2016 Ram 1500 2500 3500 Manual

As an eBay Partner Network Affiliate, we earn from qualifying purchases.

1 5 0 0 / 2 5 0 0 / 3 5 0 0

O W N E R ’ S M A N U A L

2 0 1 6 R A M T R U C K

VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA

With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name FCA

US LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the name FCA

Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.

DRIVING AND ALCOHOL

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

accidents.

Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood

alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-

drinking driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public trans-

portation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to an accident.

Your perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are

slower, and your judgment is impaired when you

have been drinking. Never drink and then drive.

This manual illustrates and describes the operation of

features and equipment that are either standard or op-

tional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a

description of features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please

disregard any features and equipment described in this

manual that are not on this vehicle.

FCA US LLC reserves the right to make changes in design

and specifications, and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any obligation

upon itself to install them on products previously manu-

factured.

TABLE OF CONTENTSSECTION PAGE

1 INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3

2 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9

3 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

4 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287

5 STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 467

6 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 731

7 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 793

8 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 877

9 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 885

10 INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 897

INTRODUCTION

CONTENTS

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . .6

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER . . . . . . . .6

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS . . . .7

INTRODUCTION

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA US LLC

vehicle. Be assured that it represents precision workman-

ship, distinctive styling, and high quality - all essentials

that are traditional to our vehicles.

This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assis-

tance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint

you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.

It is supplemented by Warranty Information, and various

customer-oriented documents. Please take the time to

read these publications carefully. Following the instruc-

tions and recommendations in this manual will help

assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.

If applicable, refer to the Diesel Supplement for diesel

related information.

NOTE: After reviewing the owner information, it

should be stored in the vehicle for convenient referenc-

ing and remain with the vehicle when sold.

When it comes to service, remember that your authorized

dealer knows your vehicle best, has factory-trained tech-

nicians and genuine MOPAR® parts, and cares about

your satisfaction.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section

contains the information you desire.

Since the specification of your vehicle depends on the

items of equipment ordered, certain descriptions and

illustrations may differ from your vehicle’s equipment.

The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual

contains a complete listing of all subjects.

4 INTRODUCTION

Consult the following table for a description of the

symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout

this Owner’s Manual:

INTRODUCTION 5

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against

operating procedures that could result in a collision,

bodily injury and/or death. It also contains CAUTIONS

against procedures that could result in damage to your

vehicle. If you do not read this entire Owner’s Manual,

you may miss important information. Observe all Warn-

ings and Cautions.

VAN CONVERSIONS/CAMPERS

The New Vehicle Limited Warranty does not apply to

body modifications or special equipment installed by van

conversion/camper manufacturers/body builders. Refer

to the Warranty Information book, Section 2.1.C. Such

equipment includes video monitors, VCRs, heaters,

stoves, refrigerators, etc. For warranty coverage and

service on these items, contact the applicable manufac-

turer.

Operating instructions for the special equipment in-

stalled by the conversion/camper manufacturer should

also be supplied with your vehicle. If these instructions

are missing, please contact your authorized dealer for

assistance in obtaining replacement documents from the

applicable manufacturer.

For information on the Body Builders Guide refer to:

www.rambodybuilder.com. This website contains dimen-

sional and technical specifications for your vehicle. It is

intended for Second Stage Manufacturer’s technical support.

For service issues, contact your authorized dealer.

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the

left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through

the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle

frame and underbody as well as the Automobile Infor-

mation Disclosure Label affixed to a window on your

vehicle, the vehicle registration and title.

6 INTRODUCTION

NOTE: It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS

WARNING!

Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could

seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and

may lead to a collision resulting in serious injury or

death.

Vehicle Identification Number

INTRODUCTION 7

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Ignition Node Module (IGNM) . . . . . . . . . . . .12

▫ Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped . . .13

▫ RKE Key Fobs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14

▫ Removing RKE Key Fob From Ignition . . . . . . .16

▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

SENTRY KEY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

▫ Replacement RKE Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

▫ Customer RKE Key Fob Programming . . . . . . .21

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ Rearming Of The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ To Arm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23

▫ Security System Manual Override . . . . . . . . . . .24

ILLUMINATED APPROACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . .25

▫ Remote Unlock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27

▫ To Lock The Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28

▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . .28

▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

▫ RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The

Vehicle) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30

▫ Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs . . . . . .31

▫ RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement . . . . . . . . . .31

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED .34

▫ How To Use Remote Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35

▫ Remote Start Abort Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫ To Enter Remote Start Mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

▫ To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37

▫ Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped . .37

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

DOOR LOCKS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

▫ Power Door Locks — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .40

▫ Child-Protection Door Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY . . . .43

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47

WINDOWS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫ Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .48

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

10 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS . . . . . . . . . .52

▫ Important Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

▫ Seat Belt Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

▫ Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) . . . . . . . .71

▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

▫ Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS . . .118

SAFETY TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 11

A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS

Your vehicle uses either a key start ignition system or

keyless ignition system. The key start ignition system

consists of a either a bladed key with an immobilizer chip

in it, or a Key Fob with Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key

Fob and an Ignition Node Module (IGNM). The keyless

ignition system consists of a RKE Key Fob and a Keyless

Push Button Ignition.

Ignition Node Module (IGNM)

The Ignition Node Module (IGNM) operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has four operating positions, three with

detents and one that is spring-loaded. The detent posi-

tions are OFF, ACC, and ON/RUN. The START position

is a spring-loaded momentary contact position. When

released from the START position, the switch automati-

cally returns to the ON/RUN position.

Ignition Module

1 — OFF

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

4 — START

12 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Keyless Push Button Ignition — If Equipped

This feature allows the driver to operate the ignition switch

with the push of a button as long as the Remote Keyless

Entry (RKE) Key Fob is in the passenger compartment.

The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four operating

positions; three of which are labeled and will illuminate

when in position. The three positions are OFF, ACC, and

ON/RUN. The fourth position is START, during start

RUN will illuminate.

NOTE: In case the ignition switch does not change with

the push of a button, the RKE Key Fob may have a low or

dead battery. In this situation, a back up method can be

used to operate the ignition switch. Put the nose side

(side opposite of the emergency key) of the Key Fob

against the ENGINE START/STOP button, with your

foot applied on the brake pedal, and push to operate the

ignition switch.

Keyless Push Button Ignition

1 — OFF

2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)

3 — ON/RUN

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 13

RKE Key Fobs

RKE Key Fob — If Equipped

The RKE Key Fob operates the ignition switch. Insert the

square end of the RKE Key Fob into the ignition switch

located on the instrument panel and rotate to the desired

position. It also contains the RKE Key Fob and an

emergency key, which stores in the rear of the RKE Key

Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go

dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when

valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch

at the top of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your thumb

and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to

your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be

triggered. Insert the RKE Key Fob into the ignition and

place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the

security system.

Emergency Key Removal

14 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

RKE Key Fob — If Equipped

This Keyless Push Button Ignition RKE Key Fob allows

the driver to operate the ignition switch with the push of

a button, as long as the RKE Key Fob is in the passenger

compartment. The Keyless Push Button Ignition has four

operating positions, three of which are labeled and will

illuminate when in position. The three positions are OFF,

ACC, and ON/RUN. The fourth position is START,

during start RUN will illuminate. It also contains the RKE

Key Fob and an emergency key, which stores in the rear

of the RKE Key Fob.

The emergency key allows for entry into the vehicle

should the battery in the vehicle or the RKE Key Fob go

dead. You can keep the emergency key with you when

valet parking.

To remove the emergency key, slide the mechanical latch

on the backside of the RKE Key Fob sideways with your

thumb and then pull the key out with your other hand.

NOTE: When using the emergency key to gain access to

your vehicle, be aware that the security alarm may be

triggered. Insert the RKE Key Fob into the ignition and

place the ignition in the ON/RUN mode to disarm the

security system.

RKE Key Fob Emergency Key

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 15

NOTE: You can insert the double-sided emergency key

into the door lock cylinder with either side up.

Removing RKE Key Fob From Ignition

Place the gear selector in PARK (if equipped with an

automatic transmission). Turn the RKE Key Fob to the

OFF position and then remove the RKE Key Fob.

NOTE:

• The power window switches, radio, power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the OFF

position. Opening either front door will cancel this fea-

ture. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,

refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Key Fob With Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob

(IGNM)

16 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• If your vehicle battery becomes low or dead, your

RKE Key Fob will become locked in the ignition.

• Do not attempt to remove the RKE Key Fob while

in this condition, damage could occur to the RKE

Key Fob or ignition module. Only remove the

emergency key for locking and unlocking the

doors.

• Leave the RKE Key Fob in the ignition and either:

• Jump Start the vehicle.

• Charge the battery.

WARNING!

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic

transmission into PARK or the manual transmis-

sion into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn

the vehicle OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the

ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless

ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE

Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 17

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and

do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped

with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation. Always remove

the RKE Key from the ignition and lock all doors

when leaving the vehicle unattended.

Key-In-Ignition Reminder

Opening the driver’s door when the Key Fob is in the

ignition and the ignition switch position is OFF or ACC,

a chime will sound to remind you to remove the Key Fob.

NOTE:

• Keyed Ignition systems will chime in OFF or ACC

when the driver door is open.

• “Keyless Ignition systems will chime in ACC or RUN

when the driver door is open.

• If equipped with Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID), the EVIC or

DID will display “Key In Ignition.”

18 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer System prevents unauthor-

ized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The

system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation

is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked

or unlocked.

The system uses a RKE Key Fob, an Ignition Node

Module, Keyless Push Button Ignition and a RF receiver

to prevent unauthorized vehicle operation. Therefore,

only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the vehicle

can be used to start and operate the vehicle. The system

will not allow the engine to crank if an invalid RKE Key

Fob is used to start and operate the vehicle. The system

will shut the engine off in two seconds if an invalid RKE

Key Fob is used to start the engine.

NOTE: A RKE Key Fob that has not been programmed is

also considered an invalid key.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 19

During normal operation, after placing the keyless igni-

tion in the ON/RUN position, the Vehicle Security Light

will turn on for three seconds for a bulb check. If the light

remains on after the bulb check, it indicates that there is

a problem with the electronics. In addition, if the light

begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that

someone used an invalid RKE Key Fob to try to start the

engine. Either of these conditions will result in the engine

being shut off after two seconds.

If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal

vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10

seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electron-

ics. Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon

as possible by an authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not compat-

ible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.

Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting

problems and loss of security protection.

All of the RKE Key Fobs provided with your new vehicle

have been programmed to the vehicle electronics.

Replacement RKE Key Fobs

NOTE: Only RKE Key Fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and operate the

vehicle. Once a RKE Key Fob is programmed to a vehicle,

it cannot be programmed to any other vehicle.

20 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Always remove the RKE Key Fobs from the vehicle

and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unat-

tended.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Ignition, always remember to place the ignition in

the OFF position.

NOTE: Duplication of RKE Key Fobs may be performed

at an authorized dealer. This procedure consists of pro-

gramming a blank RKE Key Fob to the vehicle electron-

ics. A blank RKE Key Fob is one that has never been

programmed.

When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer System ser-

viced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an authorized

dealer.

Customer RKE Key Fob Programming

Programming RKE Key Fobs may be performed at an

authorized dealer.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 21

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

The Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the vehicle doors

and ignition for unauthorized operation. When the Ve-

hicle Security Alarm is activated, interior switches for

door locks are disabled. The system provides both au-

dible and visible signals for the first three minutes the

horn will sound and the headlights will turn on, the park

lamps and/or turn signals will flash and Vehicle Security

Light will flash repeatedly. For an additional 15 minutes

only, the headlights will turn on, the park lamps and/or

turn signals, and Vehicle Security Light will flash.

Rearming Of The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm will rearm itself after the 15

additional minutes of headlights and Vehicle Security

Light flashing, if the system has not been disabled. If the

condition which initiated the alarm is still present, the

system will ignore that condition and monitor the re-

maining doors and ignition.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the Vehicle Security Alarm:

1. Remove the key from the ignition system (refer to

Starting Procedures in Starting And Operating for

further information).

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is

OFF.

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go

— Ignition, make sure the vehicle ignition system is

OFF and the key is physically removed from the

ignition.

2. Perform one of the following methods to lock the

vehicle:

• Push LOCK button on the interior power door

lock switch with the driver and/or passenger

door open.

22 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

• Push the LOCK button on the exterior Passive

Entry Door Handle with a valid Key Fob available

in the same exterior zone (refer to Keyless Enter-

N-Go — Passive Entry in Things To Know Before

Starting Your Vehicle for further information).

• Push the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

The Vehicle Security Alarm will set when you use the

power door locks, or use the RKE Key Fob to lock the

doors. After all the doors are locked and closed, the

Vehicle Security Light, in the instrument panel cluster,

will flash rapidly for about 16 seconds to indicate that the

alarm is being set. After the alarm is set, the Vehicle

Security Light will flash at a slower rate to indicate that

the system is armed.

To Disarm The System

The Vehicle Security Alarm can be disarmed using any of

the following methods:

1. Push the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.

2. Grasp the Passive Entry Unlock Door Handle with a

valid RKE Key Fob within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the passive

entry door handle (if equipped, refer to Keyless

Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry in Things To Know

Before Starting Your Vehicle for further information).

3. Cycle the ignition out of the OFF position.

• For vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Ignition, push the Keyless Ignition button (re-

quires at least one valid RKE Key Fob in the

vehicle).

• For vehicles not equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go,

insert a valid key into the ignition switch and turn

the key to the ON position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 23

The Vehicle Security Alarm is designed to protect your

vehicle. However, you can create conditions where the

system will give you a false alarm. If one of the previ-

ously described arming sequences has occurred, the

Vehicle Security Alarm will arm regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in the vehicle

and open a door, the alarm will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

If the Vehicle Security Alarm is armed and the battery

becomes disconnected, the Vehicle Security Alarm will

remain armed when the battery is reconnected; the

exterior lights will flash, and the horn will sound. If this

occurs, disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm.

Security System Manual Override

The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the

doors using the manual door lock plunger.

ILLUMINATED APPROACH

The courtesy lights will turn on when you use the RKE

Key Fob to unlock the doors or open any door.

This feature also turns on the approach lighting in the

outside mirrors (if equipped). Refer to “Mirrors” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

The lights will fade to off after approximately 30 seconds,

or they will immediately fade to off once the ignition

switch is turned to ON/RUN from the OFF position.

The front courtesy overhead console and door courtesy

lights will not turn off if the dimmer control is in the

“Dome ON” position (rotate horizontal thumb wheel on

the bottom of the switch to the far right detent position).

24 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The illuminated entry system will not operate if the

dimmer control is in the “Dome OFF” position (rotate

horizontal thumb wheel on the bottom of the switch to

the far left detent position).

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated

approach lights under the outside mirrors, they can be

turned off by using the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) con-

trols (if NOT equipped with a touchscreen radio) or the

Uconnect radio (if equipped with a touchscreen radio).

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),”

“Driver Information Display (DID),” or “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY (RKE)

The RKE system allows you to lock or unlock all doors,

tailgate, and the RamBox (if equipped) as well as activate

the Panic Alarm from distances up to approximately 66 ft

(20 m) using a RKE Key Fob with integrated key. The

RKE Key Fob does not need to be pointed at the vehicle

to activate the system. Push and release the LOCK

button on the RKE Key Fob to lock all doors, the

tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped). The turn signal

lights will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowl-

edge the signal.

NOTE: Inserting the RKE Key Fob with integrated key

into the ignition switch disables the system from re-

sponding to any button pushes from that RKE Key Fob.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 25

Driving at speeds 5 MPH (8 km/h) and above disables

the system from responding to all RKE Key Fob buttons

for all RKE Key Fobs.

RKE Key Fob With Integrated Key

Passive Entry RKE Key Fob

26 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Remote Unlock The Doors

Push and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE

Key Fob once to unlock the driver’s door. Push the

unlock button twice within five seconds to unlock

all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if equipped).

The turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the

unlock signal. The illuminated entry system will also

turn on.

NOTE: The EVIC/DID or Uconnect Settings are setup for

driver door first, otherwise this will unlock all doors.

Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All Doors First

This feature lets you program the system to unlock either

the driver’s door or all doors on the first push of the

UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/ Set-

tings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE Key Fob

while you are inside the vehicle will activate the Vehicle

Security Alarm System. Opening a door with the Vehicle

Security Alarm System activated will cause the alarm to

sound. Push the UNLOCK button to deactivate the

Vehicle Security Alarm System.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 27

Flash Lamps With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when

the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE Key Fob.

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

To Lock The Doors

Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key

Fob to lock all doors, the tailgate and the RamBox (if

equipped). The turn signal lights will flash and the

horn will chirp to acknowledge the signal.

Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock

This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors

are locked with the RKE Key Fob. This feature can be

turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,

proceed as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,

refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

28 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Pushing the LOCK button on the RKE Key

Fob while you are in the vehicle will activate the

Vehicle Security Alarm System. Opening a door with

the Vehicle Security Alarm System activated will cause

the alarm to sound. Push the UNLOCK button to

deactivate the Vehicle Security Alarm System.

Using The Panic Alarm

To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, push and

hold the button on the RKE Key Fob for at least one

second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on, the

headlights will turn on, the park lights will flash, the

horn will pulse on and off, and the turn signal lights

will flash.

The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless

you turn it off by either pushing the button a second

time or drive the vehicle at a speed of 5 mph (8 km/h)

or greater.

NOTE:

• The interior lights will turn off if you turn the ignition

switch to the ACC or ON/RUN position while the

Panic Alarm is activated. However, the exterior lights

and horn will remain on.

• You may need to be less than 35 ft (11 m) from the

vehicle when using the RKE Key Fob to turn off the

Panic Alarm due to the radio frequency noises emitted

by the system.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 29

RKE Air Suspension (Remote Lowering Of The

Vehicle) — If Equipped

For easy entry and loading, your vehicle can be

lowered by pushing the RKE Key Fob air

suspension lowering button two times. When

RKE Key Fob lowering is requested, the vehicle

will send a series of chirps and flashes to alert the

customer that the operation has begun and will continue

these alerts until it successfully lowers.

The following conditions must be met for the vehicle to

lower remotely:

• The vehicle must not already be in Entry/Exit (Park)

ride height.

• The vehicle battery must be fully charged.

• All doors must be closed.

• The RKE Key Fob/RKE Key Fob integrated key must

be out of the vehicle.

Cancelling Remote Lowering

Vehicle lowering can be cancelled at anytime. When

vehicle lowering is cancelled, the vehicle will raise up to

the next defined level and lock out the remote lowering

feature until the ignition has been cycled ON/OFF.

To cancel vehicle lowering, push the RKE Key Fob air

suspension lowering button one time during the lower-

ing process. When vehicle lowering is cancelled, the horn

will chirp two times and the turn signal lamps will flash

four times. Once raising is completed, the horn will chirp

one time.

NOTE: Refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting

And Operating” for further information.

30 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Programming Additional RKE Key Fobs

If you do not have a programmed RKE Key Fob, contact

your authorized dealer for details.

RKE Key Fob Battery Replacement

The recommended replacement battery is one CR2032

battery.

NOTE:

• Perchlorate Material — special handling may apply.

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate

• Do not touch the battery terminals that are on the back

housing or the printed circuit board.

1. Remove the emergency key by sliding the mechanical

latch on the back of the RKE Key Fob sideways with

your thumb and then pull the key out with your other

hand.

Emergency Key Removal

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 31

2. Separating RKE Key Fob halves requires screw re-

moval – if equipped, and gently prying the two halves

of the RKE Key Fob apart. Make sure not to damage

the seal during removal.

Emergency Key Removal Remove Screw From RKE Key Fob Case

32 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Remove the battery by turning the back cover over

(battery facing downward) and tapping it lightly on a

solid surface such as a table or similar, then replace the

battery. When replacing the battery, match the + sign

on the battery to the + sign on the inside of the battery

clip, located on the back cover. Avoid touching the

Separating RKE Key Fob Case Separating RKE Key Fob Case

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 33

new battery with your fingers. Skin oils may cause

battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it

with rubbing alcohol.

4. To assemble the RKE Key Fob case, snap the two

halves together, reposition and secure the screw as

shown in step #2 for removal.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

This system uses the RKE Key Fob to start the

engine conveniently from outside the vehicle

while still maintaining security. The system has

a range of approximately 300 ft (91 m).

NOTE:

• The vehicle must be equipped with an automatic

transmission to be equipped with Remote Start.

• Obstructions between the vehicle and the RKE Key

Fob may reduce this range.

34 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

How To Use Remote Start

All of the following conditions must be met before the

engine will remote start:

• Gear selector in PARK

• Doors closed

• Hood closed

• HAZARD switch off

• BRAKE switch inactive (brake pedal not pushed)

• Ignition key removed from ignition switch

• Battery at an acceptable charge level

• RKE PANIC button not pushed

• Fuel meets minimum requirement

• System not disabled from previous remote start event

• Vehicle security alarm not active

WARNING!

• Do not start or run an engine in a closed garage or

confined area. Exhaust gas contains Carbon Mon-

oxide (CO) which is odorless and colorless. Carbon

Monoxide is poisonous and can cause serious in-

jury or death when inhaled.

• Keep RKE Key Fobs away from children. Opera-

tion of the Remote Start System, windows, door

locks or other controls could cause serious injury or

death.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 35

Remote Start Abort Message

The following messages will display in the EVIC/DID if

the vehicle fails to remote start or exits remote start

prematurely:

• Remote Start Cancelled — Door Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Hood Open

• Remote Start Cancelled — Fuel Low

• Remote Start Cancelled — System Fault

• Remote Start Disabled — Start Vehicle to Reset

The EVIC/DID message stays active until the ignition is

turned to the ON/RUN position.

To Enter Remote Start Mode

Push and release the REMOTE START button on the

RKE Key Fob twice within five seconds. The parking

lights will flash, vehicle doors will lock, and the horn

will chirp twice (if programmed). Once the vehicle has

started, the engine will run for 15 minutes.

NOTE:

• If your power door locks were unlocked, Remote Start

will automatically lock the doors.

• If an engine fault is present or fuel level is low, the

vehicle will start and then shut down in 10 seconds.

• The park lamps will turn on and remain on during

Remote Start mode.

• For security, power window and power sunroof op-

eration (if equipped) are disabled when the vehicle is

in the Remote Start mode.

• The engine can be started two consecutive times (two

15-minute cycles) with the RKE Key Fob. However, the

ignition must be placed in the ON/RUN position before

you can repeat the start sequence for a third cycle.

36 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Exit Remote Start Mode Without Driving The

Vehicle

Push and release the REMOTE START button one

time or allow the engine to run for the entire 15-

minute cycle.

NOTE: To avoid unintentional shut downs, the system

will disable the one time push of the REMOTE START

button for two seconds after receiving a valid

Remote Start request.

To Exit Remote Start Mode And Drive The Vehicle

Before the end of the 15-minute cycle, push and release

the UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob to unlock the

doors and disarm the Vehicle Security Alarm System (if

equipped). Then, prior to the end of the 15-minute cycle,

cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

Remote Start Comfort Systems — If Equipped

When Remote Start is activated, the heated steering

wheel and driver heated seat features will automatically

turn on in cold weather. In warm weather, the driver

vented seat feature will automatically turn on when the

remote start is activated. These features will stay on

through the duration of Remote Start or until the ignition

switch is turned to the ON/RUN position.

The Remote Start Comfort System can be activated and

deactivated through the Uconnect System. Refer to ”Cus-

tomer Programmable Features” in “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation on Remote Start Comfort System operation.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 37

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all Radio

Frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

DOOR LOCKS

Manual Door Locks

Front and rear doors may be locked by moving the lock

knob down or unlocked by moving the lock knob up.

Door Lock Knob

38 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Front doors may be opened with the inside door handle

without lifting the lock knob.

Doors locked before closing will remain locked when

closed.

The emergency key will unlock the driver door lock on

your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• For personal security and safety in the event of an

collision, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as

well as when you park and leave the vehicle.

• Before exiting a vehicle, always shift the automatic

transmission into PARK or the manual transmission

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

into REVERSE, apply the parking brake, turn the

vehicle OFF, remove the RKE Key Fob from the

ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless

ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the RKE Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle unattended is

dangerous for a number of reasons. A child or

others could be seriously or fatally injured. Chil-

dren should be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 39

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to children, and

do not leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped

with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

Power Door Locks — If Equipped

A power door LOCK switches are on each front

door trim panel. Use this switch to lock or unlock

the doors.

If you push the power door LOCK switch while the

RKE Key Fob is in the ignition, and any front door is

open, the power locks will not operate. This prevents

you from accidentally locking your RKE Key Fob in

the vehicle. Removing the RKE Key Fob or closing the

door will allow the locks to operate. A chime will

Power Door Lock Switch Location

40 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

sound if the RKE Key Fob is in the ignition switch and

a door is open, as a reminder to remove the RKE Key

Fob.

Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped

The auto door lock feature default condition is enabled.

When enabled, the door locks will lock automatically

when the vehicle’s speed exceeds 15 mph (24 km/h). The

auto door lock feature can be enabled or disabled by your

authorized dealer. The auto door lock feature is enabled/

disabled in the Uconnect Settings.

Automatic Doors Unlock — If Equipped

This feature unlocks all of the doors of the vehicle when

either front door is opened. This will occur only after the

vehicle has been shifted into the PARK position after the

vehicle has been driven (shifted out of PARK and all

doors closed).

Automatic Doors Unlock Programming — If

Equipped

The Automatic Doors Unlock feature can be enabled or

disabled as follows:

• For vehicles not equipped with a touchscreen radio,

refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• For vehicles equipped with a touchscreen radio, refer

to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Use the Auto Unlock Doors feature in accordance

with local laws.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 41

Child-Protection Door Lock

To provide a safer environment for children riding in the

rear seat, the rear doors (if equipped) of your vehicle

have the Child-Protection Door Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a flat blade

screwdriver (or emergency key) and rotate the dial to engage

and disengage the Child-Protection locks. When the system

on a door is engaged, that door can only be opened by using

the outside door handle even if the inside door lock is in the

unlocked position.

Child-Protection Door Lock Location

Child Lock Control

42 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.

Remember that the rear doors can only be opened

from the outside when the Child-Protection locks are

engaged.

NOTE:

• After setting the Child-Protection Door Lock system,

always test the door from the inside to make certain it

is in the desired position.

• For emergency exit with the system engaged, move the

door lock switch to the UNLOCK position, roll down

the window and open the door with the outside door

handle.

KEYLESS ENTER-N-GO — PASSIVE ENTRY

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement to the

vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) system and a

feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. Refer to “Keyless Enter-

N-Go” in “Starting And Operating” for further informa-

tion. This feature allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the RKE Key

Fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry may be programmed ON/OFF. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has been

raining on the Passive Entry door handle, the unlock

sensitivity can be affected, resulting in a slower re-

sponse time.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 43

• If the vehicle is unlocked by Passive Entry and no door

is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock

and if equipped will arm the security alarm.

• The vehicles security alarm can be armed/disarmed

by pushing the passive entry key fob lock/unlock

buttons (if equipped).

To Unlock From The Driver’s Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver door handle, grab the front driver

door handle to unlock the driver’s door automatically.

The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the

door is unlocked. NOTE: If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is programmed,

all doors will unlock when you grab hold of the front

driver’s door handle. To select between “Unlock Driver

Door 1st Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,” refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

44 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Passenger Side:

With a valid Passive Entry RKE Key Fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab the front

passenger door handle to unlock all doors automatically.

The interior door panel lock knob will raise when the

door is unlocked.

NOTE: All doors will unlock when the front passenger

door handle is grabbed regardless of the driver’s door

unlock preference setting (“Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” or “Unlock All Doors 1st Press”).

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry RKE

Key Fob In Vehicle:

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally locking a

Passive Entry RKE Key Fob inside your vehicle, the

Passive Entry system is equipped with an automatic door

unlock feature which will function if the ignition switch

is in the OFF position.

If one of the vehicle doors is open and the door panel

switch is used to lock the vehicle, once all open doors

have been closed the vehicle checks the inside and

outside of the vehicle for any valid Passive Entry RKE

Key Fobs. If one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key

Fobs is detected inside the vehicle, and no other valid

Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs are detected outside the

vehicle, the Passive Entry System automatically unlocks

all vehicle doors and chirps the horn three times (on the

third attempt ALL doors will lock and the Passive Entry

RKE Key Fob can be locked in the vehicle).

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 45

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors:

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry RKE Key Fobs

within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or passenger front door

handles, push the door handle LOCK button to lock all

doors.

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing the door

handle lock button. This could unlock the door(s).

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock

Do NOT Grab The Door Handle When Locking

46 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• After pushing the door handle LOCK button, you

must wait two seconds before you can lock or unlock

the doors, using either Passive Entry door handle. This

is done to allow you to check if the vehicle is locked by

pulling the door handle, without the vehicle reacting

and unlocking.

• The Passive Entry system will not operate if the RKE

Key Fob battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using the RKE

Key Fob lock button or the lock button located on the

vehicle’s interior door panel.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to all radio

frequency (RF) devices equipped in this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 47

WINDOWS

Power Windows — If Equipped

The power window controls located on the

driver’s door trim panel have UP-DOWN switches

that give you fingertip control of all power windows.

There is a single opening and closing switch on the

front passenger door for passenger window control

and on the rear doors of the Quad Cab and Crew Cab

models. The windows will operate when the ignition

switch is turned to the ON/RUN or ACC position, and

for up to 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF or

until a front door is opened.

NOTE: The Key Off Power Delay feature will allow the

power windows to operate for up to 10 minutes after the

ignition is turned OFF. This feature is cancelled when

either front door is opened.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a vehicle. Do not

leave the RKE Key Fob in or near the vehicle or in a

location accessible to children, and do not leave the

(Continued)

Power Window Switches

48 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-

N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants,

particularly unattended children, can become en-

trapped by the windows while operating the power

window switches. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

Auto-Down

Both the driver and front passenger window switch have

an Auto-Down feature. Push the window switch past

the first detent, release, and the window will go down

automatically. To cancel the Auto-Down movement,

operate the switch in either the up or down direc-

tion and release the switch.

To stop the window from going all the way down during

the Auto-Down operation, pull up on the switch

briefly.

To open the window part way, push to the switch to

the first detent and release it when you want the

window to stop.

Auto-Up Feature With Anti-Pinch Protection

(4-Door Models Driver And Front Passenger Door

Only) — If Equipped

Pull the window switch fully upward to the second

detent, release, and the window will go up automati-

cally.

To stop the window from going all the way up during the

Auto Up operation, push down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way, lift the window switch

to the first detent and release when you want the

window to stop.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 49

NOTE: If the window runs into any obstacle during the

auto-closure, it will reverse direction and then go back

down. Remove the obstacle and use the window

switch again to close the window. Any impact due

to rough road conditions may trigger the auto reverse

function unexpectedly during auto closure. If this

happens, pull the switch lightly to the first detent

and hold to close the window manually.

WARNING!

There is no anti-pinch protection when the window

is almost closed. Be sure to clear all objects from the

window before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto Up feature stop working, the window

may need to be reset. To reset Auto Up:

1. Make sure the door is fully closed.

2. Pull the window switch up to close the window

completely and continue to hold the switch up for

an additional two seconds after the window is

closed.

3. Push the window switch down firmly to the

second detent to open the window completely and

continue to hold the switch down for an additional

two seconds after the window is fully open.

50 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Window LOCKOUT Switch (4–Door Models Only)

The window LOCKOUT switch on the driver’s door

allows you to disable the window control on the rear

passenger doors. To disable the window controls on

the rear passenger doors, push the window LOCK

button into the latched or down position. To enable

the window controls, push the window LOCK but-

ton again and return the switch to the released or up

position.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of

pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the

ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain

Window Lockout Switch

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 51

open or partially open positions. This is a normal occur-

rence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with

the rear windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting. If the

buffeting occurs with the sunroof open, adjust the sun-

roof opening to minimize the buffeting.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in your

vehicle are the restraint systems:

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air Bags

• Child Restraints

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information in this

section. It tells you how to use your restraint system

properly, to keep you and your passengers as safe as

possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the

risk of harm from a deploying air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should always ride

buckled up in a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a rear-facing

child restraint) must ride in the front passenger seat,

move the seat as far back as possible and use the

proper child restraint. (Refer to “Child Restraints”)

3. Children that are not big enough to wear the vehicle

seat belt properly (Refer to Child Restraints in this

section of “Occupant Restraints”) should be secured in

52 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

a vehicle with a rear seat in child restraints or belt-

positioning booster seats. Older children who do not

use child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats

should ride properly buckled up in a vehicle with a

rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder belt behind

them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided with your

child restraint to make sure that you are using it

properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap and

shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats should be moved

back as far as practical to allow the Advanced Front

Air Bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If your vehicle

has side air bags, and deployment occurs, the side air

bags will inflate forcefully into the space between occu-

pants and the door and occupants could be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs to be

modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact

the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided

under If You Need Assistance.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 53

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent driver, even

on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver

and could cause a collision that includes you. This can

happen far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they

can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some

of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown

from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of

ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the

inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should

be belted at all times.

Driver And Passenger BeltAlert — If Equipped

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind the driver

and outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert) to buckle

their seat belts. The Belt Alert feature is active when-

ever the ignition is placed in the START or ON/RUN

position.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition is first placed

in the START or ON/RUN position, an intermittent

chime will signal for a few seconds. If the driver or

outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with outboard

front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the

ignition is first placed in the START or ON/RUN position

the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on

until both outboard front seat belts are buckled. The

outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when an outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

54 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated when the

vehicle is moving above a specified vehicle speed range

and the driver or outboard front seat passenger is un-

buckled (if equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert). The BeltAlert warning sequence starts by

blinking the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding an

intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert warning sequence

has completed, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will remain

on until the seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed until the

driver and occupied outboard front seat passenger seat

belts are buckled. The driver should instruct all occu-

pants to buckle their seat belts.

Change Of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert)

unbuckles their seat belt while the vehicle is traveling,

the BeltAlert warning sequence will begin until the seat

belts are buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert is not active

when the outboard front passenger seat is unoccupied.

BeltAlert may be triggered when an animal or other items

are placed on the outboard front passenger seat or when

the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It is recommended

that pets be restrained in the rear seat (if equipped) in pet

harnesses or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by your autho-

rized dealer. FCA US LLC does not recommend deacti-

vating BeltAlert.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 55

NOTE: If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the driver

or outboard front seat passenger (if equipped with out-

board front passenger seat BeltAlert) is unbuckled the

Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on and remain on until

the driver and outboard front seat passenger seat belts

are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions except the Quad Cab, Mega Cab and

Crew Cab front center seating position have combination

lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only during very

sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the shoul-

der part of the seat belt to move freely with you under

normal conditions. However, in a collision the seat belt

will lock and reduce your risk of striking the inside of the

vehicle or being thrown out of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work

with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, the air bags won’t deploy at all.

Always wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer

much greater injuries if you are not properly buck-

led up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or

other passengers, or you can be thrown out of the

vehicle. Always be sure you and others in your

vehicle are buckled up properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

(Continued)

56 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could make your

injuries in a collision much worse. You might

suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out

of the seat belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers

safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a single

seat belt. People belted together can crash into one

another in a collision, hurting one another badly.

Never use a lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their size.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of

injury in a collision. The seat belt forces won’t be at

the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across your

abdomen. Always wear the lap part of your seat

belt as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you properly. In

a collision, it could even cut into you. Be sure the

seat belt is flat against your body, without twists. If

you can’t straighten a seat belt in your vehicle, take

it to your authorized dealer immediately and have

it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle

will not protect you properly. The lap portion could

ride too high on your body, possibly causing inter-

nal injuries. Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 57

WARNING! (Continued)

• A seat belt that is too loose will not protect you

properly. In a sudden stop, you could move too far

forward, increasing the possibility of injury. Wear

your seat belt snugly.

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is dangerous.

Your body could strike the inside surfaces of the

vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck injury.

A seat belt worn under the arm can cause internal

injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder bones. Wear

the seat belt over your shoulder so that your strongest

bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect

you from injury during a collision. You are more

likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not

wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt

are meant to be used together.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart in a collision

and leave you with no protection. Inspect the seat belt

system periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose

parts. Damaged parts must be replaced immediately.

Do not disassemble or modify the seat belt system.

Seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and

adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front

seat, and next to your arm in the rear seat (for vehicles

equipped with a rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and

pull out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

58 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the latch

plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces

the risk of sliding under the seat belt in a collision.

Pulling Out The Latch Plate Inserting Latch Plate Into Buckle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 59

5. Position the shoulder belt across the shoulder and

chest with minimal, if any slack so that it is comfort-

able and not resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle. The seat belt will automatically retract to its

stowed position. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to retract

fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a twisted lap/

shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as possible to the

anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm) above the latch

plate, grasp and twist the seat belt webbing 180

degrees to create a fold that begins immediately above

the latch plate.

Positioning The Lap Belt

60 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the folded webbing.

The folded webbing must enter the slot at the top of

the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it clears the

folded webbing and the seat belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the top of the

shoulder belt can be adjusted upward or downward to

position the seat belt away from your neck. Push or

squeeze the anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that serves you

best. As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will

prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in a lower position,

and if you are taller than average, you will prefer the

shoulder belt anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it up or down

to make sure that it is locked in position.

Adjustable Anchorage

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 61

NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is

equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows

the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward

position without pushing or squeezing the release but-

ton. To verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull

downward on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is

locked into position.

First Row Center Seat Belt Operating Instructions

(Regular Cab Only)

The first row center seat belt (Regular Cab only) features

a seat belt with a mini-latch plate and buckle, which

allows the seat belt to detach from the lower anchor when

the seat is folded. The latch plate and regular latch plate

can then be stored out of the way in the seat for added

convenience to open up utilization of the storage areas

behind the front seats when the seat is not occupied.

1. Remove the mini-latch plate and regular latch plate

from its stowed position on the seat.

Inserting Latch Plate

62 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the seat belt over

the seat.

3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head

restraint.

4. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the

mini-latch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a

“click.”

5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the

webbing as far as necessary to allow the seat belt to go

around your lap.

6. When the seat belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”

7. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and lies low

across your hips, below your abdomen. To remove

slack in the lap belt portion, pull up on the shoulder

belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, pull on the

lap belt. A snug seat belt reduces the risk of sliding

under the seat belt in a collision.

In Use Position

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 63

8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is

comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retrac-

tor will withdraw any slack in the seat belt.

9. To release the seat belt, push the red button on the

buckle.

10. To disengage the mini-latch plate from the mini-

buckle for storage, insert the regular latch plate into

the center red slot on the mini-buckle. The seat belt

will automatically retract to its stowed position. If

necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to

allow the seat belt to retract fully. Insert the mini-

latch plate and regular latch plate into its stowed

position.

Detaching Buckle With Seat Belt Tongue

64 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• If the mini-latch plate and mini-buckle are not

properly connected when the seat belt is used by an

occupant, the seat belt will not be able to provide

proper restraint and will increase the risk of injury

in a collision.

• When reattaching the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, ensure the seat belt webbing is not twisted.

If the webbing is twisted, follow the preceding

procedure to detach the mini-latch plate and mini-

buckle, untwist the webbing, and reattach the

mini-latch plate and mini-buckle.

First Row Center Lap Belt Operating Instructions

(If Equipped)

The center seating position for the Quad Cab, Mega Cab

and Crew Cab front seat has a lap belt only. To buckle the

lap belt, slide the latch plate into the buckle until you

hear a click. To lengthen the lap belt, tilt the latch plate

and pull.

To remove slack, pull the loose end of the webbing. Wear

the lap belt snug against the hips. Sit back and upright in

the seat, then adjust the seat belt as tightly as is comfort-

able.

Seat Belt Extender

If a seat belt is not long enough to fit properly, even when

the webbing is fully extended and the adjustable upper

shoulder belt anchorage (if equipped) is in its lowest

position, your authorized dealer can provide you with a

Seat Belt Extender. The Seat Belt Extender should be used

only if the existing seat belt is not long enough. When the

Seat Belt Extender is not required for a different occu-

pant, it must be removed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 65

WARNING!

• ONLY use a Seat Belt Extender if it is physically

required in order to properly fit the original seat

belt system. DO NOT USE the Seat Belt Extender

if, when worn, the distance between the front edge

of the Seat Belt Extender buckle and the center of

the occupant’s body is LESS than 6 inches.

• Using a Seat Belt Extender when not needed can

increase the risk of serious injury or death in a

collision. Only use the Seat Belt Extender when the

lap belt is not long enough and only use in the

recommended seating positions. Remove and store

the Seat Belt Extender when not needed.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants including

pregnant women: the risk of injury in the event of an

accident is reduced for the mother and the unborn child

if they are wearing a seat belt.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

66 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Position the lap belt snug and low below the abdomen

and across the strong bones of the hips. Place the

shoulder belt across the chest and away from the neck.

Never place the shoulder belt behind the back or under

the arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with pretensioning

devices that are designed to remove slack from the seat

belt in the event of a collision. These devices may

improve the performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision. Pretensioners

work for all size occupants, including those in child

restraints.

NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat

belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be

worn snugly and positioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC). Like the air bags, the preten-

sioners are single use items. A deployed pretensioner or

a deployed air bag must be replaced immediately.

Energy Management Feature — If Equipped

This vehicle has a seat belt system with an Energy

Management feature in the front seating positions that

may help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of

a collision. This seat belt system has a retractor assembly

that is designed to release webbing in a controlled

manner.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 67

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors (ALR) —

If Equipped

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions may be

equipped with a Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR) which is used to secure a child restraint system.

For additional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” under the “Child

Restraints” section of this manual. The table below

defines the type of feature for each seating position.

Regular Cab

68 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the passenger seating position is equipped with an

ALR and is being used for normal usage, only pull the

seat belt webbing out far enough to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section so as to not activate

the ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a clicking

sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow the webbing to

retract completely in this case and then carefully pull out

only the amount of webbing necessary to comfortably

wrap around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the latch

plate into the buckle until you hear a click.

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder belt is auto-

matically pre-locked. The seat belt will still retract to

remove any slack in the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic

Locking Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in a

seating position that has a seat belt with this feature.

Children 12 years old and under should always be

properly restrained in a vehicle with a rear seat.

Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 69

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until

the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat belt retracts,

you will hear a clicking sound. This indicates the seat

belt is now in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt and allow it

to retract completely to disengage the Automatic Locking

Mode and activate the vehicle sensitive (emergency)

locking mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced if the

switchable Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) fea-

ture or any other seat belt function is not working

properly when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly could

increase the risk of injury in collisions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode to restrain

occupants who are wearing the seat belt or children

who are using booster seats. The locked mode is

(Continued)

70 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

only used to install rear-facing or forward-facing

child restraints that have a harness for restraining

the child.

Supplemental Restraint System (SRS)

Air Bag System Components

Your vehicle may be equipped with the following air bag

system components:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Advanced Front Air Bags

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors — If Equipped

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

Advanced Front Air Bags

This vehicle has Advanced Front Air Bags for both the

driver and front passenger as a supplement to the seat

belt restraint systems. The driver’s Advanced Front Air

Bag is mounted in the center of the steering wheel. The

passenger’s Advanced Front Air Bag is mounted in the

instrument panel, above the glove compartment. The

words “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed on

the air bag covers.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 71

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument

panel during Advanced Front Air Bag deployment

could cause serious injury, including death. Air

bags need room to inflate. Sit back, comfortably

extending your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

Advanced Front Air Bag And Knee Bolster Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Advanced Front Air Bags

2 — Driver/Passenger Knee Impact Bolsters

72 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Advanced Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has multistage

driver and front passenger air bags. This system provides

output appropriate to the severity and type of collision as

determined by the Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC),

which may receive information from the front impact

sensors (if equipped) or other system components.

The first stage inflator is triggered immediately during an

impact that requires air bag deployment. A low energy

output is used in less severe collisions. A higher energy

output is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver and/or front

passenger seat belt buckle switch that detects whether

the driver or front passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat

belt buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near the air

bag on the instrument panel or steering wheel

because any such objects could cause harm if the

vehicle is in a collision severe enough to cause the

air bag to inflate.

• Do not put anything on or around the air bag covers or

attempt to open them manually. You may damage the

air bags and you could be injured because the air bags

may no longer be functional. The protective covers for

the air bag cushions are designed to open only when

the air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead to more

severe injuries in a collision. The air bags work with

your seat belt to restrain you properly. In some colli-

sions, air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear your

seat belts even though you have air bags.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 73

Advanced Front Air Bag Operation

Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat belts. Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags are not expected to reduce the risk

of injury in rear, side, or rollover collisions. The Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags will not deploy in all frontal

collisions, including some that may produce substantial

vehicle damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type and location of

impact, Advanced Front Air Bags may deploy in crashes

with little vehicle front-end damage but that produce a

severe initial deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle deceleration

over time, vehicle speed and damage by themselves are

not good indicators of whether or not an air bag should

have deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in all colli-

sions, and also are needed to help keep you in position,

away from an inflating air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring the Ad-

vanced Front Air Bags, it signals the inflator units. A large

quantity of non-toxic gas is generated to inflate the

Advanced Front Air Bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the upper right

side of the instrument panel separate and fold out of the

way as the air bags inflate to their full size. The Advanced

Front Air Bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The air bags then quickly deflate while

helping to restrain the driver and front passenger.

74 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees of the

driver and front passenger, and position the front occu-

pants for improved interaction with the Advanced Front

Air Bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee impact

bolsters in any way

• Do not mount any accessories to the knee impact

bolsters such as alarm lights, stereos, citizen band

radios, etc.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Your vehicle is equipped with two types of side air bags:

1. Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs):

Located in the outboard side of the front seats. The

SABs are marked with a “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIR-

BAG” label sewn into the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of occupant injury

during certain side impacts and/or vehicle rollover

events, in addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body structure.

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bag Label

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 75

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on the out-

board side of the seatback’s trim cover. The inflating SAB

deploys through the seat seam into the space between the

occupant and the door. The SAB moves at a very high

speed and with such a high force that it could injure

occupants if they are not seated properly, or if items are

positioned in the area where the SAB inflates. Children

are at an even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place objects

between you and the Side Air Bags; the performance

could be adversely affected and/or objects could be

pushed into you, causing serious injury.

2. Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs): Located above the side windows. The trim

covering the SABICs is labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or

“AIRBAG.”

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtain (SABIC)

Label Location

76 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head or other injuries

to front and rear seat outboard occupants in certain side

impacts and/or vehicle rollover events, in addition to the

injury reduction potential provided by the seat belts and

body structure.

The SABICs deploy downward, covering the side win-

dows. An inflating SABIC pushes the outside edge of the

trim out of the way and covers the window. The SABICs

inflate with enough force to injure occupants if they are

not belted and seated properly, or if items are positioned

in the area where the SABICs inflate. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of partial or

complete ejection of vehicle occupants through side

windows in certain rollover or side impact events.

WARNING!

• Your vehicle is equipped with left and right

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs). Do not stack luggage or other cargo up

high enough to block the deployment of the

SABICs. The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deployment path

are located should remain free from any obstruc-

tions.

• Your vehicle is equipped with SABICs. In order for

the SABICs to work as intended, do not install any

accessory items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket sunroof to your

vehicle. Do not add roof racks that require perma-

nent attachments (bolts or screws) for installation

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the roof of the

vehicle for any reason.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 77

The SABICs and SABs (“Side Air Bags”) are designed to

activate in certain side impacts and certain rollover

events. The Occupant Restraint Controller (“ORC”) de-

termines whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags in

a particular side impact or rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat belt restraint

system. Side Air Bags deploy in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags can be seriously

injured or killed. Occupants, including children, should

never lean on or sleep against the door, side windows, or

area where the Side Air Bags inflate, even if they are in an

infant or child restraint.

Seat belts (and child restraints where appropriate) are

necessary for your protection in all collisions. They also

help keep you in position, away from inflating Side Air

Bags. To get the best protection from the Side Air Bags,

occupants must wear their seat belts properly and sit

upright with their backs against the seats. Children must

be properly restrained in a child restraint or booster seat

that is appropriate for the size of the child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do not lean

against the door or window. Sit upright in the

center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags during deploy-

ment could cause you to be severely injured or

killed.

(Continued)

78 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could lead to

more severe injuries in a collision. The Side Air

Bags work with your seat belt to restrain you

properly. In some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt even

though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE: Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior

trim, but they will open during air bag deployment.

Side Impacts

In side impacts, the side impact sensors aid the ORC in

determining the appropriate response to impact events.

The system is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags on

the impact side of the vehicle during impacts that require

Side Air Bag occupant protection. In side impacts, the

Side Air Bags deploy independently; a left side impact

deploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right side

impact deploys the right Side Air Bags only.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side collisions,

including some collisions at certain angles, or some side

collisions that do not impact the area of the passenger

compartment. The Side Air Bags may deploy during

angled or offset frontal collisions where the Advanced

Front Air Bags deploy.

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in certain rollover

events. The ORC determines whether the deployment of

the Side Air Bags in a particular rollover event is appro-

priate, based on the severity and type of collision. Vehicle

damage by itself is not a good indicator of whether or not

Side Air Bags should have deployed.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 79

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all rollover events.

The rollover sensing-system determines if a rollover

event may be in progress and whether deployment is

appropriate. A slower-developing event may deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the vehicle. A

faster-developing event may deploy the seat belt preten-

sioners as well as the Side Air Bags on both sides of the

vehicle. The rollover sensing-system may also deploy the

seat belt pretensioners, with or without the Side Air Bags,

on both sides of the vehicle if the vehicle experiences a

near rollover event.

If A Deployment Occurs

The Advanced Front Air Bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE: Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in all

collisions. This does not mean something is wrong with

the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the air bags, any

or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause abrasions

and/or skin reddening to the occupants as the air bags

deploy and unfold. The abrasions are similar to friction

rope burns or those you might get sliding along a carpet

or gymnasium floor. They are not caused by contact with

chemicals. They are not permanent and normally heal

quickly. However, if you haven’t healed significantly

within a few days, or if you have any blistering, see your

doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some smoke-like

particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the

process that generates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,

eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,

rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat irrita-

tion, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues, see your

doctor. If these particles settle on your clothing, follow the

garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.

80 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags have de-

ployed. If you are involved in another collision, the air

bags will not be in place to protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt pretensioners cannot

protect you in another collision. Have the air bags,

seat belt pretensioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized dealer imme-

diately. Also, have the Occupant Restraint Controller

System serviced as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the interior trim,

but they will open during air bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be taken to an

authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communication network

remains intact, and the power remains intact, depending

on the nature of the event, the ORC will determine

whether to have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine.

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery has power or

until the hazard light button is pressed. The hazard

lights can be deactivated by pressing the hazard light

button.

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on as long as

the battery has power.

• Unlock the power door locks.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 81

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

In order to reset the Enhanced Accident Response System

functions after an event, the ignition must be changed

from the START or ON/RUN position to the OFF posi-

tion. Carefully check the vehicle for fuel leaks in the

engine compartment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting the system

and starting the engine.

Air Bag Warning Light

The air bags must be ready to inflate for your

protection in a collision. The Occupant Re-

straint Controller (ORC) monitors the internal

circuits and interconnecting wiring associated

with air bag system electrical components.

The ORC monitors the readiness of the electronic parts of

the air bag system whenever the ignition is placed in the

START or ON/RUN position. If the ignition is in the OFF

position or in the ACC position, the air bag system is not

on and the air bags will not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply system that

may deploy the air bags even if the battery loses power or

it becomes disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light in the

instrument panel for approximately four to eight seconds

for a self-check when the ignition is first placed in the

ON/RUN position. After the self-check, the Air Bag

Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects a mal-

function in any part of the system, it turns on the Air Bag

Warning Light, either momentarily or continuously. A

single chime will sound to alert you if the light comes on

again after initial startup.

82 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will illuminate

the instrument panel Air Bag Warning Light if a malfunc-

tion is detected that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the malfunction.

While the air bag system is designed to be maintenance

free, if any of the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immediately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come on during

the four to eight seconds when the ignition is first

placed in the ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after the four to

eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving.

NOTE: If the speedometer, tachometer, or any engine

related gauges are not working, the Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) may also be disabled. In this condition

the air bags may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your instru-

ment panel could mean you won’t have the air bags

to protect you in a collision. If the light does not come

on as a bulb check when the ignition is first turned

on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes

on as you drive, have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 83

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag system

could cause it to fail when you need it. You could

be injured if the air bag system is not there to

protect you. Do not modify the components or

wiring, including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the

upper right side of the instrument panel. Do not

modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or

add aftermarket side steps or running boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the air

bag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who

works on your vehicle that it has an air bag system.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your air bag

system. The air bag may inflate accidentally or may

not function properly if modifications are made.

Take your vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, including your

trim cover and cushion, needs to be serviced in any

way (including removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle to your

authorized dealer. Only manufacturer approved

seat accessories may be used. If it is necessary to

modify the air bag system for persons with dis-

abilities, contact your authorized dealer.

84 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data recorder

(EDR). The main purpose of an EDR is to record, in

certain crash or near crash-like situations, such as an air

bag deployment or hitting a road obstacle, data that will

assist in understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data related to

vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short period of

time, typically 30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle

is designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger safety belts

were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing the

accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

These data can help provide a better understanding of

the circumstances in which crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE: EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if a

non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data are recorded by

the EDR under normal driving conditions and no per-

sonal data (e.g., name, gender, age, and crash location)

are recorded. However, other parties, such as law en-

forcement, could combine the EDR data with the type of

personally identifying data routinely acquired during a

crash investigation.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special equipment is

required, and access to the vehicle or the EDR is needed.

In addition to the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,

such as law enforcement, that have the special equip-

ment, can read the information if they have access to the

vehicle or the EDR.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 85

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up at all

times, including babies and children.

Every state in the United States, and every Canadian

province, requires that small children ride in proper

restraint systems. This is the law, and you can be pros-

ecuted for ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride properly

buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash

statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in

the rear seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can become a

projectile inside the vehicle. The force required to

hold even an infant on your lap could become so

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

great that you could not hold the child, no matter

how strong you are. The child and others could be

badly injured. Any child riding in your vehicle

should be in a proper restraint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of restraints for

children from newborn size to the child almost large

enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child

seat Owner’s Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow all the

instructions and warnings in the child restraint Owner’s

Manual and on all the labels attached to the child

restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it has

a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety

Standards. You should also make sure that you can install

it in the vehicle where you will use it.

86 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to www.seatcheck.org or

call 1-866-732-8243.

• Canadian residents should refer to Transport Canada’s

website for additional information: www.tc.gc.ca/

eng/motorvehiclesafety/safedrivers-childsafety-

index-53.htm

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and

Toddlers

Children who are two years old or

younger and who have not reached the

height or weight limits of their child re-

straint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible

Child Restraint, facing rearward in the rear

seat of the vehicle

Small Children Children who are at least two years old or

who have out-grown the height or weight

limit of their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a

five-point Harness, facing forward in the

rear seat of the vehicle

Larger Children Children who have out-grown their

forward-facing child restraint, but are too

small to properly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the ve-

hicle seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the

vehicle

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 87

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Children Too Large

for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who

have out-grown the height or weight limit

of their booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Infants And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride rear-facing

in the vehicle until they are two years old or until they

reach either the height or weight limit of their rear-facing

child restraint. Two types of child restraints can be used

rear-facing: infant carriers and convertible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in the vehicle.

It is recommended for children from birth until they

reach the weight or height limit of the infant carrier.

Convertible child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible child seats

often have a higher weight limit in the rear-facing

direction than infant carriers do, so they can be used

rear-facing by children who have outgrown their infant

carrier but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they reach the

highest weight or height allowed by their convertible

child seat.

88 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of

an air bag. A deploying passenger Advanced Front

Air Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child

12 years or younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in a vehicle

with a rear seat.

WARNING!

Do not install a rear-facing car seat using a rear

support leg in this vehicle. The floor of this vehicle is

not designed to manage the crash forces of this type

of car seat. In a crash, the support leg may not

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

function as it was designed by the car seat manufac-

turer, and your child may be more severely injured as

a result.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 89

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have outgrown their

rear-facing convertible child seat can ride forward-facing in

the vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible child

seats used in the forward-facing direction are for children

who are over two years old or who have outgrown the

rear-facing weight or height limit of their rear-facing con-

vertible child seat. Children should remain in a forward-

facing child seat with a harness for as long as possible, up to

the highest weight or height allowed by the child seat.

All children whose weight or height is above the

forward-facing limit for the child seat should use a

belt-positioning booster seat until the vehicle’s seat belts

fit properly. If the child cannot sit with knees bent over

the vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back is against

the seatback, they should use a belt-positioning booster

seat. The child and belt-positioning booster seat are held

in the vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure of an infant

or child restraint. It could come loose in a collision.

The child could be badly injured or killed. Follow the

child restraint manufacturer’s directions exactly when

installing an infant or child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the vehicle, do

not move the vehicle seat forward or rearward

because it can loosen the child restraint attach-

ments. Remove the child restraint before adjusting

the vehicle seat position. When the vehicle seat has

been adjusted, reinstall the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in

the vehicle with the seat belt or LATCH anchor-

ages, or remove it from the vehicle. Do not leave it

loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks and cause

serious personal injury.

90 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt

comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend

over the front of the seat when their back is against the

seatback, should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use this

simple 5-step test to decide whether the child can use the

vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against the back of

the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably over the front

of the vehicle seat – while they are still sitting all the

way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s shoulder

between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as possible, touching

the child’s thighs and not their stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was “no,” then the

child still needs to use a booster seat in this vehicle. If the

child is using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt fit

periodically and make sure the seat belt buckle is latched. A

child’s squirming or slouching can move the belt out of

position. If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move

the child closer to the center of the vehicle, or use a booster

seat to position the seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt under an

arm or behind their back. In a crash, the shoulder belt

will not protect a child properly, which may result in

serious injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the seat belt

correctly.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 91

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined

Weight of the

Child + Child

Restraint

Use any attachment method shown with an “X” Below

LATCH –

Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH –

Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether

Anchor

Seat Belt + Top

Tether Anchor

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Rear-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

Up to 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

X X

Forward-Facing

Child Restraint

More than

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

92 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchor-

age system called LATCH, which stands for Lower

Anchors and Tethers for CHildren. The LATCH system

has three vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower anchorages

located at the back of the seat cushion where it meets the

seatback and one top tether anchorage located behind the

seating position. These anchorages are used to install

LATCH-equipped child seats without using the vehicle’s

seat belts. Some seating positions may have a top tether

anchorage but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the top tether

anchorage to install the child restraint. Please see the

following table for more information.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 93

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Restraints In

This Vehicle

Regular Cab

• Lower Anchorage Symbol – 2 anchorages per

seating position

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Mega Cab/Crew Cab Split Bench

• Lower Anchorage Symbol - 2 anchorages per

seating position

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

94 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Quad Cab/Crew Cab Full Bench

• Lower Anchorage Symbol 2 anchorages per

seating position

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 95

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the

child restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg) Use the LATCH anchorage system until

the combined weight of the child and the

child restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the

seat belt and tether anchor instead of the

LATCH system once the combined weight

is more than 65 lbs (29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat

belt be used together to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint?

No Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Can a child seat be installed in the center

position using the inner LATCH lower an-

chorages?

No Full bench rear seat only: Use the seat belt

and tether anchor to install a child seat in

the center seating position.

96 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

Can two child restraints be attached using

a common lower LATCH anchorage?

No Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with

two or more child restraints. If the center

position does not have dedicated LATCH

lower anchorages, use the seat belt to in-

stall a child seat in the center position next

to a child seat using the LATCH anchor-

ages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch

the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes The child seat may touch the back of the

front passenger seat if the child restraint

manufacturer also allows contact. See your

child restraint owner’s manual for more

information.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in

each seating position.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 97

NOTE: If the folding, non-adjustable head restraint in-

terferes with the installation of the child restraint, the

head restraint may be folded and the child seat installed

in front of it.

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright

position when the seat is to be used by an occupant

who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with

the head restraint in its lowered position could result

in serious injury or death in a collision.

Locating LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback. They are just visible when

you lean into the rear seat to install the child restraint.

You will easily feel them if you run your finger along the

gap between the seatback and seat cushion.

Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab Rear Outboard Seats

Driver Side

98 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Locating Tether Anchorages

Regular Cab models have tether strap anchor-

ages behind the front center and right seats.

Quad Cab, Mega Cab and Crew Cab models

have tether strap anchorages located behind

each of the rear seats.

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap To Child Restraint

3 — Tether Anchor

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 99

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems will be

equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible strap on each side.

Each will have a hook or connector to attach to the lower

anchorage and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints and some

rear-facing child restraints will also be equipped with a

tether strap. The tether strap will have a hook at the end

to attach to the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH — Regular Cab/Quad

Cab/Crew Cab Full Bench

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in the center posi-

tion using the LATCH system. This position is not

approved for installing child seats using the

LATCH attachments. You must use the seat belt

and tether anchor to install a child seat in the center

seating position.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. Please refer to Installing

Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-

ages in the section Installing Child Restraints for

typical installation instructions.

Mega Cab Tether Anchorages (Behind Covers)

100 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Center Seat LATCH — Mega Cab/Crew Cab Split

Bench

If a child restraint installed in the center position blocks the

seat belt webbing or buckle for the outboard position, do not

use that outboard position. If a child seat in the center

position blocks the outboard LATCH anchors or seat belt, do

not install a child seat in that outboard position.

WARNING!

Never use the same lower anchorage to attach more

than one child restraint. Please refer to Installing

Child Restraints Using the LATCH Lower Anchor-

ages in the section Installing Child Restraints for

typical installation instructions.

Always follow the directions of the child restraint manu-

facturer when installing your child restraint. Not all child

restraint systems will be installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint

If the selected seating position has a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat belt, stow the seat

belt, following the instructions below. See the section

“Installing Child Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt”

to check what type of seat belt each seating position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps and on the

tether strap of the child seat so that you can more

easily attach the hooks or connectors to the vehicle

anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower anchorages for

that seating position. For some second row seats, you

may need to recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to

move it to its rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front seat forward

to allow more room for the child seat.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 101

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of the child

restraint to the lower anchorages in the selected seat-

ing position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap, connect it to the

top tether anchorage. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for direc-

tions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the seat. Remove slack

in the straps according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to install a

child restraint, stow all ALR seat belts that are not being

used by other occupants or being used to secure child

restraints. An unused belt could injure a child if they play

with it and accidentally lock the seat belt retractor. Before

installing a child restraint using the LATCH system,

buckle the seat belt behind the child restraint and out of

the child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with

the child restraint installation, instead of buckling it

behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the

child restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not lock

the seat belt. Remind all children in the vehicle that the

seat belts are not toys and that they should not play with

them.

102 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint to the

LATCH anchorages can lead to failure of the re-

straint. The child could be badly injured or killed.

Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed to with-

stand only those loads imposed by correctly-fitted

child restraints. Under no circumstances are they to

be used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt

The seat belts in the passenger seating positions are

equipped with either a Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor (ALR) or a cinching latch plate or both. Both

types of seat belts are designed to keep the lap portion of

the seat belt tight around the child restraint so that it is

not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR retractor can

be “switched” into a locked mode by pulling all of the

webbing out of the retractor and then letting the webbing

retract back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR will

make a clicking noise while the webbing is pulled back

into the retractor. Refer to the “Automatic Locking

Mode” description under “Occupant Restraints” for ad-

ditional information on ALR. The cinching latch plate is

designed to hold the lap portion of the seat belt tight

when webbing is pulled tight and straight through a

child restraint’s belt path.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 103

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing Child

Restraints In This Vehicle

Regular Cab

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

Quad Cab/Mega Cab/Crew Cab

• ALR = Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

• Cinch = Cinching Latch Plate

• Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

104 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a

forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the

Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using

the seat belt to install a forward facing

child restraint, up to the recommended

weight limit of the child restraint.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch

the back of the front passenger seat?

Yes Contact between the front passenger seat

and the child restraint is allowed, if the

child restraint manufacturer also allows

contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? Yes The head restraints can be removed in

each seating position.

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten

the seat belt against the belt path of the

child restraint?

Yes In positions with cinching latch plates

(CINCH), the buckle stalk may be twisted

up to 3 full turns. Do not twist the buckle

stalk in a seating position with an ALR

retractor.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 105

WARNING!

Always make sure the head restraint is in its upright

position when the seat is to be used by an occupant

who is not in a child restraint. Sitting in a seat with

the head restraint in its lowered position could result

in serious injury or death in a collision.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switchable

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the retractor

to pass it through the belt path of the child restraint.

Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap portion tight

against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the shoulder part of

the belt until you have pulled all the seat belt webbing

out of the retractor. Then, allow the webbing to retract

back into the retractor. As the webbing retracts, you

will hear a clicking sound. This means the seat belt is

now in the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor. If it is

locked, you should not be able to pull out any web-

bing. If the retractor is not locked, repeat step 5.

106 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Cinching

Latch Plate (CINCH) — If Equipped:

1. Place the child seat in the center of the seating

position. For some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and / or raise the head restraint to get

a better fit. If the rear seat can be moved forward and

rearward in the vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the child seat.

You may also move the front seat forward to allow

more room for the child seat.

2. Next, pull enough of the seat belt webbing from the

retractor to pass it through the belt path of the child

restraint. Do not twist the belt webbing in the belt

path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

“click.”

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 107

4. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to tighten the

lap portion around the child restraint while you push

the child restraint rearward and downward into the

vehicle seat.

5. If the child restraint has a top tether strap and the

seating position has a top tether anchorage, connect

the tether strap to the anchorage and tighten the tether

strap. See the section “Installing Child Restraints

Using the Top Tether Anchorage” for directions to

attach a tether anchor.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed tightly by

pulling back and forth on the child seat at the belt

path. It should not move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm)

in any direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so check the

belt occasionally, and pull it tight if necessary.

If the buckle or the cinching latch plate is too close to the

belt path opening of the child restraint, you may have

trouble tightening the seat belt. If this happens, discon-

nect the latch plate from the buckle and twist the short

buckle-end belt up to three full turns to shorten it. Insert

the latch plate into the buckle with the release button

facing out, away from the child restraint. Repeat steps 4

to 6, above, to complete the installation of the child

restraint.

108 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

If the belt still cannot be tightened after you shorten the

buckle, disconnect the latch plate from the buckle, turn

the buckle around one half turn, and insert the latch plate

into the buckle again. If you still cannot make the child

restraint installation tight, try a different seating position.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top Tether

Anchorage

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-facing car seat

to any location in front of the car seat, including the

seat frame or a tether anchorage. Only attach the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

tether strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating position,

located behind the top of the vehicle seat. See the

section “Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 109

Regular and Mega Cab Trucks:

In the regular cab truck, the top tether anchorages are

located behind the center and right passenger seats. In

the mega cab truck, the top tether anchorages are located

behind each rear seating position. There is a plastic cover

over each anchorage. To attach the tether strap of the

child restraint:

1. Place the child restraint on the seat and adjust the

tether strap so that it will reach over the seat back,

under the head restraint and to the tether anchor

directly behind the seat.

1 — Tether Strap Hook

2 — Tether Strap to Child Restraint

3 — Tether Anchor

Regular Cab Tether Anchorages

110 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most direct path

between the anchorage and the child seat. The tether

strap should go between the head restraint posts

underneath the head restraint. You may need to adjust

the head restraint to the upward position to pass the

tether strap underneath the head restraint and be-

tween its posts.

3. Lift the cover (if so equipped), and attach the hook to

the square opening in the sheet metal. Tighten the

tether strap according to the child seat manufacturer’s

instructions.

Mega Cab Tether Anchorages

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 111

WARNING!

Never place a rear-facing child restraint in front of an

air bag. A deploying Passenger Advanced Front Air

Bag can cause death or serious injury to a child 12

years or younger, including a child in a rear-facing

child restraint.

Quad Cab or Crew Cab Trucks:

The top tether anchorages in this vehicle are tether strap

loops located between the rear glass and the back of the

rear seat. There is a tether strap loop located behind each

seating position. Follow the steps below to attach the

tether strap of the child restraint.

Right or Left Outboard Seats:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear

seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Head Restraint In Raised Position

112 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether

strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the

head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind

the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind the

center seat.

3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint

behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop

behind the seat and over to the center tether strap

loop.

Tether Strap Loop With Center Head Restraint In Raised

Position

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 113

4. Attach the hook to the center tether strap loop (see

diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the

child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

NOTE: If there are child seats in both of the outboard (left

and right) seating positions, the tether strap hooks of

both child seats should be connected to the center tether

strap loop. This is the correct way to tether two outboard

child seats.

Center Seat:

1. Raise the head restraint and reach between the rear

seat and rear glass to access the tether strap loop.

Tether Strap Through Outboard Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Center Tether Strap Loop

114 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Place a child restraint on the seat and adjust the tether

strap so that it will reach over the seat back, under the

head restraint, through the tether strap loop behind

the seat and over to the tether strap loop behind either

the right or left outboard seat.

3. Pass the tether strap hook under the head restraint

behind the child seat, though the tether strap loop

behind the seat and over to the right or left outboard

tether strap loop.

Tether Strap Loop With Head Restraint In Raised

Position

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 115

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop (see

diagram). Tighten the tether strap according to the

child seat manufacturer’s instructions.

Installing Three Child Restraints:

1. Place a child restraint on each outboard rear seat.

Route the tether straps following the directions for

right and left seating positions, above.

2. Attach both hooks to the center tether strap loop, but

do not tighten the straps yet.

3. Place a child restraint on the center rear seat. Route the

tether strap following the directions for the center

seating position, above.

4. Attach the hook to the outboard tether strap loop.

5. Tighten the tether straps according to the child seat

manufacturer’s instructions, tightening the right and

left tether straps before the center tether strap.

Tether Strap Through Center Tether Strap Loop And

Attached To Outboard Tether Strap Loop

116 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to

increased head motion and possible injury to the

child. Use only the anchorage position directly

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

behind the child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split rear seat,

make sure the tether strap does not slip into the

opening between the seatbacks as you remove

slack in the strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.

An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly

injured, or injure a passenger during panic braking or in

a collision.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses

or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.

Left Outboard And Center Seating Position Shown

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 117

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the engine and

drivetrain (transmission and axle) in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).

After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or

55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the

limits of local traffic laws contributes to a good break-in.

Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detri-

mental and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a

high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil

changes should be consistent with anticipated climate

conditions under which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality grades, refer to

“Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle.”

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight Mineral Oil

in the engine or damage may result.

NOTE: A new engine may consume some oil during its

first few thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This

should be considered a normal part of the break-in and

not interpreted as a problem.

118 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO

AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people

riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle

that is not equipped with seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon

monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.

Breathing it can make you unconscious and can

eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO),

follow these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in

confined areas any longer than needed to move

your vehicle in or out of the area.

• If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate/

rear doors open, make sure that all windows are

closed and the climate control BLOWER switch is

set at high speed. DO NOT use the recirculation

mode.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 119

WARNING! (Continued)

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running, adjust your heating or cooling

controls to force outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into the

vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust sys-

tem.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust

system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the

vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is

damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,

damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open

seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes

to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,

inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically, checking for

cuts, frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be

replaced immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a

collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after

a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,

torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding seat

belt or retractor condition, replace the seat belt.

120 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for four to

eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is first

placed in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either

not on during starting, stays on, or turns on while

driving, have the system inspected at an authorized

dealer as soon as possible. This light will illuminate

with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag

Warning Light has been detected, it will stay on until

the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently

or remains on while driving, have an authorized

dealer service the vehicle immediately. Refer to “Oc-

cupant Restraints” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place the

blower control on high speed. You should be able to feel the

air directed against the windshield. See your authorized

dealer for service if your defroster is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit the footwell of your

vehicle. Use only floor mats that leave the pedal area

unobstructed and that are firmly secured so that they

cannot slip out of position and interfere with the pedals

or impair safe operation of your vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

Pedals that cannot move freely can cause loss of

vehicle control and increase the risk of serious per-

sonal injury.

• Always make sure that floor mats are properly

attached to the floor mat fasteners.

• Never place or install floor mats or other floor cover-

ings in the vehicle that cannot be properly secured to

prevent them from moving and interfering with the

pedals or the ability to control the vehicle.

(Continued)

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 121

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never put floor mats or other floor coverings on top

of already installed floor mats. Additional floor

mats and other coverings will reduce the size of the

pedal area and interfere with the pedals.

• Check mounting of mats on a regular basis. Always

properly reinstall and secure floor mats that have

been removed for cleaning.

• Always make sure that objects cannot fall into the

driver footwell while the vehicle is moving. Objects

can become trapped under the brake pedal and accel-

erator pedal causing a loss of vehicle control.

• If required, mounting posts must be properly in-

stalled, if not equipped from the factory.

Failure to properly follow floor mat installation or

mounting can cause interference with the brake

pedal and accelerator pedal operation causing loss of

control of the vehicle.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside

The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear

patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects

lodged in the tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts, cracks, and bulges.

Check the wheel bolts for tightness. Check the tires

(including spare) for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake lights and

exterior lights while you work the controls. Check turn

signal and high beam indicator lights on the instrument

panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and locking.

122 THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid Leaks

Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,

engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline

fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid (if

equipped), or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The cause

should be located and corrected immediately.

THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE 123

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

MIRRORS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped . . . .132

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped . . .133

▫ Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View

Camera Display — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .140

▫ Outside Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

▫ Outside Mirrors Folding Feature . . . . . . . . . . .141

▫ Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped . . . . . . .142

▫ Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And

Trailer Tow — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143

▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .144

▫ Heated Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .146

▫ Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

▫ Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . .146

▫ Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped . . . .147

▫ “Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

SEATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148

▫ Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . .149

▫ Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped . . . . . .151

▫ Power Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .152

▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .152

▫ Ventilated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .155

▫ Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped . . . . . . .156

▫ 40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped . . . .157

▫ Mega Cab Rear Seat Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

▫ Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED . . . .166

▫ Programming The Memory Feature . . . . . . . . .166

▫ Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Key Fob To Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167

▫ Memory Position Recall . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168

▫ Easy Entry/Exit Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD . . . . . . . . .171

LIGHTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .172

▫ Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

▫ Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . . . . . .174

▫ Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

▫ Headlight Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

▫ Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

▫ Parking Lights And Panel Lights. . . . . . . . . . .178

▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178

126 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ Battery Saver. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

▫ Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped . .182

▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

▫ Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ High/Low Beam Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS . . . . . .184

▫ Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .186

▫ Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . . . . . . .187

TILT STEERING COLUMN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED .189

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . .192

▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193

▫ To Set A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 127

▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196

▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .197

▫ Enabling And Disabling ParkSense . . . . . . . . .201

▫ Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist

System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .202

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .203

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .203

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK

ASSIST — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205

▫ ParkSense Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ ParkSense Warning Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . .206

▫ ParkSense Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207

▫ Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear

ParkSense . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209

▫ Service The ParkSense Park Assist System . . . .210

▫ Cleaning The ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . .211

▫ ParkSense System Usage Precautions . . . . . . . .211

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .217

▫ Courtesy/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED . . .219

▫ Before You Begin Programming HomeLink . . .220

▫ Programming A Rolling Code . . . . . . . . . . . .221

128 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Programming A Non-Rolling Code . . . . . . . . .224

▫ Canadian/Gate Operator Programming . . . . .225

▫ Using HomeLink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .228

▫ Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Opening Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Closing Sunroof — Express. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230

▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Sunshade Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS . . . . . . . . . . .232

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . .237

AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED . . . . .238

CUPHOLDERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats) . . . . . .239

▫ Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor

Storage Bin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

▫ Rear Cupholders — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .240

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 129

STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

▫ Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240

▫ Door Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .242

▫ Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped . .243

▫ Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .246

▫ Seatback Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

▫ Storage (Regular Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247

▫ Storage and Seats (Crew Cab) . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

▫ Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab

Models) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

REAR WINDOW FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

▫ Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped . .250

▫ Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped .250

FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED . .250

PICKUP BOX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255

▫ Cargo Camera — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .256

▫ Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257

RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258

▫ RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins . . . .258

▫ Locking And Unlocking RamBox. . . . . . . . . . .260

▫ RamBox Safety Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .261

▫ Bed Extender — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .262

▫ Bed Rail Tie-Down System . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

130 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Camper Applications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

EASY-OFF TAILGATE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

▫ Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote

Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

▫ Removing The Tailgate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273

▫ Locking Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274

TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER —

IF EQUIPPED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal . . . . . . . . . .275

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation. . . . . . . . .279

▫ Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . .285

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 131

MIRRORS

Inside Day/Night Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right

for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to

center on the view through the rear window.

Headlight glare from vehicles behind you can be reduced

by moving the small control under the mirror to the night

position (toward the rear of the vehicle). The mirror

should be adjusted while set in the day position (toward

the windshield).

Adjusting Rearview Mirror

132 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Dimming Mirror — If Equipped

The mirror head can be adjusted up, down, left, and right

for various drivers. The mirror should be adjusted to

center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you.

NOTE: The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature is dis-

abled when the vehicle is in reverse gear to improve rear

view viewing.

The Automatic Dimming Mirror feature can be turned

On or Off through the touchscreen.

• Press the Mirror Dimmer button once to turn the

feature On.

• Press the Mirror Dimmer button a second time to turn

the feature Off.

If equipped, the rearview mirror contains an ASSIST and

a 9-1-1 button.

Automatic Dimming Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 133

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• The 9–1–1 and ASSIST buttons will only function if

you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data) or

3G(data) network. Other Uconnect services will only

be operable if your Uconnect Access service is active

and you are connected to an operable 1X(voice/data)

or 3G(data) network.

ASSIST Call

The ASSIST Button is used to automatically connect you

to any one of the following support centers:

• Roadside Assistance – If you get a flat tire, or need a

tow, just push the ASSIST button and you’ll be con-

nected to someone who can help. Roadside Assistance

will know what vehicle you’re driving and its location.

Additional fees may apply for roadside Assistance.

• Uconnect Access Customer Care – In-vehicle support

for Uconnect Access and Uconnect Access Via Mobile

features.

• Vehicle Customer Care – Total support for all other

vehicle issues.

134 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

9-1-1 Call

1. Push the 9-1-1 Call button on the Rearview Mirror.

NOTE: In case the 9-1-1 Call button is pushed in error,

there will be a 10 second delay before the 9-1-1 Call

system initiates a call to a 9-1-1 operator. To cancel the

9-1-1 Call connection, push the 9-1-1 Call button on the

Rearview Mirror or press the cancellation button on the

Device Screen. Termination of the 9-1-1 Call will turn off

the green LED light on the Rearview Mirror.

2. The LED light located between the ASSIST and 9-1-1

buttons on the Rearview Mirror will turn green once a

connection to a 9-1-1 operator has been made.

3. Once a connection between the vehicle and a 9-1-1 operator

is made, the 9-1-1 Call system may transmit the following

important vehicle information to a 9-1-1 operator:

• Indication that the occupant placed a 9-1-1 Call.

• The vehicle brand.

• The last known GPS coordinates of the vehicle.

4. You should be able to speak with the 9-1-1 operator

through the vehicle audio system to determine if

additional help is needed.

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 135

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• Once a connection is made between the vehicle’s

9-1-1 Call system and the 9-1-1 operator, the 9-1-1

operator may be able to open a voice connection with

the vehicle to determine if additional help is needed.

Once the 9-1-1 operator opens a voice connection

with the vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system, the operator

should be able to speak with you or other vehicle

occupants and hear sounds occurring in the vehicle.

The vehicle’s 9-1-1 Call system will attempt to re-

main connected with the 9-1-1 operator until the

9-1-1 operator terminates the connection.

5. The 9-1-1 operator may attempt to contact appropriate

emergency responders and provide them with impor-

tant vehicle information and GPS coordinates.

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in danger (e.g.,

fire or smoke is visible, dangerous road conditions

or location), do not wait for voice contact from a

9-1-1 operator. All occupants should exit the vehicle

immediately and move to a safe location.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s

operable 1X (voice/data) or 3G(data) network and

GPS antennas. You could prevent operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal

reception, which can prevent your vehicle from

placing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/

data) or 3G(data) network and GPS signal recep-

tion is required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function

properly.

• The 9-1-1 Call system is embedded into the vehi-

cle’s electrical system. Do not add aftermarket

(Continued)

136 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

electrical equipment to the vehicle’s electrical sys-

tem. This may prevent your vehicle from sending a

signal to initiate an emergency call. To avoid inter-

ference that can cause the 9-1-1 Call system to fail,

never add aftermarket equipment (e.g., two-way

mobile radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to your

vehicle’s electrical system or modify the antennas

on your vehicle. IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BAT-

TERY POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUDING

DURING OR AFTER AN ACCIDENT), THE

UCONNECT FEATURES, APPS AND SERVICES,

AMONG OTHERS, WILL NOT OPERATE.

• Modifications to any part of the 9-1-1 Call system

could cause the air bag system to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air bag system

is not there to help protect you.

9-1-1 Call System Limitations

Vehicles sold in Canada and Mexico DO NOT have 9-1-1

Call system capabilities.

9-1-1 or other emergency line operators in Canada and

Mexico may not answer or respond to 9-1-1 system calls.

If the 9-1-1 Call system detects a malfunction, any of the

following may occur at the time the malfunction is

detected, and at the beginning of each ignition cycle:

• The Rearview Mirror light located between the ASSIST

and 9-1-1 buttons will continuously be illuminated

red.

• The Device Screen will display the following message

“Vehicle device requires service. Please contact your

dealer.”

• An In-Vehicle Audio message will state “Vehicle de-

vice requires service. Please contact your dealer.”

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 137

WARNING!

• Ignoring the Rearview Mirror light could mean you

will not have 9-1-1 Call services. If the Rearview

Mirror light is illuminated, have an authorized

dealer service the 9-1-1 Call system immediately.

• The Occupant Restraint Control module turns on

the air bag Warning Light on the instrument panel

if a malfunction in any part of the system is

detected. If the Air Bag Warning Light is illumi-

nated, have an authorized dealer service the Occu-

pant Restraint Control system immediately.

Even if the 9-1-1 Call system is fully functional, factors

beyond FCA US LLC’s control may prevent or stop the

9-1-1 Call system operation. These include, but are not

limited to, the following factors:

• Delayed accessories mode is active.

• The ignition is in the OFF position.

• The vehicle’s electrical systems are not intact.

• The 9-1-1 Call system software and/or hardware are

damaged during a crash.

• The vehicle battery loses power or becomes discon-

nected during a vehicle crash.

• 1X(voice/data) or 3G(data) network and/or Global

Positioning Satellite signals are unavailable or ob-

structed.

• Equipment malfunction at the 9-1-1 operator facility.

• Operator error by the 9-1-1 operator.

• 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) network congestion.

• Weather.

• Buildings, structures, geographic terrain, or tunnels.

138 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be transmitting data as authorized

by the subscriber.

• Never place anything on or near the vehicle’s 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS antennas. You could

prevent 1X (voice/data) or 3G (data) and GPS signal

reception, which can prevent your vehicle from plac-

ing an emergency call. An operable 1X (voice/data) or

3G (data) network connection and a GPS signal is

required for the 9-1-1 Call system to function properly.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules.

Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1)

This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2)

this device must accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause undesired operation.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never

spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.

Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the

mirror clean.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 139

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View

Camera Display — If Equipped

A single ball joint mirror is provided in the vehicle. It is

a twist on mirror that has a fixed position at the wind-

shield. The mirror installs on the windshield button with

a counterclockwise rotation and requires no tools for

mounting. The mirror head can be adjusted up, down,

left, and right for various drivers. The mirror should be

adjusted to center on the view through the rear window.

This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare

from vehicles behind you.

When the vehicle is placed into reverse gear a video

display illuminates to display the image generated by the

rear view camera located on the tailgate handle. The auto

dimming feature is also disabled to improve rear view

viewing.

Outside Mirrors

To receive maximum benefit, adjust the outside mirrors

to center on the adjacent lane of traffic with a slight

overlap of the view obtained on the inside mirror.

Automatic Dimming Mirror With Rear View Camera

140 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated

approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be

turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect

radio. For further information refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel”.

WARNING!

Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side

convex mirror will look smaller and farther away

than they really are. Relying too much on your

passenger side convex mirror could cause you to

collide with another vehicle or other object. Use your

inside mirror when judging the size or distance of a

vehicle seen in the passenger side convex mirror.

Some vehicles will not have a convex passenger side

mirror.

Outside Mirrors Folding Feature

All outside mirrors are designed to be able to be manu-

ally folded both forward and rearward to prevent dam-

age.

Folding Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 141

CAUTION!

It is recommended to fold the mirrors into the full

rearward position to resist damage when entering a

car wash or a narrow location.

Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

Tilt Mirrors in Reverse provides automatic outside mirror

positioning which will aid the driver’s view of the

ground rearward of the front doors. The outside mirrors

will move slightly downward from the present position

when the vehicle is shifted into REVERSE. The outside

mirrors will then return to the original position when the

vehicle is shifted out of the REVERSE position. Each

stored memory setting will have an associated Tilt Mir-

rors in Reverse position.

NOTE: The Tilt Mirrors in Reverse feature is not turned

on when delivered from the factory.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-

tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

142 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Folding Outside Mirrors For Standard And

Trailer Tow — If Equipped

If equipped with power folding mirrors, they can be

electrically folded rearward and unfolded into the drive

position.

The switch for the power folding mirrors is located

between the power mirror switches L (left) and R (right).

Push the switch once and the mirrors will fold in, push

the switch a second time and the mirrors will return to

the normal driving position.

If the mirror is manually folded after electrically cycled,

a potential extra button push is required to get the

mirrors back to the home position. If the mirror does not

electrically fold check for ice or dirt build up at the pivot

area which can cause excessive drag.

Resetting the Power Folding Outside Mirrors

You may need to reset the power folding mirrors if the

following occurs:

• The mirrors are accidentally blocked while folding.

• The mirrors are accidentally manually folded/unfolded.

Power Folding Mirror Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 143

• The mirrors come out of the unfolded position.

• The mirrors shake and vibrate at normal driving

speeds.

To reset the power folding mirrors: Fold and unfold them

by pushing the button (this may require multiple button

pushes). This resets them to their normal position.

NOTE:

• The power fold mirrors are designed to operate while

the vehicle is stationary or traveling at moderate

speeds. If you attempt to power fold the mirrors at

high speeds they may not fully open or close. You

should slow down to a moderate speed and complete

the operation.

• When pushing the power fold button 10 or more times

in one minute the system shuts down for one minute

to protect the motors from over heating.

Power Mirrors — If Equipped

The controls for the power mirrors are located on the

driver’s door trim panel.

The power mirror controls consist of mirror select but-

tons and a four-way mirror control switch.

Power Mirror Controls Location

144 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To adjust a mirror, push either the L (left) or R (right)

button to select the mirror that you want to adjust.

Using the mirror control switch, push on any of the four

arrows for the direction that you want the mirror to

move.

Power Mirror Controls

1 — Mirror Select Buttons

2 — Four-Way Mirror Control Switch

Power Mirror Movement

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 145

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt frost or ice. This

feature can be activated whenever you turn on the

rear window defroster (if equipped). Refer to “Rear

Window Features” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for further information.

Driver’s Outside Automatic Dimming Mirror — If

Equipped

The driver’s outside mirror will automatically adjust for

glare from vehicles behind you. This feature is controlled

by the inside automatic dimming mirror and will auto-

matically adjust for headlight glare when the inside

mirror adjusts.

Trailer Towing Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are designed with an adjustable mirror

head to provide a greater vision range when towing

extra-wide loads. To change position inboard or out-

board, the mirror head should be rotated (flipped in or

out).

NOTE: Fold the trailer towing mirrors rearward prior to

entering an automated car wash.

Trailer Towing Position

146 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

A small blindspot mirror is located next to main mirror

and can be adjusted separately.

Illuminated Vanity Mirror — If Equipped

Illuminated vanity mirrors are located on each sun visor.

To use the mirror, rotate the sun visor down and swing

the mirror cover upward. The lights will turn on auto-

matically. Closing the mirror cover turns off the light.

Blindspot Mirror

Illuminated Vanity Mirror

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 147

“Slide-On-Rod” Features Of Sun Visor — If

Equipped

The sun visor “Slide-On-Rod” feature allows for addi-

tional flexibility in positioning the visor to block out the

sun.

To use the “Slide-On-Rod” feature, rotate the sun visor

downward and unclip it. Pull the sun visor along the

“Slide-On-Rod” until the sun visor is in the desired

position.

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint System of the

vehicle.

“Slide-On-Rod” Extender

148 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts. In a collision, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

Driver’s Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models may be equipped with an eight-way power

driver’s seat. The power seat switches are located on the

outboard side of the driver’s seat cushion. There are two

power seat switches that are used to control the move-

ment of the seat cushion and the seatback.

Power Seat Switches

1 — Power Seat Switch

2 — Power Seatback Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 149

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

Adjusting The Seat Up Or Down

The height of the seats can be adjusted up or down. Pull

upward or push downward on the seat switch. The seat

will move in the direction of the switch. Release the

switch when the desired position is reached.

Tilting The Seat Up Or Down

The angle of the seat cushion can be adjusted in four

directions. Pull upward or push downward on the front

or rear of the seat switch, the front or rear of the seat

cushion will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position is reached.

Reclining The Seatback

The angle of the seatback can be adjusted forward or

rearward. Push the seatback switch forward or rearward,

the seat will move in the direction of the switch. Release

the switch when the desired position is reached.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

(Continued)

150 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under a power seat or

impede its ability to move as it may cause damage to

the seat controls. Seat travel may become limited if

movement is stopped by an obstruction in the seat’s

path.

Passenger’s Power Seat — If Equipped

Some models are equipped with a six-way power pas-

senger seat. The power seat switch is located on the

outboard side of the seat. The switch is used to control

the movement of the seat and seat cushion.

Adjusting The Seat Forward Or Rearward

The seat can be adjusted both forward and rearward.

Push the seat switch forward or rearward. The seat will

move in the direction of the switch. Release the switch

when the desired position has been reached.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 151

Power Lumbar — If Equipped

Vehicles equipped with power driver or passenger seats may

be also be equipped with power lumbar. The power lumbar

switch is located on the outboard side of the power seat. Push

the switch forward to increase the lumbar support. Push the

switch rearward to decrease the lumbar support.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

On some models, the front and rear seats may be

equipped with heaters located in the seat cushions and

seat backs.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because

of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord

injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other

physical condition must exercise care when using the

seat heater. It may cause burns even at low tempera-

tures, especially if used for long periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or seatback that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or cushion.

This may cause the seat heater to overheat. Sitting

in a seat that has been overheated could cause

serious burns due to the increased surface tempera-

ture of the seat.Lumbar Control Switch

152 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Front Heated Seats

The front heated seats control buttons are located on the

center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front

heated seats control buttons are also located within the

climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the heated seat button once to turn the HI

setting On.

• Press the heated seat button a second time to turn

the LO setting On.

• Press the heated seat button a third time to turn

the heating elements OFF.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will

provide a boosted heat level during the first four minutes

of operation. Then, the heat output will drop to the

normal HI-level. If the HI-level setting is selected, the

system will automatically switch to LO-level after ap-

proximately 60 minutes of continuous operation. At that

time, the display will change from HI to LO, indicating

the change. The LO-level setting will turn OFF automati-

cally after approximately 45 minutes.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated seats

to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with Remote Start, the

drivers seat can be programmed to come on during a

remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-

tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 153

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Rear Heated Seats

On some models, the two outboard seats are equipped

with heated seats. The heated seat switches for these

seats are located on the rear of the center console.

There are two heated seat switches that allow the rear

passengers to operate the seats independently. You can

choose from HI, LO or OFF heat settings. Amber indica-

tor lights in each switch indicate the level of heat in use.

Two indicator lights will illuminate for HI, one for LO

and none for OFF.

Push the switch once to select HI-level heating.

Push the switch a second time to select LO-

level heating. Push the switch a third time to

shut the heating elements OFF.

NOTE:

• Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt within

two to five minutes.

• The engine must be running for the heated seats to

operate.

When the HI-level setting is selected, the heater will provide

a boosted heat level during the first four minutes of opera-

tion. Then, the heat output will drop to the normal HI-level.

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system will automati-

cally switch to LO-level after approximately 60 minutes of

continuous operation. At that time, the number of illumi-

nated LEDs changes from two to one, indicating the change.

The LO-level setting will turn OFF automatically after

approximately 45 minutes.

154 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Ventilated Seats — If Equipped

Located in the seat cushion are small fans that draw the

air from the passenger compartment and move air

through fine perforations in the seat cover to help keep

the driver and front passenger cooler in higher ambient

temperatures. The fans operate at two speeds, HI and LO.

The front ventilated seats control buttons are located on

the center instrument panel below the climate controls.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the front

ventilated seats control buttons are also located within

the climate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the ventilated seat button once to choose HI.

• Press the ventilated seat button a second time to

choose LO.

• Press the ventilated seat button a third time to

turn the ventilated seat OFF.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the ventilated

seats to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

ventilated seats can be programmed to come on during a

remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Uconnect sys-

tem. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 155

Manual Seat Adjuster — If Equipped

Both front seats are adjustable forward or rearward. The

manual seat adjustment handle is located under the seat

cushion at the front edge of each seat.

While sitting in the seat, pull up on the handle and slide

the seat forward or backward. Release the bar once you

have reached the desired position. Then, using body

pressure, move forward and rearward on the seat to be

sure that the seat adjusters have latched.

WARNING!

• Adjusting a seat while driving may be dangerous.

Moving a seat while driving could result in loss of

control which could cause a collision and serious

injury or death.

• Seats should be adjusted before fastening the seat

belts and while the vehicle is parked. Serious

injury or death could result from a poorly adjusted

seat belt.

Manual Seat Adjuster

156 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Dump Feature (Manual Recline Seat Only) —

Standard Cab

Actuating the recliner handle will allow the seatback to

swing (dump) forward on manual recliner seats. This

“dump” feature allows access to the storage bin behind

the seat.

WARNING!

• Do not stand or lean in front of the seat while

actuating the handle. The seatback may swing

forward and hit you causing injury.

• To avoid injury, place your hand on the seatback

and actuate the handle, then position the seatback

in the desired position.

40-20-40 Front Bench Seat — If Equipped

The seat is divided into three segments. The outboard

seat portions are each 40% of the total width of the seat.

On some models the back of the center portion (20%)

easily folds down to provide an armrest/center storage

compartment.

Mega Cab Rear Seat Features

Reclining Rear Seats — If Equipped

The recliner handle is located on the outside of the seat

cushion. To adjust the seatback, lift upward on the

handle, lean back on the seatback and when you reach

the desired position, release the handle.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 157

WARNING!

Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the

shoulder belt is no longer resting against your chest.

In a collision you could slide under the seat belt,

which could result in serious injury or death.

Folding Rear Seat (Table Mode) — If Equipped

Both the left and right rear seatbacks can be folded down

and used as a table.

To fold down either rear seatback:

1. Lift the handle, located next to the head restraint.

Rear Seat Recliner Handle

Table Mode Handle

158 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Fold the seatback forward.

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat

cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left

folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and

by simply opening the seats to the open position, over

time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright

position. Be sure the seatback is locked in place.

Folding Rear Seat — If Equipped

Both the outboard rear seats will drop and move forward

when the seatback is folded flat.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area, inside or

outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people riding in

these areas are more likely to be seriously injured

or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your

vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat

belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and

using a seat belt properly.

(Continued)

Table Mode

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 159

WARNING! (Continued)

• Cargo must be securely tied down before driving

your vehicle. Improperly secured cargo can fly

around in a sudden stop or collision and strike

someone in the vehicle, causing serious injury or

death.

To fold either rear seat flat:

1. Lift the handle, located on the outboard side of either

of the rear seats.

2. Fold the seatback down and push the seat forward.

Folding Rear Seat Handle

160 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

3. Lift the seatback, to return the seat to the upright

position. Be sure the seat is locked in place.

NOTE: You may experience deformation in the seat

cushion from the seat belt buckles if the seats are left

folded for an extended period of time. This is normal and

by simply opening the seats to the open position, over

time the seat cushion will return to its normal shape.

WARNING!

An improperly latched seat could cause serious in-

jury or death. Make sure that the seatback is securely

locked into position. If the seatback in not securely

locked into position the seat will not provide the

proper stability for child seats and/or passengers.Rear Passenger Fold-Flat Seats

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 161

Head Restraints

Head restraints are designed to reduce the risk of injury

by restricting head movement in the event of a rear

impact. Head restraints should be adjusted so that the top

of the head restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

The head restraints for all occupants must be prop-

erly installed and adjusted prior to operating the

vehicle or occupying a seat. Head restraints should

never be adjusted while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints improperly

adjusted or removed could cause serious injury or

death in the event of a collision.

Front Head Restraints

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the head

restraint. To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button located on the base of the head restraint and

push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, raise it up as far as it can go

then push the adjustment button and the release button

at the base of each post while pulling the head restraint

up. To reinstall the head restraint, put the head restraint

posts into the holes then adjust it to the appropriate

height.

162 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• A loose head restraint thrown forward in a colli-

sion or hard stop could cause serious injury or

death to occupants of the vehicle. Always securely

stow removed head restraints in a location outside

the occupant compartment.

• ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow

the re-installation instructions above prior to oper-

ating the vehicle or occupying a seat.

NOTE: Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees

to the incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional

clearance to the back of the head.

Adjustment Buttons

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 163

Rear Head Restraints

The rear seats are equipped with adjustable and remov-

able head restraints. To raise the head restraint, pull

upward on the head restraint. To lower the head restraint,

push the adjustment button located on the base of the

head restraint and push downward on the head restraint.

To remove the head restraint, push the adjustment button

and the release button while pulling upward on the

whole assembly. To reinstall the head restraint, put the

head restraint posts into the holes and adjust it to the

appropriate height.

NOTE: To remove outboard restraints, the rear seat

bottom must be folded up.

WARNING!

A loose head restraint thrown forward in a collision

or hard stop could cause serious injury or death to

occupants of the vehicle. Always securely stow re-

moved head restraints in a location outside the occu-

pant compartment.

164 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• The rear center head restraint (Crew Cab and Quad

Cab) has only one adjustment position that is used to

aid in the routing of a tether. Refer to “Occupant

Restraints” in “Things to Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

• Do not reposition the head restraint 180 degrees to the

incorrect position in an attempt to gain additional

clearance to the back of the head.

WARNING!

ALL the head restraints MUST be reinstalled in the

vehicle to properly protect the occupants. Follow the

re-installation instructions above prior to operating

the vehicle or occupying a seat.

Release/Adjustment Buttons

1 — Release Button

2 — Adjustment Button

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 165

DRIVER MEMORY SEAT — IF EQUIPPED

This feature allows the driver to store up to two different

memory profiles for easy recall through a memory

switch. Each memory profile contains desired position

settings for the driver seat, side mirrors, adjustable

pedals (if equipped) and a set of desired radio station

presets. Your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob can

also be programmed to recall the same positions when

the UNLOCK button is pushed.

NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with two RKE Key Fobs,

one RKE Key Fob can be linked to memory position 1 and

the other Key Fob can be linked to memory position 2.

The memory seat buttons are located on the outboard

side of the drivers seat cushion.

Programming The Memory Feature

To create a new memory profile, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the ON/RUN position

(do not start the engine).

Memory Seat Buttons

166 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Adjust all memory profile settings to desired prefer-

ences (seat, side mirrors, adjustable pedals and radio

station presets).

3. Push and release the S (Set) button on the memory

switch.

4. Within five seconds, push and release either of the

memory buttons (1) or (2). The Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-

play (DID) will display which memory position has

been set.

NOTE:

• Memory profiles can be set without the vehicle in

PARK, but the vehicle must be in PARK to recall a

memory profile.

• To set a memory profile to your RKE Key Fob, refer to

“Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Key Fob To Memory” in this section.

Linking And Unlinking The Remote Keyless Entry

Key Fob To Memory

Your RKE Key Fobs can be programmed to recall one of

two pre-programmed memory profiles by pushing the

UNLOCK button on the RKE Key Fob.

NOTE: Before programming your RKE Key Fobs to

memory the feature has to be selected.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, you must

select the “Memory To Fob” feature through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, you

must select the “Key Fob Linked To Memory” feature

through the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” or

“Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 167

To program your RKE Key Fobs, perform the following:

1. Cycle the vehicles ignition to the Off position.

2. Select desired memory profile (1) or (2).

NOTE: If a memory profile has not already been set, refer

to Programming The Memory Feature for instructions

on how to set a memory profile.

3. Once the profile has been recalled, push and release

the SET (S) button on the memory switch, then push

and release button (1) or (2) accordingly. “Memory

Profile Set” (1 or 2) will display in the instrument

cluster on vehicles equipped with the EVIC/DID.

4. Push and release the LOCK button on the RKE Key

Fob within 10 seconds.

NOTE: Your RKE Key Fobs can be unlinked to your

memory settings by pushing the SET (S) button, and

within 10 seconds, followed by pushing the UNLOCK

button on the RKE Key Fob.

Memory Position Recall

NOTE:

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic transmission,

the vehicle must be in PARK to recall memory posi-

tions. If a recall is attempted when the vehicle is not in

PARK, a message will be displayed in the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID).

• For vehicles equipped with a manual transmission, the

vehicle speed must be at 0 mph (0 km/h) to recall

memory positions. If a recall is attempted with the

vehicle speed above 0 mph (0 km/h), a message will

display in the EVIC/DID.

Driver One Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the

memory switch, push MEMORY button number 1 on

the memory switch.

168 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• To recall the memory settings for driver one using the

RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE

Key Fob linked to memory position 1.

Driver Two Memory Position Recall

• To recall the memory setting for driver two using the

memory switch, push MEMORY button number 2 on

the memory switch.

• To recall the memory settings for driver two using the

RKE Key Fob, push the UNLOCK button on the RKE

Key Fob linked to memory position 2.

A recall can be cancelled by pushing any of the MEMORY

buttons during a recall (S, 1, or 2). When a recall is

cancelled, the driver’s seat, and the power pedals (if

equipped) stop moving. A delay of one second will occur

before another recall can be selected.

Easy Entry/Exit Seat

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle.

The distance the driver seat moves depends on where

you have the driver seat positioned when you remove the

Key Fob from the ignition (or change the ignition to OFF,

for vehicles equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go).

• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or

change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move about

2.4 inches (60 mm) rearward if the driver seat position

is greater than or equal to 2.7 inches (67.7 mm) forward

of the rear stop. The seat will return to its previously

set position when you place the ignition into the ACC

or RUN position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 169

• When you remove the Key Fob from the ignition (or

change the ignition to OFF, for vehicles equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go), the driver seat will move to a

position 0.3 inches (7.7 mm) forward of the rear stop if

the driver seat position is between 0.9 inches and

2.7 inches (22.7 mm and 67.7 mm) forward of the rear

stop. The seat will return to its previously set position

when you place the ignition to the ACC or RUN

position.

• The Easy Entry/Easy Exit feature is disabled when the

driver seat position is less than 0.9 inches (22.7 mm)

forward of the rear stop. At this position, there is no

benefit to the driver by moving the seat for Easy Exit

or Easy Entry.

Each stored memory setting will have an associated Easy

Entry and Easy Exit position.

NOTE: The Easy Entry/Exit feature is not enabled when

the vehicle is delivered from the factory. The Easy

Entry/Exit feature is enabled (or later disabled) through

the programmable features in the Uconnect system. Refer

to “Uconnect Settings/Customer Programmable Fea-

tures” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

170 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD

To open the hood, two latches must be released.

1. Pull the hood release lever located below the steering

wheel at the base of the instrument panel.

2. Reach into the opening beneath the center of the hood

and push the safety latch lever to the left to release it,

before raising the hood.

Hood Release

Safety Latch Location (1500 Series Shown)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 171

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before driving your

vehicle. If the hood is not fully latched, it could open

when the vehicle is in motion and block your vision.

Failure to follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to

close it. Use a firm downward push at the front center

of the hood to ensure that both latches engage.

LIGHTS

The headlight switch is located on the left side of the

instrument panel, next to the steering wheel. The head-

light switch controls the operation of the headlights,

parking lights, instrument panel lights, cargo lights and

fog lights (if equipped).

Headlight Switch Location

172 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlight and fog

light (if equipped) lenses that are lighter and less suscep-

tible to stone breakage than glass lights. Plastic is not as

scratch resistant as glass and therefore different lens

cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with illuminated

approach lights under the outside mirrors they can be

turned off through the instrument cluster or the Uconnect

radio. For further information refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” and “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel”.

CAUTION!

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents,

steel wool or other abrasive materials to clean the

lenses.

Headlights

To turn on the headlights, rotate the headlight

switch clockwise to the headlight position.

When the headlight switch is on, the parking

lights, taillights, license plate light and instru-

ment panel lights are also turned on. To turn off the

headlights, rotate the headlight switch back to the O (Off)

position.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 173

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the headlights on or off

according to ambient light levels. To turn the system on,

rotate the headlight switch to the AUTO position.

When the system is on, the Headlight Delay feature is

also on. This means the headlights will stay on for up to

90 seconds after you turn the ignition switch to the OFF

position. To turn the automatic headlights off, turn the

headlight switch out of the AUTO position.

NOTE: The engine must be running before the head-

lights will turn on in the Automatic Mode.

Headlights On With Wipers (Available With

Automatic Headlights Only)

When this feature is active, the headlights will turn on

approximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on

if the headlight switch is placed in the AUTO position. In

addition, the headlights will turn off when the wipers are

turned off, if they were turned on by this feature.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Automatic Headlight Position

174 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped

The headlights on your vehicle will illuminate when the

engine is started and the transmission is in any gear

except PARK. This provides a constant Lights ON

condition until the ignition is turned OFF. The lights

illuminate at less than 50% of normal intensity. If the

parking brake is applied, the Daytime Running Lights

(DRL) will turn OFF. Also, if a turn signal is activated, the

DRL lamp on the same side of the vehicle may turn off for

the duration of the turn signal activation. Once the turn

signal is no longer active, the DRL lamp will illuminate.

Headlight Delay

To aid in your exit, your vehicle is equipped with a headlight

delay that will leave the headlights on for approximately up

to 90 seconds. This delay is initiated when the ignition is

turned OFF while the headlight switch is on, and then the

headlight switch is cycled off. Headlight delay can be

cancelled by either turning the headlight switch on then off,

or by turning the ignition ON.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 175

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control system

provides increased forward lighting at night by automat-

ing high beam control through the use of a digital camera

mounted on the inside rearview mirror. This camera

detects vehicle specific light and automatically switches

from high beams to low beams until the approaching

vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen the

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be

turned on or off using the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen the

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control can be

turned on or off using the Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights and taillights

of vehicles in the field of view will cause headlights to

remain on longer (closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film,

and other obstructions on the windshield or camera

lens will cause the system to function improperly.

• To opt out of the Advanced Auto High-Beam Sensitiv-

ity Control (default) and enter Reduced High-Beam

Sensitivity Control (not recommended), toggle high-

beam lever 6 full on/off cycles within 10 seconds of

ignition ON. System will return to default setting upon

ignition off.

176 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If the windshield or Automatic High Beam Headlamp

Control mirror is replaced, the mirror must be re-aimed

to ensure proper performance. See your local authorized

dealer.

To Activate

1. If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the

Automatic High Beams are enabled through the

Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the

Automatic High Beams are enabled through the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-

mation Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

2. Turn the headlight switch to the AUTO headlight

position.

3. Push the multifunction lever away from you (toward

front of vehicle) to engage the high beam mode.

NOTE: This system will not activate until the vehicle is

at or above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Deactivate

1. Pull the multifunction lever toward you (or rearward

in vehicle) to manually deactivate the system (normal

operation of low beams).

2. Push back on the multifunction lever to reactivate the

system.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 177

Parking Lights And Panel Lights

To turn on the parking lights and instrument

panel lights, rotate the headlight switch clockwise.

To turn off the parking lights, rotate the headlight switch

back to the O (Off) position.

Fog Lights — If Equipped

The fog lights are turned on by rotating the headlight

switch to the parking light or headlight position and

pushing in the headlight rotary control.

The fog lights will operate only when the parking lights are

on or when the vehicle headlights are on low beam. An

indicator light located in the instrument cluster will illumi-

nate when the fog lights are on. The fog lights will turn off

when the switch is pushed a second time, when the head-

light switch is rotated to the off position, or the high beam is

selected.

Fog Light Switch

178 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Lights-On Reminder

If the headlights, parking lights, or cargo lights are left on

after the ignition is turned OFF, a chime will sound when

the driver’s door is opened.

Battery Saver

To protect the life of your vehicle’s battery, load shedding

is provided for both the interior and exterior lights.

If the ignition is OFF and any door is left ajar for 10 minutes

or the dimmer control is rotated all the way up to the dome

ON position for 10 minutes, the interior lights will automati-

cally turn off.

NOTE: Battery saver mode is cancelled if the ignition is ON.

If the headlights remain on while the ignition is cycled

OFF, the exterior lights will automatically turn off after

eight minutes. If the headlights are turned on and left on

for eight minutes while the ignition is OFF, the exterior

lights will automatically turn off.

Interior Lights

Courtesy and dome lights are turned on when the front

doors are opened, when the dimmer control (rotating

wheel on the bottom of the switch) is rotated to the far

right detent position. If your vehicle is equipped with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and the UNLOCK button is

pushed on the RKE Key Fob the courtesy and dome

lights will turn on. When a door is open and the interior

lights are on, rotating the dimmer control all the way left,

to the OFF detent, will cause all the interior lights to go

out. This is also known as the Party mode because it

allows the doors to stay open for extended periods of

time without discharging the vehicle’s battery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 179

The brightness of the instrument panel as well as the

ambient lighting can be regulated by rotating the dimmer

control right (brighter) or left (dimmer). When the head-

lights are on you can supplement the brightness of the

odometer, trip odometer, radio and overhead console by

rotating the control to the right until you hear a click. This

feature is termed the “Parade” mode and is useful when

headlights are required during the day.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

the dimming of the touchscreen is programmable

through the Uconnect system. Refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings ” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further details. Courtesy/Reading Lights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger

compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a

door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the

Dimmer Control

180 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

courtesy light position (full right position), or when the

UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) Key Fob, if equipped. These lights are also oper-

ated individually as reading lights by pushing on the

corresponding lens.

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until

the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have

been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior

lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will

automatically turn off after 15 minutes.Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 181

Ambient Light

The overhead console is equipped with an ambient light

feature. This light casts illumination for improved visibil-

ity of the floor console area.

Cargo Light With Bed Lights — If Equipped

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) are turned on

by pushing on the cargo lights button.

Ambient Light

Cargo Lights Button

182 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The cargo light and bed lights (if equipped) will also turn

on for approximately 60 seconds when a RKE Key Fob

UNLOCK button is pushed, as part of the Illuminated

Entry feature.

Multifunction Lever

The multifunction lever is located on the left side of the

steering column.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows

on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show

proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE: If either light remains on and does not flash, or

there is a very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside

light bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the lever is

moved, it would suggest that the indicator bulb is

defective.

Turn Signal Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 183

Lane Change Assist

Tap the lever up or down once, without moving beyond

the detent, and the turn signal (right or left) will flash

three times then automatically turn off.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by

partially pulling the multifunction lever toward the steer-

ing wheel. This will cause the high beam headlights to

turn on until the lever is released.

High/Low Beam Switch

Push the multifunction lever toward the instrument

panel to switch the headlights to high beam. Pulling the

multifunction lever back toward the steering wheel will

turn the low beams back on, or shut the high beams off.

WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS

Windshield Wipers

The wipers and washers are operated by a switch in the

multifunction lever. Turn the end of the handle to select

the desired wiper speed.

High/Low Beam Switch

184 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Windshield Wiper Operation

Rotate the end of the lever upward, to the first detent past

the intermittent settings for low-speed wiper operation.

Rotate the end of the lever upward to the second detent

past the intermittent settings for high-speed wiper opera-

tion.

Intermittent Wiper System

The intermittent feature of this system was designed for

use when weather conditions make a single wiping cycle,

with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. For

maximum delay between cycles, rotate the control knob

into the upper end of the delay range.

The delay interval decreases as you rotate the knob until

it enters the low continual speed position. The delay can

be regulated from a maximum of about 18 seconds

between cycles, to a cycle every one second. The delay

intervals will double in duration when the vehicle speed

is 10 mph (16 km/h) or less.

Windshield Washers

To use the windshield washer, push the washer knob,

located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to

the second detent. Washer fluid will be sprayed and the

wiper will operate for two to three cycles after the washer

knob is released from this position.

Windshield Wiper/Washer Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 185

If the washer knob is depressed while in the delay range,

the wiper will operate for several seconds after the

washer knob is released. It will then resume the intermit-

tent interval previously selected. If the washer knob is

pushed while in the off position, the wiper will turn on

and cycle approximately three times after the wash knob

is released.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system

in cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This

rating information can be found on most washer fluid

containers.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the windshield

could lead to a collision. You might not see other

vehicles or other obstacles. To avoid sudden icing of

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the windshield during freezing weather, warm the

windshield with the defroster before and during

windshield washer use.

Mist Feature

When a single wipe to clear off road mist or spray from

a passing vehicle is needed, push the washer knob,

located on the end of the multifunction lever, inward to

the first detent and release. The wipers will cycle one

time and automatically shut off.

NOTE: The mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be sprayed on the

windshield. The wash function must be used in order to

spray the windshield with washer fluid.

186 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the windshield and

automatically activates the wipers for the driver. The

feature is especially useful for road splash or overspray

from the windshield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of five settings

to activate this feature.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted with the

multifunction lever. Wiper delay position 1 is the least

sensitive, and wiper delay position 5 is the most sensi-

tive. Setting 3 should be used for normal rain conditions.

Settings 1 and 2 can be used if the driver desires less

wiper sensitivity. Setting 4 and 5 can be used if the driver

desires more sensitivity. Place the wiper switch in the

OFF position when not using the system.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate when the

wiper switch is in the low or high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function properly

when ice, or dried salt water is present on the wind-

shield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or silicone

may reduce Rain Sensing performance.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 187

The Rain Sensing system has protection features for the

wiper blades and arms, and will not operate under the

following conditions:

• Low Ambient Temperature — When the ignition is

first turned ON, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 0 mph (0 km/h), or the outside tem-

perature is greater than 32°F (0°C).

• Transmission In NEUTRAL Position — When the

ignition is ON, and the transmission is in the NEU-

TRAL position, the Rain Sensing system will not

operate until the wiper switch is moved, vehicle speed

is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), or the gear selector is

moved out of the NEUTRAL position.

• Remote Start Mode Inhibit — On vehicles equipped

with Remote Starting system, Rain Sensing wipers are

not operational when the vehicle is in the remote start

mode. Once the operator is in the vehicle and has

placed the ignition switch in the RUN position, rain

sensing wiper operation can resume, if it has been

selected, and no other inhibit conditions (mentioned

previously) exist.

TILT STEERING COLUMN

This feature allows you to tilt the steering column

upward or downward. The tilt lever is located on the

steering column, below the multifunction lever.

Pull the lever toward the steering wheel to unlock the

steering column. With one hand firmly on the steering

wheel, move the steering column up or down, as desired.

Release the lever to lock the steering column firmly in place.

188 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while driving.

Adjusting the steering column while driving or driv-

ing with the steering column unlocked, could cause

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

the driver to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious injury or

death.

HEATED STEERING WHEEL — IF EQUIPPED

The steering wheel contains a heating element that helps

warm your hands in cold weather. The heated steering

wheel has only one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel has been turned on it will operate for

approximately 30 to 80 minutes before automatically

shutting off. The heated steering wheel can shut off early

or may not turn on when the steering wheel is already

warm.

The heated steering wheel control button is located on

the center of the instrument panel below the climate

controls.

Tilt Steering Lever

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 189

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the heated

steering wheel control button is located within the cli-

mate or controls screen of the touchscreen.

• Press the heated steering wheel button once to

turn the heating element On.

• Press the heated steering wheel button a second

time to turn the heating element Off.

NOTE: The engine must be running for the heated

steering wheel to operate.

Vehicles Equipped With Remote Start

On models that are equipped with remote start, the

heated steering wheel can be programmed to come on

during a remote start.

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this feature

can be programmed through the Uconnect system. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin

because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,

spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion, or other physical conditions must exercise

care when using the steering wheel heater. It may

cause burns even at low temperatures, especially if

used for long periods.

(Continued)

190 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not place anything on the steering wheel that

insulates against heat, such as a blanket or steering

wheel covers of any type and material. This may

cause the steering wheel heater to overheat.

DRIVER ADJUSTABLE PEDALS — IF EQUIPPED

The adjustable pedals system is designed to allow a

greater range of driver comfort for steering wheel tilt and

seat position. This feature allows the brake, accelerator,

and clutch pedals (if equipped) to move toward or away

from the driver to provide improved position with the

steering wheel.

The adjustable pedal switch is located to the left side of

the steering column.

• The pedals can be adjusted with the ignition OFF.

• The pedals cannot be adjusted when the vehicle is in

REVERSE or when the Electronic Speed Control Sys-

tem is on. The following messages will be displayed on

vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion System (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

Adjustable Pedals Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 191

(DID) if the pedals are attempted to be adjusted when

the system is locked out (“Adjustable Pedal Disabled

— Cruise Control Engaged” or “Adjustable Pedal

Disabled — Vehicle In Reverse”).

NOTE:

• Always adjust the pedals to a position that allows full

pedal travel.

• Further small adjustments may be necessary to find

the best possible seat/pedal position.

• For vehicles equipped with Driver Memory Seat, you

can use your Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob or

the memory switch on the driver’s door trim panel to

return the adjustable pedals to pre-programmed posi-

tions. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in “Understand-

ing The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the pedals while the vehicle is moving.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

adjust the pedals while the vehicle is parked.

CAUTION!

Do not place any article under the adjustable pedals

or impede its ability to move as it may cause damage

to the pedal controls. Pedal travel may become lim-

ited if movement is stopped by an obstruction in the

adjustable pedal’s path.

ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Electronic Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h).

192 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The Electronic Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE: In order to ensure proper operation, the Elec-

tronic Speed Control System has been designed to shut

down if multiple Speed Control functions are operated at

the same time. If this occurs, the Electronic Speed Control

System can be reactivated by pushing the Electronic

Speed Control ON/OFF button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

To Activate

Push the ON/OFF button. The Cruise Indicator Light in

the instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system

off, push the ON/OFF button a second time. The Cruise

Indicator Light will turn off. The system should be

turned off when not in use.

Electronic Speed Control Switches

1 — ON/OFF 3 — SET -

2 — RES + 4 — CANCEL

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 193

WARNING!

Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on

when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally

set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.

You could lose control and have an accident. Always

leave the system OFF when you are not using it.

To Set A Desired Speed

Turn the Electronic Speed Control ON. When the vehicle

has reached the desired speed, push the SET (-) button

and release. Release the accelerator and the vehicle will

operate at the selected speed.

NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady speed

and on level ground before pushing the SET (-) button.

To Deactivate

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the CANCEL

button, or normal brake pressure while slowing the

vehicle will deactivate the Electronic Speed Control with-

out erasing the set speed from memory.

Pushing the ON/OFF button or turning the ignition

switch OFF erases the set speed from memory.

To Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the RES (+)

button and release. Resume can be used at any speed

above 20 mph (32 km/h).

To Vary The Speed Setting

To Increase Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the RES (+) button.

194 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

To Decrease Speed

When the Electronic Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The drivers preferred units can be selected through the

instrument panel settings if equipped. Refer to “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for more information.

The speed increment shown is dependant on the chosen

speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric (km/h):

To Accelerate For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the

pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.

Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills

The transmission may downshift on hills to maintain the

vehicle set speed.

NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains

speed up and down hills. A slight speed change on

moderate hills is normal.

On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so

it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed

Control.

WARNING!

Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the

system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your ve-

hicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you

could lose control and have an accident. Do not use

Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic or on roads

that are winding, icy, snow-covered or slippery.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 195

PARKSENSE REAR PARK ASSIST — IF

EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Rear Park Assist system provides visual

and audible indications of the distance between the rear

fascia and a detected obstacle when backing up, e.g.

during a parking maneuver. Refer to “ParkSense System

Usage Precautions” in this section for limitations of this

system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in

REVERSE. If ParkSense is enabled at this gear selector

position, the system will remain active until the vehicle

speed is increased to approximately 7 mph (11 km/h) or

above. When in REVERSE and above the system’s oper-

ating speed, a warning will appear within the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) indicating the vehicle speed is too fast. The

system will become active again if the vehicle speed is

decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h).

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

196 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings

to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper

and the detected obstacle. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID) Settings” in Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

ParkSense Display

When the vehicle is in REVERSE, the warning display

will turn ON indicating the system status.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on

the object’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an object is detected in the left and/or right rear region,

the display will show a single solid arc in the left and/or

right rear region and the system will produce a tone.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 197

As the vehicle moves closer to the object, the display will

show the single arc moving closer to the vehicle and the

tone will change from a single 1/2 second tone to slow, to

fast, to continuous.

Single 1/2 Second Tone

Slow Tone

198 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Fast Tone Continuous Tone

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 199

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the warning

display shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous

tone. The following chart shows the warning alert opera-

tion when the system is detecting an obstacle:

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

79 in (200 cm)

79-45 in

(200-115 cm)

45-31 in

(115-80 cm)

31-18 in

(80-45 cm)

Less than

18 in (45 cm)

Audible Alert

Chime

None Single 1/2

Second Tone

Slow Fast Continuous

Arc None 4th Solid 3rd

Solid

2nd

Flashing

1st

Flashing

Radio Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if

on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

200 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

The Rear chime volume settings are programmable.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the

settings may be programmed through the Uconnect

System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the

settings may be programmed through the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Enabling And Disabling ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

ParkSense switch.

When the ParkSense switch is pushed to dis-

able the system, the instrument cluster will

display the “PARKSENSE OFF” message for

approximately five seconds. Refer to “Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Infor-

mation Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information. When the gear

selector is moved to REVERSE and the system is dis-

abled, the EVIC/DID will display the “PARKSENSE

OFF” message for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: The ParkSense system will automatically disable

when the system detects that a trailer with trailer brakes

has been connected to the Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-

ule. The EVIC/DID will display “PARKSENSE OFF”

message for as long as the vehicle is in reverse.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 201

The ParkSense switch LED will be ON when ParkSense is

disabled or defective. The ParkSense switch LED will be

OFF when the system is enabled.

If the ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system is

disabled or requires service, the ParkSense switch LED

will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense Rear Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense Rear Park

Assist System has detected a faulted condition, the

instrument cluster will actuate a single chime, once per

ignition cycle, and it will display the PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS or the

PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED

message. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the

system has detected a faulted condition, the EVIC/DID

will display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS or the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED message for as long as the vehicle

is in REVERSE. Under this condition, ParkSense will not

operate.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS

appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make sure

the outer surface and the underside of the rear fascia/

bumper is clean and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other

obstruction, and then cycle the ignition. If the message

continues to appear, see an authorized dealer.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED

appears in the EVIC/DID, see your authorized dealer.

202 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the rear bumper is free of snow, ice, mud,

dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system operating

properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense.

• When you turn ParkSense off, the instrument cluster

will display PARKSENSE OFF. Furthermore, once

you turn ParkSense off, it remains off until you turn it

on again, even if you cycle the ignition key.

• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE

position and ParkSense is turned off, the instrument

cluster will display PARKSENSE OFF message for as

long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not

to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be

covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an

obstacle behind the fascia/bumper, or it could provide

a false indication that an obstacle is behind the fascia/

bumper.

• Ensure the ParkSense system is OFF if objects such as

bicycle carriers, trailer hitches, etc., are placed within

18 in (45 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper while

driving the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in the

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 203

system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor

problem, causing the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED message to be displayed in the

instrument cluster.

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense

should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered

or open position and the vehicle is in REVERSE. A

lowered tailgate could provide a false indication that

an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense. Always check carefully

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

204 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

PARKSENSE FRONT AND REAR PARK ASSIST —

IF EQUIPPED

The ParkSense Park Assist system provides visual and

audible indications of the distance between the rear

and/or front fascia and a detected obstacle when backing

up or moving forward, e.g. during a parking maneuver.

Refer to ParkSense System Usage Precautions for limita-

tions of this system and recommendations.

ParkSense will retain the last system state (enabled or

disabled) from the last ignition cycle when the ignition is

changed to the ON/RUN position.

ParkSense can be active only when the gear selector is in

REVERSE or DRIVE. If ParkSense is enabled at one of

these gear selector positions, the system will remain

active until the vehicle speed is increased to approxi-

mately 7 mph (11 km/h) or above. A display warning

will appear in the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) indicating

the vehicle is above ParkSense operating speed. The

system will become active again if the vehicle speed is

decreased to speeds less than approximately 6 mph

(9 km/h).

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 205

ParkSense Sensors

The four ParkSense sensors, located in the rear fascia/

bumper, monitor the area behind the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 18 in (45 cm) up to 79 in

(200 cm) from the rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

The six ParkSense sensors, located in the front fascia/

bumper, monitor the area in front of the vehicle that is

within the sensors’ field of view. The sensors can detect

obstacles from approximately 12 in (30 cm) up to 47 in

(120 cm) from the front fascia/bumper in the horizontal

direction, depending on the location, type and orienta-

tion of the obstacle.

ParkSense Warning Display

The ParkSense Warning screen is located within the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID). It provides visual warnings

to indicate the distance between the rear fascia/bumper

and/or front fascia/bumper and the detected obstacle.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID) Settings” in Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The ParkSense Warning screen will only be displayed if

Sound and Display is selected.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen,

this feature can be programmed through the Uconnect

system. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

206 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be programmed through the Electronic Ve-

hicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

ParkSense Display

The warning display will turn ON indicating the system

status when the vehicle is in REVERSE or when the

vehicle is in DRIVE and an obstacle has been detected.

The system will indicate a detected obstacle by showing

a single arc in the left and/or right rear regions based on

the obstacle’s distance and location relative to the vehicle.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or right rear

region, the display will show a single arc in the left

and/or right rear region and the system will produce a

tone. As the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the

display will show the single arc moving closer to the

vehicle and the tone will change from a single 1/2 second

tone to slow, to fast, to continuous.

The vehicle is close to the obstacle when the display

shows one flashing arc and sounds a continuous tone.

The following chart shows the warning alert operation

when the system is detecting an obstacle:

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 207

WARNING ALERTS

Rear Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

79 in (200 cm)

79-45 in

(200-115 cm)

45-31 in

(115-80 cm)

31-18 in

(80-45 cm)

Less than 18 in

(45 cm)

Front Distance

(in/cm)

Greater than

47 in (120 cm)

47-39 in

(120-100 cm)

39-25 in

(100-65 cm)

25-12 in

(65-30 cm)

Less than 12 in

(30 cm)

Audible Alert

(Chime)

None Single 1/2

Second Tone

(for rear only)

Slow (for rear

only)

Fast Continuous

Arcs None 4th Solid 3rd Solid 2nd Flashing 1st Flashing

Radio Volume

Reduced

No Yes Yes Yes Yes

NOTE: ParkSense will reduce the volume of the radio, if

on, when the system is sounding an audio tone.

Front Park Assist Audible Alerts

ParkSense will turn off the Front Park Assist audible alert

(chime) after approximately three seconds when an ob-

stacle has been detected, the vehicle is stationary, and

brake pedal is applied.

208 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Adjustable Chime Volume Settings

The Front and Rear chime volume settings are program-

mable.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, the

settings may be programmed through the Uconnect

System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings ” in “Understand-

ing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

• If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, the

settings may be programmed through the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Informa-

tion Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

Enabling And Disabling Front And/Or Rear

ParkSense

Front ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

Front ParkSense switch.

Rear ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with the

Rear ParkSense switch.

When the Front or Rear ParkSense switch is

pushed to disable the system, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID) will display the

“PARKSENSE OFF” message for approximately five sec-

onds. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 209

When the gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the

Front or Rear system is disabled, the EVIC/DID will

display the FRONT PARKSENSE OFF or REAR

PARKSENSE OFF message for five seconds, followed by

a vehicle graphic with OFF in the corresponding side.

This vehicle graphic will be displayed for as long as the

vehicle is in REVERSE.

NOTE: Arc alerts from the enabled ParkSense system,

will interrupt the five second messages, and the EVIC/

DID will display the vehicle graphic with the correspond-

ing arcs and OFF message.

The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be ON

when Front or Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires

service. The Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED will be

OFF when the Front or Rear system is enabled. If the

Front or Rear ParkSense switch is pushed, and the system

requires service, the Front or Rear ParkSense switch LED

will blink momentarily, and then the LED will be ON.

Service The ParkSense Park Assist System

During vehicle start up, when the ParkSense System has

detected a faulted condition, the instrument cluster will

actuate a single chime, once per ignition cycle, and it will

display the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

FRONT SENSORS, or the PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED message for five seconds.

When the gear selector is moved to Reverse and the

system has detected a faulted condition, the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID) will display a PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE WIPE FRONT SENSORS or PARKSENSE UN-

AVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED pop up message for

five seconds. After five seconds, a vehicle graphic will be

displayed with UNAVAILABLE at either the front or

rear sensor location depending on where the fault is

detected. The system will continue to provide arc alerts

210 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

for the side that is functioning properly. These arc alerts

will interrupt the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

REAR SENSORS, PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE

FRONT SENSORS, or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED messages if an object is detected

within the five second pop-up duration. The vehicle

graphic will remain displayed for as long as the vehicle is

in REVERSE. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” for

further information.

If PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR SENSORS

or PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE FRONT SEN-

SORS appears in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID) make

sure the outer surface and the underside of the rear

fascia/bumper and/or front fascia/bumper is clean and

clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other obstruction and then

cycle the ignition. If the message continues to appear see

an authorized dealer.

If the PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE RE-

QUIRED message appears in the EVIC/DID, see an

authorized dealer.

Cleaning The ParkSense System

Clean the ParkSense sensors with water, car wash soap

and a soft cloth. Do not use rough or hard cloths. Do not

scratch or poke the sensors. Otherwise, you could dam-

age the sensors.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the front and rear bumper are free of snow,

ice, mud, dirt and debris to keep the ParkSense system

operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vibrations could

affect the performance of ParkSense.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 211

• When you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, the

instrument cluster will display “FRONT PARKSENSE

OFF” or “REAR PARKSENSE OFF.” Furthermore,

once you turn Front or Rear ParkSense off, it remains

off until you turn it on again, even if you cycle the

ignition key.

• When you move the gear selector to the REVERSE

position and Front or Rear ParkSense is turned off, the

instrument cluster will display FRONT PARKSENSE

OFF or REAR PARKSENSE OFF message for five

seconds, followed by a vehicle graphic with OFF in

the corresponding side. This vehicle graphic will be

displayed for as long as the vehicle is in REVERSE.

• ParkSense, when on, will reduce the volume of the

radio when it is sounding a tone.

• Clean the ParkSense sensors regularly, taking care not

to scratch or damage them. The sensors must not be

covered with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not working

properly. The ParkSense system might not detect an

obstacle behind or in front of the fascia/bumper, or it

could provide a false indication that an obstacle is

behind or in front of the fascia/bumper.

• Use the ParkSense switch to turn the ParkSense system

off if obstacles such as bicycle carriers, trailer hitches,

etc. are placed within 18 in (45 cm) from the rear

fascia/bumper. Failure to do so can result in the

system misinterpreting a close obstacle as a sensor

problem, causing the “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

SERVICE REQUIRED” message to be displayed in the

instrument cluster.

• On vehicles equipped with a tailgate, ParkSense

should be disabled when the tailgate is in the lowered

or open position. A lowered tailgate could provide a

false indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

212 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up even

when using ParkSense. Always check carefully

behind your vehicle, look behind you, and be sure

to check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before backing up.

You are responsible for safety and must continue to

pay attention to your surroundings. Failure to do so

can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly recom-

mended that the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly is disconnected from the vehicle when the

vehicle is not used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or obstacles

because the hitch ball will be much closer to the

obstacle than the rear fascia when the loudspeaker

sounds the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

could detect the ball mount and hitch ball assem-

bly, depending on its size and shape, giving a false

indication that an obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is unable to

recognize every obstacle, including small obstacles.

Parking curbs might be temporarily detected or not

detected at all. Obstacles located above or below

the sensors will not be detected when they are in

close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when using

ParkSense in order to be able to stop in time when

an obstacle is detected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when using

ParkSense.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 213

PARKVIEW REAR BACK UP CAMERA — IF

EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see a image of the

rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever the gear

selector is put into REVERSE or whenever it is initiated

through Backup Camera button in the Controls menu.

Whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE, the

image will be displayed in the rearview mirror display (if

equipped) or Uconnect screen (if equipped) along with a

caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the

top of the screen. After five seconds this note will

disappear.

The ParkView Camera is located to the left of the tailgate

handle.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with

Camera delay turned OFF), the rear Camera mode is

exited and the navigation or audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with

Camera delay turned ON), the rear Camera image will be

displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

REVERSE unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (13 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK

or the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

Whenever the Rear View Camera image is activated

through Backup Camera button in the Controls menu,

a display timer for the image is initiated. The image will

continue to be displayed until the display timer exceeds

10 seconds and the vehicle speed is above 8 mph

(13 km/h) or the touchscreen button X to disable

display of the Rear View Camera image is pressed.

NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph

(13 km/h), the Rear View Camera image will be dis-

played continuously until deactivated via the touch-

screen button X.

214 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button

to indicate the current active Camera image being

displayed is made available whenever the Rear View

Camera image is displayed.

If equipped with a Cargo Camera, a touchscreen button

to switch the display to Cargo Camera image is

made available whenever the Rear View Camera im-

age is displayed.

A touchscreen button X to disable display of the Cam-

era image is made available when the vehicle is not in

REVERSE gear.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid on the

image to illustrate the width of the vehicle and its

projected backup path based on the steering wheel

position. The active guide lines will show separate zones

that will help indicate the distance to the rear of the

vehicle.

NOTE: For further information about how to access and

change the programmable features of the ParkView Rear

Backup Camera, refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

The following table shows the approximate distances for

each zone:

Zones Distance to the rear of

the vehicle

Red 0 - 1 ft (0 - 30 cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 6.5 ft (30 cm - 2m)

Green 6.5 ft or greater (2 m or

greater)

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 215

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up even when

using the ParkView Rear Back Up Camera. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle, and be sure to

check for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles, ob-

structions, or blind spots before backing up. You are

responsible for the safety of your surroundings and

must continue to pay attention while backing up.

Failure to do so can result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, ParkView should only be

used as a parking aid. The ParkView camera is

unable to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle must be

driven slowly when using ParkView to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is seen. It is recom-

mended that the driver look frequently over his/her

shoulder when using ParkView.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the Camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,

and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning Rear View Camera image On:

1. Press the Controls button located on the bottom of

the Uconnect display.

2. Press the Backup Camera button to turn the Rear

View Camera system ON.

216 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Once initiated by the Backup Camera button,

the Rear View Camera image may be deactivated by

pressing the X soft button. On deactivation, the previ-

ous selected screen will appear.

OVERHEAD CONSOLE — IF EQUIPPED

The overhead console is located on the headliner above

the review mirror. The overhead console contains the

following features:

• Courtesy/Reading Lights

• Power Sunroof Switch — If Equipped

• Power Sliding Rear Window Switch — If Equipped

• Universal Garage Door Opener — If Equipped Courtesy/Reading Lights

Both lights in the overhead console and rear passenger

compartment will illuminate as courtesy lights when a

door is opened, when the dimmer control is rotated to the

Overhead Console

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 217

courtesy light position (full right position), or when the

UNLOCK button is pushed on the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) Key Fob, if equipped. These lights are also oper-

ated individually as reading lights by pushing on the

corresponding lens.

NOTE: The courtesy/reading lights will remain on until

the switch is pushed a second time, so be sure they have

been turned off before leaving the vehicle. If the interior

lights are left on after the ignition is turned OFF, they will

automatically turn off after 15 minutes.Front Courtesy/Reading Lights

Rear Passenger Courtesy/Reading Light

218 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED

HomeLink replaces up to three hand-held transmitters

that operate devices such as garage door openers, motor-

ized gates, lighting or home security systems. The

HomeLink unit is powered by your vehicles 12 Volt

battery.

The HomeLink buttons that are located in the overhead

console designate the three different HomeLink channels.

NOTE: HomeLink is disabled when the Vehicle Security

Alarm is active.

HomeLink Buttons

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 219

WARNING!

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are training the universal transceiver. Do

not train the transceiver if people, pets or other

objects are in the path of the door or gate. Only use

this transceiver with a garage door opener that has

a “stop and reverse” feature as required by Federal

safety standards. This includes most garage door

opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use

a garage door opener without these safety features.

Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

www.HomeLink.com for safety information or as-

sistance.

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can

cause serious injury or death.

NOTE: Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as required

by federal safety standards. This includes most garage

door opener models manufactured after 1982. Do not use

a garage door opener without these safety features. Call

toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.

Before You Begin Programming HomeLink

Ensure your vehicle is parked outside of the garage

before you begin programming.

For efficient programming and accurate transmission of

the radio-frequency signal it is recommended that a new

battery be placed in the hand-held transmitter of the

device that is being programmed to the HomeLink

system.

220 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To erase the channels place the ignition in the ON/RUN

position and push and hold the two outside HomeLink

buttons (I and III) for up to 20 seconds. The Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC), or Driver Interactive

Display (DID) will display “CLEARING CHANNELS.”

Release the buttons when the EVIC/DID displays

“CHANNELS CLEARED.”

NOTE:

• For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

• Erasing all channels should only be performed when

programming HomeLink for the first time. Do not

erase channels when programming additional buttons.

• If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

Programming A Rolling Code

For programming garage door openers that were manu-

factured after 1995. These garage door openers can be

identified by the “LEARN” or “TRAIN” button located

where the hanging antenna is attached to the garage door

opener. It is NOT the button that is normally used to

open and close the door. The name and color of the

button may vary by manufacturer.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 221

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand - held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID

display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to

“CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases

for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat

from Step 2.

Training The Garage Door Opener

1 — Door Opener

2 — Training Button

222 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

5. At the garage door opener motor (in the garage),

locate the “LEARN” or “TRAINING” button. This can

usually be found where the hanging antenna wire is

attached to the garage door opener/device motor.

Firmly push and release the “LEARN” or “TRAIN-

ING” button. On some garage door openers/devices

there may be a light that blinks when the garage door

opener/device is in the LEARN/TRAIN mode.

NOTE: You have 30 seconds in which to initiate the next

step after the LEARN button has been pushed.

6. Return to the vehicle and push the programmed

HomeLink button twice (holding the button for two

seconds each time). The EVIC/DID will display

“CHANNEL # TRANSMIT.” If the garage door

opener/device activates, programming is complete.

NOTE: If the garage door opener/device does not acti-

vate, push the button a third time (for two seconds) to

complete the training.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat

each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all remaining

steps.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 223

Programming A Non-Rolling Code

For programming Garage Door Openers manufactured

before 1995.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to 8

cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program.

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button you want to

program while you push and hold the hand - held

transmitter button.

4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID

display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to

“CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases

for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat

from Step 2.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button.

The EVIC/DID will display “CHANNEL # TRANS-

MIT.” If the garage door opener/device activates,

programming is complete.

To program the remaining two HomeLink buttons, repeat

each step for each remaining button. DO NOT erase the

channels.

224 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Non — Rolling Code)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not

release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with “Program-

ming A Non-Rolling Code” step 2 and follow all

remaining steps.

Canadian/Gate Operator Programming

For programming transmitters in Canada/United States

that require the transmitter signals to “time-out” after

several seconds of transmission.

Canadian radio frequency laws require transmitter sig-

nals to time-out (or quit) after several seconds of trans-

mission – which may not be long enough for HomeLink

to pick up the signal during programming. Similar to this

Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are designed to

time-out in the same manner.

It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling

process to prevent possible overheating of the garage

door or gate motor.

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

2. Place the hand - held transmitter 1 to 3 inches (3 to

8 cm) away from the HomeLink button you wish to

program.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 225

3. Push and hold the HomeLink button while you push

and release (“cycle”), your hand - held transmitter

every two seconds.

4. Continue to hold both buttons until the EVIC/DID

display changes from “CHANNEL # TRAINING” to

“CHANNEL # TRAINED,” then release both buttons.

NOTE:

• It may take up to 30 seconds or longer in some cases

for the channel to train.

• If the EVIC/DID displays “DID NOT TRAIN” repeat

from Step 2.

5. Push and hold the programmed HomeLink button.

The EVIC/DID will display “CHANNEL # TRANS-

MIT.” If the device is plugged in and activates, pro-

gramming is complete.

If you unplugged the garage door opener/device for

programming, plug it back in at this time.

Reprogramming A Single HomeLink Button

(Canadian/Gate Operator)

To reprogram a channel that has been previously trained,

follow these steps:

1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.

For vehicle’s equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, place

the ignition in the RUN position with the Engine ON.

2. Push and hold the desired HomeLink button until the

EVIC/DID displays “CHANNEL # TRAINING” Do

not release the button.

3. Without releasing the button proceed with

“Canadian/Gate Operator Programming” Step 2 and

follow all remaining steps.

226 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Using HomeLink

To operate, push and release the programmed HomeLink

button. Activation will now occur for the programmed

device (i.e. garage door opener, gate operator, security

system, entry door lock, home/office lighting, etc.) The

hand-held transmitter of the device may also be used at

any time.

Security

It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn

in your vehicle.

To erase the channels press and hold the two outside

HomeLink buttons (I and III) for up 20 seconds. The

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Interactive Display (DID) will display “CLEARING

CHANNELS.” Release the buttons when the EVIC/DID

displays “CHANNELS CLEARED.”

The HomeLink Universal Transceiver is disabled when

the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.

Troubleshooting Tips

If you are having trouble programming HomeLink, here

are some of the most common solutions:

• Replace the battery in the Garage Door Opener hand-

held transmitter.

• Push the LEARN button on the Garage Door Opener

to complete the training for a Rolling Code.

• Did you unplug the device for programming and

remember to plug it back in?

If you have any problems, or require assistance, please

call toll-free 1-800-355-3515 or, on the Internet at

HomeLink.com for information or assistance.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 227

WARNING!

• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dan-

gerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage

while programming the transceiver. Exhaust gas

can cause serious injury or death.

• Your motorized door or gate will open and close

while you are programming the universal trans-

ceiver. Do not program the transceiver if people,

pets or other objects are in the path of the door or

gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door

opener that has a “stop and reverse” feature as

required by Federal safety standards. This includes

most garage door opener models manufactured

after 1982. Do not use a garage door opener without

these safety features. Call toll-free 1-800-355-3515

or, on the Internet at HomeLink.com for safety

information or assistance.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada licence-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference, and

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switch is located on the overhead

console between the courtesy/reading lights.

228 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a vehicle, or

with access to an unlocked vehicle. Never leave the

Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or in a location

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

accessible to children. Do not leave the ignition of

a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go in the

ACC or ON/RUN mode. Occupants, particularly

unattended children, can become entrapped by the

power sunroof while operating the power sunroof

switch. Such entrapment may result in serious

injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of being thrown

from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You could

also be seriously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof.

Never allow your fingers, other body parts, or any

object, to project through the sunroof opening.

Injury may result.

Power Sunroof Switch

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 229

Opening Sunroof — Manual Mode

To open the sunroof, push and hold the switch rearward to

full open. Any release of the switch will stop the movement.

The sunroof and sunshade will remain in a partially opened

condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Closing Sunroof — Manual Mode

To close the sunroof, push and hold the switch in the

forward position. Any release of the switch will stop the

movement and the sunroof will remain in a partially

closed condition until the sunroof switch is pushed again.

Opening Sunroof — Express

Push the switch rearward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will open automatically from any

position. The sunroof will open fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Open”. During Express

Open operation, any other actuation of the sunroof

switch will stop the sunroof.

Closing Sunroof — Express

Push the switch forward and release it within one-half

second and the sunroof will close automatically from any

position. The sunroof will close fully and stop automati-

cally. This is called “Express Close.” During Express

Close operation, any other actuation of the switch will

stop the sunroof.

Pinch Protect Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of

the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an ob-

struction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the

sunroof will automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs.

NOTE: If three consecutive sunroof close attempts result

in Pinch Protect reversals, Pinch Protect will disable, and

the sunroof must be closed in Manual Mode.

230 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Venting Sunroof — Express

Push and release the Vent button within one half second and

the sunroof will open to the vent position. This is called

“Express Vent” and it will occur regardless of sunroof

position. During Express Vent operation, any movement of

the switch will stop the sunroof.

Sunshade Operation

The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the

sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.

NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of pres-

sure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your

vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the windows down,

or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain open or partially open

positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear windows open,

open the front and rear windows together to minimize the

buffeting. If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,

adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the buffeting or

open any window.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean

the glass panel.

Ignition Off Operation

The power sunroof switch will remain active in Acces-

sory Delay for up to approximately ten minutes after the

ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 231

NOTE: Ignition Off time is programmable through the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Settings/Customer

Programmable Features” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS

The auxiliary 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets can provide

power for in-cab accessories designed for use with the

standard “cigar lighter” plug. The 12 Volt power outlets

and USB Port (Charge Only) have a cap attached to the

outlet indicating “12V DC,” together with either a key

symbol, battery symbol, or USB symbol.

A key symbol indicates that the key must be in the

ON/RUN or ACC positions for the outlet to provide

power. The battery symbol indicates that the outlet is

connected to the battery, and can provide power at all

times.

NOTE: To ensure proper operation, a MOPAR knob and

element must be used.

The auxiliary power outlets can be found in the following

locations:

CAUTION!

• Do not exceed the maximum power of 160 Watts

(13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the 160 Watts (13 Amps)

power rating is exceeded, the fuse protecting the

system will need to be replaced.

• Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs

only. Do not insert any other object in the power

outlets as this will damage the outlet and blow the

fuse. Improper use of the power outlet can cause

damage not covered by your New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

232 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

• Lower left and lower right of the center stack when

equipped with a bench seat.

• Center console when equipped with bucket seats.

Power Outlets — Center Stack

1 — Power Outlet

2 — USB Port (Charge Only)

Power Outlet — Center Console

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 233

• Inside the upper lid of the center storage compartment

— if equipped.

• Rear of the center console storage compartment —

Quad Cab or Crew Cab.

USB Port (Charge Only) — Upper Lid Power Outlet — Rear Center Console

234 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Power Outlet — Rear Center Console Fuse Power Outlet Fuse Locations

1 — F104 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Center Console Bin /

USB Port (Charge Only)

2 — F90–F91 Fuse 20 A Yellow Power Outlet Rear Center Console

3 — F93 Fuse 20 A Yellow Cigar Lighter Instrument Panel

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 235

The key symbol indicates that this outlet can supply

power when the key is in the ON/RUN or ACC posi-

tions.

All accessories connected to the outlet(s) should be

removed or turned off when the vehicle is not in use to

protect the battery against discharge.

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Only devices designed for use in this type of outlet

should be inserted into any 12 Volt outlet.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use and while driving the

vehicle.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

CAUTION!

• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in

use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will

discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,

vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.), will discharge the

battery even more quickly. Only use these intermit-

tently and with greater caution.

• After the use of high power draw accessories, or

long periods of the vehicle not being started (with

accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be

driven a sufficient length of time to allow the

generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.

236 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CIGAR LIGHTER AND ASH RECEIVER — IF

EQUIPPED

A removable cigar lighter and ash receiver are available.

For vehicles with a bench seat the cupholder tray can be

used to hold the ash receiver.

POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED

A 115 Volt (150 Watts Maximum) outlet is located on the

center stack of the instrument panel, to the right of the

radio. This outlet can power cellular phones, electronics

and other low power devices requiring power up to 150

Watts. Certain high-end video game consoles will exceed

this power limit, as will most power tools.

The power inverter is designed with built-in overload

protection. If the power rating of 150 Watts is exceeded,

the power inverter will automatically shut down. Once

the electrical device has been removed from the outlet the

inverter should automatically reset.

To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in the device.

The outlet automatically turns off when the device is

unplugged.

NOTE: Due to built-in overload protection, the power

inverter will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.

Power Inverter Outlet

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 237

WARNING!

To avoid serious injury or death:

• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.

• Do not touch with wet hands.

• Close the lid when not in use.

• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

AUXILIARY SWITCHES — IF EQUIPPED

There can be up to five auxiliary switches located in the

lower switch bank of the instrument panel which can be

used to power various electronic devices and PTO

(Power Take Off) – If Equipped. If Power Take Off is

equipped, it will take the place of the fifth Auxiliary

switch. Connections to the switches are found under the

hood in the connectors attached to the auxiliary Power

Distribution Center.

You have the ability to configure the functionality of the

auxiliary switches via the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID). All

switches can now be configured for setting the switch

type operation to latching or momentary, power source of

either battery or ignition, and ability to hold last state

across key cycles.

NOTE: Holding last state conditions are met when

switch type is set to latching and power source is set to

ignition.

For further information on using the auxiliary switches,

please refer to the Ram Body Builders Guide by accessing

www.rambodybuilder.com and choosing the appropriate

links.

238 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CUPHOLDERS

Front Seat Cupholders (40–20–40 Seats)

The cupholders are located on the backside of the center

portion of the front seat (20). Fold down the center

section of the front seat to gain access to the cupholders.

Front Instrument Panel Cupholders — Floor

Storage Bin

For vehicles equipped with bucket seats two cupholders

are located next to the center console storage bin.

Front Cupholders For Bucket Seats

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 239

Rear Cupholders — If Equipped

Some vehicles are equipped with rear cupholders located

in the center armrest.

Some vehicles may be equipped with a rear cupholder that

consists of two cup wells for rear passenger convenience.

STORAGE

Glove Compartment

The glove compartment is located on the passenger side

of the instrument panel and features both an upper and

lower storage area.

Rear Armrest Cupholder

Rear Cup Wells

240 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

To open the upper glove compartment push upward on

the handle release. The glove compartment door will

automatically open.

Glove Compartment

1 — Upper Glove Compartment

2 — Lower Glove Compartment

Upper Glove Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 241

To open the lower glove compartment, pull on the handle

to release the latch and lower the glove compartment

door.

Door Storage

Front Door Storage — If Equipped

Storage areas and bottle holders (drivers side only) are

located in the door trim panels.

Lower Glove Compartment

Front Door Storage

242 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Door Storage — If Equipped

Storage compartments are located in both the driver and

passenger rear door trim panels.

Center Storage Compartment — If Equipped

The center storage compartment is located between the

driver and passenger seats. The storage compartment

provides an armrest and contains both and upper and

lower storage area.

Rear Door Storage

Center Storage Compartment

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 243

WARNING!

• This armrest is not a seat. Anyone seated on the

armrest could be seriously injured during vehicle

operation, or a collision. Only use the center seat-

ing position when the armrest is fully upright.

• In a collision, the latch may open if the total weight

of the items stored exceeds about 10 lbs (4.5 kg).

These items could be thrown about endangering

occupants of the vehicle. Items stored should not

exceed a total of 10 lbs (4.5 kg).

Pull on the upper handle on the front of the armrest to

raise the cover. The upper storage area contains a USB

power outlet that can be used to power small electrical

devices, refer to “Electrical Power Outlets” for further

information.

With the upper lid closed, pull on the lower handle to

open the lower storage bin.

Upper Storage Compartment

244 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

Do not operate this vehicle with a console compart-

ment lid in the open position. Driving with the

console compartment lid open may result in injury in

a collision.

The center console is equipped with a front storage bin

located next to the cupholders. This storage bin may be

equipped with a manual sliding top door.

Lower Storage Bin

Front Storage Bin With Door — If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 245

Second Row In-Floor Storage Bin — If Equipped

In-floor storage bins are located in front of the second

row seats and can be used for extra storage. The storage

bins have removable liners that can be easily removed for

cleaning.

To open in-floor storage bin, lift upward on the handle of

the latch and open the lid.

NOTE: The front seat may have to be moved forward to

fully open the lid.

In-Floor Storage Bin And Latch Opened Storage Bin

246 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Seatback Storage

Located in the back of both the driver and passenger

front seats are pockets that can be used for storage.

Storage (Regular Cab)

The storage bin is located behind the front seats and runs

the length of the cab.

Drivers Side Seatback Storage Storage Bin

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 247

Storage and Seats (Crew Cab)

The Crew Cab models provide additional storage under

the rear seats. Lift the seats to access the storage com-

partment.

To open the storage compartments, lift upward on the

fold flat lid.

Plastic Grocery Bag Retainers (Regular Cab

Models)

Retainer hooks which will hold plastic grocery bag

handles are built into the back panel of the cab, behind

the rear seat.

Crew Cab Storage

Grocery Bag Hooks

248 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

REAR WINDOW FEATURES

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located on

the climate control panel. Push this button to turn

on the rear window defroster and the heated outside

mirrors (if equipped). An indicator in the button will

illuminate when the rear window defroster is on. The

rear window defroster automatically turns off after ap-

proximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes of

operation, push the button a second time.

NOTE: To prevent excessive battery drain, use the rear

window defroster only when the engine is operating.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 249

Power Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

The switch for the power sliding rear window is located

on the overhead console.

Push the switch to the right to open the glass. Pull the

switch to the left to close the glass.

Manual Sliding Rear Window — If Equipped

A locking device in the center of the window helps to

prevent entry from the rear of the vehicle. Squeeze the

lock to release the window.

FOLD FLAT LOAD FLOOR — IF EQUIPPED

Quad Cab and Crew Cab models with a 60/40 rear seat

may be equipped with a folding load floor.

WARNING!

Do not operate the vehicle with loose items stored on

the load floor. While driving or in an accident you

may experience abrupt stopping, rapid acceleration,

or sharp turns. Loose objects stored on the load floor

may move around with force and strike occupants,

resulting in serious or fatal injury.

Rear Window Switch

250 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Unfolding The Load Floor/Quad Cab

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

2. Grasp the knob on the load floor and lift the knob until

the load floor unfolds into position.

3. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

Unfolding The Load Floor

Load Floor In Open Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 251

Unfolding The Load Floor/Crew Cab

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

2. Unfold both the legs using the straps.

3. Lift the front panel until the load floor unfolds into

position.

Load Floor Legs In Stowed Position

Load Floor Legs In Opened Position

252 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Reverse the procedure to store the load floor.

Positioning The Load Floor For Storage Access Under

The Seat

1. Lift the 60/40 seat cushion(s) to the upward position.

2. Unsnap the securing snap located at either side of the

load floor.

3. Lift the load floor up to access storage under the load

floor.

WARNING!

Do not drive with the load floor in the up position.

When stopping fast or in an accident, the load floor

could move to the down position causing serious

injury.

Load Floor In Open Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 253

Quad Cab — If Equipped Crew Cab — If Equipped

4. Reverse the procedure to put the load floor back in the

secured down position before you operate the vehicle.

Load Floor Securing Straps/Quad Cab Load Floor Securing Straps/Crew Cab

254 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

PICKUP BOX

The pickup box has many features designed for utility

and convenience.

NOTE: If you are installing a Toolbox, Ladder Rack or

Headache Rack at the front of the Pickup Box, you must

use Mopar Box Reinforcement Brackets that are available

from your authorized dealer.

You can carry wide building materials (sheets of ply-

wood, etc.) by building a raised load floor. Place lumber

across the box in the indentations provided above the

wheel housings and in the bulkhead dividers to form the

floor.

WARNING!

• The pickup box is intended for load carrying pur-

poses only, not for passengers, who should sit in

seats and use seat belts.

• Care should always be exercised when operating a

vehicle with unrestrained cargo. Vehicle speeds

may need to be reduced. Severe turns or rough

(Continued)

Pick Up Box Features

1 — Upper Load Floor Indents

2 — Bulk Head Dividers

3 — Cleats

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 255

WARNING! (Continued)

roads may cause shifting or bouncing of the cargo

that may result in vehicle damage. If wide building

materials are to be frequently carried, the installa-

tion of a support is recommended. This will re-

strain the cargo and transfer the load to the pickup

box floor.

• If you wish to carry more than 600 lbs (272 kg) of

material suspended above the wheelhouse, sup-

ports must be installed to transfer the weight of the

load to the pickup box floor or vehicle damage may

result. The use of proper supports will permit

loading up to the rated payload.

• Unrestrained cargo may be thrown forward in an

accident causing serious or fatal injury.

There are stampings in the sheet metal on the inner side

bulkheads of the box in front of and behind both wheel

housings. Place wooden boards across the box from side

to side to create separate load compartments in the

pickup box.

There are four tie-down cleats bolted to the lower sides of

the pickup box that can sustain loads up to 1000 lbs

(450 kg) total.

Cargo Camera — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with the Cargo Camera

that allows you to see an image of the inside of the

pickup box. The image will be displayed in the Uconnect

screen.

A display timer is initiated when the cargo camera image

is displayed. The image will continue to be displayed

until the display timer exceeds 10 seconds and the vehicle

speed is above 8 mph (13 km/h) or the touchscreen

button X to disable display of the Cargo Camera image

is pressed.

256 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: If the vehicle speed remains below 8 mph

(13 km/h), the cargo camera image will be displayed

continuously until the touchscreen button X to disable

display of the Cargo Camera image is pressed.

The Cargo Camera is located in the bottom center area of

the center high-mounted stoplamp (CHMSL).

A touchscreen button to indicate the current active

Camera image being displayed is made available

whenever the Cargo camera image is displayed.

Also, a touchscreen button to switch the display to

Rear View camera image is made available whenever

the Cargo camera image is displayed.

A touchscreen button X to disable display of the camera

image is made available when the vehicle is not in

REVERSE gear.

NOTE: If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance builds

up on the camera lens, clean the lens, rinse with water,

and dry with a soft cloth. Do not cover the lens.

Turning Cargo Camera On Or Off — With

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN

1. Press the “Controls” button located on the bottom of

the Uconnect display.

2. Press the “Cargo Camera” button to turn the

Cargo Camera system ON.

NOTE: Once initiated by the Cargo Camera button, the

Cargo Camera image may be deactivated by pressing the

X soft button. On deactivation, the previous selected

screen will appear.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 257

RAMBOX — IF EQUIPPED

The RamBox system is an integrated pickup box storage

and cargo management system consisting of three fea-

tures:

• Integrated box side storage bins

• Cargo extender/divider

• Bed rail tie-down system

RamBox Integrated Box Side Storage Bins

Cargo storage bins are located on both sides of the pickup

box. The cargo storage bins provide watertight, lockable,

illuminated storage for up to 150 lbs (68 kg) for 1500

series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and 3500 series

vehicles of evenly distributed cargo.

RamBox Cargo Storage Bins

258 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the following items could cause

damage to the vehicle:

• Assure that all cargo inside the storage bins is

properly secured.

• Do not exceed cargo weight rating of 150 lb (68 kg)

1500 series vehicles or 300 lbs (136 kg) for 2500 and

3500 series vehicles per bin.

To open a storage bin with the RamBox unlocked, push

and release the button located on the lid. The RamBox lid

will open upward to allow hand access. Lift the lid to

fully open.

NOTE: RamBox will not open when the pushbutton is

pushed if the RamBox is locked.

The interior of the RamBox will automatically illuminate

when the lid is opened. In addition to the automatic

illumination switch, there is a manual on/off switch

located at the rear of each storage bin. Pushing the switch

once will turn off the bin lights, pushing the switch again

will turn the lights back on.

RamBox Pushbutton And Lock

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 259

CAUTION!

Leaving the lid open for extended periods of time

could cause the vehicle battery to discharge. If the lid

is required to stay open for extended periods of time,

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

it is recommended that the bin lights be turned off

manually using the on/off switch.

Cargo bins feature two removable drain plugs (to allow

water to drain from bins). To remove plug, pull up on the

edge. To install push plug downward into drain hole.

NOTE: Provisions are provided in the bins for cargo

dividers and shelf supports. These accessories (in addi-

tion to other RamBox accessories) are available from

MOPAR.

Locking And Unlocking RamBox

Push and release the LOCK or UNLOCK button on the

RKE Key Fob to lock and unlock all doors, the tailgate

and the RamBox (if equipped). Refer to “Remote Keyless

Entry” for further details. The RamBox storage bins can

be locked using the vehicle key. To lock and unlock the

RamBox Light Switch

260 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

storage bin, insert the key into the keyhole on the

pushbutton and turn clockwise to lock or counterclock-

wise to unlock. Always return the key to the upright

(vertical) position before removing the key from the

pushbutton.

CAUTION!

• Ensure cargo bin lids are closed and latched before

moving or driving vehicle.

• Loads applied to the top of the bin lid should be

minimized to prevent damage to the lid and

latching/hinging mechanisms.

• Damage to the RamBox bin may occur due to

heavy/sharp objects placed in bin that shift due to

vehicle motion. In order to minimize potential for

damage, secure all cargo to prevent movement and

protect inside surfaces of bin from heavy/sharp

objects with appropriate padding.

RamBox Safety Warning

Carefully follow these warnings to help prevent personal

injury or damage to your vehicle:

WARNING!

• Always close the storage bin covers when your

vehicle is unattended.

• Do not allow children to have access to the storage

bins. Once in the storage bin, young children may

not be able to escape. If trapped in the storage bin,

children can die from suffocation or heat stroke.

• In an accident, serious injury could result if the

storage bin covers are not properly latched.

• Do not drive the vehicle with the storage bin covers

open.

• Keep the storage bin covers closed and latched

while the vehicle is in motion.

• Do not use a storage bin latch as a tie down.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 261

RamBox Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release

Lever — If Equipped

As a security measure, a Storage Bin Cover Emergency

Release is built into the storage bin cover latching mecha-

nism.

NOTE: In the event of an individual being locked inside

the storage bin, the storage bin cover can be opened from

inside of the bin by pulling on the glow-in-the-dark lever

attached to the storage bin cover latching mechanism.

Bed Extender — If Equipped

The bed extender has three functional positions:

• Storage Position

• Divider Position

• Extender Position

Storage Bin Cover Emergency Release Lever

262 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

Storage Position

The storage position for the bed extender is at the front of

the truck bed which maximizes the bed cargo area when

not in use.

To install the bed extender into the storage position,

perform the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the

vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to

release the extender side gates.

Center Handle And Lock

1 — Center Handle Lock

2 — Handle

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 263

2. With the side gates open, position the extender fully

forward in the bed against the front panel.

3. Rotate the side gates closed allowing the outboard

ends to be positioned in front of the cargo tie down

loops.

Storage Position

Cargo Tie Down Loop

264 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side

gates in the closed position.

5. Lock the center handle using the vehicle key to secure

the panel into place.

Divider Position

The divider position is intended for managing your cargo

and assisting in keeping cargo from moving around the

bed. There are 11 divider slots along the bed inner panels

which allow for various positions to assist in managing

your cargo.

To install the bed extender into a divider position per-

form the following:

1. Make sure the center handle is unlocked using the

vehicle key and rotate the center handle vertically to

release the extender side gates.

Side Gates Closed

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 265

2. With the side gates open, position the extender so the

outboard ends align with the intended slots in the

sides of the bed.

3. Rotate the side gates closed so that the outboard ends

are secured into the intended slots of the bed.

Center Handle And Lock

1 — Center Handle Lock

2 — Handle

Aligning Gate To Slots

266 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Rotate the center handle horizontally to secure the side

gates in the closed position.

5. Lock the center handle to secure the panel into place.

Extender Position

The extender position allows you to load the bed of the

truck beyond the tail gate. The bed extender will add an

additional 15 in (38 cm) in the back of the truck when

additional cargo room is needed. The extender position

utilizes a locating pin and rotating handle located on both

sides of the truck bed near the tailgate.

Side Gates Closed

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 267

To install the bed extender into the extender position

perform the following:

1. Lower the tailgate.

2. Make sure the center handle is unlocked and rotate the

center handle vertically in order to release the ex-

tender side gates.

3. Fit the end of the side gate ends onto the pin and

handle.

Extender Position

Extender Installation

268 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

4. Rotate the handles to the horizontal position to secure

into place. WARNING!

To reduce the risk of potential injury or property

damage:

• Cargo must be secured.

• Do not exceed cargo load rating of your vehicle.

• Secure all loads to truck utilizing cargo tie downs.

• Extender should not be used as cargo tie down.

• When vehicle is in motion do not exceed 150 lbs

(68 kg) load on the tailgate.

• The bed extender is not intended for off road use.

• When not in use, the extender/divider should be in

stowed or divider position with the tailgate closed.

• When in use all handles are to be in the locked

position.Locking Tab

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 269

Bed Rail Tie-Down System

CAUTION!

The maximum load per cleat should not exceed

250 lbs (113 kg) and the angle of the load on each cleat

should not exceed 45 degrees above horizontal, or

damage to the cleat or cleat rail may occur.

There are two adjustable cleats on each side of the bed

that can be used to assist in securing cargo.

Each cleat must be located and tightened down in one of

the detents, along either rail, in order to keep cargo

properly secure.

To move the cleat to any position on the rail, turn the nut

counterclockwise, approximately three turns. Then pull

Adjustable Cleats

270 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

out on the cleat and slide it to the detent nearest the

desired location. Make sure the cleat is seated in the

detent and tighten the nut.

To remove the cleats from the utility rail, remove the end

cap screw located in the center of the end cap, using a

#T30 Torx head driver. Remove the end cap and slide the

cleat off the end of the rail.

1 — Utility Rail Detent

2 — Cleat Retainer Nut

3 — Utility Rail Cleat

Utility Rail End Cap

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 271

SLIDE-IN CAMPERS

Camper Applications

Certain truck models are not recommended for slide-in camp-

ers. To determine if your vehicle is excluded, please refer to

the “Consumer Information Truck-Camper Loading” docu-

ment available from your authorized dealer. For safety rea-

sons, follow all instructions in this important document.

NOTE: When a cap or pickup camper is installed on a

vehicle, an alternate Center High-Mounted Stop Light

(CHMSL) must be provided.

EASY-OFF TAILGATE

To simplify mounting of a camper unit with an overhang,

the tailgate can be removed.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a rear camera or

RKE (Remote Keyless Entry) the electrical connector

must be disconnected prior to removing the tailgate.

Disconnecting The Rear Camera Or Remote

Keyless Entry — If Equipped

1. Open the tailgate to access the rear camera or RKE

(Remote Keyless Entry) connector bracket located on

the rear sill.

Connector Bracket

272 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

2. Remove the connector bracket from the sill by pushing

inward in the locking tab.

3. Disconnect the chassis wiring harness, ensuring the

connector bracket does not fall into the sill.

4. Connect the chassis plug and bracket (provided in the

glove box) to the chassis wiring harness and insert the

bracket back into the sill.

5. Connect the tailgate plug (provided in the glove box)

to the tailgate wiring harness to ensure that the

terminals do not corrode.

6. Tape the tailgate harness and bracket against the

forward-facing surface of the tailgate. This will pre-

vent damaging the connector and bracket when stor-

ing or reinstalling the tailgate.

Removing The Tailgate

1. Disconnect the wiring harness for the rear camera and

or power locks (if equipped), refer to “Disconnecting

the Rear Camera — If Equipped” in this section.

2. Unlatch the tailgate and remove the support cables by

releasing the lock tang from the pivot.

Locking Tab

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 273

NOTE: Make sure tailgate is supported when removing

support cables.

3. Position the tailgate on a 45 degree angle.

4. Raise the right side of the tailgate until the right side

pivot clears the hanger bracket.

5. Slide the entire tailgate to the right to free the left side

pivot.

6. Remove the tailgate from the vehicle.

NOTE: Do not carry the tailgate loose in the truck

pickup box.

WARNING!

To avoid inhaling carbon monoxide, which is deadly, the

exhaust system on vehicles equipped with “Cap or

Slide-In Campers” should extend beyond the overhang-

ing camper compartment and be free of leaks.

Locking Tailgate

The lock is located next to the tailgate handle. The

tailgate can be locked using the vehicle key or by locking

the truck with the key-fob if equipped with remote

keyless entry.

Locking Tang

274 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

TRI-FOLD TONNEAU COVER — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tri-Fold Tonneau

Cover which consists of different features:

• Easy Tri-Fold cover

• Tonneau fore aft locator

• Crosscar inside bed locator

• Front and rear clamps

• Stowage strap

• Locking Capability

NOTE: The Tonneau Cover can be folded up and secured

at the front of the box without removing completely.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Removal

To remove the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Lower the tailgate to gain access to the first set of two

tonneau cover clamps located on the driver and pas-

sengers under side of the tonneau cover.

Clamped Position

NOTE: If clamp wire is damaged replace immediately.

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 275

2. Pull down on the first set of clamps on both driver and

passenger sides to the semi clamped position.

3. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up

into the proper released position.

NOTE: Be sure the clamp and clamp wire is in the

proper released position.Semi Clamped Position

Proper Released Position

276 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Make sure the tonneau cover clamp and clamp wire is in

the proper released position. If the clamp and clamp

wire is not properly released, damage to the tonneau

cover material will result.

4. Pick up on the tonneau cover and fold it back onto the

second panel.

5. Pick up on the cover and fold it back onto the third

panel.

Improper Clamp Wire Released Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 277

6. Once in the third panel position pull down on the

second set of clamps on both driver and passenger

sides to the semi clamped position.

7. Pull down on the clamp wire and push the clamp up

into the proper released position.

8. Be sure to clip both stowage straps together to insure

the cover stays together.

Semi Clamped Position

Proper Released Position

278 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

9. With two people remove the cover.

NOTE: Be sure the Tonneau Cover has been folded

completely before removing.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Installation

To install the Tonneau Cover follow the following steps:

1. Position the folded Tonneau Cover on the truck bed

and push the Cover forward against the front of the

truck bed. The Tonneau Cover centers itself when

placed on the vehicle.

Stowage Strap

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 279

2. Pull down on the first set of clamp handles to release

the clamps from the stowed position.

3. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or

flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi

clamped position.

4. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position

to properly engage the clamps.Stowed Position

Semi Clamped Position

280 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not par-

tially clamped to the truck bed flange.

5. Disengage the stowage straps.

Clamped Position Improper Clamp Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 281

6. Unfold Tonneau Cover to the intermediate position.

NOTE: The vehicle cannot be driven when the Tonneau

Cover is in this position.

7. Completely unfold the Tonneau Cover.

Intermediate Position (Vehicle Cannot Be Driven)

Fully Unfolded Position

282 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

8. Pull down on the second set of clamp handles to

release the clamps from the stowed position.

9. Push clamp wires up and under the flange of box (or

flange of Ram Box rail, if equipped) to the semi

clamped position.

Stowed Position

Semi Clamped Position

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 283

10. Push clamp handles upward to the clamped position

to properly engage the clamps.

NOTE: Once clamped, be sure the clamps are not par-

tially clamped to the truck bed flange.

The Tonneau Cover clamps can be locked when in the

clamped position by placing a lock through the locking

hole.

Clamped Position

Improper Clamp Position

284 UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

It is the driver’s responsibility to ensure the Tonneau

Cover is properly installed on the vehicle. Failure to

follow this procedure can result in detachment of the

Tonneau Cover from the vehicle and/or damage to the

vehicle/Tonneau Cover.

Tri-Fold Tonneau Cover Cleaning

For proper cleaning of the Tonneau Cover use MOPAR

Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and MOPAR Leather &

Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

Locking Hole

UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE 285

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES . . . . . . . . . .290

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — MIDLINE (EVIC) . .291

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM (DID) . .294

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS . . . . . . .297

▫ Red Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

▫ Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .309

▫ Green Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .326

▫ White Telltale Indicator Lights . . . . . . . . . . . .330

▫ Blue Telltale Indicator Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . .332

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION

CENTER (EVIC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays — 3.5” Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335

▫ Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .337

▫ EVIC Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID) . . . . .352

▫ Driver Information Display (DID) Displays . . .355

▫ Oil Life Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .357

▫ DID Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359

▫ DID Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364

CYBERSECURITY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .377

UCONNECT SETTINGS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

▫ Buttons On The Faceplate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .380

▫ Buttons On The Touchscreen. . . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . .381

▫ Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings . . . . .397

UCONNECT RADIOS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED . . .416

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

▫ CD Player — If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . .418

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES . .419

▫ Regulatory And Safety Information . . . . . . . . .419

CLIMATE CONTROLS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

▫ Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421

▫ Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426

▫ Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

▫ Climate Control Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .437

▫ Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . .439

▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441

288 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

PERSONALIZED MENU BAR . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION . . . . . . . .445

▫ Introducing Uconnect. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

▫ Get Started . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446

▫ Basic Voice Commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .447

▫ Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .449

▫ Media. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451

▫ Phone. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .452

▫ Voice Text Reply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .454

▫ Climate (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .455

▫ Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .456

▫ Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . .457

▫ Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

▫ Register (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .459

▫ Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .460

▫ Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .461

▫ Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .463

▫ SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN). . . . . . . . .464

▫ Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .464

▫ Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

▫ General Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

▫ Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 289

INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES

1 — Headlight Switch 7 — 115v Power Inverter Outlet 13 — Gear Selector/Transfer Case Position

Switch — If Equipped

2 — Instrument Cluster

8 — Power Outlet — If Equipped

14 — Ignition Switch

3 — Radio

9 — Lower Switch Bank

15 — Hood Release

4 — Hazard Switch

10 — Instrument Panel Drawer

16 — Parking Brake Release

5 — Upper Glove Compartment

11 — Climate Controls

6 — Lower Glove Compartment

12 — Power Outlet/Cigar Lighter — If

Equipped

290 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — MIDLINE (EVIC)

Midline EVIC Instrument Cluster — If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 291

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Display

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) messages. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Infor-

mation Center” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

3. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

4. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the

ON/RUN position.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel door is located.

5. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain

grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be

allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal

operating range.

292 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or

others could be badly burned by steam or boiling

coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealer

for service if your vehicle overheats. If you decide to

look under the hood yourself, see “Maintaining Your

Vehicle”. Follow the warnings under the Cooling

System Pressure Cap paragraph.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 293

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER — PREMIUM (DID)

Premium DID Instrument Cluster — If Equipped

294 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. Tachometer

• Indicates the engine speed in revolutions per minute

(RPM x 1000).

2. Voltmeter

• When the engine is running, the gauge indicates the

electrical system voltage. The pointer should stay

within the normal range if the battery is charged. If

the pointer moves to either extreme left or right and

remains there during normal driving, the electrical

system should be serviced.

NOTE: The voltmeter may show a gauge fluctuation at

various engine temperatures. This cycling operation is

caused by the post-heat cycle of the intake manifold heater

system. The number of cycles and the length of the cycling

operation is controlled by the engine control module. Post-

heat operation can run for several minutes, and then the

electrical system and voltmeter needle will stabilize.

3. Oil Pressure Gauge

• The pointer should always indicate some oil pres-

sure when the engine is running. A continuous high

or low reading under normal driving conditions may

indicate a lubrication system malfunction. Immedi-

ate service should be obtained from an authorized

dealer.

4. Speedometer

• Indicates vehicle speed.

5. Fuel Gauge

• The pointer shows the level of fuel in the fuel tank

when the Keyless Push Button Ignition is in the

ON/RUN position.

• The fuel pump symbol points to the side of the

vehicle where the fuel door is located.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 295

6. Driver Information Display (DID)

• When the appropriate conditions exist, this display

shows the Driver Information Display (DID) mes-

sages. Refer to “Driver Information Display” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

7. Temperature Gauge

• The temperature gauge shows engine coolant tem-

perature. Any reading within the normal range indi-

cates that the engine cooling system is operating

satisfactorily.

• The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher tem-

perature when driving in hot weather, up mountain

grades, or when towing a trailer. It should not be

allowed to exceed the upper limits of the normal

operating range.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot engine cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads

“H” pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H”, turn the engine off immediately

and call an authorized dealer for service.

296 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

WARNING!

A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or others

could be badly burned by steam or boiling coolant. You

may want to call an authorized dealer for service if your

vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the hood

yourself, see “Maintaining Your Vehicle”. Follow the

warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap para-

graph.

WARNING AND INDICATOR LIGHTS

IMPORTANT: The warning / indicator lights switch on

in the instrument panel together with a dedicated mes-

sage and/or acoustic signal when applicable. These

indications are indicative and precautionary and as such

must not be considered as exhaustive and/or alternative

to the information contained in the Owner’s Manual,

which you are advised to read carefully in all cases.

Always refer to the information in this chapter in the

event of a failure indication.

All active telltales will display first if applicable. The

system check menu may appear different based upon

equipment options and current vehicle status. Some

telltales are optional and may not appear.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 297

Red Telltale Indicator Lights

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

When the ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN, this light will turn on for four to eight

seconds as a bulb check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled, a

chime will sound. After the bulb check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains un-

buckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or remain on continuously and a chime will

sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for

further information.

298 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Bag Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds as a bulb check when the ignition is palaced

in the ON/RUN position. If the light is either not on during startup, stays on, or turns on

while driving, have the system inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as possible. This

light will illuminate with a single chime when a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light has

been detected, it will stay on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving, have an authorized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 299

Brake Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

United States

Canada

Brake Warning Light

This light monitors various brake functions, including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may indicate that the parking brake is applied, that

the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with the anti-lock brake system reser-

voir.

If the light remains on when the parking brake has been disengaged, and the fluid level is at

the full mark on the master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hydraulic system

malfunction or that a problem with the Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock

Brake System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this case, the light will

remain on until the condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to the brake

booster, the ABS pump will run when applying the brake, and a brake pedal pulsation may

be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capac-

ity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic

system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is

indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on

when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has

dropped below a specified level.

300 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.

NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level condi-

tions. The vehicle should have service performed, and

the brake fluid level checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is neces-

sary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is

dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.

It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have

a collision. Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS) are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force

Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the

Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS

Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by

placing the ignition in the position ON/RUN position.

The light should illuminate for approximately two sec-

onds. The light should then turn off unless the parking

brake is applied or a brake fault is detected. If the light

does not illuminate, have the light inspected by an

authorized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking brake is

applied with the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN

position.

NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 301

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Vehicle Security Warning Light — If Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly until the vehicle is disarmed.

Engine Temperature Warning Light

Red Warning

Light What It Means

Engine Temperature Warning Light

This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As engine coolant temperatures rise and

the gauge approaches H, this indicator will illuminate and a single chime will sound after

reaching a set threshold. Further overheating will cause a continuous chime sound for 4

minutes, or until the engine is allowed to cool, whichever comes first.

302 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Warning

Light What It Means

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on,

turn it off. Also, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature

reading does not return to normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for service. Refer to

“If Your Engine Overheats” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further information.

Battery Charge Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light

What It Means

Battery Charge Warning Light

This light illuminates when the battery is not charging properly. If it stays on while the en-

gine is running, there may be a malfunction with the charging system. Contact your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible. This indicates a possible problem with the electrical system

or a related component.

If jump starting is required, refer to “Jump Starting Procedures” in “What To Do In Emer-

gencies.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 303

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

304 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the engine is running, the light will either stay on or flash de-

pending on the nature of the problem. Cycle the ignition key when the vehicle is safely and

completely stopped and the transmission is placed in the PARK position. The light should

turn off. If the light remains on with the engine running, your vehicle will usually be driv-

able; however, see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible.

If the light continues to flash when the engine is running, immediate service is required and

you may experience reduced performance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine stall and your

vehicle may require towing. The light will come on when the ignition is first turned to ON/

RUN and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized dealer.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 305

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Electric Power Steering Fail Warning — If Equipped

This light is used to manage the electrical warning of the EPS (Power Steering System). Re-

fer to “Power Steering” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light

Red Warning

Light What It Means

Trailer Brake Disconnected Warning Light

This telltale is on when the Trailer Brake has been disconnected.

306 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Oil Pressure Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Oil Pressure Warning Light

This light indicates low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on while driving, stop the ve-

hicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A chime will sound when this light turns

on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 307

Door Open Warning Light

Red Telltale

Light What It Means

Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is open and not fully closed.

NOTE: If the vehicle is moving there will also be a single chime.

NOTE: Door Open Warning Light will differ depending

on the equipped instrument cluster display

308 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yellow Telltale Indicator Lights

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The

light will illuminate when the ignition is in the ON position before engine start. If the bulb

does not come on when turning the key from OFF to ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

Certain conditions, such as a loose or missing gas cap, poor quality fuel, etc., may illuminate

the light after engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light stays on through sev-

eral typical driving styles. In most situations, the vehicle will drive normally and will not

require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may flash to alert serious conditions that could lead to

immediate loss of power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle should be ser-

viced as soon as possible if this occurs.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 309

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) on could cause damage to the engine

control system. It also could affect fuel economy and

driveability. If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon occur.

Immediate service is required.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as referenced

above, can reach higher temperatures than in normal

operating conditions. This can cause a fire if you

drive slowly or park over flammable substances such

as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc. This could result

in death or serious injury to the driver, occupants or

others.

310 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

The “ESC Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will come on when the ignition is

placed in the ON/RUN position, and when ESC is activated. It should go out with the en-

gine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light” comes on continuously with the engine running,

a malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this light remains on after several ig-

nition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at speeds greater

than 30 MPH (48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the “ESC Indicator Light” come on momentarily each

time the ignition is placed in the ON/RUN position.

• Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN, the ESC system will be ON, even if it was

turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes inactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle is in an ESC event.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 311

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) OFF Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability Control (ESC) is off.

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Low Washer Fluid Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the windshield washer fluid is low.

312 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Tire Pressure Monitoring Indicator Light

The warning light switches on and a message is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel consumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in sequence.

IMPORTANT: Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compromised. Stop the

vehicle, avoiding sharp braking and steering. Repair

immediately using the dedicated tire repair kit and

contact your authorized dealership as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), should be

checked monthly when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label. If your vehicle

has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should

determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 313

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been

equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when

one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.

Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-

nates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as

possible and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving

on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to

overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also

reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect

the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper

tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has

not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS

low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS

malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not

operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is

combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then remain continuously

illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.

When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the sys-

tem may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure

as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation of replacement or

alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the

TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the

TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more

tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS

to continue to function properly.

314 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the original

equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and

warning have been established for the tire size

equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when using re-

placement equipment that is not of the same size,

type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

sensor damage. Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

sensor to become inoperable. After using an after-

market tire sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

Low Fuel Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Low Fuel Indicator Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately 1.5 gal (5.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain

on until fuel is added.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 315

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Indicator Light

After the ignition is turned on, the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) light illuminates to indi-

cate function check at vehicle startup. If the light remains on after startup or comes on and

stays on at road speeds, it may indicate that the ABS has detected a malfunction or has be-

come inoperative. The system reverts to standard non-anti-lock brakes.

If both the Brake Warning Light and the ABS Warning Light are on, see an authorized dealer

immediately. Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in “Starting And Operating” for further in-

formation.

316 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Transmission Temperature Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Transmission Temperature Indicator Light

This light indicates that the transmission fluid temperature is running hot. This may occur

with severe usage, such as trailer towing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and stop the

vehicle. Then, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and run the engine at idle or faster un-

til the light turns off.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission Tempera-

ture Warning Light illuminated will eventually cause

severe transmission damage or transmission failure.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when the

Transmission Temperature Warning Light is illumi-

nated you could cause the fluid to boil over, come in

contact with hot engine or exhaust components and

cause a fire.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 317

Rear Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Rear Fog Light Indicator

This indicator will illuminate when the rear fog lights are on.

Low Coolant Level Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Low Coolant Level Indicator Light

This telltale will turn on to indicate the vehicle coolant level is low.

318 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Suspension Payload Protection Telltale

This telltale will turn on to indicate that the maximum payload may have been exceeded or

load leveling cannot be achieved at its current ride height. Protection Mode will automati-

cally be selected in order to “protect” the air suspension system, air suspension adjustment

is limited due to payload.

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

TOW/HAUL Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when TOW HAUL mode is selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 319

Cargo Light — If Equipped

Yellow Tell-

tale Light What It Means

Cargo Light

The cargo light will illuminate when the cargo light is activated by pressing the cargo light but-

ton on the headlight switch.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will illuminate when fuel filler cap is loose. Properly close the filler cap to disen-

gage the light. If the light does not turn off, please see your authorized dealer.

320 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Service Stop/Start System Indicator Light — If Equipped

This telltale will turn on to indicate the Stop/Start system is not functioning properly and

service is required.

Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Suspension Off-Road 1 Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 1 setting.

For further information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 321

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Suspension Off-Road 2 Indicator Light

This light will illuminate when the air suspension system is set to the Off-Road 2 setting.

For further information, refer to “Air Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating”.

Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light— If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Suspension Ride Height Raising Indicator Light

This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a higher ride height.

322 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light— If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Air Suspension Ride Height Lowering Indicator Light

This light will blink and alert the driver that the vehicle is changing to a lower ride height.

4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

4WD Indicator Light

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive mode, and the front

and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 323

4 Low Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

4 Low Indicator Light

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive LOW mode. The front

and rear driveshafts are mechanically locked together forcing the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed. Low range provides a greater gear reduction ratio to provide in-

creased torque at the wheels.

Refer to “Four-Wheel Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-

ther information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use.

324 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Service 4WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

Service 4WD Indicator Light

If the light stays on or comes on during driving, it means that the 4WD system is not func-

tioning properly and that service is required. We recommend you drive to the nearest ser-

vice center and have the vehicle serviced immediately.

2WD Indicator Light — If Equipped

Yellow Telltale

Light What It Means

2WD Indicator Light

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the two-wheel drive mode.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 325

Green Telltale Indicator Lights

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

Park/Headlight ON Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when the park lights or headlights are turned on.

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

Front Fog Indicator Light — If Equipped

This indicator will illuminate when the front fog lights are on.

326 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

Turn Signal Indicator Lights

The instrument cluster directional arrow will flash independently for the LEFT or RIGHT

turn signal as selected, as well as the exterior turn signal lamp(s) (front and rear) as selected

when the multifunction lever is moved down (LEFT) or up (RIGHT).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the vehicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km) with

either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 327

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

Stop/Start Active Indicator Light — If Equipped

This telltale will illuminate when the Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

Electronic Speed Control Set Indicator Light — If Equipped

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control has been set.

328 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

4WD AUTO Indicator Light — If Equipped

Green Telltale

Light What It Means

4WD AUTO Indicator Light

This light alerts the driver that the vehicle is in the four-wheel drive auto mode, and the

front axle is engaged, but the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel drive

will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a loss of traction.

For further information on four-wheel drive operation and proper use, refer to “Four-Wheel

Drive Operation — If Equipped” in “Starting And Operating.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 329

White Telltale Indicator Lights

Cruise Control ON Indicator Light

White Telltale

Light What It Means

Cruise Control ON Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is ON, but not set.

Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Telltale

Light What It Means

Electronic Speed Control SET Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the electronic speed control is set. Refer to “Electronic Speed

Control” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

330 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light — If Equipped

White Telltale

Light What It Means

Hill Decent Control (HDC) Indicator Light

This indicator will illuminate when Hill Descent Control (HDC) has been selected using the

Hill Descent Control Switch. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control” in “Starting And Operat-

ing” for further information.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 331

Blue Telltale Indicator Lights

High Beam Indicator Light

Blue Telltale

Light What It Means

High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator shows that the high beam headlights are on. Push the multifunction control

lever away from you to switch the headlights to high beam. Pull the lever toward you to

switch the headlights back to low beam. Pull the lever toward you for a temporary high

beam on, flash to pass scenario.

332 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER

(EVIC)

The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) fea-

tures a driver-interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster.

The EVIC Menu items consists of the following:

• Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)

• Air Suspension (If Equipped)

• Trailer Tow

• Messages

• Screen Setup

• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &

8.4 radio)Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 333

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following EVIC Control buttons located on

the left side of the steering wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu items.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu

items.

EVIC Control Buttons

334 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access/select the information screens or sub-

menu screens of a main menu item. Push and

hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds

to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

• LEFT Arrow Button

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to

return to the main menu, to exit the main menu

push and release the UP or DOWN arrow to

highlight Turn Menu Off, then push and re-

lease the RIGHT arrow.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)

Displays — 3.5” Display

The EVIC displays are located in the center portion of the

cluster and consists of seven sections:

1. Compass Display

Displays the current direction. Refer to “Compass

Settings” under “Customer Programmable

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 335

Features — Uconnect 5.0/8.4 Settings” for

further information.

2. Temperature Display

Displays the temperature in degrees Celsius or degrees

Fahrenheit.

3. Main Screen

Displays main menu, sub-menus, settings.

4. EVIC White Telltales

5. EVIC Amber Telltales

6. EVIC Red Telltales

7. Audio/Phone Information And Sub-menu Information

Whenever there are sub-menus available, the position

within the sub-menu is shown here.

The main display area will normally display the main

menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main

menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-

ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall

into several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen. Most of

the messages of this type are then stored (as long as the

condition that activated it remains active) and can be

reviewed from the “Messages” main menu item. As long

as there is a stored message, an “i” will be displayed in

the EVIC’s compass/outside temp line. Examples of this

message type are “Right Front Turn Signal Lamp Out”

and “Low Tire Pressure.”

336 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the

condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples

of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal

is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start

feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition

is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are

“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake

Pedal and Push Button to Start.”

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An

example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams

On.”

Oil Life Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

will display in the EVIC after a single chime has sounded,

to indicate the next scheduled oil change interval. The

engine oil change indicator system is duty cycle based,

which means the engine oil change interval may fluctu-

ate, dependent upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: Use the steering wheel EVIC controls for the

following procedure(s).

Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry

1. Without depressing the brake pedal, push the EN-

GINE START/STOP button and place the ignition to

the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-

hicle Info.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 337

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the ”Vehicle Info” screen, then scroll up or

down to select “Oil Life.”

4. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to select

“Reset”.

5. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

select “NO” or “YES” to reset the Oil Life to 100%.

6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

EVIC screen.

Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry

1. Without depressing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition

to the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-

hicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the “Vehicle Info” screen then scroll up or

down to select “Oil Life.”

4. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to select

“Reset,” then select “NO” or “YES” by pushing the

RIGHT arrow then push the RIGHT arrow

button to select reset of the Oil Life to 100%.

5. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

EVIC screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the Oil Life indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

EVIC Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow but-

tons until the desired Selectable Menu item is high-

lighted in the EVIC.

338 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Speedometer Menu Item

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the speedometer menu item is highlighted in the

EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button

to cycle the display between MPH and km/h.

Vehicle Info Menu Item

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Vehicle Info menu item is highlighted in the

EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button

to enter the submenus items of Vehicle Info. follow the

directional prompts to access or reset any of the

following Vehicle Info submenu items:

• Tire Pressure

• Coolant Temp

• Transmission Temp (Automatic only)

• Oil Temp

• Oil Pressure

• Oil Life

• Battery Voltage

• Gauge Summary

• Engine Hours

Fuel Economy Menu Item

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Fuel Economy menu item is highlighted.

Push and Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset

Average Fuel Economy.

• Current Fuel Economy Gauge

• Average Fuel Economy value

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 339

• To reset the following features (Range, Current MPG

or L/100 km, or Average MPG / L/100 km), push hold

the RIGHT arrow button till features are reset.

• Range to Empty

Trip Menu Item

Trip A

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Trip A menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.

The Trip A information will display the following:

• Distance

• Average MPG

• Elapsed Time

Push and hold RIGHT arrow button to reset all

information.

Trip B

Push and release UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Trip B menu item is highlighted in the EVIC.

The Trip B information will display the following:

• Distance

• Average MPG

• Elapsed Time

Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all

the information.

Stop/Start Menu Item – If Equipped

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Stop/Start menu item is highlighted in the

EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button

to display the Stop/Start status.

340 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Air Suspension Menu Item — If Equipped

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Air Suspension menu item is highlighted in

the EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow

button to display the Air Suspension status.

Trailer Tow Menu Item

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Trailer Tow menu item is highlighted. Push

and release the RIGHT arrow button and the next

screen will display the following trailer trip information:

• Trip (trailer specific) Distance: Push and hold the

RIGHT arrow button to reset the distance.

• Trailer Brake

• Output

• Type

• Gain

EVIC Messages (Stored)

Number of messages stored will be indicated on the

highlighted Messages Menu bar.

When no message(s) have been stored, the right arrow

will not be present in the highlighted Messages bar.

Message(s) remain stored until condition has been

cleared by your authorized service provider.

Sample of stored EVIC Messages

• Front Seat Belts Unbuckled

• Driver Seat Belt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seat Belt Unbuckled

• Service Air Bag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 341

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Anti-lock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to

XX”

• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Push; 2nd

Push

• Vehicle Not In Park

342 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key To Run

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start To Reset

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift To Neutral Then Drive Or Reverse

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.

• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift To Park Wait To Cool

• Transmission Cool Ready To Drive

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 343

• Trailer Brake Disconnected

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake To Prevent Rolling

• Transmission Too Cold Idle With Engine On

• Washer Fluid Low

• Service Air Suspension System

• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too

Light

• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

• Normal Ride Height Achieved

• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved

• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved

• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved

• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted

• Service Air Suspension System Immediately

• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height

• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait

• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open

• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance

• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance

344 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And

Tire Change

• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

• Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or

Heating – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Se-

lected – If Equipped

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 345

• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Push Clutch Or Shift To Neutral

– If Equipped

• Stop/Start Req’d Fault Detected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped

• Autostop Duration – If Equipped

Screen Setup Menu Item

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow button

until the Screen Setup menu item is highlighted in the

EVIC. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button

to enter the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup

feature allows you to change what information is

displayed in the instrument cluster as well as the

location that information is displayed.

Vehicle Settings Menu Item

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall

features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the UP and DOWN button until

Settings displays in the EVIC.

346 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Follow the prompts to display and set any of the follow-

ing Vehicle Settings.

NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with

all the following settings.

• If equipped with a base radio (Non-Touchscreen)

Vehicle Settings will be included in the EVIC.

• If equipped with a Touchscreen radio, the Vehicle

Settings will be included in the radio head unit.

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian, German, Dutch

2 Units Units U.S.; Metric

3 ParkSense ParkSense • Notification — Sound Only; Sound & Display

• Front Volume — Low; Medium; High

• Rear Volume — Low; Medium; High

4 Tilt Mirror in Re-

verse

Tilt Mirror in R On; Off

5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off

6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 347

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds

8 Illuminated Ap-

proach

Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 seconds; 90 seconds

9 Headlights On with

Wipers

Lights w/ Wipers On; Off

10 Automatic High-

beams

Auto Highbeams On; Off

11 Flash Lights with

Lock

Lights w/ Lock On; Off

12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off

13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off

14 Sound Horn with

Remote Start

Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off

348 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

15 Sound Horn with

Remote Lock

Horn w/ Rmt Lock Off; 1st Press; 2nd Press

16 Remote Unlock Se-

quence

Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors

17 Key Fob Linked to

Memory

Key in Memory On; Off

18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off

19 Remote Start Com-

fort System

Rmt Start Comfort Off; Remoter Start; All starts

20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off

21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10 minutes

22 Air Suspension Dis-

play Alerts

Air Susp. Alerts All; Warnings Only

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 349

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

23 Aero Ride Height

Mode

Aero Mode On; Off

24 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off

25 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off

26 Wheel Alignment

Mode

Wheel Alignment On; Off

27 Horn w/ Remote

Lower

Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off

28 Lights w/ Remote

Lower

Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off

29 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3; Trailer 4

30 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric; Light EOH; Heavy

EOH

350 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

31 Trailer Name Trailer Name • Trailer # (# is equal to slot position)

• Boat

• Car

• Cargo

• Dump

• Equipment

• Flatbed

• Gooseneck

• Horse

• Livestock

• Motorcycle

• Snowmobile

• Travel

• Utility

• 5th Wheel

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 351

Setting Names

Setting Names Ab-

breviated (Left Sub-

menu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu Layer)

32 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1

33 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate

34 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off

Turn Menu OFF

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to exit the

main menu.

Push and release any EVIC control button to enter the

EVIC main menu again.

DRIVER INFORMATION DISPLAY (DID)

The Driver Information Display (DID) features a driver-

interactive display that is located in the instrument

cluster.

352 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

The DID Menu items consists of the following:

• Digital Speedometer

• Vehicle Info

• Fuel Economy Info

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Stop/Start Info (If Equipped)

• Trailer Tow

• Audio

• Stored Messages

• Screen Setup

• Vehicle Settings (Not Equipped with a Uconnect 5.0 &

8.4 radio)

Driver Information Display (DID)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 353

Vehicle Information (Customer Information Features)

The system allows the driver to select information by

pushing the following buttons mounted on the steering

wheel:

• UP Arrow Button

Push and release the UP arrow button to scroll

upward through the main menu and

submenus.

• DOWN Arrow Button

Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu and

submenus.

DID Controls

354 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• RIGHT Arrow Button

Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access/select the information screens or sub-

menu screens of a main menu item. Push and

hold the RIGHT arrow button for two seconds

to reset displayed/selected features that can be reset.

• LEFT Arrow Button

Push and release the LEFT arrow button to

return to the main menu from an info screen or

submenu item.

Driver Information Display (DID) Displays

The DID displays are located in the center portion of the

cluster and consists of eight sections:

1. Main Screen — The inner ring of the display will

illuminate in grey under normal conditions, yellow for

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 355

non critical warnings, red for critical warnings, and

white for on demand information.

2. Audio / Phone Information and Sub-menu Informa-

tion — Whenever there are sub-menus available, the

position within the sub-menus is shown here.

3. Selectable Information (Compass, Temp, Range to

Empty, Trip A, Trip B, Average MPG, Trailer Trip

(distance only), Trailer Brake Gain, Time)

4. Telltales/Indicators

5. Gear Selector Status (PRNDL)

6. Selectable Menu Icons

7. Air Suspension Status – If Equipped

8. 4WD Status

9. Selectable Gauge 2 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,

Trailer Brake, Current MPG)

10. Selectable Gauge 1 (Trans Temp, Oil Temp, Oil Life,

Trailer Brake, Current MPG)

The main display area will normally display the main

menu or the screens of a selected feature of the main

menu. The main display area also displays “pop up”

messages that consist of approximately 60 possible warn-

ing or information messages. These pop up messages fall

into several categories:

• Five Second Stored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of message

takes control of the main display area for five seconds and

then returns to the previous screen. Most of the messages of

this type are then stored (as long as the condition that

activated it remains active) and can be reviewed from the

“Messages” main menu item. As long as there is a stored

message, an “i” will be displayed in the DID’s compass/

outside temp line. Examples of this message type are “Right

Front Turn Signal Lamp Out” and “Low Tire Pressure.”

356 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Unstored Messages

This message type is displayed indefinitely or until the

condition that activated the message is cleared. Examples

of this message type are “Turn Signal On” (if a turn signal

is left on) and “Lights On” (if driver leaves the vehicle).

• Unstored Messages Until RUN

These messages deal primarily with the Remote Start

feature. This message type is displayed until the ignition

is in the RUN state. Examples of this message type are

“Remote Start Aborted - Door Ajar” and “Press Brake

Pedal and Push Button to Start.”

• Five Second Unstored Messages

When the appropriate conditions occur, this type of

message takes control of the main display area for five

seconds and then returns to the previous screen. An

example of this message type is “Automatic High Beams

On.”

Oil Life Reset

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change

indicator system. The “Oil Change Required” message

will flash in the DID display for approximately 10

seconds after a single chime has sounded, to indicate the

next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change

indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the

engine oil change interval may fluctuate, dependent

upon your personal driving style.

NOTE: Use the steering wheel DID controls for the

following procedure(s).

Vehicles Equipped With Passive Entry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push the ENGINE

START/STOP button and cycle the ignition to the

ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 357

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-

hicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the “Oil Life” screen.

4. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for one

second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.

5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT

arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.

6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

DID screen.

Vehicles Not Equipped With Passive Entry

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, cycle the ignition to

the ON/RUN position (do not start the engine).

2. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

scroll downward through the main menu to “Ve-

hicle Info.”

3. Push and release the RIGHT arrow button to

access the “Oil Life” screen.

4. Push and hold the RIGHT arrow button for one

second to access the “Oil Life Reset” screen.

5. Push and release the DOWN arrow button to

select “Yes,” then push and release the RIGHT

arrow button to select reset of the Oil Life.

6. Push and release the UP arrow button to exit the

DID screen.

NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you

start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not

reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.

358 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

DID Messages

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Service Airbag System

• Traction Control Off

• Washer Fluid Low

• Oil Pressure Low

• Oil Change Due

• Fuel Low

• Service Antilock Brake System

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

• Service Power Steering

• Cruise Off

• Cruise Ready

• Cruise Set To XXX MPH

• Tire Pressure Screen With Low Tire(s) “Inflate Tire to

XX”

• Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)

• Service Tire Pressure System

• Parking Brake Engaged

• Brake Fluid Low

• Service Electronic Braking System

• Engine Temperature Hot

• Battery Voltage Low

• Service Electronic Throttle Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 359

• Lights On

• Right Turn Signal Light Out

• Left Turn Signal Light Out

• Turn Signal On

• Sound Horn with Remote Lock: Off; 1st Push; 2nd

Push

• Vehicle Not in Park

• Key in Ignition

• Key in Ignition Lights On

• Remote Start Active Key to Run

• Remote Start Active Push Start Button

• Remote Start Aborted Fuel Low

• Remote Start Aborted Too Cold

• Remote Start Aborted Door Open

• Remote Start Aborted Hood Open

• Remote Start Aborted Trunk Open

• Remote Start Aborted Time Expired

• Remote Start Disabled Start to Reset

• Service Airbag System

• Service Airbag Warning Light

• Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Passenger Seatbelt Unbuckled

• Front Seatbelts Unbuckled

• Door Open

• Doors Open

• Gear Not Available

360 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Shift Not Allowed

• Shift to Neutral then Drive or Reverse

• Autostick Unavailable Service Required

• Automatic Unavailable Use Autostick Service Req.

• Transmission Getting Hot Push Brake

• Trans. Hot Stop Safely Shift to Park Wait to Cool

• Transmission Cool Ready to Drive

• Trailer Brake Disconnected

• Service Transmission

• Service Shifter

• Engage Park Brake to Prevent Rolling

• Transmission Too cold Idle with Engine On

• Washer Fluid Low

• Service Air Suspension System

• Heavy Duty Air Suspension System Disabled

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Speed

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted Due To Payload

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted - Payload Too

Light

• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

• Normal Ride Height Achieved

• Aerodynamic Ride Height Achieved

• Off Road 1 Ride Height Achieved

• Off Road 2 Ride Height Achieved

• Entry/Exit Ride Height Achieved

• Selected Ride Height Not Permitted

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 361

• Service Air Suspension System Immediately

• Reduce Speed To Maintain Selected Ride Height

• Air Suspension System Cooling Down Please Wait

• Vehicle Cannot Be Lowered Door Open

• Off Road 2 Watch For Clearance

• Entry/Exit Watch For Clearance

• Air Suspension Temporarily Disabled For Jacking And

Tire Change

• Battery Low Start Engine To Change Ride Height

• Stop/Start Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Hood Open – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Battery Charging – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Trailer Tow/Haul Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready 4WD/Low Range Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Fuel Level Low – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steep Incline – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Extreme Outside Temperature –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too High –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Engine Temperature Too Low –

If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Seatbelt Unbuckled – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Driver Door Open – If Equipped

362 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Stop/Start Not Ready Cabin Cooling Or Heating – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Not Ready Max Cooling Or

Heating – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Max Cooling Or Heating Se-

lected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Front Defrost Selected – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Not Ready Steering Wheel Turned – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Autostop Active – If Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Push Clutch Or Shift To Neutral

– If Equipped

• Stop/Start Req’d Fault Detected – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Cannot Autostart Hood Open – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Battery – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Unavailable Service Stop/Start System – If

Equipped

• Stop/Start To Restart Shift Out Of Park – If Equipped

• Stop/Start Off – If Equipped

• Autostop Duration – If Equipped

The Reconfigurable Telltales section is divided into the

white telltales area on the right, yellow telltales in the

middle, and red telltales on the left.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 363

DID Selectable Menu Items

Push and release the UP or DOWN arrow but-

tons until the desired Selectable Menu icon/title is

highlighted in the DID.

Digital Speedometer

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Digital display icon is

highlighted in the DID. Push and release the

RIGHT arrow button to change the dis-

play between mph and km/h.

Vehicle Info

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Vehicle Info icon is

highlighted in the DID. Push and release the

RIGHT arrow button to enter the submenus items

of Vehicle Info. follow the directional prompts to

access or reset any of the following Vehicle Info

submenu items:

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (1500 & 2500 Series)

A vehicle ICON is displayed with tire pressure values in

each corner of the ICON.

• Tire Pressure:

– Tire Pressure Information System (3500 Series

Heavy Duty Ram Trucks)

– A vehicle ICON is displayed with the tire pressure

values in each corner of the ICON.

– If the Tire Pressure system requires service, “Service

Tire Pressure System” is displayed.

– Tire Pressure is an information only function and

cannot be reset.

364 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

– Refer to the Tire Pressure Information System

(TPIS)” under Starting and Operating for further

information.

• Transmission Temperature – Automatic Transmission

Only

• Oil Temperature

• Oil Life

• Battery Voltage — If Equipped

• Gauge Summary:

– Coolant Temperature

– Transmission Temperature (automatic only)

– Oil Temperature

– Oil Pressure

• Engine Hours

Fuel Economy

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Fuel Economy Menu

icon/title is highlighted.

Submenu item:

• Range

• Current MPG or L/100 km

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• To reset the following features (Range, Current MPG

or L/100 km, or Average MPG / L/100 km), push hold

the RIGHT arrow button till features are reset.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 365

Trip A

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Trip A icon/title is

highlighted in the DID. The Trip A informa-

tion will display the following:

• Distance MI or km

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• Average MPH or km/h

• Elapsed Time

Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the

information.

Trip B

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Trip B icon/title is

highlighted in the DID. The Trip B informa-

tion will display the following:

• Distance MI or km

• Average MPG or L/100 km

• Average MPH or km/h

• Elapsed Time

Hold the RIGHT arrow button to reset all the

information.

366 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Stop/Start – If Equipped

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Stop/Start icon is high-

lighted in the DID. The DID will display the

Stop/Start status.

Trailer Tow

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Trailer Tow icon is high-

lighted. Push and release the RIGHT arrow

button and the next screen will display the

following trailer trip information:

• Trailer Trip

• Trailer Brake

Audio

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Audio display icon is

highlighted in the DID. Push and release the

RIGHT arrow button to display the ac-

tive source.

Stored Messages

Push and release the UP arrow button until

the Messages display icon is highlighted in

the DID. This feature shows the number of

stored warning messages. Pushing the

RIGHT arrow button will allow you to see what

the stored messages are.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 367

Screen Setup

Push and release the UP or DOWN ar-

row button until the Screen Setup display

icon is highlighted in the DID. Push and

release the RIGHT arrow button to enter

the Screen Setup submenu. The Screen Setup feature

allows you to change what information is displayed in

the instrument cluster as well as the location that

information is displayed.

Settings Options

1 Upper Left • None

• Compass

• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Trailer Trip

• Trailer Brake Gain

368 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Settings Options

2 Upper Right • None

• Compass

• Outside Temp. (Default)

• Time

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trip A

• Trip B

• Trailer Trip

• Trailer Brake Gain

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 369

Settings Options

3 Lower Left • None (Default)

• Compass

• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trailer Brake Gain

4 Lower Right • None (Default)

• Compass

• Outside Temp.

• Time

• Range to Empty

• Average MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trailer Brake Gain

370 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Settings Options

5 Upper Gauge • None (Default)

• Trans Temp.

• Oil Temp.

• Oil Life

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trailer Brake Gain

6 Lower Gauge • None (Default)

• Trans Temp.

• Oil Temp.

• Oil Life

• Current MPG (not available for CNG models)

• Trailer Brake Gain

7 Odometer • 000

• 000.0

8 Restore Defaults • Cancel

• OK

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 371

Vehicles Settings (Customer-Programmable

Features)

NOTE: This feature is only available on 5.0 and

8.4 Uconnect Radios

Personal Settings allows the driver to set and recall

features when the transmission is in PARK.

Push and release the UP and DOWN arrow

button until Personal Settings displays in the DID.

Follow the prompts to display and set any of the follow-

ing Personal Settings.

NOTE: Your vehicle may or may not be equipped with

all the following settings.

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

1 Language Select Language English, Spanish, French, Italian,

German, Dutch

2 Units Units U.S.; Metric

372 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

3 ParkSense ParkSense • Notification — Sound Only;

Sound & Display

• Front Volume — Low; Me-

dium; High

• Rear Volume — Low; Me-

dium; High

4 Tilt Mirror in Reverse Tilt Mirror in R On; Off

5 Rain Sensing Wipers Auto Wipers On; Off

6 Hill Start Assist Hill Start Assist On; Off

7 Headlights Off Delay Lights Off Delay 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 sec-

onds; 90 seconds

8 Illuminated Approach Lights w/ Unlock 0 seconds; 30 seconds; 60 sec-

onds; 90 seconds

9 Headlights On with Wipers Lights w/ Wipers On; Off

10 Automatic Highbeams Auto Highbeams On; Off

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 373

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

11 Flash Lights with Lock Lights w/ Lock On; Off

12 Auto Lock Doors Auto Lock Doors On; Off

13 Auto Unlock Doors Auto Unlock Doors On; Off

14 Sound Horn with Remote Start Horn w/ Rmt Start On; Off

15 Sound Horn with Remote Lock Horn w/ Rmt Lock On; Off

16 Remote Unlock Sequence Remote Unlock Driver Door; All Doors

17 Key Fob Linked to Memory Key in Memory On; Off

18 Passive Entry Passive Entry On; Off

19 Remote Start Comfort System Rmt Start Comfort On; Off

20 Easy Exit Seat Easy Exit Seat On; Off

21 Key-off Power Delay Power Off Delay Off; 45 seconds; 5 minutes; 10

minutes

374 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

22 Commercial Settings Commercial • Aux Switches

• Power Take-Off

• PIN Setup

23 Air Suspension Display Alerts Air Susp. Alerts All; Warnings Only

24 Aero Ride Height Mode Aero Mode On; Off

25 Tire/Jack Mode Tire/Jack Mode On; Off

26 Transport Mode Transport Mode On; Off

27 Wheel Alignment Mode Wheel Alignment On; Off

28 Horn w/ Remote Lower Horn w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off

29 Lights w/ Remote Lower Lights w/ Rmt Lwr On; Off

30 Trailer Select Trailer Select Trailer 1; Trailer 2; Trailer 3;

Trailer 4

31 Brake Type Brake Type Light Electric; Heavy Electric;

Light EOH; Heavy EOH

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 375

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

32 Trailer Name Trailer Name • Trailer # (# is equal to slot

position)

• Boat

• Car

• Cargo

• Dump

• Equipment

• Flatbed

• Gooseneck

• Horse

• Livestock

• Motorcycle

• Snowmobile

• Travel

• Utility

• 5th Wheel

376 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Setting Names Setting Names Abbreviated

(Left Submenu Layer)

Sub-Menus (Right Submenu

Layer)

33 Compass Variance Compass Var 1-15 increments of 1

34 Calibrate Compass Compass Cal Cancel; Calibrate

35 Fuel Saver Display Fuel Saver On; Off

36 Park Assist Front Chime Vol-

ume

Park Assist Front Chime Vol-

ume

On; Off

37 Park Assist Rear Chime Volume Park Assist Rear Chime Volume On; Off

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and may be

equipped with both wired and wireless networks. These

networks allow your vehicle to send and receive infor-

mation. This information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain security

features to reduce the risk of unauthorized and unlawful

access to vehicle systems and wireless communications.

Vehicle software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its suppliers,

evaluates and takes appropriate steps as needed. Similar

to a computer or other devices, your vehicle may require

software updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the potential risk of

unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle sys-

tems.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 377

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access to your vehicle

systems may still exist, even if the most recent version of

vehicle software (such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all of the

possible outcomes if your vehicle’s systems are

breached. It may be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems, could be impaired or

a loss of vehicle control could occur that may result in

an accident involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card, or CD) into

your vehicle if it came from a trusted source. Media

of unknown origin could possibly contain mali-

cious software, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle systems to

be breached.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• As always, if you experience unusual vehicle be-

havior, take your vehicle to your nearest authorized

dealer immediately.

NOTE:

• FCA or your dealer may contact you directly regarding

software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and minimize

the potential risk of a security breach, vehicle owners

should:

• Routinely check www.driveuconnect.com/software-

update to learn about available Uconnect software

updates.

• Only connect and use trusted media devices (e.g.

personal mobile phones, USBs, CDs).

378 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Privacy of any wireless and wired communications can-

not be assured. Third parties may unlawfully intercept

information and private communications without your

consent. For further information, refer to “Privacy Prac-

tices – If Equipped with Uconnect 8.4 radio” in “All

About Uconnect Access” in your Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement and “Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle”.

UCONNECT SETTINGS

The Uconnect system uses a combination of buttons on

the touchscreen and buttons on the faceplate located on

the center of the instrument panel that allows you to

access and change the customer programmable features.

Many features can vary by vehicle.

Uconnect 5.0 Buttons On The Touchscreen And Buttons

On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 379

Buttons On The Faceplate

Buttons on the faceplate are located below the Uconnect

system in the center of the instrument panel. In addition,

there is a Scroll/Enter control knob located on the right

side of the Climate Controls in the center of the instru-

ment panel. Turn the control knob to scroll through

menus and change settings (i.e., 30, 60, 90), push the

center of the control knob one or more times to select or

change a setting (i.e., ON, OFF).

Your Uconnect system may also have Screen Off and

Back buttons located below the Uconnect system.

Push the Screen Off button to turn off the Uconnect

touchscreen. Push the Screen Off button a second time to

turn the touchscreen on.

Push the Back button to exit out of a Menu or certain

option on the Uconnect system.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Buttons On The Touchscreen And

Buttons On The Faceplate

1 — Uconnect Buttons On The Touchscreen

2 — Uconnect Buttons On The Faceplate

380 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect display.

Customer Programmable Features —

Uconnect 5.0 Personal Settings

Push the MORE or SETTINGS button on the faceplate,

then press the “Settings” button on the touchscreen (if

equipped) to display the settings menu screen. In this

mode the Uconnect system allows you to access pro-

grammable features that may be equipped such as Dis-

play, Units, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving Assistance,

Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if equipped),

Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer Brake, Audio,

Compass Settings, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if

equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and

System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting until the

button is highlighted. Once the setting is complete, either

press the back arrow or Done button on the touchscreen

or the Back button on the faceplate to return to the

previous menu. Pressing the Up or Down Arrow buttons

on the touchscreen on the right side of the screen will

allow you to toggle up or down through the list of

available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition

in the “Run” position.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 381

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select the Auto or Manual

display settings. To change Mode status, press and re-

lease the “Auto” or “Manual” button on the touchscreen.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English/Français/Español) for all display no-

menclature, including the trip functions and the naviga-

tion system (if equipped). Press the “Language” button

on the touchscreen and select from “English,” “Français,”

or “Español.”

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a touchscreen button is pressed. To

change the Mode status, press and release the “On” or

“Off” button on the touchscreen.

• Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and

will be displayed in the EVIC/DID. Press the “Fuel Saver

Display” button on the touchscreen select from “On” or

“Off.”

Units — If Equipped

Press the Units button to select “US” or “Metric”.

382 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, press the “Voice Response Length” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Brief” or “Detailed.”

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Com-

mand List settings. To change the Show Command List

settings, press the “Show Command List” button on the

touchscreen and select from “Always,” “With Help” or

“Never.”

Clock & Date

After pressing the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Set Time

When in this display, you may set the time and format

manually. Press the “Set Time” button then choose from

a “12 hour” or “24 hour format.” Press the corresponding

arrow above and below the current time to adjust, then

select “AM” or “PM.”

• Set Date

When in this display, you may set the date manually.

Press the “Set Date” button then press the corresponding

arrows above and below the current date to adjust.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 383

Safety/Assistance

After pressing the “Safety/Assistance” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• ParkSense — If Equipped

The ParkSense system will scan for objects behind the

vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in RE-

VERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph

(18 km/h). It will provide an alert (audible and/or

visual) to indicate the proximity to other objects. The

system can be enabled with Sound Only, or Sound and

Display. To change the ParkSense status, press and re-

lease the “Sound Only” or “Sounds and Display” button.

Refer to “ParkSense” in “Understanding The Features Of

Your Vehicle” for system function and operating infor-

mation.

• Front ParkSense Chime Volume

The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected

from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if equipped. The

chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH.

The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To change

the mode status, press the “Front ParkSense Volume” button

and select the “Low” “Med” or “High” buttons on the

touchscreen. ParkSense will retain its last known configura-

tion state through ignition cycles.

• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume — If Equipped

The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected

from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if equipped. The

chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH.

The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To change

the mode status, press the “Rear ParkSense Volume” button

and select the “Low” “Med” or “High” buttons on the

touchscreen. ParkSense will retain its last known configura-

tion state through ignition cycles.

384 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Tilt Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the exterior sideview

mirrors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the

RUN position and the transmission gear selector is in the

REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their

previous position when the transmission is shifted out of

REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Mirrors

In Reverse” button on the touchscreen and make your

selection.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear Back

Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see active

guidelines over the ParkView Back up camera display

whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image

will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along

with a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across

the top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will

disappear. To make your selection, press the “ParkView

Backup Camera Active Guidelines” button on the touch-

screen and make your selection. Press arrow button on the

touchscreen to return to the previous menu.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera

delay turned OFF), the rear camera mode is exited and

the navigation or audio screen appears again. When the

vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE (with camera delay

turned ON), the rear view image with dynamic grid lines

will be displayed for up to 10 seconds after shifting out of

“REVERSE” unless the forward vehicle speed exceeds

8 mph (12 km/h), the transmission is shifted into PARK

or the ignition is switched to the OFF position. To set the

ParkView Backup Camera Delay push the SETTINGS

button on the faceplate, then the “Safety & Driving

Assistance” button on the touchscreen. Press the

“Parkview Backup camera Delay” button on the touch-

screen to turn the ParkView Delay ON or OFF.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 385

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield. To make your selection, press the

“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen and make your

selection.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)

system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control

System” in “Starting And Operating” for system function

and operating information. To make your selection, press

the “Hill Start Assist” button on the touchscreen and

make your selection.

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen,

the following settings will be available:

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on after the

engine is shut off. To change the Headlight Off Delay

setting, press the “Headlight Off Delay” button on the

touchscreen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90”

buttons on the touchscreen to select your desired time

interval.

386 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, it allows the adjustment of

the amount of time the headlights remain on when the

doors are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)

Key Fob. To change the Illuminated Approach status,

press the “Illuminated Approach” button on the touch-

screen and choose either “0,” “30,” “60,” or “90” buttons

on the touchscreen to select your desired time interval.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off, if they were turned on by this feature. To

make your selection, press the “Lights w/Wipers” button

and select from “On” or “Off.”

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will activate/deactivate automatically under certain con-

ditions. To make your selection, press the “Auto High

Beams” button on the touchscreen, and select from “On”

or “Off.” Refer to ”Automatic High Beam Headlamp

Control — If Equipped” in “Understanding The Features

Of Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be

selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from

“On” or “Off.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 387

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock auto-

matically when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph

(24 km/h). To make your selection, press the “Auto Door

Locks” button on the touchscreen and select from “On”

or “Off.”

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped, the transmission is in the PARK or

NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is opened. To

make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock On Exit”

button on the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.”

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the door locks are activated. To make your selection,

press the “Horn w/Lock” Button and choose “Off,” “1st

Press” or “2nd Press.”

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the remote start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Horn w/Remote Start” button on the touch-

screen and select from “On” or “Off.”

• Remote Door Unlock

This feature will allow you to program your remote door

locks to open “All doors” or only the “Driver door” with

the first push of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob

or grabbing the Passive Entry door handle. To make your

selection, press the “Remote Door Unlock” button on the

touchscreen and choose from “All” or “Driver.”

388 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If “Driver Door” is selected, the (RKE) Key Fob

will have to be pushed two times in order to unlock all

doors.

• Memory Linked to Fob — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Memory

Linked to Fob” button on the touchscreen and select from

“On” or “Off.”

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location if “Memory Linked to Fob” is set to (ON) when

the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is used to

unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat” in

“Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for fur-

ther information.

• Passive Entry — If Equipped

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicle’s

door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. It automatically

unlocks the doors when the outside door handle is grabbed.

To make your selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on

the touchscreen and select from “On” or “Off.” Refer to

“Keyless Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting

Your Vehicle” for further information.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lights will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be

selected with or without the sound horn on lock feature

selected. To make your selection, press the “Flash Lights

w/Lock” button on the touchscreen, and select from

“On” or “Off.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 389

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering

Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and

heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-

tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will

turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated

Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “On”

or “Off.”

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Easy Exit Seats — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will

automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seats”

button on the touchscreen and make your selection.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. Press the “Headlight Off Delay”

button on the touchscreen and choose from “0,” “30,”

“60,” or “90” seconds to select your desired time interval.

390 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window

switches, radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped),

DVD video system (if equipped), power sunroof (if

equipped), and power outlets will remain active for up to

10 minutes after the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature. Press the “En-

gine Off Power Delay” button on the touchscreen and

choose from “0 sec,” “45 sec,” “5 min” or “10 min” to

select your desired time interval.

• Auto Entry/Exit — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, it automatically lowers the

vehicle ride height position when shifted into park. Press

the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen and

choose from “On” or “Off.”

Suspension — If Equipped

After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Sound Horn With Lower

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will

occur when the RKE Key Fob REMOTE LOWER button is

pressed. To make your selection, press the “Horn

w/lower” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or

“Off.”

• Flash Lights With Lower

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

signals will flash when the RKE Key Fob REMOTE

LOWER button is pressed twice. To make your selection,

press the “Light w/Lower” button on the touchscreen,

select “On” or “Off.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 391

• Auto Entry/Exit Suspension

When this feature is selected, the vehicle automatically

lowers from ride height position when vehicle shifted to

park for easy entry/exit. To make your selection, press

the “Auto Entry/Exit” button on the touchscreen, select

“On” or “Off.”

• Display Suspension Messages

When “All” is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will

be displayed. When “Warning Only” is selected only the

Air Suspension Warnings will be displayed.

• Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model Only)

When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto-

matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed. To

make your selection, press the “Aero Mode” button on

the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Tire Jack Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is

disabled to prevent auto leveling of the suspension, while

the vehicle is on a jack changing a tire. To make your

selection, press the “Tire Jack Mode” button on the

touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Transport Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is

disabled to assist with flat bed towing. To make your

selection, press the “Transport Mode” button on the

touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Wheel Alignment Mode

This feature prevents auto leveling of the air suspension

while performing a wheel alignment service. Before per-

forming a wheel alignment this mode must be enabled.

Refer to your authorized dealer for further information.

392 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Trailer Brake

After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Trailer Select

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be

selected between “Trailer 1,” “Trailer 2,” “Trailer 3” and

“Trailer 4.”

• Trailer Brake Type

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can

be changed between “Light Electric,” “Heavy Electric,”

“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH.” Refer to “Integrated

Trailer Brake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade

settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the

arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 393

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-

screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on

the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Loudness — If Equipped

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.

To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on

the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

Compass Settings — If Equipped

After pressing the “Compass Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Variance

Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic

North and Geographic North. To compensate for the

differences the variance should be set for the zone where

the vehicle is driven, per the zone map. Once properly

set, the compass will automatically compensate for the

differences, and provide the most accurate compass

heading.

394 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: Keep magnetic materials away from the top of the

instrument panel, such as iPod’s, Mobile Phones, Lap-

tops and Radar Detectors. This is where the compass

module is located, and it can cause interference with the

compass sensor, and it may give false readings.

• Perform Compass Calibration

Press the “Calibration” button on the touchscreen to

change this setting. This compass is self-calibrating,

which eliminates the need to manually reset the compass.

When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic

until it is calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass

by pressing the “ON” button on the touchscreen and

completing one or more 360-degree turns (in an area free

from large metal or metallic objects). The compass will

now function normally.

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Devices

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to your Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.Compass Variance Map

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 395

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to exclude undesirable

channels while scanning. To make your selection, press

the “Channel Skip” button on the touchscreen, select the

channels you would like to skip.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

Write down the SIRIUS ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

“Restore Settings” button and select from “Yes” or “No.”

If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will appear asking Are you

sure you want to reset your settings to default?” select

“Yes” to restore, or “Cancel” to exit.

396 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data Settings” button on

the touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove all personal data

including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove all per-

sonal information, press the “Clear Personal Data” button and

select from “Yes” or “No.” If “Yes” is selected a pop-up will

appear asking Are you sure you want to clear all personal

data?” select “Yes” to Clear, or “Cancel” to exit.

System Information

After pressing the “System Information” button on the

touchscreen the following information will be available:

• System Information

When System Information is selected, a System Informa-

tion screen will appear displaying the system software

version.

Customer Programmable Features — Uconnect

8.4A/8.4AN Personal Settings

Press the “Apps” button on the touchscreen then press

the “Settings” button on the touchscreen to display the

settings menu screen. In this mode the Uconnect system

allows you to access programmable features that may be

equipped such as Display, Voice, Clock, Safety & Driving

Assistance, Lights, Doors & Locks, Auto-On Comfort (if

equipped), Engine Off Options, Suspension, Trailer

Brake, Audio, Phone/Bluetooth, SiriusXM Setup (if

equipped), Restore Settings, Clear Personal Data and

System Information.

NOTE: Only one category may be selected at a time.

When making a selection, press the button on the touch-

screen to enter the desired mode. Once in the desired

mode, press and release the preferred setting until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that

setting has been selected. Once the setting is complete,

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 397

either press the back arrow button on the touchscreen or

the Back button on the faceplate to return to the previous

menu or press the “X” button on the touchscreen to close

out of the settings screen. Pressing the Up or Down

Arrow buttons on the touchscreen on the right side of the

screen will allow you to toggle up or down through the

list of available settings.

NOTE: All settings should be changed with the ignition

in the “Run” position.

Display

After pressing the “Display” button on the touchscreen

the following settings will be available.

• Display Mode

When in this display you may select one of the auto display

settings. To change Mode status, select from “Day,” “Night”

or “Auto” until a check-mark appears next to the setting,

showing that setting has been selected.

NOTE: When Day or Night is selected for the Display

Mode, the usage of the Parade Mode feature will cause

the radio to activate the Display Brightness Day control

even though the headlights are on.

• Display Brightness With Headlights ON

When in this display, you may select the brightness with

the headlights on. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–” setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with

Headlights ON setting, the headlights must be on and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or

parade positions.

398 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Display Brightness With Headlights OFF

When in this display, you may select the brightness with

the headlights off. Adjust the brightness with the “+” and

“–”setting buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any

point on the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

NOTE: To make changes to the Display Brightness with

Headlights OFF setting, the headlights must be off and

the interior dimmer switch must not be in the party or

parade positions.

• Set Theme

This feature will allow you to choose a background

theme for the display screen. The theme will change the

background color, highlight color, and button color of the

display screen. Press the “Set Theme” button on the

touchscreen and select one of the pre-configured themes

available.

• Set Language

When in this display, you may select one of multiple

languages (English / Français / Español) for all display

nomenclature, including the trip functions and the navi-

gation system (if equipped). Press the Set Language

button on the touchscreen, then press the desired lan-

guage button on the touchscreen until a check-mark

appears next to the language, showing that setting has

been selected.

• Touchscreen Beep

When in this display, you may turn on or shut off the

sound heard when a touchscreen button (button on the

touchscreen) is pressed. Press the “Touchscreen Beep”

button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears

next to the setting, showing that setting has been se-

lected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 399

• Navigation Turn-By-Turn In Cluster — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the turn-by-turn directions

will appear in the display as the vehicle approaches a

designated turn within a programmed route. To make

your selection, press the “Navigation Turn-By-Turn In

Cluster” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Controls Screen Time-Out — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Controls Screen will

stay open for five seconds before the screen times out.

With the feature deselected, the screen will stay open

until it is manually closed. Press the “Controls Screen

Time-Out” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Fuel Saver Display — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to enable fuel saver mode and

will be displayed in the DID. Press the “Fuel Saver

Display” button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

Units

After pressing the “Units” button on the touchscreen you

may select each unit of measure independently displayed

in the Driver Information Display (DID), and navigation

system (if equipped). The following selectable units of

measure are listed below:

• Speed

Select from: “MPH” or “km/h.”

• Distance

Select from: “mi” or “km.”

400 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Fuel Consumption

Select from: “MPG” (US), “MPG” (UK), “L/100 km” or

“km/L.”

• Capacity

Select from: “gal” (US), “gal” (UK), “L/100 km” or “L.”

• Pressure

Select from: “psi,” “kPa,” or “bar.”

• Temperature

Select from: “°C,” or “°F.”

• Power

Select from: “HP” (US), “HP” (UK), and “kW.”

• Torque

Select from: “lb-ft” or “Nm.”

After the desired setting has been selected, press the back

arrow/Done button on the touchscreen to return to the

previous menu.

Units — If Equipped

Press the Units button to select “US” or “Metric”.

Voice

After pressing the “Voice” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Voice Response Length

When in this display, you may change the Voice Re-

sponse Length settings. To change the Voice Response

Length, select from the “Brief” or “Detailed” buttons on

the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to the

setting, showing that setting has been selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 401

• Show Command List

When in this display, you may change the Show Com-

mand List settings. To change the Show Command List

settings, select from the “Always,” “With Help” or

“Never” buttons on the touchscreen until a check-mark

appears next to the setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

Clock

After pressing the “Clock” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Sync Time With GPS — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to automatically have the

radio set the time. To change the Sync Time setting, press

the “Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen to

turn the feature on or off.

• Set Time Hours

This feature will allow you to adjust the hours. The “Sync

with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must not be

selected. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the hours up or

down.

• Set Time Minutes

This feature will allow you to adjust the minutes. The

“Sync with GPS Time” button on the touchscreen must be

unchecked. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–”

buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the minutes up or

down.

• Time Format

This feature will allow you to select the time format

display setting. Press the “Time Format” button on the

touchscreen and select from “12hrs” or “24hrs.”

402 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Show Time In Status Bar — If Equipped

This feature will allow you to turn on or shut off the

digital clock in the status bar. To change the Show Time

Status setting press the “Show Time in Status Bar” button

on the touchscreen to turn the feature on or off.

Safety & Driving Assistance

After pressing the “Safety & Driving Assistance” button

on the touchscreen the following settings will be avail-

able.

• ParkSense

The Rear Park Assist system will scan for objects behind

the vehicle when the transmission gear selector is in

REVERSE and the vehicle speed is less than 11 mph

(18 km/h). The system can be enabled with Sound Only

or Sound and Display. To change the Park Assist status,

select the “Sound Only” or the “Sound and Display”

button on the touchscreen. Refer to “ParkSense Rear Park

Assist” in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle”

for system function and operating information.

• Front ParkSense Chime Volume

The Front ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be

selected from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if

equipped. The chime volume settings include LOW,

MEDIUM, and HIGH. The factory default volume setting

is MEDIUM. To change the mode status, press the “Front

ParkSense Volume” button and select the “Low” “Med”

or “High” buttons on the touchscreen. ParkSense will

retain its last known configuration state through ignition

cycles.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 403

• Rear ParkSense Chime Volume

The Rear ParkSense Chime Volume settings can be selected

from the EVIC/DID or Uconnect System — if equipped. The

chime volume settings include LOW, MEDIUM, and HIGH.

The factory default volume setting is MEDIUM. To change

the mode status, press the “Rear ParkSense Volume” button

and select the “Low” “Med” or “High” buttons on the

touchscreen. ParkSense will retain its last known configura-

tion state through ignition cycles.

• Tilt Side Mirrors In Reverse — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the outside sideview mir-

rors will tilt downward when the ignition is in the RUN

position and the transmission gear selector is in the

REVERSE position. The mirrors will move back to their

previous position when the transmission is shifted out of

REVERSE. To make your selection, press the “Tilt Side

Mirrors In Reverse” button on the touchscreen to select

from on or off.

• ParkView Backup Camera

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera that allows you to see an on-screen

image of the rear surroundings of your vehicle whenever

the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image will be

displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with a

caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the

top of the screen. After five seconds, this note will

disappear. The ParkView camera is located on the rear of

the vehicle above the rear License plate. To make your

selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera” button

on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next to

the setting, indicating that the setting had been selected.

• ParkView Backup Camera Active Guidelines

Your vehicle may be equipped with the ParkView Rear

Back Up Camera Active Guidelines that allows you to see

Active (Dynamic) Guidelines which deflect with steering

wheel angle over the ParkView Back up Camera display

404 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

whenever the gear selector is put into REVERSE. The image

will be displayed on the radio touchscreen display along with

a caution note to “check entire surroundings” across the top

of the screen. After five seconds, this note will disappear. To

make your selection, press the “ParkView Backup Camera

Active Guidelines” and select from on or off.

• ParkView Backup Camera Delay

When this feature is enabled, it will allow the ParkView

Backup Camera display to remain on while in drive for

up to 10 seconds, or 8 mph. To make your selection, press

the “ParkView Backup Camera Delay” button on the

touchscreen to select from on or off.

• Rain Sensing Auto Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the system will automati-

cally activate the windshield wipers if it senses moisture

on the windshield. To make your selection, press the

“Rain Sensing” button on the touchscreen to select from

on or off.

• Hill Start Assist — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Hill Start Assist (HSA)

system is active. Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”

in “Starting And Operating” for system function and oper-

ating information. To make your selection, press the “Hill

Start Assist” button on the touchscreen to select from on or

off.

• Two Or Four Corner Air Suspension Modes — If

Equipped

There are four air suspension modes designed to protect the

system in unique situations. Tire Jack Mode is selected to

assist in changing a spare tire. Transport Mode is selected to

assist when the vehicle is being flat bed towed. Wheel

Alignment Mode is selected before performing a wheel

alignment, refer to your authorized dealer for information.

Protection Mode will automatically be selected to “protect”

the air suspension system when the payload has been

exceeded or load leveling cannot be achieved.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 405

Lights

After pressing the “Lights” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection, press

the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the

seconds up or down.

• Headlight Illumination On Approach

When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate

and remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds when the doors

are unlocked with the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key

Fob. To make your selection, press the “+” or “–” buttons

on the touchscreen to adjust the seconds up or down.

• Headlights With Wipers — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, and the headlight switch is

in the AUTO position, the headlights will turn on ap-

proximately 10 seconds after the wipers are turned on.

The headlights will also turn off when the wipers are

turned off if they were turned on by this feature. To make

your selection, press the “Headlights With Wipers” but-

ton on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next

to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Auto Dim High Beams — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the high beam headlights

will deactivate automatically under certain conditions. To

make your selection, press the “Auto Dim High Beams”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears

next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Refer to “Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control — If

Equipped” in “Understanding The Features Of Your

Vehicle” for further information.

406 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the exterior lamps will flash

when the doors are locked or unlocked with the Remote

Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob. This feature may be selected

with or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To

make your selection, press the “Flash Lights with Lock”

button on the touchscreen, until a check-mark appears next

to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

Doors & Locks

After pressing the “Doors & Locks” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Auto Door Locks

When this feature is selected, all doors will lock automati-

cally when the vehicle reaches a speed of 15 mph (24 km/h).

To make your selection, press the “Auto Door Lock” button

on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Auto Unlock On Exit

When this feature is selected, all doors will unlock when

the vehicle is stopped and the transmission is in the

PARK or NEUTRAL position and the driver’s door is

opened. To make your selection, press the “Auto Unlock

On Exit” button on the touchscreen until a check-mark

appears next to setting, showing that setting has been

selected.

• Flash Lights With Lock

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

signals will flash when the doors are locked or unlocked

with the RKE Key Fob. This feature may be selected with

or without the sound horn on lock feature selected. To

make your selection, press the “Flash Lights With Lock”

button on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears

next to setting, showing that setting has been selected.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 407

• Sound Horn With Lock

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the door locks are activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn With Lock” button on the touch-

screen and select from “Off”, “1st Press” or “2nd Press”.

• Sound Horn With Remote Start

When this feature is selected, the horn will sound when

the remote start is activated. To make your selection,

press the “Sound Horn With Remote Start” button on the

touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to setting,

showing that setting has been selected.

• 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks

When 1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is

selected, only the driver’s door will unlock on the first

press of the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob UN-

LOCK button you must push the RKE Key Fob UNLOCK

button twice to unlock the passenger’s doors. When

Unlock “All Doors” On 1st Press is selected, all of the

doors will unlock on the first push of the RKE Key Fob

UNLOCK button.

NOTE: If the vehicle is programmed 1st Press Of Key Fob

Unlocks “All Doors”, all doors will unlock no matter

which Passive Entry equipped door handle is grasped. If

1st Press Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is pro-

grammed, only the driver’s door will unlock when the

driver’s door is grasped. With Passive Entry, if 1st Press

Of Key Fob Unlocks “Driver Door” is programmed

pushing the handle more than once will only result in the

driver’s door opening. If driver door is selected, once the

driver door is opened, the interior door lock/unlock

switch can be used to unlock all doors (or use RKE Key

Fob).

408 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Passive Entry — If Equipped

This feature allows you to lock and unlock the vehicles

door(s) without having to push the Remote Keyless Entry

(RKE) Key Fob lock or unlock buttons. To make your

selection, press the “Passive Entry” button on the touch-

screen until a check-mark appears next to setting, show-

ing that setting has been selected. Refer to “Keyless

Enter-N-Go” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle”.

• Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob — If Equipped

This feature provides automatic driver seat positioning to

enhance driver mobility when entering and exiting the

vehicle. To make your selection, press the “Personal

Settings Linked To Key Fob” button on the touchscreen

until a check-mark appears next to setting, showing that

setting has been selected.

NOTE: The seat will return to the memorized seat

location (if Personal Settings Linked To Key Fob is set to

ON) when the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) Key Fob is

used to unlock the door. Refer to “Driver Memory Seat”

in “Understanding The Features Of Your Vehicle” for

further information.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

After pressing the “Auto-On Comfort” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Auto-On Driver Heated/Ventilated Seat & Steering

Wheel With Vehicle Start — If Equipped

When this feature is selected the driver’s heated seat and

heated steering wheel will automatically turn ON when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C). When tempera-

tures are above 80° F (26.7° C) the driver vented seat will

turn ON. To make your selection, press the “Auto Heated

Seats” button on the touchscreen, then select either “Off,”

“Remote Start” or “All Starts”.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 409

Engine Off Options

After pressing the “Engine Off Options” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available.

• Easy Exit Seat — If Equipped

When this feature is selected, the Driver’s seat will

automatically move rearward once the engine is shut off.

To make your selection, press the “Easy Exit Seat” button

on the touchscreen until a check-mark appears next to

setting, showing that setting has been selected.

• Engine Off Power Delay

When this feature is selected, the power window switches,

radio, Uconnect phone system (if equipped), DVD video

system (if equipped), power sunroof (if equipped), and

power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes after

the ignition is cycled to OFF. Opening either front door will

cancel this feature. To change the Engine Off Power Delay

status press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to

adjust the time delay up or down.

• Headlight Off Delay

When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to

have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds

when exiting the vehicle. To make your selection press

the “+” or “–” buttons on the touchscreen to adjust the

seconds up or down.

Air Suspension — If Equipped

After pressing the “Suspension” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available.

• Sound Horn With Lower

When this feature is selected, a short horn sound will

occur when the RKE Key Fob REMOTE LOWER button is

pressed. Press the box next to your selection and a

check-mark appears next to the feature showing the

system has been activated or the check-mark is removed

showing the system has been deactivated.

410 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Flash Lights With Lower

When this feature is selected, the front and rear turn

signals will flash when the RKE Key Fob REMOTE

LOWER button is pressed twice. This feature may be

selected with or without the Sound Horn on Lower

feature selected. Press the box next to your selection and

a check-mark appears next to the feature showing the

system has been activated or the check-mark is removed

showing the system has been deactivated.

• Suspension Display Messages

When “All” is selected, all the Air Suspension Alerts will

be displayed. When “Warning” is selected only the Air

Suspension Warnings will be displayed.

• Automatic Aero Mode (1500 Model Only)

When this feature is selected the Ride Height will auto-

matically be adjusted depending on the vehicle speed.

Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark

appears next to the feature showing the system has been

activated or the check-mark is removed showing the

system has been deactivated.

• Tire Jack Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system is

disabled to assist with changing a spare tire. Press the box

next to your selection and a check-mark appears next to

the feature showing the system has been activated or the

check-mark is removed showing the system has been

deactivated.

• Transport Mode

When this feature is selected the air suspension system

lowers and then disables to assist with flat bed towing.

Press the box next to your selection and a check-mark

appears next to the feature showing the system has been

activated or the check-mark is removed showing the

system has been deactivated.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 411

• Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be

enabled. Refer to your authorized dealer for further

information.

Trailer Brake

After pressing the “Trailer Brake” button on the touch-

screen the following settings will be available:

• Trailer Select

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Type can be

selected between “Trailer 1,” “Trailer 2,” “Trailer 3” and

“Trailer 4.” To make your selection, scroll up or down

until the preferred setting is highlighted, then press and

release the SELECT button until a check-mark appears

next to the setting, showing that the setting has been

selected.

• Trailer Brake Type

When this feature is selected, the Trailer Brake Type can

be changed between “Light Electric,” “Heavy Electric,”

“Light EOH” and “Heavy EOH.” To make your selection,

scroll up or down until the preferred setting is high-

lighted, then press and release the SELECT button until a

check-mark appears next to the setting, showing that the

setting has been selected. Refer to “Integrated Trailer

Brake Module” in “Starting And Operating.”

Audio

After pressing the “Audio” button on the touchscreen the

following settings will be available:

• Balance/Fade

This feature allows you to adjust the Balance and Fade

settings. Press and drag the speaker icon or use the

arrows to adjust, tap the “C” icon to readjust to the center.

412 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Equalizer

When in this display you may adjust the Bass, Mid and

Treble settings. Adjust the settings with the “+” and “–”

buttons on the touchscreen or by selecting any point on

the scale between the “+” and “–” buttons on the

touchscreen.

• Speed Adjusted Volume

This feature increases or decreases volume relative to

vehicle speed. To change the Speed Adjusted Volume

press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button on the touch-

screen and select from “Off,” “1,” “2” or “3” buttons on

the touchscreen.

• Surround Sound — If Equipped

This feature provides simulated surround sound mode.

To make your selection, press the “Surround Sound”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• AUX Volume Offset — If Equipped

This feature provides the ability to tune the audio level

for portable devices connected through the AUX input.

To make your selection, press the “AUX Volume Offset”

button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Loudness — If Equipped

This feature improves sound quality at lower volumes.

To make your selection, press the “Loudness” button on

the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

Phone/Bluetooth

After pressing the “Phone/Bluetooth” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Paired Phones

This feature shows which phones are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 413

• Paired Audio Sources

This feature shows which audio devices are paired to the

Phone/Bluetooth system. For further information, refer

to the Uconnect Owner’s Manual Supplement.

SiriusXM Setup — If Equipped

After pressing the “SiriusXM Setup” button on the touch-

screen, the following settings will be available:

• Tune Start

Tune Start begins playing the current song from the begin-

ning when you tune to a music channel using one of the

twelve presets, so you can enjoy the complete song. This

feature occurs the first time the preset is selected during that

current song. Tune Start works in the background, so you

will not even realize it’s on, except that you will miss the

experience of joining your favorite song with only a few

seconds left to play. To make your selection, press the “Tune

Start” button on the touchscreen, select “On” or “Off.”

• Channel Skip

SiriusXM can be programmed to designate a group of

channels that are the most desirable to listen to or to

exclude undesirable channels while scanning. To make

your selection, press the “Channel Skip” button on the

touchscreen, select the channels you would like to skip

followed by pressing the back arrow button on the

touchscreen.

• Subscription Information

New vehicle purchasers or lessees will receive a free

limited time subscription to SiriusXM Satellite Radio

with your radio. Following the expiration of the free

services, it will be necessary to access the information on

the Subscription Information screen to re-subscribe.

Press the “Subscription Info” button on the touchscreen

to access the Subscription Information screen.

414 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Write down the Sirius ID numbers for your receiver. To

reactivate your service, either call the number listed on

the screen or visit the provider online.

NOTE: SiriusXM Travel Link is a separate subscription

and is available for U.S. residents only.

Restore Settings

After pressing the “Restore Settings” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Restore Settings

When this feature is selected it will reset the Display,

Clock, Audio, and Radio Settings to their default settings.

To restore the settings to their default setting, press the

“Restore Settings” button on the touchscreen and pop-up

will appear asking Are you sure you want to reset your

settings to default?” select “OK” to restore, or “Cancel” to

exit. Once the settings are restored, a pop-up appears

stating Settings Reset To Default.

Clear Personal Data

After pressing the “Clear Personal Data” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• Clear Personal Data

When this feature is selected it will remove personal data

including Bluetooth devices and presets. To remove

personal information, press the “Clear Personal Data”

button and a pop-up will appear asking Are you sure

you want to clear all personal data?” select “OK” to

Clear, or “Cancel” to exit. Once the data has been cleared,

a pop up appears stating Personal Data Cleared.”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 415

System Information

After pressing the “System Information” button on the

touchscreen the following settings will be available:

• System Information

When System Information is selected, a System Information

screen will appear displaying the system software version.

UCONNECT RADIOS

For detailed information about your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0

and 8.4A/AN radio, refer to your Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement.

iPod/USB/MP3 CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED

Located inside the center console upper lid, this feature

allows an iPod or external USB device to be plugged into the

USB port.

iPod control supports Mini, 4G, Photo, Nano, 5G iPod and

iPhone devices. Some iPod software versions may not fully

support the iPod control features. Please visit Apple’s website

for software updates.

For further information, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement or visit UconnectPhone.com.

Center Console USB/AUX SD Card Media Hub

1 — USB Port

2 — SD Card Slot

3 — Aux Jack

416 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STEERING WHEEL AUDIO CONTROLS — IF

EQUIPPED

The remote sound system controls are located on the back

surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to

access the switches.

The right hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center. Pushing the top of the switch

will increase the volume, and pushing the bottom of the

switch will decrease the volume.

The button located in the center of the right hand control

will switch modes to Radio, CD or other valid audio

sources.

The left hand control is a rocker type switch with a

push-button in the center. The function of the left hand

control is different depending on which mode you are in.

The following describes the left hand control operation in

each mode.

Remote Sound System Controls (Rearview Of Steering

Wheel)

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 417

Radio Operation

Pushing the top of the switch will SEEK up for the next

listenable station and pushing the bottom of the switch

will SEEK down for the next listenable station.

The button located in the center of the left hand control

will tune to the next pre-set station that you have

programmed in the radio pre-set buttons.

CD Player — If Equipped

Pushing the top of the switch once will go to the next

track on the CD. Pressing the bottom of the switch once

will go to the beginning of the current track or to the

beginning of the previous track if it is within eight

seconds after the current track begins to play.

If you push the switch up or down twice, it plays the

second track. If you push the switch up or down three

times, it will play the third, etc.

CD/DVD DISC MAINTENANCE

To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following

precautions:

1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the

surface.

2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,

wiping from center to edge.

3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratch-

ing the disc.

4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,

or anti-static sprays.

5. Store the disc in its case after playing.

6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.

7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become

too high.

418 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular

disc, it may be damaged (e.g., scratched, reflective coat-

ing removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)

oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known

good disc before considering disc player service.

RADIO OPERATION AND MOBILE DEVICES

Under certain conditions, an “on” mobile device in your

vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from your

radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated by

relocating the mobile device antenna. This condition is

not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance does

not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the

antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be

turned down or off during mobile device operation when

not using Uconnect (if equipped).

Regulatory And Safety Information

USA/CANADA

Exposure to Radio Frequency Radiation

The radiated output power of the internal wireless radio

is far below the FCC radio frequency exposure limits.

Nevertheless, the wireless radio will be used in such a

manner that the radio is 20 cm or further from the human

body.

The internal wireless radio operates within guidelines

found in radio frequency safety standards and recom-

mendations, which reflect the consensus of the scientific

community.

The radio manufacturer believes the internal wireless

radio is safe for use by consumers. The level of energy

emitted is far less than the electromagnetic energy emit-

ted by wireless devices such as mobile phones. However,

the use of wireless radios may be restricted in some

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 419

situations or environments, such as aboard airplanes. If

you are unsure of restrictions, you are encouraged to ask

for authorization before turning on the wireless radio.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and

with Industry Canada license-exempt RSS standard(s).

Operation is subject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE:

• This equipment has been tested and found to comply with

the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of

the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses and

can radiate radio frequency energy and, ifnot installed and

used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harm-

ful interference to radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a

particular installation.

• If this equipment does cause harmful interference to

radio or television reception, which can be determined

by turning the equipment off and on, the user is

encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or

more of the following measures:

• Increase the separation between the equipment and

receiver.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio technician

for help.

420 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

CLIMATE CONTROLS

The Climate Control System allows you to regulate the

temperature, amount, and direction of air circulating

throughout the vehicle. The controls are located on the

instrument panel below the radio.

Manual Climate Controls Without Touchscreen —

If Equipped

The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning

system in this vehicle consist of a series of outer rotary

dials and inner push knobs. These comfort controls can

be set to obtain desired interior conditions. Manual Climate Controls

1 — Front Blower 5 — MAX A/C

2 — Temperature Control 6 — Air Conditioning (A/C)

3 — MODE Control 7 — DEFROST Mode

4 — RECIRCULATION Control

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 421

Front Blower Control

There are seven blower speeds. Use

this control to regulate the amount of

air forced through the system in any

mode you select. The blower speed

increases as you move the control

clockwise from the OFF position.

NOTE: Depending on the configuration, your vehicle

may be equipped with four blower speeds.

Temperature Control

Use this control to regulate the tem-

perature of the air inside the passenger

compartment. Rotating the knob coun-

terclockwise, from top center into the

blue area of the scale, indicates cooler

temperatures. Rotating the knob clock-

wise, into the red area, indicates

warmer temperatures.

Air Conditioning Operation

Push the A/C button to engage the Air

Conditioning (A/C). A LED will illu-

minate when the A/C system is

engaged.

422 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

MAX A/C

For maximum cooling, when MAX A/C is selected the

A/C is turned on automatically and the air is

recirculated.

NOTE: A/C cannot be deselected when in MAX A/C

position. The LED will blink three times if the A/C

button is pushed. If your air conditioning performance

seems lower than expected, check the front of the A/C

condenser (located in front of the radiator), for an accu-

mulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water

spray from behind the radiator and through the con-

denser. Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce airflow

to the condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

Mode Control (Air Direction)

Mode control allows you to choose

from several patterns of air distribu-

tion. You can select either a primary

mode, as identified by the symbols, or

a blend of two of these modes. The

closer the control is to a particular

mode, the more air distribution you

receive from that mode.

Panel Mode

Air is directed through the outlets in the instru-

ment panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct

airflow.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 423

Bi-Level Mode

Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.

NOTE: There is a difference in temperature (in any

conditions other than full cold or full hot), between the

upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer

air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved

comfort during sunny but cool conditions.

Floor Mode

Air is directed through the floor outlets with a

small amount through the defrost and side win-

dow demist outlets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side

window demist outlets. This setting works best in

cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at the

windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort,

while reducing moisture on the windshield.

Defrost Mode

Air is directed through the windshield and side

window demist outlets. Use the DEFROST mode

with maximum blower and warm temperature settings

for best windshield and side window defrosting.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST, or a blend of these modes even if the A/C

button is not pushed. This dehumidifies the air to help

dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy, use these

modes only when necessary.

424 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Recirculation Control

Push the Recirculation Control button to choose

between outside air intake or recirculation of the

air inside the vehicle. A LED will illuminate when

you are in Recirculation mode. Only use the

Recirculation mode to temporarily block out any outside

odors, smoke, or dust, and to cool the interior rapidly upon

initial start-up in very hot or humid weather.

NOTE:

• If the RECIRCULATION button is pushed when the

system is in Defrost mode, the Recirculation LED

indicator will flash three times and then turn off to

indicate Recirculation mode is not allowed.

• Continuous use of the Recirculation mode may make

the inside air stuffy and window fogging may occur.

Extended use of this mode is not recommended.

• In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculation

mode will cause windows to fog on the inside because

of moisture buildup inside the vehicle. For maximum

defogging, select the outside air position.

• The A/C can be deselected manually without disturb-

ing the mode control selection by pushing the A/C

button.

Air Outlets

The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can

be adjusted for direction, and turned on or off to control

airflow.

NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear, the center

instrument panel outlets can be directed toward the rear

seat passengers.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 425

Economy Mode

If ECONOMY mode is desired, push the A/C button to

turn off the LED indicator and the A/C compressor.

Rotate the temperature control knob to the desired tem-

perature. Also, make sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or

Floor modes.

Stop/Start System — If Equipped

While in an Autostop, the Climate Controls system may

automatically adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort.

Customer settings will be maintained upon return to an

engine running condition.

Manual Climate Controls With Touchscreen — If

Equipped

Buttons On The Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the radio

touchscreen.

Climate Controls — Buttons On The Faceplate

426 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the radio.

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The

Faceplate and Buttons On The Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the

prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates

when MAX A/C is ON. In MAX A/C, the blower level

and mode position can be adjusted to desired user

settings. Pressing other settings will cause the MAX A/C

operation to switch to the prior settings and the MAX

A/C indicator will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

Temperature Controls — Buttons On The Touchscreen

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 427

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting; the

indicator illuminates when ON.

4. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to

Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-

ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode

with maximum temperature settings for best windshield

and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing

this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual

mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate

system will return the previous setting.

5. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window

defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if

equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear

window defroster is on. The rear window defroster

automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

428 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

6. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

and demist outlets. The Mode settings are as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-

ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air

vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can

be moved up and down or side to side to regulate

airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located

below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount

of airflow from these outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets

and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is

directed through the defrost and side window

demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight

amount of air is directed through the defrost

and side window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side

window demister outlets. This mode works

best in cold or snowy conditions.

NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in MIX

and DEFROST modes even if the A/C button is not

pressed. This dehumidifies the air to help dry the wind-

shield. To improve fuel economy, utilize these modes

only when required.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 429

7. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air

forced through the climate system. There are seven

blower speeds available. Adjusting the blower will cause

automatic mode to switch to manual operation. The

speeds can be selected using either buttons on the

faceplate or buttons on the touchscreen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the control

clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The blower

speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob

counterclockwise.

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

8. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control

ON/OFF.

9. Temperature Control Down Button

Push the button on the faceplate for cooler temperature

settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar

towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature

settings.

10. Temperature Control Up Button

Push the button on the faceplate for warmer temperature

settings. On the touchscreen, slide the temperature bar

towards the blue arrow button for cooler temperature

settings.

430 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the RECIRCULATION control button.

Recirculation mode should only be used temporarily. The

recirculation LED will illuminate on the blower control

knob when this button is selected. Push the button a

second time to turn off the Recirculation mode LED and

allow outside air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The Recirculation

mode is not allowed in Defrost mode to improve window

clearing operation. Recirculation will be disabled auto-

matically if these modes are selected.

Automatic Climate Controls With Touchscreen —

If Equipped

Buttons On The Faceplate

The buttons on the faceplate are located below the

Uconnect screen.

Automatic Climate Controls — Buttons On The

Faceplate

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 431

Buttons On The Touchscreen

Buttons on the touchscreen are accessible on the

Uconnect system screen.

Uconnect 5.0 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

Uconnect 8.4 Automatic Temperature Controls — Buttons

On The Touchscreen

432 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Button Descriptions (Applies To Both Buttons On The

Faceplate And Buttons On The Touchscreen)

1. MAX A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when MAX A/C is ON. Performing

this function again will cause the MAX A/C operation to

switch into manual mode and the MAX A/C indicator

will turn off.

2. A/C Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when A/C is ON. Performing this

function again will cause the A/C operation to switch

into manual mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

3. Recirculation Button

Press and release to change the current setting, the

indicator illuminates when ON.

4. AUTO Operation Button

Automatically controls the interior cabin temperature by

adjusting airflow distribution and amount. Performing

this function will cause the ATC to switch between

manual mode and automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic

Operation” for more information.

5. Front Defrost Button

Press and release to change the current airflow setting to

Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this fea-

ture is ON. Air comes from the windshield and side

window demist outlets. When the defrost button is

selected, the blower level will increase. Use Defrost mode

with maximum temperature settings for best windshield

and side window defrosting and defogging. Performing

this function will cause the ATC to switch into manual

mode. If the front defrost mode is turned off the climate

system will return the previous setting.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 433

6. Rear Defrost Button

Press and release this button to turn on the rear window

defroster (if equipped) and the heated outside mirrors (if

equipped). An indicator will illuminate when the rear

window defroster is on. The rear window defroster

automatically turns off after 10 minutes.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause damage to

the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the rear

window. Do not use abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window. Use a soft cloth

and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled off after

soaking with warm water.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments, or abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface of the

window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the window.

7. Passenger Temperature Control Up Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button on the faceplate for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for

warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

434 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

8. Passenger Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the passenger with independent temperature

control. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the temperature bar towards the blue arrow for

cooler temperature settings.

NOTE: Pressing this button while in Sync mode will

automatically exit Sync.

9. SYNC

Press the Sync button on the touchscreen to toggle the

Sync feature On/Off. The Sync indicator is illuminated

when this feature is enabled. Sync is used to synchronize

the passenger temperature setting with the driver tem-

perature setting. Changing the passenger temperature

setting while in Sync will automatically exit this feature.

10. Blower Control

Blower control is used to regulate the amount of air forced

through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds

available. Adjusting the blower will cause automatic mode

to switch to manual operation. The speeds can be selected

using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or

buttons on the touchscreen as follows:

Blower Control Knob On The Faceplate

The blower speed increases as you turn the blower

control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting.

The blower speed decreases as you turn the blower

control knob counterclockwise.

Button On The Touchscreen

Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting

and the large blower icon to increase the blower setting.

Blower can also be selected by pressing the blower bar

area between the icons.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 435

11. Modes

The airflow distribution mode can be adjusted so air

comes from the instrument panel outlets, floor outlets,

demist outlets and defrost outlets. The Mode settings are

as follows:

• Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument

panel. Each of these outlets can be individu-

ally adjusted to direct the flow of air. The air vanes of

the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved

up and down or side to side to regulate airflow

direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the

air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow

from these outlets.

• Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and

floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed

through the defrost and side window demister outlets.

NOTE: BI-LEVEL mode is designed under comfort con-

ditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and

warmer air from the floor outlets.

• Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight

amount of air is directed through the defrost

and side window demister outlets.

• Mix Mode

Air comes from the floor, defrost and side

window demist outlets. This mode works best

in cold or snowy conditions.

12. Climate Control OFF Button

Press and release this button to turn the Climate Control

ON/OFF.

436 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

13. Driver Temperature Control Down Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Push the button on the faceplate for cooler tempera-

ture settings or on the touchscreen, press and slide the

temperature bar towards the blue arrow for cooler tem-

perature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same

time.

14. Driver Temperature Control Up Button

(Uconnect 8.4)

Provides the driver with independent temperature con-

trol. Push the button on the faceplate button for warmer

temperature settings or on the touchscreen, press and

slide the temperature bar towards the red arrow for

warmer temperature settings.

NOTE: In Sync mode, this button will also automatically

adjust the passenger temperature setting at the same time.

15. Temperature Control (Uconnect 5.0)

Press the temperature button on the touchscreen to regulate

the temperature of the air inside the passenger compart-

ment. Moving the temperature bar into the red area, indi-

cates warmer temperatures. Moving the temperature bar

into the blue area indicates cooler temperatures.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the operator

to manually activate or deactivate the air conditioning

system. When the air conditioning system is turned on,

cool dehumidified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press the A/C

button to turn off the air conditioning and manually

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 437

adjust the blower and airflow mode settings. Also, make

sure to select only Panel, Bi-Level or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• For Manual Climate Controls, if the system is in Mix,

Floor or Defrost Mode, the A/C can be turned off, but

the A/C system shall remain active to prevent fogging

of the windows.

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or side glass,

select Defrost mode and adjust blower speed if

needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems lower than

expected, check the front of the A/C condenser (lo-

cated in front of the radiator), for an accumulation of

dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray from

behind the radiator and through the condenser. Fabric

front fascia protectors may reduce airflow to the

condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cooling perfor-

mance.

Press and release to toggle between MAX A/C and the

prior settings. The button on the touchscreen illuminates

when MAX A/C is ON.

In MAX A/C, the blower level and mode position can be

adjusted to desired user settings. Pressing other settings

will cause the MAX A/C operation to switch to the prior

settings and the MAX A/C indicator will turn off.

Recirculation Control

When outside air contains smoke, odors, or

high humidity, or if rapid cooling is desired,

you may wish to recirculate interior air by

pressing the RECIRCULATION control button

438 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

on the touchscreen or faceplate. Recirculation mode

should only be used temporarily. The recirculation LED

button on the faceplate will illuminate when either

button is selected. Push either button a second time to

turn off the Recirculation mode LED and allow outside

air into the vehicle.

NOTE: In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode may

lead to excessive window fogging. The recirculation

feature may be unavailable (button on the touchscreen

greyed out) if conditions exist that could create fogging

on the inside of the windshield. On systems with Manual

Climate Controls, the recirculation mode is not allowed

in Defrost mode to improve window clearing operation.

Recirculation will be disabled automatically if this mode

is selected. Attempting to use Recirculation while in this

mode will cause the LED in the control button on the

faceplate to blink and then turn off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC)

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the faceplate or press the

“AUTO” button on the touchscreen.

2. Adjust the temperature you would like the system to

maintain by adjusting the driver and passenger tem-

perature buttons on the faceplate or buttons on the

touchscreen. Once the desired temperature is dis-

played, the system will achieve and automatically

maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort level, it is

not necessary to change the temperature. You will

experience the greatest efficiency by simply allowing

the system to function automatically.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 439

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature settings.

The system automatically adjusts the temperature,

mode, and blower speed to provide comfort as quickly

as possible.

• The temperature can be displayed in U.S. or Metric

units by selecting the Uconnect customer-

programmable feature. Refer to the “Uconnect Set-

tings” in this section of the manual.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the Automatic

mode, during cold start-ups the blower fan will remain

on low until the engine warms up. The blower will

increase in speed and transition into Auto mode.

Manual Operation Override

The system allows for manual selection of blower speed,

air distribution mode, A/C status and recirculation con-

trol.

The blower fan speed can be set to any fixed speed by

adjusting the blower control. The fan will now operate at

a fixed speed until additional speeds are selected. This

allows the front occupants to control the volume of air

circulated in the vehicle and cancel the Auto mode.

The operator can also select the direction of the airflow

by selecting one of the available mode settings. A/C

operation and Recirculation control can also be manually

selected in Manual operation.

NOTE: Each of these features operates independently

from each other. If any feature is controlled manually,

temperature control will continue to operate automati-

cally.

440 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Operating Tips

NOTE: Refer to the chart at the end of this section for

suggested control settings for various weather condi-

tions.

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected with a

high-quality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corro-

sion protection and to protect against engine overheating.

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Refer to “Maintenance Procedures” in “Maintaining Your

Vehicle” for proper coolant selection.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster perfor-

mance, make sure the engine cooling system is function-

ing properly and the proper amount, type, and concen-

tration of coolant is used. Refer to “Maintenance

Procedures” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for proper

coolant selection. Use of the air Recirculation mode

during Winter months is not recommended because it

may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of service

(i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the air

conditioning system at idle for about five minutes in

fresh air with the blower setting in high. This will ensure

adequate system lubrication to minimize the possibility

of compressor damage when the system is started again.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 441

Window Fogging and Frosting

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside of the glass in

mild, rainy and/or humid weather. Windows may frost

on the inside of the glass in very cold weather. To clear

the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and increase

the front blower speed. Do not use the Recirculation

mode without A/C for long periods, as fogging may

occur.

NOTE: Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC) will au-

tomatically adjust the climate control settings to reduce

or eliminate window fogging on the front windshield.

When this occurs, recirculation will be unavailable.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in front of the

windshield, is free of obstructions such as leaves. Leaves

collected in the air intake may reduce airflow, can cause

odor, and if they enter the plenum they could plug the

water drains. In winter months, ensure the air intake is

clear of ice, slush and snow.

442 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Control Setting Suggestions For Various Weather Conditions

Operating Tips Chart

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 443

PERSONALIZED MENU BAR

The Uconnect features and services in the main menu bar

are easily changed for your convenience. Simply follow

these steps:

1. Press the “Apps ” button to open the App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected App to replace

an existing shortcut in the main menu bar.

The replaced shortcut will now be an active App/

shortcut on the main menu bar.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Main Menu

444 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

Introducing Uconnect

Start using Uconnect Voice Recognition with these helpful

quick tips. It provides the key Voice Commands and tips you

need to know to control your Uconnect 3.0, 5.0 or 8.4A/

8.4AN system.

Uconnect 3.0

Uconnect 5.0

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 445

If you see the icon on your touchscreen, you have

the Uconnect 8.4AN system. If not, you have a

Uconnect 8.4A system.

Get Started

1. Visit UconnectPhone.com to check mobile device and

feature compatibility and to find phone pairing in-

structions.

2. Reduce background noise. Wind and passenger con-

versations are examples of noise that may impact

recognition.

3. Speak clearly at a normal pace and volume while

facing straight ahead. The microphone is positioned

on the rearview mirror and aimed at the driver.

4. Each time you give a Voice Command, you must first

push either the VR or Phone button, wait until after

the beep, then say your Voice Command.

5. You can interrupt the help message or system prompts

by pushing the VR or Phone button and saying a Voice

Command from current category.

Uconnect 8.4AN

446 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Two buttons are all you need to control your Uconnect

system with your voice.

Basic Voice Commands

The basic Voice Commands below can be given at any

point while using your Uconnect system.

Push the VR button . After the beep, say

• Cancel to stop a current voice session

• Help to hear a list of suggested Voice Commands

• Repeat to listen to the system prompts again

Voice Recognition (VR)/Phone Buttons

1 — Push To Begin Radio, Media, Navigation, Apps And Climate

Functions

2 — Push To Initiate Or To Answer A Phone Call, Send Or Re-

ceive A Text

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 447

Notice the visual cues that inform you of your voice

recognition system’s status. Cues appear on the screen.

Uconnect 3.0

Uconnect 5.0

448 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Radio

Use your voice to quickly get to the AM, FM or SiriusXM

Satellite Radio stations you would like to hear. (Subscrip-

tion or included SiriusXM Satellite Radio trial required.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say

• Tune to ninety-five-point-five FM

• Tune to Satellite Channel Hits 1

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 449

TIP: At any time, if you are not sure of what to say or

want to learn a Voice Command, press the VR button

and say “Help.” The system will provide you with

a list of commands.

Uconnect 5.0 Radio

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Radio

450 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Media

Uconnect offers connections via USB, SD, Bluetooth and

auxiliary ports (If Equipped). Voice operation is only

available for connected USB and iPod devices. (Remote

CD player optional and not available on all vehicles.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands and follow the prompts to

switch your media source or choose an artist.

• Change source to Bluetooth

• Change source to iPod

• Change source to USB

• Play artist Beethoven; Play album Greatest Hits; Play

song Moonlight Sonata; Play genre Classical

TIP: For the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4A/8.4AN systems, press

the Browse button on the touchscreen to see all of the

music on your iPod or USB device. Your Voice Command

must match exactly how the artist, album, song and

genre information is displayed.

Uconnect 5.0 Media

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 451

Phone

Making and answering hands-free phone calls is easy

with Uconnect. When the Phonebook button is illumi-

nated for the Uconnect 5.0 and 8.4A/AN radios, your

system is ready. Check UconnectPhone.com for mobile

phone compatibility and pairing instructions.

Push the Phone button . After the beep, say one of

the following commands

• Call John Smith

• Dial 123-456-7890 and follow the system prompts

• Redial (call previous outgoing phone number)

• Call back (call previous incoming phone number)

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Media

452 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: When providing a Voice Command, push the Phone

button and say “Call,” then pronounce the name

exactly as it appears in your phone book. When a

contact has multiple phone numbers, you can say

“Call John Smith work.”

Uconnect 5.0 Phone

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Phone

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 453

Voice Text Reply

Uconnect will announce incoming text messages. Push

the Phone button and say Listen. (Must have com-

patible mobile phone paired to Uconnect system.)

1. Once an incoming text message is read to you, push

the Phone button . After the beep, say: “Reply.”

2. Listen to the Uconnect prompts. After the beep, repeat

one of the pre-defined messages and follow the system

prompts.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes. Stuck in traffic. See you later.

No. Start without

me. I’ll be late.

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Okay. Where are you? I will be

minutes late.Call me. Are you there

yet?

I’ll call you

later.

I need

directions.

See you in

<number> of

minutes.I’m on my way. Can’t talk right

now.I’m lost. Thanks.

TIP: Your mobile phone must have the full implementa-

tion of the Message Access Profile (MAP) to take advan-

tage of this feature. For details about MAP, visit

UconnectPhone.com.

Apple iPhone iOS 6 or later supports reading incoming

text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple

iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

454 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: Voice Text Reply is not compatible with iPhone, but

if your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can

use your voice to send a text message.

Climate (8.4A/8.4AN)

Too hot? Too cold? Adjust vehicle temperatures hands-

free and keep everyone comfortable while you keep

moving ahead. (If vehicle is equipped with climate

control.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Set driver temperature to 70 degrees

• Set passenger temperature to 70 degrees

iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 455

TIP: Voice Command for Climate may only be used to

adjust the interior temperature of your vehicle. Voice

Command will not work to adjust the heated seats or

steering wheel if equipped.

Navigation (8.4A/8.4AN)

The Uconnect navigation feature helps you save time and

become more productive when you know exactly how to

get to where you want to go. (Navigation is optional on

the Uconnect 8.4A system. See your dealer to activate

navigation at any time.)

1. To enter a destination, push the VR button . After

the beep, say:

• For the 8.4A Uconnect System, say: “Enter state.”

• For the 8.4AN Uconnect System, say: “Find address

800 Chrysler Drive Auburn Hills, Michigan.”

2. Then follow the system prompts.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Climate

456 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

TIP: To start a POI search, push the VR button . After

the beep, say: “ Find nearest coffee shop.”

Uconnect Access (8.4A/8.4AN)

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay attention to the

road. Some Uconnect Access services, including 9-1-1

and Assist, will NOT work without an operable 1X

(voice/data) or 3G (data) network connection.

NOTE: Your vehicle may be transmitting data as autho-

rized by the subscriber.

An included trial and/or subscription is required to take

advantage of the Uconnect Access services in the next

section of this guide. To register with Uconnect Access,

press the Apps button on the 8.4-inch touchscreen to get

started. Detailed registration instructions can be found

on the next page.

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Navigation

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 457

NOTE: Uconnect Access is available only on equipped

vehicles purchased within the continental United States,

Alaska and Hawaii. Services can only be used where

coverage is available; see coverage map for details.

9-1-1 Call

Security Alarm Notification

Remote Door Lock/Unlock

Stolen Vehicle Assistance

Remote Vehicle Start**

Remote Horn and Lights

Yelp Search

Voice Texting

Roadside Assistance Call

WiFi Hotspot***

**If vehicle is equipped.

***Extra charges apply.

Vehicle Health Alert

Your vehicle will send you an email alert if it senses a

problem under the hood with one of your vehicles key

systems. For further information go to the Mopar Owner

Connect website moparownerconnect.com.

458 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

To unlock the full potential of Uconnect Access in your

vehicle, you first need to register with Uconnect Access.

1. Push the ASSIST button on your rearview mirror.

2. Press the “Uconnect Care” button on the touchscreen.

3. A helpful Uconnect Care Agent will register your

vehicle and handle all of the details.

Signing up is easy! Simply follow the steps above. Or,

press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen to

“Register By Web” to complete the process using your

smartphone or computer.

For further information, please visit DriveUconnect.com.

Assist Button

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 459

Mobile App (8.4A/8.4AN)

You’re only a few steps away from using remote com-

mands and playing your favorite music in your vehicle.

To link your internet radio accounts:

1. Download the Uconnect Access App to your mobile

device.

2. Press the Via Mobile icon on the navigation bar at the

bottom of the app.

3. Press the app you’d like to connect to your vehicle.

4. Enter your login information for the selected app and

press Link.

5. Next time you’re in your vehicle, enable Bluetooth,

pair your phone and select the Via Mobile app you

want to play from the Uconnect touchscreen to stream

your personalized music.

Mobile App

460 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

NOTE:

• You can also complete this process on the web. Simply

visit moparownerconnect.com log in and click Set Up

Via Mobile Profile (under Quick Links).

• Once you download the app to your compatible

mobile device, you will also be able to start your

vehicle and lock/unlock its doors from virtually any-

where.

Voice Texting (8.4A/8.4AN)

1. To send a message, push the Phone button . After

the beep, say the following command: “Send mes-

sage to John Smith.”

2. Listen to the prompt. After the beep, dictate the

message you would like to send. Wait for Uconnect to

process your message.

3. The Uconnect system will repeat your message and

provide a variety of options to add to, delete, send or

hear the message again. After the beep, tell Uconnect

what you’d like to do. For instance, if you’re happy

with your message, after the beep, say: “Send.”

You must be registered with Uconnect Access and have a

compatible MAP – enabled smartphone to use your voice

to send a personalized text message. For details about

MAP, visit UconnectPhone.com.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 461

Apple iPhone iOS6 or later supports reading incoming

text messages only. To enable this feature on your Apple

iPhone, follow these 4 simple steps:

TIP:

• Voice Texting is not compatible with iPhone, but if

your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can

use your voice to send a text message.

• Messages are limited to 140 characters.

• The Messaging button on the touchscreen must be

illuminated to use the feature.

iPhone Notification Settings

1 — Select “Settings”

2 — Select “Bluetooth”

3 — Select the (i) for the paired vehicle

4 — Turn on “Show Notifications”

462 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Yelp (8.4A/8.4AN)

Once registered with Uconnect Access, you can use your

voice to search for the most popular places or things

around you.

1. Press the “Apps ” button on the touchscreen.

2. Press the “Yelp” button on the touchscreen.

3. Once the YELP home screen appears on the touch-

screen, push the VR button , then say: “YELP

search.”

4. Listen to the system prompts and after the beep, tell

Uconnect the place or business that you’d like

Uconnect to find.

TIP: Once you perform a search, you can reorganize the

results by selecting either the Best Match, Rating or

Distance tab on the top of the touchscreen display.

Yelp

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 463

SiriusXM Travel Link (8.4A/8.4AN)

Need to find a gas station, view local movie listings,

check a sports score or the 5 - day weather forecast?

SiriusXM Travel Link is a suite of services that brings a

wealth of information right to your Uconnect 8.4AN

system. (Not available for 8.4A system.)

Push the VR button . After the beep, say one of the

following commands:

• Show fuel prices

• Show 5 - day weather forecast

• Show extended weather

TIP: Traffic alerts are not accessible with Voice Com-

mand.

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with Siri Eyes Free, you can use

your voice to send text messages, schedule meetings, set

reminders, and more. For further information go to the

Mopar Owner Connect website moparownerconnect.com.

SiriusXM Travel Link

464 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Do Not Disturb

With Do Not Disturb, you can disable notifications from

incoming calls and texts, allowing you to keep your eyes

on the road and hands on the wheel. For your conve-

nience, there is a counter display to keep track of your

missed calls and text messages while you were using Do

Not Disturb.

Do Not Disturb can automatically reply with a text

message, a call or both, when declining an incoming call

and send it to voicemail.

Automatic reply messages can be:

• “I am driving right now, I will get back to you shortly.”

• Create a custom auto reply message up to 160 charac-

ters.

NOTE: Only the first 25 characters can been seen on the

touchscreen while typing a custom message.

While in Do Not Disturb, Conference Call can be selected

so you can still place a second call without being inter-

rupted by incoming calls.

NOTE:

• Reply with text message is not compatible with iP-

hones.

• Auto reply with text message is only available on

phones that supporting Bluetooth MAP.

General Information

This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry

Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following

two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference that may be

received including interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL 465

NOTE:

• The transmitter has been tested and it complies with

FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to operate the

device.

• The term IC before the certification/registration num-

ber only signifies that Industry Canada technical speci-

fications were met.

Additional Information

Uconnect are registered trademarks and Mopar Owner

Connect is a trademark of FCA US LLC. Android is a

trademark of Google Inc. SiriusXM and all related marks

and logos are trademarks of SiriusXM Radio Inc. Yelp,

Yelp logo, Yelp burst and related marks are registered

trademarks of Yelp.

For Uconnect system support, call: 1-877-855-8400 (24

hours a day 7 days a week) or visit DriveUconnect.com.

Uconnect Access services support, call: 1-855-792-4241

Please have your Uconnect Security PIN ready when you

call.

466 UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

STARTING AND OPERATING

CONTENTS

STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .475

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

▫ Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition . . . . . . . . . . .477

▫ Normal Starting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .477

▫ Extreme Cold Weather

(Below –22°F Or −30°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . .480

▫ Automatic Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .480

▫ Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not

Autostop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .481

▫ To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode. .482

▫ To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System . .484

▫ To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System . .485

▫ System Malfunction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED . . .485

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . .486

▫ Key Ignition Park Interlock. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .488

▫ Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System . . .489

▫ Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —

1500 Models Only (If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . .498

▫ Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —

2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .511

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

▫ Manually Shifted Transfer Case —

If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .526

▫ Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped . . . . . . .532

▫ Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer

Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .539

▫ Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer

Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) —

If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .546

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553

▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553

▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .558

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)

Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .559

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM

(2500/3500 MODELS) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . .562

468 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .562

▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .563

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)

Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .565

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS

ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566

▫ Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .566

▫ Air Suspension Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .570

▫ Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Infromation Display (DID)

Display Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .571

AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON

MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . .573

STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER

WAGON ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON

ONLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

▫ Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle

Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

▫ Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand . . . . . . . . . .580

▫ Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High

Points) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .582

▫ Hill Climbing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .585

▫ Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .588

▫ Airing Down For Off-Road Driving . . . . . . . . .590

▫ Vehicle Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .591

STARTING AND OPERATING 469

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .595

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL . . . . . . . . . . . . .596

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES . . . . . . . . .597

▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597

▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597

DRIVING THROUGH WATER . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600

▫ After Driving Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .600

WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY —

(IF EQUIPPED) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601

▫ Things To Know Before Using Your Winch . . . .601

▫ Understanding The Features Of Your Winch. . .603

▫ Winch Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605

▫ Operating Your Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606

▫ Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618

POWER STEERING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621

▫ Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models . . . . .621

▫ Hydraulic Power Steering —

2500/3500 Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES

ONLY — IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

PARKING BRAKE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

BRAKE SYSTEM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626

▫ Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models

Only (Except Power Wagon) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626

470 STARTING AND OPERATING

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM . . . .626

▫ Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD) . . . .627

▫ Brake System Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . .627

▫ Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light. . . . . . . . . . . .629

▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629

▫ Hill Start Assist (HSA) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630

▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . .633

▫ Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM) . . . . . . . . . .638

▫ Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

▫ Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped . . .640

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN). . . . . . . . . . .647

▫ Tire Terminology And Definitions . . . . . . . . . .649

▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . .650

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION . . . . . . . .655

▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655

▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657

▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . .658

▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658

▫ Tire Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .659

▫ Run Flat Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . .661

▫ Spare Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661

▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664

STARTING AND OPERATING 471

▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION

— IF EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES) . . . . . . .668

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS . . . . .670

▫ Directional Tires — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . .671

▫ Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . .672

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS) . .673

▫ Premium System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .676

▫ Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)

3500 Series Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .681

▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682

FUEL REQUIREMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ 3.6L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ 5.7L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

▫ 6.4L Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .684

▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . .686

▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .686

▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

▫ Fuel System Cautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .688

▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

472 STARTING AND OPERATING

▫ E-85 General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

▫ Ethanol Fuel (E-85) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690

▫ Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .690

▫ Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel

Vehicles (E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles . . . . . . .691

▫ Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691

▫ Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

▫ Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

▫ Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

ADDING FUEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .695

VEHICLE LOADING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

▫ Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

TRAILER TOWING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

▫ Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706

▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708

▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .717

SNOWPLOW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719

▫ 1500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719

▫ 2500/3500 Models Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .720

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND

MOTORHOME, ETC.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723

STARTING AND OPERATING 473

▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle . .723

▫ Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .724

▫ Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive

Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .725

474 STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING PROCEDURES

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both

inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belt.

The starter should not be operated for more than 10-

second intervals. Waiting a few seconds between such

intervals will protect the starter from overheating.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

keyless ignition node is in the OFF mode, remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside parked

vehicles in hot weather. Interior heat build-up may

cause serious injury or death.

STARTING AND OPERATING 475

Normal Starting

Normal starting of either a warm or cold engine is

obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator

pedal. Cycle the ignition to the START position and

release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to start

within 10 seconds, cycle the ignition to the OFF position,

wait five seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting”

procedure.

Automatic Transmission

Start the engine with the transmission in PARK position.

Apply the brake before shifting into any driving range.

NOTE:

• This vehicle is equipped with a transmission shift

interlocking system. The brake pedal must be pressed

to shift out of PARK.

• If equipped with an 8 speed transmission starting the

vehicle in NEUTRAL is not possible unless the Manual

Park Release has been activated. For the Manual Park

Release operation refer to Manual Park Release in

“What To Do In Emergencies”.

Tip Start Feature

Do not press the accelerator. Cycle the ignition switch

briefly to the START position and release it. The starter

motor will continue to run but will automatically disen-

gage when the engine is running.

476 STARTING AND OPERATING

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Ignition

This feature allows the driver to oper-

ate the ignition switch with the push

of a button, as long as the Remote

Start/Keyless Enter-N-Go Key Fob is

in the passenger compartment.

Normal Starting

To Turn On The Engine Using The ENGINE

START/STOP Button

1. The transmission must be in PARK or NEUTRAL.

2. Press and hold the brake pedal while pushing the

ENGINE START/STOP button once.

3. The system takes over and attempts to start the

vehicle. If the vehicle fails to start, the starter will

disengage automatically after 10 seconds.

4. If you wish to stop the cranking of the engine prior to

the engine starting, push the button again.

NOTE: Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine

is obtained without pumping or pressing the accelerator

pedal.

To Turn Off The Engine Using ENGINE

START/STOP Button

1. Place the gear selector in PARK, then push and release

the ENGINE START/STOP button.

2. The ignition switch will return to the OFF position.

STARTING AND OPERATING 477

3. If the gear selector is not in PARK, the ENGINE

START/STOP button must be held for two seconds or

three short pushes in a row with the vehicle speed

above 5 mph (8 km/h) before the engine will shut off.

The ignition switch position will remain in the ACC

position until the gear selector is in PARK and the

button is pushed twice to the OFF position. If the gear

selector is not in PARK and the ENGINE START/

STOP button is pushed once, the EVIC/DID will

display a “Vehicle Not In Park” message and the

engine will remain running. Never leave a vehicle out

of the PARK position, or it could roll.

NOTE: If the ignition switch is left in the ACC or RUN

(engine not running) position and the transmission is in

PARK, the system will automatically time out after 30

minutes of inactivity and the ignition will switch to the

OFF position.

ENGINE START/STOP Button Functions — With

Driver’s Foot OFF The Brake Pedal (In PARK Or

NEUTRAL Position)

The ENGINE START/STOP button operates similar to an

ignition switch. It has three positions, OFF, ACC, RUN.

To change the ignition switch positions without starting

the vehicle and use the accessories follow these steps:

1. Starting with the ignition in the OFF position:

2. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button once to

change the ignition to the ACC position.

3. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a second time

to change the ignition to the RUN position.

4. Push the ENGINE START/STOP button a third time to

return the ignition to the OFF position.

478 STARTING AND OPERATING

Extreme Cold Weather (Below –22°F Or −30°C)

To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of

an externally powered electric engine block heater (avail-

able from your authorized dealer) is recommended.

If Engine Fails To Start

If the engine fails to start after you have followed the

“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push

the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it

there while the engine is cranking. This should clear any

excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.

The starter motor will engage automatically, run for 10

seconds, and then disengage. Once this occurs, release

the accelerator pedal and the brake pedal, wait 10 to 15

seconds, then repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.

CAUTION!

To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the

engine for more than 10 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to

15 seconds before trying again.

WARNING!

• Never pour fuel or other flammable liquids into

the throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to

start the vehicle. This could result in a flash fire

causing serious personal injury.

• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it

started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic trans-

mission cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel

could enter the catalytic converter and once the

engine has started, ignite and damage the converter

and vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 479

WARNING! (Continued)

• If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster

cables may be used to obtain a start from a booster

battery or the battery in another vehicle. This type

of start can be dangerous if done improperly. Refer

to “Jump-Starting” in “What To Do In Emergen-

cies” for further information.

If the engine has been flooded, it may start to run, but not

have enough power to continue running when the igni-

tion button/key is released. If this occurs, continue

cranking with the accelerator pedal pushed all the way to

the floor. Release the accelerator pedal and the ignition

button/key once the engine is running smoothly.

If the engine shows no sign of starting after a 10 second

period of engine cranking with the accelerator pedal held

to the floor, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the

“Normal Starting” procedure.

After Starting

The idle speed is controlled automatically, and it will

decrease as the engine warms up.

STOP/START SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

The Stop/Start function is developed to save fuel and

reduce emissions. The system will stop the engine auto-

matically during a vehicle stop if the required conditions

are met. Releasing the brake pedal will automatically

restart the vehicle.

Automatic Mode

The Stop/Start feature is enabled after every normal

customer engine start. It will remain in STOP/START

NOT READY until you drive forward with a vehicle

speed greater than 5 mph (8 km/h). At that time, the

system will go into STOP/START READY and if all other

conditions are met, can go into an STOP/START AUTO

STOP ACTIVE “Autostop” mode.

480 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Activate The Autostop Mode, The Following Must

Occur:

1. The system must be in STOP/START READY state. A

STOP/START READY message will be displayed in

the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/

Driver Information Display (DID) within the Stop/

Start section. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

2. The vehicle must be completely stopped.

3. The transmission Gear Selector must be in DRIVE and

the brake pedal depressed.

The engine will shut down, the tachometer will move to

the zero position and the stop/start telltale will illumi-

nate indicating you are in an Autostop. While in an

Autostop, the Climate Controls system may automati-

cally adjust airflow to maintain cabin comfort. Customer

settings will be maintained upon return to an engine

running condition.

Possible Reasons The Engine Does Not Autostop

Prior to engine shut down, the system will check many

safety and comfort conditions to see if they are fulfilled.

In following situations, the engine will not stop:

• Driver’s seat belt is not buckled.

• Driver’s door is not closed.

• Outside temperature is less than 1°F (–17°C) or greater

than 104°F (40°C).

• Battery temperature too warm or cold.

• The vehicle is on a steep grade.

STARTING AND OPERATING 481

• Cabin heating or cooling is in process and an accept-

able cabin temperature has not been achieved.

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode at a high blower

speed.

• Engine has not reached normal operating temperature.

• Battery discharged.

• The transmission is not in DRIVE.

• Hood is open.

• Vehicle is in 4LO transfer case mode.

Other factors which can inhibit AutoStop include: fuel

level, accelerator pedal input, engine temp too high and

steering angle.

It may be possible for the vehicle to be driven several

times without the STOP/START system going into a

STOP/START READY state under more extreme condi-

tions of the items listed above.

To Start The Engine While In Autostop Mode

While in DRIVE, the engine will start when the brake

pedal is released or the throttle pedal is depressed. The

transmission will automatically reengage upon engine

restart. During this transition, the brakes will hold the

vehicle to avoid undesired vehicle movement.

Conditions That Will Cause The Engine To Start Auto-

matically While In Autostop Mode

The engine will start automatically when:

• The transmission selector is moved from DRIVE to

REVERSE or NEUTRAL

• To maintain cabin temperature near the HVAC settings

• HVAC is set to full defrost mode

• Autostop time exceeds 5 minutes

• Battery voltage drops too low

482 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Low brake vacuum (e.g. after several brake pedal

applications)

• STOP/START OFF switch is pushed

• 4WD system is put into 4LO mode

• The emissions system requires it

• A STOP/START system error occurs

Conditions That Force An Automatic Shift To Park

While In Autostop Mode

The engine will not start automatically and the transmis-

sion will be placed in PARK if:

• The driver door is open and brake pedal released

• The driver door is open and the driver seat belt is

unbuckled

• The engine hood has been opened

• A STOP/START system error occurs

The engine may then be restarted by moving the trans-

mission shift selector out of PARK (e.g. to DRIVE) or, in

some cases, only by a KEY START. The Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display

(DID) will display a SHIFT OUT OF PARK message, or a

STOP/START KEY START REQUIRED message, to indi-

cate which action is required.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 483

To Manually Turn Off The Stop Start System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the

switch bank). The light on the switch will illuminate.

2. The STOP/START OFF message will appear in Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver In-

formation Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

3. At the next vehicle stop (after turning off the STOP/

START system) the engine will not be stopped.

4. If the STOP/START system is manually turned off, the

engine can only be started and stopped by cycling the

ignition switch.

5. The STOP/START system will reset itself back to an

ON condition every time the key is turned off and

back on.

STOP/START OFF Switch

484 STARTING AND OPERATING

To Manually Turn On The Stop Start System

1. Push the STOP/START Off switch (located on the

switch bank).

2. The light on the switch will turn off.

System Malfunction

If there is a malfunction in the STOP/START system, the

system will not shut down the engine. A “SERVICE

STOP/START SYSTEM” message will appear in the

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver In-

formation Display (DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

The system will need to be checked by your authorized

dealer.

ENGINE BLOCK HEATER — IF EQUIPPED

The engine block heater warms the engine, and permits

quicker starts in cold weather. Connect the cord to a

standard 110-115 Volt AC electrical outlet with a

grounded, three-wire extension cord.

1500 Models

The engine block heater cord is routed under the hood on

the passenger side of the vehicle near the right head lamp

assembly. It is located between the front grill and the

radiator, but underneath the black upper seal.

2500/3500 Models

The engine block heater cord is routed through the grille

by the right front tow hook.

STARTING AND OPERATING 485

It includes a removable cap that is secured by a tethered

strap. It also has a c-clip that is used for storage when not

in use for the winter months. During winter months,

remove the heater cord wiring assembly from itself on

the c-clip.

The engine block heater must be plugged in at least one

hour to have an adequate warming effect on the engine.

WARNING!

Remember to disconnect the engine block heater

cord before driving. Damage to the 110-115 Volt

electrical cord could cause electrocution.

AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if the follow-

ing precautions are not observed:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE only after

the vehicle has come to a complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE, NEU-

TRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is above idle

speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot

is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

NOTE: You must press and hold the brake pedal while

shifting out of PARK.

486 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. Before exiting a vehicle, always shift an

automatic transmission into PARK, or a manual

transmission into FIRST gear or REVERSE, turn

the engine OFF, apply the parking brake, and

remove the ignition key. When the ignition is in the

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

LOCK/OFF (key removal) position, an automatic

transmission is locked in PARK, securing the ve-

hicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key

fob from the ignition and lock your vehicle. If

equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make

sure the keyless ignition node is in “OFF” mode,

remove the Key Fob from the vehicle and lock the

vehicle.

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Check by trying to move the

transmission gear selector out of PARK with the

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 487

WARNING! (Continued)

brake pedal released. Make sure the transmission

is in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition of a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

A child could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

Key Ignition Park Interlock

This vehicle is equipped with a Key Ignition Park Inter-

lock which requires the transmission to be in PARK

before the ignition switch can be turned to the LOCK/

OFF (key removal) position. The Key Fob can only be

removed from the ignition when the ignition is in the

LOCK/OFF position, and the transmission is locked in

PARK whenever the ignition switch is in the LOCK/OFF

position.

NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the

Key Fob in the ignition switch to warn you that this

safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started

and stopped but the Key Fob cannot be removed until

you obtain service.

488 STARTING AND OPERATING

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Transmission Shift

Interlock System (BTSI) that holds the transmission gear

selector in PARK unless the brakes are applied. To shift

the transmission out of PARK, the ignition switch must

be turned to the ON/RUN position (engine running, for

vehicles with eight-speed transmission) and the brake

pedal must be pressed.

In 8-speed vehicles, the brake pedal must also be pressed

to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE when

the vehicle is stopped or moving at low speeds.

Eight-Speed Automatic Transmission — If

Equipped

The transmission is controlled using a rotary electronic

gear selector located on the instrument panel. The trans-

mission gear range (PRND) is displayed both above the

gear selector and in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID). To

select a gear range, simply rotate the gear selector. You

must press the brake pedal to shift the transmission out

of PARK, or to shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or

REVERSE, when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low

speeds (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock Sys-

tem” in this section). To shift past multiple gear ranges at

once (such as Park to Drive), simply rotate the gear

selector to the appropriate detent. Select the DRIVE range

for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

STARTING AND OPERATING 489

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-

VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE positions. Manual down-

shifts can be made using the Electronic Range Select

(ERS) shift control (refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS)

Operation in this section for further information). Press-

ing the GEAR-/GEAR+ switches (on the steering wheel)

while in the DRIVE position will select the highest

available transmission gear, and will display that gear

limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Models with

the Driver Information Display (DID) will display both

the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear, while

in ERS mode.

Electronic Transmission Gear Selector

490 STARTING AND OPERATING

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK. As an added precau-

tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a downhill

grade and away from the curb on an uphill grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the

transfer case is in a drive position.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not in PARK. Make sure the transmission is

in PARK before leaving the vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 491

WARNING! (Continued)

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF

(key removal) position, the transmission is locked

in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted

movement.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking

brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK,

turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the

ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless

ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the key fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with access

to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to be in a

vehicle unattended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally

injured. Children should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

(Continued)

492 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/ RUN

position. A child could operate power windows,

other controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

• Before moving the transmission gear selector out of

PARK, you must start the engine, and also press the

brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear selector

could result.

The following indicator should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into PARK:

• With brake pedal released, look at the transmission

gear position display and verify that it indicates the

PARK position (P).

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. Apply the parking

brake and shift the transmission into PARK if you must

leave the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 493

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through all forward gears. The

DRIVE position provides optimum driving characteris-

tics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

while towing a heavy trailer), select TOW/HAUL mode

or use the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control

(refer to Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation in this

section for further information) to select a lower gear

range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range

will improve performance and extend transmission life

by reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

494 STARTING AND OPERATING

During extremely cold temperatures (-22°F [-30°C] or

below), transmission operation may be modified depend-

ing on engine and transmission temperature as well as

vehicle speed. Normal operation will resume once the

transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission may

operate only in certain gears, or may not shift at all.

Vehicle performance may be severely degraded and the

engine may stall. In some situations, the transmission

may not re-engage if the engine is turned off and

restarted. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. A message in the instrument cluster will

inform the driver of the more serious conditions, and

indicate what actions may be necessary.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

NOTE: In cases where the instrument cluster message

indicates the transmission may not re-engage after en-

gine shutdown, perform this procedure only in a desired

location (preferably, at your authorized dealer).

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if possible. If not,

shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position. On

vehicles with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the

ignition switch until the engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

STARTING AND OPERATING 495

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your earliest

possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has diagnostic

equipment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer

service is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —

Eight-Speed Transmission

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the

driver to limit the highest available gear when the transmis-

sion is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the transmission

gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmission will not shift

above fourth gear (except to prevent engine overspeed), but

will shift through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any

vehicle speed. When the transmission gear selector is in

DRIVE, the transmission will operate automatically, shift-

ing between all available gears. Tapping the GEAR-

switch (on the steering wheel) will activate ERS mode,

display the current gear in the instrument cluster, and set

that gear as the top available gear. Once in ERS mode,

tapping the GEAR- or GEAR+ switch will change the top

available gear.

496 STARTING AND OPERATING

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the GEAR+

switch until the gear limit display disappears from the

instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

When to Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a

heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-

curs, press the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce

the potential for transmission overheating or failure due

to excessive shifting.

1 — ERS (-) Switch 2 — ERS (+) Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 497

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the

instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has

been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores

normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at

engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch

must be pushed each time the engine is started.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —

1500 Models Only (If Equipped)

The transmission gear position display (located in the

instrument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range.

The gear selector is mounted either on the right side of

the steering column (if equipped) or on the console (if

equipped). You must press the brake pedal to move the

gear selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission

Shift Interlock System” in this section). To drive, move

the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to the DRIVE

position. Pull the gear selector toward you when shifting

into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of PARK

(column shift only).

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

TOW/HAUL Switch

498 STARTING AND OPERATING

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-

VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual

downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range

Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further infor-

mation). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (column shift)

or moving the gear selector to the left or right (-/+)

(console shift) while in the DRIVE position will select the

highest available transmission gear, and will display that

gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Models

with the Driver Information Display (DID) will display

both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,

while in ERS mode.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

STARTING AND OPERATING 499

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the

transfer case is in a drive position.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others

if it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to

move the gear selector out of PARK with the brake

pedal released. Make sure the transmission is in

PARK before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL

if the engine speed is higher than idle speed. If

your foot is not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the

vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in re-

verse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit

someone or something. Only shift into gear when

the engine is idling normally and your foot is

firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

500 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure those

in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles, you should

never exit a vehicle while the engine is running. When

the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF (key removal) posi-

tion, the transmission is locked in PARK, securing the

vehicle against unwanted movement.

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking

brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK,

turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the

ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless

ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 501

CAUTION!

• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you

must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF

position to the ON/RUN position, and also press

the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear

selector could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the column-mounted

gear selector toward you and move it all the way

counterclockwise until it stops. For console-mounted

shifter, firmly move the gear selector all the way

forward and to the left until it stops.

• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully

seated in the PARK gate.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

Reverse only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

502 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through underdrive first and sec-

ond gears, direct third gear and overdrive fourth and

fifth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-

ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

To access all six available gears, you must use the

Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, described

below.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as when

operating the vehicle under heavy loading conditions, in

hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or while

towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range Select (ERS)

shift control (refer to “Electronic Range Select (ERS) Opera-

tion” in this section for further information) to select a lower

gear range. Under these conditions, using a lower gear range

STARTING AND OPERATING 503

will improve performance and extend transmission life by

reducing excessive shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the

transmission shift schedule and expand the range of

torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to

prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger

of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning

Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate

differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded

vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep

grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In

these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a

significant additional heat load on the cooling system.

Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible

gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL

(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this

excess heat generation.

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the

torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or

below), operation may briefly be limited to first and

direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the

transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

504 STARTING AND OPERATING

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for

abnormal conditions. If a condition is detected that could

result in transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home

Mode is activated. In this mode, the transmission remains

in direct gear regardless of which forward gear is se-

lected. PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to

operate. The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be

driven to an authorized dealer for service without dam-

aging the transmission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer

service is required.

STARTING AND OPERATING 505

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation —

Six-Speed Transmission (1500 Models Only)

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the

driver to limit the highest available gear when the

transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the

transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmis-

sion will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift

through the lower gears normally.

Use of ERS (or TOW/HAUL mode) also enables an

additional underdrive gear which is not normally used

during through-gear accelerations. This additional gear

can improve vehicle performance and cooling capability

when towing a trailer on certain grades. In ERS mode,

gears 1 though 3 are underdrive gears, and ERS 4 is direct

drive. ERS 5 and 6 (Overdrive gears) are the same as the

normal fourth and fifth gears.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any

vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE

position, the transmission will operate automatically,

shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)

switch (column shift) or tapping the gear selector to the

left (-) (console shift) will activate ERS mode, display the

current gear in the instrument cluster, and set that gear as

the top available gear. For example, if you are in DRIVE

and are in third (direct) gear, when you tap the gear

selector/switch one time in the (-) direction, the display

will show 4 (ERS 4 is direct gear). Another tap down (-)

will shift the transmission down to ERS 3 (the added

underdrive gear). Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+)

will change the top available gear.

506 STARTING AND OPERATING

To exit ERS mode, simply hold the gear selector to the

right (+) (console shift) or press and hold the ERS (+)

switch (column shift) until the gear limit display disap-

pears from the instrument cluster.

Column Gear Selector Console Gear Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 507

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their

grip and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum

deceleration (engine braking), simply press and hold the

gear selector to the left (-) (console shift) or the ERS (-) switch

down (column shift). The transmission will shift to the range

from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERS for engine braking while descend-

ing steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the

engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en-

gine overspeed.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically

controlled Overdrive (fourth and fifth gears). The trans-

mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the

following conditions are present:

• the gear selector is in the DRIVE position,

• the transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-

perature,

• the engine coolant (antifreeze) has reached an ad-

equate temperature,

• vehicle speed is sufficiently high,

• the TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated, and

• the driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

508 STARTING AND OPERATING

When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a

heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-

curs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce

the potential for transmission overheating or failure due

to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL

mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-

mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-

ing) when the throttle is closed and/or during steady

braking maneuvers.

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the

instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has

been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores

normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at

engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch

must be pushed each time the engine is started.

TOW/HAUL Switch

STARTING AND OPERATING 509

WARNING!

Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving

in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine

braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the

vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of

vehicle control, which may cause an accident possi-

bly resulting in personal injury or death.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, and the

transmission will not shift into the top overdrive gear,

until the transmission fluid and engine coolant are

warm [usually after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving].

Because top gear is disabled, and the engine speed is

higher when the torque converter clutch is not en-

gaged, it may seem as if the transmission is not shifting

properly when cold. This is normal. Using the Elec-

tronic Range Select (ERS) shift control, when the

transmission is sufficiently warm, will demonstrate

that the transmission is able to shift into and out of

Overdrive.

510 STARTING AND OPERATING

• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the

first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-

sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid

partially draining from the torque converter into the

transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause

damage to the transmission. The torque converter will

refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

Six-Speed Automatic Transmission —

2500/3500 Models Only

The transmission gear position display (located in the in-

strument cluster) indicates the transmission gear range. The

gear selector is mounted on the right side of the steering

column. You must press the brake pedal to move the gear

selector out of PARK (refer to “Brake/Transmission Shift

Interlock System” in this section for further information). To

drive, move the gear selector from PARK or NEUTRAL to

the DRIVE position. Pull the gear selector toward you when

shifting into REVERSE or PARK, or when shifting out of

PARK.

The electronically-controlled transmission provides a

precise shift schedule. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts on a new

vehicle may be somewhat abrupt. This is a normal

condition, and precision shifts will develop within a few

hundred miles (kilometers).

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE when the

accelerator pedal is released and the vehicle is stopped.

Be sure to keep your foot on the brake pedal when

shifting between these gears.

The transmission gear selector has only PARK, RE-

VERSE, NEUTRAL, and DRIVE shift positions. Manual

downshifts can be made using the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range

Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further infor-

mation). Pressing the ERS (-/+) switches (on the gear

selector) while in the DRIVE position will select the

highest available transmission gear, and will display that

gear limit in the instrument cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc. Models

STARTING AND OPERATING 511

with the Driver Information Display (DID) will display

both the selected gear limit, and the actual current gear,

while in ERS mode.

Gear Ranges

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or

NEUTRAL into another gear range.

NOTE: After selecting any gear range, wait a moment to

allow the selected gear to engage before accelerating.

This is especially important when the engine is cold.

PARK (P)

This range supplements the parking brake by locking the

transmission. The engine can be started in this range.

Never attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the parking brake when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may shift the

transmission into PARK first, and then apply the parking

brake.

When parking on a hill, apply the parking brake before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise the load on

the transmission locking mechanism may make it diffi-

cult to move the gear selector out of PARK. As an added

precaution, turn the front wheels toward the curb on a

downhill grade and away from the curb on an uphill

grade.

NOTE: On four-wheel drive vehicles be sure that the

transfer case is in a drive position.

512 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you and others if

it is not completely in PARK. Check by trying to move

the gear selector out of PARK with the brake pedal

released. Make sure the transmission is in PARK

before leaving the vehicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or NEUTRAL if the

engine speed is higher than idle speed. If your foot is

not firmly pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle could

accelerate quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose

control of the vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is idling normally

and your foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure

those in or near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,

you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is

running. When the ignition is in the LOCK/OFF

(key removal) position, the transmission is locked

in PARK, securing the vehicle against unwanted

movement.

• Before exiting a vehicle, always apply the parking

brake, shift the automatic transmission into PARK,

turn the vehicle OFF, remove the key fob from the

ignition and lock your vehicle. If equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go, always make sure the keyless

ignition node is in “OFF” mode, remove the Key

Fob from the vehicle and lock the vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 513

WARNING! (Continued)

• When leaving the vehicle, always make sure the

ignition is in the OFF position, remove the Key Fob

from the vehicle, and lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Allowing children to

be in a vehicle unattended is dangerous for a

number of reasons. A child or others could be

seriously or fatally injured. Children should be

warned not to touch the parking brake, brake pedal

or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle (or

in a location accessible to children), and do not

leave the ignition (in a vehicle equipped with

Keyless Enter-N-Go) in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. A child could operate power windows, other

controls, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the gear selector out of PARK, you

must turn the ignition switch from the LOCK/OFF

position to the ON/RUN position, and also press

the brake pedal. Otherwise, damage to the gear

selector could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range, as this

can damage the drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to ensure that

you have engaged the transmission into the PARK posi-

tion:

• When shifting into PARK, pull the gear selector to-

ward you and move it all the way counterclockwise

until it stops.

514 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Release the gear selector and make sure it is fully

seated in the PARK gate.

• Look at the transmission gear position display and

verify that it indicates the PARK position (P).

• With brake pedal released, verify that the gear selector

will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle backward. Shift into

REVERSE only after the vehicle has come to a complete

stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing for prolonged

periods with the engine running. The engine may be

started in this range. Apply the parking brake and shift

the transmission into PARK if you must leave the vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn off the

ignition to coast down a hill. These are unsafe

practices that limit your response to changing traffic

or road conditions. You might lose control of the

vehicle and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for any other

reason with the transmission in NEUTRAL can cause

severe transmission damage. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “What To Do In Emergencies”

for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 515

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and highway

driving. It provides the smoothest upshifts and down-

shifts, and the best fuel economy. The transmission

automatically upshifts through underdrive first, second,

and third gears, direct fourth gear and overdrive fifth and

sixth gears. The DRIVE position provides optimum driv-

ing characteristics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs (such as

when operating the vehicle under heavy loading condi-

tions, in hilly terrain, traveling into strong head winds, or

while towing a heavy trailer), use the Electronic Range

Select (ERS) shift control (refer to “Electronic Range

Select (ERS) Operation” in this section for further infor-

mation) to select a lower gear range. Under these condi-

tions, using a lower gear range will improve performance

and extend transmission life by reducing excessive shift-

ing and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds normal operat-

ing limits, the powertrain controller will modify the

transmission shift schedule and expand the range of

torque converter clutch engagement. This is done to

prevent transmission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot or is in danger

of overheating, the “Transmission Temperature Warning

Light” may illuminate and the transmission may operate

differently until the transmission cools down.

NOTE: Use caution when operating a heavily loaded

vehicle at low speeds (such as towing a trailer up a steep

grade, or in stop-and-go traffic) during hot weather. In

these conditions, torque converter slip can impose a

significant additional heat load on the cooling system.

Downshifting the transmission to the lowest possible

gear (when climbing a grade), or shifting to NEUTRAL

(when stopped in heavy traffic) can help to reduce this

excess heat generation.

516 STARTING AND OPERATING

During cold temperatures, transmission operation may

be modified depending on engine and transmission

temperature as well as vehicle speed. This feature im-

proves warm up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of both the

torque converter clutch and the top overdrive gear are

inhibited until the transmission fluid is warm (refer to the

“Note” under “Torque Converter Clutch” in this section).

During extremely cold temperatures (-16°F [-27°C] or

below), operation may briefly be limited to first and

direct gears only. Normal operation will resume once the

transmission temperature has risen to a suitable level.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is monitored electronically for abnor-

mal conditions. If a condition is detected that could result in

transmission damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is

activated. In this mode, the transmission remains in fourth

gear regardless of which forward gear is selected. PARK,

REVERSE, and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be illuminated.

Limp Home Mode allows the vehicle to be driven to an

authorized dealer for service without damaging the trans-

mission.

In the event of a momentary problem, the transmission

can be reset to regain all forward gears by performing the

following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position.

4. Wait approximately 10 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the problem is no

longer detected, the transmission will return to normal

operation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 517

NOTE: Even if the transmission can be reset, we recom-

mend that you visit your authorized dealer at your

earliest possible convenience. Your authorized dealer has

diagnostic equipment to determine if the problem could

recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, authorized dealer

service is required.

Electronic Range Select (ERS) Operation

The Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift control allows the

driver to limit the highest available gear when the

transmission is in DRIVE. For example, if you set the

transmission gear limit to 4 (fourth gear), the transmis-

sion will not shift above fourth gear, but will shift

through the lower gears normally.

You can switch between DRIVE and ERS mode at any

vehicle speed. When the gear selector is in the DRIVE

position, the transmission will operate automatically,

shifting between all available gears. Tapping the ERS (-)

switch will activate ERS mode, display the current gear in

the instrument cluster, and set that gear as the top

available gear. Once in ERS mode, tapping (-) or (+) will

change the top available gear.

Column Gear Selector

518 STARTING AND OPERATING

To exit ERS mode, simply push and hold the ERS (+)

switch until the gear limit display disappears from the

instrument cluster.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine braking on a

slippery surface. The drive wheels could lose their grip

and the vehicle could skid, causing a collision or per-

sonal injury.

NOTE: To select the proper gear position for maximum

deceleration (engine braking), simply push and hold the

ERS (-) switch. The transmission will shift to the range

from which the vehicle can best be slowed down.

CAUTION!

When using ERS for engine braking while descend-

ing steep grades, be careful not to overspeed the

engine. Apply the brakes as needed to prevent en-

gine overspeed.

Overdrive Operation

The automatic transmission includes an electronically

controlled Overdrive (fifth and sixth gears). The trans-

mission will automatically shift into Overdrive if the

following conditions are present:

• The gear selector is in the DRIVE position.

• The transmission fluid has reached an adequate tem-

perature.

STARTING AND OPERATING 519

• The engine coolant has reached an adequate tempera-

ture.

• Vehicle speed is sufficiently high.

• The TOW/HAUL switch has not been activated.

• The driver is not heavily pressing the accelerator.

When To Use TOW/HAUL Mode

When driving in hilly areas, towing a trailer, carrying a

heavy load, etc., and frequent transmission shifting oc-

curs, push the TOW/HAUL switch to activate TOW/

HAUL mode. This will improve performance and reduce

the potential for transmission overheating or failure due

to excessive shifting. When operating in TOW/HAUL

mode, transmission upshifts are delayed, and the trans-

mission will automatically downshift (for engine brak-

ing) during steady braking maneuvers.

The “TOW/HAUL Indicator Light” will illuminate in the

instrument cluster to indicate that TOW/HAUL mode has

been activated. Pushing the switch a second time restores

normal operation. Normal operation is always the default at

engine start-up. If TOW/HAUL mode is desired, the switch

must be pushed each time the engine is started.

TOW/HAUL Switch

520 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Do not use the “TOW/HAUL” feature when driving

in icy or slippery conditions. The increased engine

braking can cause the rear wheels to slide, and the

vehicle to swing around with the possible loss of

vehicle control, which may cause an accident possi-

bly resulting in personal injury or death.

Torque Converter Clutch

A feature designed to improve fuel economy has been

included in the automatic transmission on your vehicle.

A clutch within the torque converter engages automati-

cally at calibrated speeds. This may result in a slightly

different feeling or response during normal operation in

the upper gears. When the vehicle speed drops or during

some accelerations, the clutch automatically disengages.

NOTE:

• The torque converter clutch will not engage, until the

transmission fluid and engine coolant are warm [usu-

ally after 1 to 3 miles (2 to 5 km) of driving]. Because

the engine speed is higher when the torque converter

clutch is not engaged, it may seem as if the transmis-

sion is not shifting into Overdrive when cold. This is

normal. Using the Electronic Range Select (ERS) shift

control, when the transmission is sufficiently warm,

will demonstrate that the transmission is able to shift

into and out of Overdrive.

• If the vehicle has not been driven for several days, the

first few seconds of operation after shifting the transmis-

sion into gear may seem sluggish. This is due to the fluid

partially draining from the torque converter into the

transmission. This condition is normal and will not cause

damage to the transmission. The torque converter will

refill within five seconds after starting the engine.

STARTING AND OPERATING 521

FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE OPERATION — IF

EQUIPPED

Four-wheel drive trucks are equipped with either a

manually shifted transfer case or an electronically shifted

transfer case. Refer to the operating instructions for your

transfer case, located in this section for further informa-

tion.

Manually Shifted Transfer Case — If Equipped

The transfer case provides four mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2H)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4H)

• Neutral (N)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4L)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

Two-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal

street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range locks

the front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional

traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat

towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-

mation.

522 STARTING AND OPERATING

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range locks the

front and rear driveshafts together forcing the front and

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional

traction and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery

road surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

This transfer case is intended to be driven in the 2H

position for normal street and highway conditions such

as dry, hard surfaced roads.

When additional traction is required, the 4H and 4L

positions can be used to lock the front and rear drive-

shafts together and force the front and rear wheels to

rotate at the same speed. This is accomplished by simply

moving the gear selector to the desired positions once the

appropriate speed and gear requirements are met, refer

to “Shifting Procedure – Manually Shifted Transfer Case”

in this section for further information.

The 4H and 4L positions are intended for loose, slippery

road surfaces only. Driving in the 4H and 4L positions on

dry, hard surfaced roads may cause increased tire wear

and damage to the driveline components.

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the

instrument cluster will alert the driver that the vehicle is

in four-wheel drive and that the front and rear drive-

shafts are locked together. This light will illuminate when

the transfer case is shifted into either the 4H or 4L

position. There is no light for the 2H or NEUTRAL

positions on some models.

When operating your vehicle in 4L, the engine speed is

approximately three times that of the 2H or 4H positions

at a given road speed. Take care not to overspeed the

engine and do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 523

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference will adversely affect shifting and

can cause damage to the drivetrain.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause

damage to driveline components.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

NOTE: Delayed shifts out of four-wheel drive may be

experienced due to uneven tire wear, low or uneven tire

pressures, excessive vehicle loading, or cold tempera-

tures.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,

even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

524 STARTING AND OPERATING

Shifting Procedure — Manually Shifted Transfer

Case

2H To 4H

Shifting between 2H and 4H can be made with the

vehicle stopped or in motion. If the vehicle is in motion,

shifts can be made up to 55 mph (88 km/h). With the

vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/

disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-

tor pedal after completing the shift. Apply a constant

force when shifting the transfer case lever.

2H Or 4H To 4L

With the vehicle rolling at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift

the transmission into NEUTRAL. While the vehicle is

coasting at 2 to 3 mph (3 to 5 km/h), shift the transfer

case lever firmly to the desired position. Do not pause in

transfer case NEUTRAL.

NOTE:

• Pausing in transfer case NEUTRAL in vehicles

equipped with an automatic transmission may require

shutting the engine OFF to avoid gear clash while

completing the shift. If difficulty occurs, shift the

transmission into NEUTRAL, hold foot on brake, and

turn the engine OFF. Make shift to the desired mode.

• Shifting into or out of 4L is possible with the vehicle

completely stopped, however difficulty may occur due

to the mating clutch teeth not being properly aligned.

Several attempts may be required for clutch teeth

alignment and shift completion to occur. The preferred

method is with the vehicle rolling 2 to 3 mph (3 to

5 km/h). Avoid attempting to engage or disengage 4L

with the vehicle moving faster than 2 to 3 mph (3 to

5 km/h).

• Do not attempt to shift into or from 4L while the

transmission is in gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 525

Transfer Case Position Indicator Light

The “Transfer Case Position Indicator Light” in the

instrument cluster is used to alert the driver that the front

axle is fully engaged and all four wheels are driving.

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Four-Position Switch) — If Equipped

The electronic shift transfer case is operated by the 4WD

Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is located

on the instrument panel.

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four

mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

Transfer Case Switch (Four-Position)

526 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for normal

street and highway driving on dry, hard surfaced roads.

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-

mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This range

provides additional traction for loose, slippery road

surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road

surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat

towing behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational

Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-

mation.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be

driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) for normal

street and highway conditions on dry, hard surfaced

roads.

STARTING AND OPERATING 527

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to

maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is

accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the

desired position.

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific

shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed

for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD

LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced

roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the

driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on

the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.

The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for

recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing”

in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and

4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate

the current and desired transfer case selection. When you

select a different transfer case position, the indicator

lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the

transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

528 STARTING AND OPERATING

If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are

Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain

ON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-

tinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all

the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer

case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn

the control switch back to the current position, wait five

seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-

ments, refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer

case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic

shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on

after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-

ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering

down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is

illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may

allow the vehicle to roll, which may cause personal

injury.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning, as this can cause

damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD or

4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care

not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 529

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the

drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,

even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.

The position indicator light for the previous position will

remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light

will continue to flash until all the requirements for the

selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return

the control switch back to the original position, make

certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five

seconds and try the shift again.

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have been met, the current position indicator

light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light

will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When

the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

530 STARTING AND OPERATING

2WD To 4WD LOCK

Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.

Shifts between 2WD and 4WD LOCK can be done with

the vehicle stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in

motion, the transfer case will engage/disengage faster if

you momentarily release the accelerator pedal after turn-

ing the control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the

ignition switch must be in the ON position with the

engine either running or off. This shift cannot be com-

pleted if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts

between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear

wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the

selected position indicator light will flash and the origi-

nal position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,

reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete

the shift.

2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some

gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not

detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. You can use

either of the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, rotate the transfer case control

switch to the desired position.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 531

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the

engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Rotate the transfer case control switch to the desired

position.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate

Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the

shift, then the desired position indicator light will flash

continuously while the original position indicator light

is ON, until all requirements have been met.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a

shift to take place and for the position indicator lights

to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON

position, the shift will not take place and no position

indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Five-Position Switch) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by

the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is

located on the instrument panel.

532 STARTING AND OPERATING

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five

mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD

AUTO)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for

normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced

roads.

4WD AUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends

power to the front wheels. The four – wheel drive system

will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a

loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road

conditions.

Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position)

STARTING AND OPERATING 533

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-

mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional

traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road

surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be

driven in the two-wheel drive position (2WD) or four-

wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and

highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving

the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy

benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode

can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but

the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel

drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle

senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is en-

gaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than

the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to

maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is

accomplished by rotating the 4WD Control Switch to the

desired position.

534 STARTING AND OPERATING

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific

shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed

for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD

LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced

roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the

driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located on

the lower left hand corner of the 4WD Control Switch.

The transfer case NEUTRAL position is to be used for

recreational towing only. Refer to “Recreational Towing”

in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,

4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument

cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case

selection. When you select a different transfer case posi-

tion, the indicator lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the

transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are

Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain

ON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-

tinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

STARTING AND OPERATING 535

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all

the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer

case position have been met. To retry the selection, turn

the control switch back to the current position, wait five

seconds, and retry selection. To find the shift require-

ments, refer to the Shifting Procedure for your transfer

case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic

shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on

after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-

ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering

down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is

illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal

injury or death.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause

damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.

Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed

25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the

drivetrain.

536 STARTING AND OPERATING

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,

even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have not been met, the transfer case will not shift.

The position indicator light for the previous position will

remain ON and the newly selected position indicator light

will continue to flash until all the requirements for the

selected position have been met. To retry a shift: return

the control switch back to the original position, make

certain all shift requirements have been met, wait five

seconds and try the shift again.

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have been met, the current position indicator

light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light

will flash until the transfer case completes the shift. When

the shift is complete, the position indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

STARTING AND OPERATING 537

2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK

Rotate the 4WD Control Switch to the desired position.

Shifts between 2WD and 4WD AUTO and 4WD LOCK

can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion. With

the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/

disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-

tor pedal after turning the control switch. If the vehicle is

stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position

with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot

be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts

between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front

and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this

situation, the selected position indicator light will flash

and the original position indicator light will remain ON.

At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels

to complete the shift.

2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some

gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not

detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of

the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, rotate the 4WD control switch to the

desired position.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

538 STARTING AND OPERATING

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the

engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Rotate the 4WD control switch to the desired position.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate

Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift

or if they no longer are being met while the shift

attempt is in process, the desired position indicator

light will flash continuously while the original position

indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been

met.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a

shift to take place and for the position indicator lights

to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON

position, then the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Four-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer

Case (Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If

Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by

the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is

located on the instrument panel.

STARTING AND OPERATING 539

This electronically shifted transfer case provides four

mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for

normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced

roads.

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-

mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional

traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

Transfer Case Switch (Four–Position) — Eight Speed

Transmission Only

540 STARTING AND OPERATING

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road

surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be

driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) for normal

street and highway conditions on dry hard surfaced

roads). Driving the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel

economy benefits as the front axle is not engaged in

2WD.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to

maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is

accomplished by pushing the desired position on the

4WD control switch.

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific

shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed

for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD

LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced

roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the

driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in

the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by

using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case

NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing

STARTING AND OPERATING 541

only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD and

4LOW) are located in the instrument cluster and indicate

the current and desired transfer case selection. When you

select a different transfer case position, the indicator

lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the

transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are

Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain

ON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-

tinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all

the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer

case position have been met. To retry the selection, push

the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selec-

tion. To find the shift requirements, refer to the Shifting

Procedure for your transfer case, located in this section.

542 STARTING AND OPERATING

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic

shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on

after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-

ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering

down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is

illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may

allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal

injury or death.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause

damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed. Take care

not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed 25 mph

(40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the

drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

STARTING AND OPERATING 543

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,

even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have not been met, the transfer case will not

shift. The position indicator light for the previous

position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-

tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the

requirements for the selected position have been met.

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have been met, the current position indicator

light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light

will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

When the shift is complete, the position indicator light

for the selected position will stop flashing and remain

ON.

544 STARTING AND OPERATING

2WD To 4WD LOCK

Push the desired position on the 4WD control switch to

shift the transfercase. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD

LOCK can be done with the vehicle stopped or in motion.

With the vehicle in motion, the transfer case will engage/

disengage faster if you momentarily release the accelera-

tor pedal after selecting the desired position on the

control switch. If the vehicle is stopped, the ignition must

be in the ON position with the engine either running or

off. This shift cannot be completed if the ignition switch

is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts

between 2WD/4WD LOCK if the front and/or rear

wheels are spinning (no traction). In this situation, the

selected position indicator light will flash and the origi-

nal position indicator light will remain ON. At this time,

reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels to complete

the shift.

2WD Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some

gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not

detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of

the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the

transfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

STARTING AND OPERATING 545

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the

engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control

switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate

Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift

or if they no longer are being met while the shift

attempt is in process, the desired position indicator

light will flash continuously while the original position

indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been

met.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a

shift to take place and for the position indicator lights

to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON

position, then the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

Five-Position Electronically Shifted Transfer Case

(Eight Speed Transmission Only) — If Equipped

This is an electronic shift transfer case and is operated by

the 4WD Control Switch (Transfer Case Switch), which is

located on the instrument panel.

546 STARTING AND OPERATING

This electronically shifted transfer case provides five

mode positions:

• Two-Wheel Drive High Range (2WD)

• Four-Wheel Drive Automatic High Range (4WD AUTO)

• Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range (4WD LOCK)

• Four-Wheel Drive Low Range (4WD LOW)

• Neutral (NEUTRAL)

For additional information on the appropriate use of each

transfer case mode position, see the information below:

2WD

Rear-Wheel Drive High Range — This range is for

normal street and highway driving on dry hard surfaced

roads.

4WD AUTO

Four-Wheel Drive Auto High Range — This range sends

power to the front wheels. The four–wheel drive system

will be automatically engaged when the vehicle senses a

loss of traction. Additional traction for varying road

conditions.

Transfer Case Switch (Five–Position) — Eight Speed

Transmission Only

STARTING AND OPERATING 547

4WD LOCK

Four-Wheel Drive Lock High Range — This range maxi-

mizes torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front and

rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. Additional

traction for loose, slippery road surfaces only.

4WD LOW

Four-Wheel Drive Low Range — This range provides low

speed four-wheel drive. It maximizes torque to the front

driveshaft, forcing the front and rear wheels to rotate at

the same speed. This range provides additional traction

and maximum pulling power for loose, slippery road

surfaces only. Do not exceed 25 mph (40 km/h).

NEUTRAL (N)

Neutral — This range disengages both the front and rear

driveshafts from the powertrain. To be used for flat towing

behind another vehicle. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” for further information.

This electronically shifted transfer case is designed to be

driven in the two–wheel drive position (2WD) or four-

wheel drive position (4WD AUTO) for normal street and

highway conditions on dry hard surfaced roads). Driving

the vehicle in 2WD will have greater fuel economy

benefits as the front axle is not engaged in 2WD.

For variable driving conditions, the 4WD AUTO mode

can be used. In this mode, the front axle is engaged, but

the vehicle’s power is sent to the rear wheels. Four-wheel

drive will be automatically engaged when the vehicle

senses a loss of traction. Because the front axle is en-

gaged, this mode will result in lower fuel economy than

the 2WD mode.

When additional traction is required, the transfer case

4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions can be used to

maximize torque to the front driveshaft, forcing the front

and rear wheels to rotate at the same speed. This is

accomplished pushing the desired position on the 4WD

Control Switch.

548 STARTING AND OPERATING

Refer to “Shifting Procedure” in this section for specific

shifting instructions.

The 4WD LOCK and 4WD LOW positions are designed

for loose, slippery road surfaces only. Driving in the 4WD

LOCK and 4WD LOW positions on dry hard surfaced

roads may cause increased tire wear and damage to the

driveline components.

NOTE: The transfer case NEUTRAL button is located in

the center of the 4WD Control Switch and is pushed by

using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The transfer case

NEUTRAL position is to be used for recreational towing

only. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in “Starting And

Operating” for further information.

Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights

The Transfer Case Position Indicator Lights (4WD,

4LOW, and 4WD AUTO) are located in the instrument

cluster and indicate the current and desired transfer case

selection. When you select a different transfer case posi-

tion, the indicator lights will do the following:

If All Of The Following Shift Conditions Are Met:

1. The current position indicator light will turn OFF.

2. The selected position indicator light will flash until the

transfer case completes the shift.

3. When the shift is complete, the indicator light for the

selected position will stop flashing and remain ON.

If One Or More Of The Following Shift Conditions Are

Not Met:

1. The indicator light for the current position will remain

ON.

2. The newly selected position indicator light will con-

tinue to flash.

3. The transfer case will not shift.

STARTING AND OPERATING 549

NOTE: Before retrying a selection, make certain that all

the necessary requirements for selecting a new transfer

case position have been met. To retry the selection, push

the current position, wait five seconds, and retry selec-

tion. To find the shift requirements, refer to the Shifting

Procedure for your transfer case, located in this section.

The “SVC 4WD Warning Light” monitors the electronic

shift four-wheel drive system. If this light remains on

after engine start up or illuminates during driving, it

means that the four-wheel drive system is not function-

ing properly and that service is required.

WARNING!

Always engage the parking brake when powering

down the vehicle if the “SVC 4WD Warning Light” is

illuminated. Not engaging the parking brake may

allow the vehicle to roll which may cause personal

injury or death.

NOTE: Do not attempt to make a shift while only the

front or rear wheels are spinning. This could cause

damage to driveline components.

When operating your vehicle in 4WD LOW, the engine

speed is approximately three times that of the 2WD, 4WD

AUTO or 4WD LOCK positions at a given road speed.

Take care not to overspeed the engine and do not exceed

25 mph (40 km/h).

Proper operation of four-wheel drive vehicles depends

on tires of equal size, type and circumference on each

wheel. Any difference in tire size can cause damage to the

drivetrain.

Because four-wheel drive provides improved traction,

there is a tendency to exceed safe turning and stopping

speeds. Do not go faster than road conditions permit.

550 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL position without first fully engaging the

parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL position

disengages both the front and rear drive shafts from

the powertrain and will allow the vehicle to roll,

even if the transmission is in PARK. The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

Shifting Procedure

NOTE:

• If any of the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have not been met, the transfer case will not

shift. The position indicator light for the previous

position will remain ON and the newly selected posi-

tion indicator light will continue to flash until all the

requirements for the selected position have been met.

• If all the requirements to select a new transfer case

position have been met, the current position indicator

light will turn OFF, the selected position indicator light

will flash until the transfer case completes the shift.

When the shift is complete, the position indicator light

for the selected position will stop flashing and remain

ON.

STARTING AND OPERATING 551

2WD To 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK

Push the desired position on the 4WD Control Switch to

shift the transfer case. Shifts between 2WD and 4WD

AUTO and 4WD LOCK can be done with the vehicle

stopped or in motion. With the vehicle in motion, the

transfer case will engage/disengage faster if you momen-

tarily release the accelerator pedal after selecting the

desired position on the control switch. If the vehicle is

stopped, the ignition switch must be in the ON position

with the engine either running or OFF. This shift cannot

be completed if the ignition switch is in the ACC position.

NOTE: The four-wheel drive system will not allow shifts

between 2WD and 4WD AUTO/4WD LOCK if the front

and/or rear wheels are spinning (no traction). In this

situation, the selected position indicator light will flash

and the original position indicator light will remain ON.

At this time, reduce speed and stop spinning the wheels

to complete the shift.

2WD Or 4WD AUTO Or 4WD LOCK To 4WD LOW

NOTE: When shifting into or out of 4WD LOW some

gear noise may be heard. This noise is normal and is not

detrimental to the vehicle or occupants.

Shifting can be performed with the vehicle rolling 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h) or completely stopped. Use either of

the following procedures:

Preferred Procedure

1. With the engine running, slow the vehicle to 2 to

3 mph (3 to 5 km/h).

2. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. While still rolling, push the desired position on the

transfer case control switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

552 STARTING AND OPERATING

Alternate Procedure

1. Bring the vehicle to complete stop.

2. With the ignition switch in the ON position and the

engine running, shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

3. Push the desired position on the transfer case control

switch.

4. After the desired position indicator light is ON (not

flashing), shift the transmission back into gear.

NOTE:

• If Steps 1 or 2 of either the Preferred or Alternate

Procedure are not satisfied prior to attempting the shift

or if they no longer are being met while the shift

attempt is in process, the desired position indicator

light will flash continuously while the original position

indicator light is ON, until all requirements have been

met.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON position for a

shift to take place and for the position indicator lights

to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the ON

position, then the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (1500 MODELS) — IF

EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load level-

ing capability along with the benefit of being able to

adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 553

1 — Up Button

2 — Down Button

3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)

4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)

5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)

6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode

when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph

(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20

seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph

(106 km/h).

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard

position of the suspension and is meant for normal

driving.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) (Raises the vehicle approximately

1 in [26 mm]) – This position should be the primary

position for all off-road driving until Off Road 2 (OR2) is

needed. A smoother and more comfortable ride will

result. To enter OR1, push the “Up” button once from the

NRH position while the vehicle speed is below 35 mph

(56 km/h). When in the OR1 position, if the vehicle speed

remains between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 50 mph

(80 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed exceeds 50 mph (80 km/h), the vehicle will be

automatically lowered to NRH. Off-Road 1 may not be

Air Suspension Switch

554 STARTING AND OPERATING

available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID message

will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) (Raises the vehicle approximately

2 in [51 mm]) – This position is intended for off-

roading use only where maximum ground clearance is

required. To enter OR2, push the “Up” button twice

from the NRH position or once from the OR1 position

while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h). While

in OR2, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h)

the vehicle height will be automatically lowered to

OR1. Off-Road 2 may not be available due to vehicle

payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed

when this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Informa-

tion Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

CAUTION!

If the vehicle is in OFFROAD1 or OFFROAD2 set-

ting, be aware of your surroundings, you may not

have the clearance required for certain areas and

vehicle damage may occur.

• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in

[15 mm]) – This position provides improved aerody-

namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will

automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle

speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and

66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the

vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle

will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle

speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph

(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 555

NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through

vehicle settings in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) when

equipped with Uconnect 3.0, or your Uconnect Radio

when equipped with Uconnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion.

• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately

2 in [51 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for

easier passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the

rear of the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of

cargo. To enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down”

button once from the NRH while the vehicle speed is

below 33 mph (53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes

below 15 mph (24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin

to lower. If the vehicle speed remains between 15 mph

(24 km/h) and 25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60

seconds, or the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph

(40 km/h) the Entry/Exit change will be cancelled. To

return to Normal Height Mode, push the “Up” button

once while in Entry/Exit or drive the vehicle over

15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit mode may not be

available due to vehicle payload, an EVIC/DID mes-

sage will be displayed when this occurs. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: Entry/Exit mode may be achieved using your

key fob for easier entry/loading. Refer to “A Word About

Your Keys” in “Things To Know Before Starting Your

Vehicle” for further information.

556 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your sur-

roundings, you may not have the clearance required for

certain areas and vehicle damage may occur.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN

position or the engine running for all user requested

changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,

must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the

vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed

until the open door(s) is closed.

This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which

keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on-

coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the

vehicle will move up first and then the front. When

lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and

then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the

air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The

system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure

a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension

system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling

to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 557

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure

volume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-

sonal injury or damage to the system, see your

authorized dealer for service.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect

the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension

system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to

be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system

has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit

height and disable the automatic load leveling system.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

558 STARTING AND OPERATING

Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment, this mode must be

enabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Protection Mode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the vehicle

will enter Protection Mode when load leveling cannot be

achieved. Some driving may be required to clear the protec-

tion mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” or

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” if equipped with a touch screen radio for further

information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display

Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error

has been detected.

STARTING AND OPERATING 559

Operation

1 — Up Button

2 — Down Button

3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator (Customer selectable)

4 — Normal Ride Height Indicator (Customer selectable)

5 — Off-Road 1 Indicator (Customer selectable)

6 — Off-Road 2 Indicator (Customer selectable)

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show

the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator

lamps will show a position which the system is working

to achieve. When raising, if multiple indicator lamps are

flashing, the highest flashing indicator lamp is the posi-

tion the system is working to achieve. When lowering, if

multiple indicators are flashing, the lowest solid indica-

tor lamp is the position the system is working to achieve.

Pushing the “UP” button once will move the suspension

one position higher from the current position, assuming

all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position,

engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The “UP”

button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise

the requested level by one position up to a maximum

position of OR2 or the highest position allowed based on

current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Air Suspension Switch

560 STARTING AND OPERATING

Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-

sion one position lower from the current level, assuming all

conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position, engine

running, doors closed, speed below threshold, etc). The

“DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times, each push

will lower the requested level by one position down to a

minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest position al-

lowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle

speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps

and EVIC/DID messages will operate the same for

automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road 2 (OR2) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in OR2.

• Off-Road 1 (OR1) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in OR1.

• Normal Ride Height (NRH)/Aero Mode – Indicator

lamps 3 and 4 will be illuminated when the vehicle is

in this position.

• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi-

nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/

Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h).

If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph

(24 km/h) indicator lamp 4 will flash and indicator

lamp 3 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is

achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-

nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Tire/Jack Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be

illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Wheel Alignment Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will

be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by

driving the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 561

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (2500/3500 MODELS)

— IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system is a rear leveling ride height

system. The main purpose of this system is to maintain

the truck’s rear ride height level.

Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard

position of the suspension and is meant for normal

driving.

Trailer Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately 1 in

(25 mm) – This position will lower the rear suspension

and provide load leveling for all loading conditions

including towing a trailer. After the “ALT TRAILER

HEIGHT” button has been pushed, it will blink continu-

ously until the trailer height has been achieved.

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN

position or the engine running with zero vehicle speed

for all user requested changes.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the

air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The

system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure

a proper appearance.

Rear Leveling Ride Height Switch

562 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure

volume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-

sonal injury or damage to the system, see your

authorized dealer for service.

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect

the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension

system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling to

be disabled. This mode is intended to be used with engine

running. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system has

a feature which will put the vehicle below Normal Ride

Height (NRH) and disable the automatic load leveling

system. This mode is intended to be used with engine

running. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 563

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be

enabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped

with a touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Protection Mode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the

vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling

cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to

clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” or “Uconnect Settings” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” if equipped with a

touch screen radio for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

564 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) Display

Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error

has been detected.

Operation

Pushing the Trailer Mode button once, while at Normal

Ride Height (NRH) will lower the vehicle to trailer level.

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until vehicle

trailer level that been achieved.

Pushing the Trailer Mode again will raise the vehicle to

Normal Ride Height (NRH).

NOTE: The LED will continuously blink until Normal

Ride Height (NRH) has been achieved.

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-

nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Tire/Jack Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-

nated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Wheel Alignment Mode – No indicator lamps will be

illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is disabled by

driving the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 565

AIR SUSPENSION SYSTEM (REBEL MODELS

ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED

Description

The air suspension system provides full time load level-

ing capability along with the benefit of being able to

adjust vehicle height by the push of a button.

Air Suspension Switch

1 — Up Button

2 — Down Button

3 — Entry/Exit Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

4 — Aero Mode Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

5 — Normal Ride Height Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

6 — Off-Road Indicator Lamp (Customer selectable)

566 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: The vehicle will automatically enter Aero Mode

when the vehicle speed remains between 62 mph

(100 km/h) and 66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20

seconds or if the vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h).

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – This is the standard

position of the suspension and is meant for normal

driving.

• Off-Road (OR) (Raises the vehicle approximately 1 in

[26 mm]) – This position is intended for off-roading use

only where maximum ground clearance is required. To

enter OR, push the “Up” button once from the NRH

position while vehicle speed is below 20 mph (32 km/h).

While in OR, if the vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph

(40 km/h) the vehicle height will be automatically lowered

to NRH. Off-Road may not be available due to vehicle

payload, an EVIC/DID message will be displayed when

this occurs. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

CAUTION!

If the vehicle is in Off-Road setting, be aware of your

surroundings, you may not have the clearance re-

quired for certain areas and vehicle damage may

occur.

• Aero Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately .6 in

[15 mm]) – This position provides improved aerody-

namics by lowering the vehicle. The vehicle will

automatically enter Aero Mode when the vehicle

speed remains between 62 mph (100 km/h) and

66 mph (106 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the

vehicle speed exceeds 66 mph (106 km/h). The vehicle

will return to NRH from Aero Mode if the vehicle

speed remains between 30 mph (48 km/h) and 35 mph

(56 km/h) for greater than 20 seconds or if the vehicle

speed falls below 30 mph (48 km/h).

STARTING AND OPERATING 567

NOTE: Speed thresholds for raising the vehicle only

apply if Automatic Aero Mode is enabled.

• To enter Aero Mode manually push the down button

once from NRH at any vehicle speed. To return to

NRH push the up button once while vehicle speed is

less than 56 mph (90 km/h).

NOTE: Automatic Aero Mode may be disabled through

vehicle settings on your Uconnect Radio when equipped

with UConnect 5.0, 8.4A, or 8.4AN. Refer to “Uconnect

Settings” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for

further information.

• Entry/Exit Mode (Lowers the vehicle approximately

3 in [73 mm]) – This position lowers the vehicle for easier

passenger entry and exit as well as lowering the rear of

the vehicle for easier loading and unloading of cargo. To

enter Entry/Exit Mode, push the “Down” button twice

from the NRH while the vehicle speed is below 33 mph

(53 km/h). Once the vehicle speed goes below 15 mph

(24 km/h) the vehicle height will begin to lower. If the

vehicle speed remains between 15 mph (24 km/h) and

25 mph (40 km/h) for greater than 60 seconds, or the

vehicle speed exceeds 25 mph (40 km/h) the Entry/Exit

change will be cancelled. To return to Normal Height

Mode, push the “Up” button twice while in Entry/Exit or

drive the vehicle over 15 mph (24 km/h). Entry/Exit

mode may not be available due to vehicle payload, an

EVIC/DID message will be displayed when this occurs.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

CAUTION!

When in ENTRY/EXIT setting, be aware of your

surroundings, you may not have the clearance re-

quired for certain areas and vehicle damage may

occur.

568 STARTING AND OPERATING

The system requires that the ignition be in ON/RUN

position or the engine running for all user requested

changes. When lowering the vehicle all of the doors,

must be closed. If a door is opened at any time while the

vehicle is lowering the change will not be completed

until the open door(s) is closed.

This system uses a lifting and lowering pattern which

keeps the headlights from incorrectly shining into on-

coming traffic. When raising the vehicle, the rear of the

vehicle will move up first and then the front. When

lowering the vehicle, the front will move down first and

then the rear.

After the engine is turned off, it may be noticed that the

air suspension system operates briefly, this is normal. The

system is correcting the position of the vehicle to ensure

a proper appearance.

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension

system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling

to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

WARNING!

The air suspension system uses a high pressure

volume of air to operate the system. To avoid per-

sonal injury or damage to the system, see your

authorized dealer for service.

STARTING AND OPERATING 569

Air Suspension Modes

The Air Suspension system has multiple modes to protect

the system in unique situations:

Tire/Jack Mode

To assist with changing a spare tire, the air suspension

system has a feature which allows the automatic leveling

to be disabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running.

Transport Mode

To assist with flat bed towing, the air suspension system

has a feature which will put the vehicle into Entry/Exit

height and disable the automatic load leveling system.

Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running and all doors closed.

Wheel Alignment Mode

Before performing a wheel alignment this mode must be

enabled. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: This mode is intended to be enabled with engine

running and all doors closed.

570 STARTING AND OPERATING

Protection Mode

In order to “protect” the air suspension system, the

vehicle will enter Protection Mode when load leveling

cannot be achieved. Some driving may be required to

clear the protection mode telltale in the EVIC/DID. Refer

to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or

Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding

Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE: If equipped with a touch screen radio all

enabling/disabling of air suspension features must be

done through the radio. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further in-

formation.

Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Infromation Display (DID) Display

Messages

When the appropriate conditions exist, a message will

appear in the EVIC/DID display. Refer to “Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument

Panel” for further information.

An audible chime will be heard whenever a system error

has been detected.

Operation

The indicator lamps 3 through 6 will illuminate to show

the current position of the vehicle. Flashing indicator

lamps will show a position which the system is working

to achieve. When raising or lowering, the flashing indi-

cator lamp is the position the system is working to

achieve.

STARTING AND OPERATING 571

Pushing the “UP” button once will move the suspension

one position higher from the current position, assuming

all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position,

engine running, speed below threshold, etc). The “UP”

button can be pushed multiple times, each push will raise

the requested level by one position up to a maximum

position of OR or the highest position allowed based on

current conditions (i.e. vehicle speed, etc).

Pushing the “DOWN” button once will move the suspen-

sion one position lower from the current level, assuming

all conditions are met (i.e. key in ON/RUN position,

engine running, doors closed, speed below threshold,

etc). The “DOWN” button can be pushed multiple times,

each push will lower the requested level by one position

down to a minimum of Entry/Exit Mode or the lowest

position allowed based on current conditions (i.e. vehicle

speed, etc.)

Automatic height changes will occur based on vehicle

speed and the current vehicle height. The indicator lamps

and EVIC/DID messages will operate the same for

automatic changes and user requested changes.

• Off-Road (OR) – Indicator lamps 3, 4, 5 and 6 will be

illuminated when the vehicle is in OR.

• Normal Ride Height (NRH) – Indicator lamps 3, 4 and

5 will be illuminated when the vehicle is in NRH.

• Aero Mode – Indicator lamps 3 and 4 will be illumi-

nated when the vehicle is in Aero Mode.

• Entry/Exit Mode – Indicator lamp 3 will be illumi-

nated when the vehicle is in Entry Exit Mode. Entry/

Exit mode can be requested up to 33 mph (53 km/h).

If vehicle speed is reduced to, and kept below, 15 mph

(24 km/h) indicator lamp 3 will flash and indicator

lamp 4 will remain solid until Entry/Exit Mode is

achieved at which point indicator lamp 4 will turn off.

572 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Transport Mode – No indicator lamps will be illumi-

nated. Transport Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Tire/Jack Mode – indicator lamps 3 and 6 will be

illuminated. Tire/Jack Mode is disabled by driving the

vehicle.

• Wheel Alignment Mode – indicator lamps 3, 4 and 5

will be illuminated. Wheel Alignment Mode is dis-

abled by driving the vehicle.

AXLE LOCKER SYSTEM — POWER WAGON

MODELS ONLY (IF EQUIPPED)

This vehicle is equipped with electronically locking front

and rear differentials. These differentials, when engaged,

mechanically lock together the axle shafts forcing the

wheels to spin at an equal rate. This allows the vehicle to

maintain its momentum and prevents it from becoming

stuck. The locking front and rear differentials should only

be engaged during low-speed, extreme off-road situa-

tions where one wheel is likely to not be in contact with

the ground. It is not recommended to drive the vehicle

with the differentials locked on pavement due to the

reduced ability to turn and speed limitations.

Axle Lock Selector

STARTING AND OPERATING 573

CAUTION!

• Do not lock the front or rear axle on hard surfaced

roads. The ability to steer the vehicle is reduced

and damage to the drivetrain may occur when the

axles are locked on hard surfaced roads.

• Do not try to lock the rear axle if the vehicle is

stuck and the tires are spinning. You can damage

drivetrain components. Lock the rear axle before

attempting situations or navigating terrain, which

could possibly cause the vehicle to become stuck.

The locking axles are controlled by the axle locker switch.

The switch has three positions, AXLE UNLOCK, REAR

LOCK, and FRONT/REAR LOCK. Under normal driv-

ing conditions, the switch should be left in the AXLE

UNLOCK position. In the AXLE UNLOCK position, the

front and rear axles are unlocked. In the REAR LOCK

position, the rear axle is locked. In the FRONT/REAR

LOCK position, the front and rear axles are locked.

NOTE: Even when the axles are in the AXLE UNLOCK

position, the limited slip differential in the rear axle still

provides torque biasing capability for moderate low

traction environments.

During the command to lock the axle, the indicator light

will flash until the axle is locked. After the lock command

has been successfully executed, the light will remain on

solid.

To lock the rear axle, place the vehicle in 4LO. Refer to

“Four Wheel Drive Operation” in “Starting And Operat-

ing” for further information. Move the axle locker switch

position to REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph

(5 km/h). The RR indicator light will remain on when the

rear axle is locked.

574 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: Left to right wheel speed difference may be

necessary to allow the axle to fully lock. If the indicator

light is flashing after placing the switch in the REAR

LOCK or FRONT/REAR LOCK position, drive the ve-

hicle in a turn or on loose gravel to expedite the locking

action.

WARNING!

Do not use the locked axle position for normal

driving. A locked front axle is intended for off-road

driving only. Locking the front axle during on-road

driving will reduce the steering ability. This could

cause a collision and you may be seriously injured.

To lock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to

FRONT/REAR LOCK while traveling less than 3 mph

(5 km/h). The indicator light will be solid when the front

axle is locked.

NOTE: The rear axle must be locked before the front axle

will lock.

To unlock the front axle; move the axle locker switch to

REAR LOCK. The FRONT/REAR LOCK indicator light

will go out when the axle is unlocked.

NOTE: The axle lockers could be torque locked due to

side to side loads on the axle. Driving slowly while

turning the steering wheel from a left hand turn to a right

hand turn or driving in REVERSE for a short distance

may be required to release the torque lock and unlock the

axles.

To unlock the rear axle; move the axle locker switch to

AXLE UNLOCK. The REAR LOCK indicator light will go

out when the rear axle is unlocked.

STARTING AND OPERATING 575

STABILIZER/SWAY BAR SYSTEM — POWER

WAGON ONLY

Your vehicle is equipped with an electronic disconnecting

stabilizer/sway bar. This system allows greater front

suspension travel in off-road situations.

Due to the use of taller springs, this vehicle has an

increased ride height of approximately 1.9 in (48.3 mm)

in the front and 1.5 in (38.1 mm) in the rear. A major

advantage to increasing ride height is the positive effect

it has on approach/departure and break over angles.

This system is controlled by the electronic control sway

bar switch located on the instrument panel. The switch has two positions; On-Road and Off-Road.

The system is normally in the On-Road mode, indicated

by a solid green light. The stabilizer/sway bar should

remain in the On-Road mode during normal driving

conditions.

Sway Bar Disconnect Buttons

576 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Do not disconnect the stabilizer bar and drive on hard

surfaced roads or at speeds above 18 mph (29 km/h), you

may lose control of the vehicle, which could result in

serious injury or death. The front stabilizer bar en-

hances vehicle stability and assists in maintaining con-

trol of the vehicle. The system monitors vehicle speed

and will attempt to reconnect the stabilizer bar at speeds

over 18 mph (29 km/h). This is indicated by a flashing

off road light and solid on road light. Once vehicle

speed is reduced below 14 mph (22 km/h), the system

will attempt to return to the Off-Road mode.

To disconnect the stabilizer/sway bar, shift to either 4HI

or 4LO as shown in “Four Wheel Drive Operation” and

push the right hand Off Road stabilizer/sway bar button

to obtain the Off-Road position. The amber indicator

light will flash until the stabilizer/sway bar has been

fully disconnected.

NOTE: The stabilizer/sway bar may be torque locked due

to left and right suspension height differences. This condi-

tion is due to driving surface differences or vehicle loading.

In order for the stabilizer/sway bar to disconnect/reconnect,

the right and left halves of the bar must be aligned. This

alignment may require that the vehicle be driven onto level

ground or rocked from side to side.

To return to the On-Road mode; push the left hand On

Road stabilizer/sway bar button.

WARNING!

If the stabilizer/sway bar will not return to On-Road

mode, vehicle stability is reduced. Do not attempt to

drive the vehicle over 18 mph (29 km/h). Driving

faster than 18 mph (29 km/h) may cause loss of

control of the vehicle, which could result in serious

injury or death. Contact your local service center for

assistance.

STARTING AND OPERATING 577

SAFE OFF-ROAD DRIVING — POWER WAGON

ONLY

Off-Road Driving Tips And Vehicle Characteristics

Your vehicle has excellent on and off-road capabilities.

These off-road capabilities will allow you to explore

those wilderness trails where few travel, providing a

source of exciting and satisfying recreation. Before you

venture out, you should contact your local governmental

agency to determine the designated off-road vehicle

(ORV) trails or recreation areas. You should always tread

lightly and only use established roads, trails or ORV

recreational areas. The National Forest Service, Bureau of

Land Management or local Department of Natural Re-

sources are a wealth of information and usually have

maps with marked trails.

Skid Plates And Underbody Protection

Steel skid plates protect the major driveline components

of the truck including the fuel tank, transfer case and

steering damper. In addition, this vehicle is equipped

with boxed cross members and fore/aft rails. This addi-

tional protection allows the vehicle to be utilized in

severe off-road situations that would be considered im-

passable by a normal truck.

Ramp Travel Index (RTI)

The ramp travel index is the distance, in inches, that you

can drive your vehicle with one wheel on a 20-degree

ramp without lifting any other wheel off the ground. This

distance up the ramp divided by the wheelbase of the

vehicle and multiplied by 1,000 is the RTI. This vehicle

has an RTI of 510, which means you can articulate one

front wheel 26 inches (66 cm) in the air while the other

three wheels remain in contact with the ground.

578 STARTING AND OPERATING

Water Fording Characteristics

Water fording characteristic is the vehicle’s ability to

cross a body of still water, where the powertrain and

drivetrain are safe from water ingestion. This vehicle has

high water fording characteristics with the ability to cross

a pool of water, without stopping, 24 inches (60 cm) deep

at a maximum speed of 10 mph (16 km/h) and a pool of

water 30 inches (76 cm) deep at a maximum speed of

5 mph (8 km/h), both with an entrance ramp angle of 1.3

degrees.

CAUTION!

The door sill height is 25 inches (63.5 cm). Water may

intrude into the interior of the vehicle at greater

depths.

Simultaneous Brake And Throttle Operation

Many off-road driving conditions require the simultane-

ous use of the brake and throttle (two footed driving).

When climbing rocks, logs, or other stepped objects,

using light brake pressure with light throttle will keep the

vehicle from jerking or lurching. This technique is also

used when you need to stop and restart a vehicle on a

steep incline.

The Basics Of Off-Road Driving

You will encounter many types of terrain driving off-

road. You should be familiar with the terrain and area

before proceeding. There are many types of surface

conditions: hard packed dirt, gravel, rocks, grass, sand,

mud, snow and ice. Every surface has a different effect on

your vehicle’s steering, handling and traction. Control-

ling your vehicle is one of the keys to successful off-road

driving, so always keep a firm grip on the steering wheel

and maintain a good driving posture. Avoid sudden

STARTING AND OPERATING 579

accelerations, turns or braking. In most cases there are no

road signs, posted speed limits or signal lights. Therefore

you will need to use your own good judgment on what is

safe and what isn’t. When on a trail you should always be

looking ahead for surface obstacles and changes in

terrain. The key is to plan your future driving route while

remembering what you are currently driving over.

CAUTION!

Never park your vehicle over dry grass or other

combustible materials. The heat from your vehicle

exhaust system could cause a fire.

WARNING!

Always wear your seat belt and firmly tie down

cargo. Unsecured cargo can become projectiles in an

off-road situation.

When To Use Low Range

When driving off-road, shift into 4LO (Low Range) for

additional traction or to improve handling and control on

slippery or difficult terrain. Due to the lower gearing, low

range will allow the engine to operate in a higher power

range. This will allow you to idle over obstacles and

down hills, with improved control and less effort. Also,

use 4LO (Low Range) in rain, ice, snow, mud, sand, to get

heavy loads rolling, improve traction, or whenever 4HI

(High Range) traction will not do the job.

Driving In Snow, Mud And Sand

There is a drastic reduction in traction when driving in

snow, mud or sand. The vehicle will be less responsive to

steering, acceleration and braking inputs. Therefore you

should accelerate slowly, leave greater stopping distances

and avoid abrupt vehicle maneuvers. You want to keep a

slow constant steady pace. The key is to maintain the

vehicle’s momentum.

580 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Snow – In heavy snow or for additional control and

traction at slower speeds, shift the transmission to a

low gear and shift the transfer case to 4LO (Low

Range) if necessary. Do not shift to a lower gear than

necessary to maintain headway. Over-revving the en-

gine can spin the wheels and traction will be lost. If

you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering

wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth,

while still applying throttle. This will allow the tires to

get a fresh bite and help maintain your momentum.

CAUTION!

On icy or slippery roads, do not downshift at high

engine RPMs or vehicle speeds because engine brak-

ing may cause skidding and loss of control.

• Mud – Deep mud creates a great deal of suction

around the tires and is very difficult to get through.

You should use 4LO (Low Range) with a gear low

enough to maintain your momentum without shifting.

If you start to slow to a stop, try turning your steering

wheel no more than a ¼ turn quickly back and forth

for additional traction. Mud holes pose an increased

threat of vehicle damage and getting stuck. They are

normally full of debris from previous vehicles getting

stuck. As a good practice before entering any mud

hole, get out and determine how deep it is, if there are

any hidden obstacles and if the vehicle can be safely

recovered if stuck.

• Sand – Soft sand is very difficult to travel through with

full tire pressure. When crossing soft sandy spots in a

trail maintain your vehicle’s momentum and do not

stop. The key to driving in soft sand using the appro-

priate tire pressure, accelerating slowly, avoiding

STARTING AND OPERATING 581

abrupt maneuvers and maintaining the vehicle’s mo-

mentum. If you are going to be driving on large soft

sandy areas or dunes, reduce your tire pressure to a

minimum of 15 psi (103 kPa) to allow for a greater tire

surface area. Reduced tire pressure will drastically

improve your traction and handling, while driving on

the soft sand, but you must return the tires to normal

air pressure before driving on pavement or other hard

surfaces. Be sure you have a way to air the tires back

up prior to reducing the pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressures may cause tire unseating and

total loss of air pressure. To reduce the risk of tire

unseating, while at a reduced tire pressure, reduce

your speed and avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers.

Crossing Obstacles (Rocks And Other High

Points)

While driving off road, you will encounter many types of

terrain. These varying types of terrain bring different

types of obstacles. Before proceeding review the path

ahead to determine the correct approach and your ability

to safely recover the vehicle if something goes wrong.

Keeping a firm grip on the steering wheel, bring the

vehicle to a complete stop and then inch the vehicle

forward until it makes contact with the object. Apply the

throttle lightly while holding a light brake pressure and

ease the vehicle up and over the object.

WARNING!

Crossing obstacles can cause abrupt steering system

loading which could cause you to loose control of

your vehicle.

582 STARTING AND OPERATING

Using A Spotter

There are many times where it is hard to see the obstacle

or determine the correct path. Determining the correct

path can be extremely difficult when you are confronting

many obstacles. In these cases have someone guide you

over, through, or around the obstacle. Have the person

stand a safe distance in front of you where they can see

the obstacle, watch your tires and undercarriage, and

guide you through.

Crossing Large Rocks

When approaching large rocks, choose a path which

ensures you drive over the largest with your tires. This

will lift your undercarriage over the obstacle. The tread of

the tire is tougher and thicker than the side wall and is

designed to take the abuse. Always look ahead and make

every effort to cross the large rocks with your tires.

CAUTION!

• Never attempt to straddle a rock that is large

enough to strike your axles or undercarriage.

• Never attempt to drive over a rock which is large

enough to contact the door sills.

Crossing A Ravine, Gully, Ditch, Washout Or Rut

When crossing a ravine, gully, ditch, washout or a large rut,

the angled approach is the key to maintaining your vehicle’s

mobility. Approach these obstacles at a 45-degree angle and

let each tire go through the obstacle independently. You need

to use caution when crossing large obstacles with steep sides.

Do not attempt to cross any large obstacle with steep sides at

an angle great enough to put the vehicle at risk of a rollover.

If you get caught in a rut, dig a small trench to the right or left

at a 45-degree angle ahead of the front tires. Use the removed

dirt to fill the rut ahead of the turnout you just created. You

should now be able to drive out following the trench you just

created at a 45-degree angle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 583

WARNING!

There is an increased risk of rollover when crossing

an obstacle, at any angle, with steep sides.

Crossing Logs

To cross a log, approach it at a slight angle (approxi-

mately 10 to 15 degrees). This allows one front tire to be

on top of the log while the other just starts to climb the

log. While climbing the log, modulate your brake and

accelerator to avoid spinning the log out from under your

tires. Then ease the vehicle off the log using your brakes.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to cross a log with a greater diameter

than the running ground clearance or the vehicle will

become high centered.

Getting High Centered

If you get hung up or high centered on an object, get out

of the vehicle and try to determine what the vehicle is

hung up on, where it is contacting the underbody and

what is the best direction to recover the vehicle. Depend-

ing on what you are in contact with, jack the vehicle up

and place a few rocks under the tires so the weight is off

of the high point when you let the vehicle down. You can

also try rocking the vehicle or winching the vehicle off

the object.

CAUTION!

Winching or rocking the vehicle off hard objects

increases the risk of underbody damage.

584 STARTING AND OPERATING

Hill Climbing

Hill climbing requires good judgment and a good under-

standing of your abilities and your vehicle’s limitations.

Hills can cause serious problems. Some are just too steep

to climb and should not be attempted. You should always

feel confident with the vehicle and your abilities. You

should always climb hills straight up and down. Never

attempt to climb a hill on an angle.

• Before Climbing A Steep Hill – As you approach a hill

consider its grade or steepness. Determine if it is too

steep. Look to see what the traction is on the hill side trail.

Is the trail straight up and down? What is on top and the

other side? Are there ruts, rocks, branches or other

obstacles on the path? Can you safely recover the vehicle

if something goes wrong? If everything looks good and

you feel confident, then change transmission into a lower

gear, shift the transfer case into 4LO (Low) and proceed

with caution. You should use first gear and 4LO (Low

Range) for very steep hills.

• Driving Up Hill – Once you have determined your

ability to proceed and have shifted into the appropri-

ate gear, line your vehicle up for the straightest pos-

sible run. Accelerate with an easy constant throttle and

apply more power as you start up the hill. Do not race

forward into a steep grade, the abrupt change of grade

could cause you to lose control. If the front end begins

to bounce, ease off the throttle slightly to bring all four

tires back on the ground. As you approach the crest of

the hill ease off the throttle and slowly proceed over

the top. If the wheels start to slip as you approach the

crest of a hill, ease off the accelerator and maintain

headway by turning the steering wheel no more than

a ¼ turn quickly back and forth. This will provide a

fresh bite into the surface and will usually provide

enough traction to complete the climb. If you do not

make it to the top, place the vehicle in REVERSE and

back straight down the grade using engine resistance

along with the vehicle brakes.

STARTING AND OPERATING 585

WARNING!

Never attempt to climb a hill at an angle or turn

around on a steep grade. Driving across an incline

increases the risk of a roll over, which may result in

severe injury or death.

• Driving Down Hill – Before driving down a steep hill

you need to determine if it is too steep for a safe descent.

What is the surface traction? Is the grade too steep to

maintain a slow controlled descent? Are there obstacles?

Is it a straight descent? Is there plenty of distance at the

base of the hill to regain control if the vehicle descends too

fast? If you feel confident in your ability to proceed then

make sure you are in 4LO (Low Range) with the trans-

mission in first gear (manually select first gear on auto-

matic transmissions) and proceed with caution. Allow

engine braking to control the descent and apply your

brakes if necessary, but do not allow the tires to lock.

WARNING!

Do not descend a steep grade in NEUTRAL. Use

vehicle brakes in conjunction with engine braking.

Descending a grade too fast could cause you to lose

control and be seriously injured or killed.

• Driving Across An Incline – If at all possible avoid

driving across an incline. If it is necessary, know your

vehicle’s abilities. Driving across an incline places

more weight on the down hill wheels, which increases

the possibilities of a down hill slide or rollover. Make

sure the surface has good traction with firm and stable

soils. If possible transverse the incline at an angle

heading slightly up or down.

586 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Driving across an incline increases the risk of a

rollover, which may result in severe injury.

• If You Stall Or Begin To Lose Headway – If you stall

or begin to lose headway while climbing a steep hill,

allow your vehicle to come to a stop and immediately

apply the brake. Restart the engine and shift into

REVERSE. Back slowly down the hill allowing the

compression braking of the engine and transmission to

help regulate your speed. If the brakes are required to

control vehicle speed, apply them lightly and avoid

locking or skidding the tires.

WARNING!

If the engine stalls or you lose headway or cannot

make it to the top of a steep hill or grade, never

attempt to turn around. To do so may result in

tipping and rolling the vehicle, which may result in

severe injury. Always back carefully straight down a

hill in REVERSE. Never back down a hill in NEU-

TRAL using only the vehicle brakes. Never drive

diagonally across a hill, always drive straight up or

down.

STARTING AND OPERATING 587

Driving Through Water

Extreme care should be taken crossing any type of water.

Water crossings should be avoided if possible and only be

attempted when necessary, in a safe responsible manner. You

should only drive through areas which are designated and

approved. You should tread lightly and avoid damage to the

environment. You should know your vehicle’s abilities and

be able to recover it if something goes wrong. You should

never stop or shut a vehicle off when crossing deep water

unless you ingested water into the engine air intake. If the

engine stalls do not attempt to restart it. Determine if it has

ingested water first. The key to any crossing is low and slow.

You want to use first gear in 4L (Low Range) and proceed

very slowly with a constant slow speed (3-5 mph [5–8 km/h]

maximum) and light throttle. Keep the vehicle moving; do

not try to accelerate through the crossing. After crossing any

water higher than the bottom of the axle differentials, you

should inspect all of the vehicle fluids for signs of water

ingestion.

CAUTION!

Water ingestion into the axles, transmission, transfer

case, engine or vehicle interior can occur if you drive

too fast or through too deep of water. Water can cause

permanent damage to engine, driveline or other

vehicle components and your brakes will be less

effective once wet and/or muddy.

• Before You Cross Any Type Of Water – As you

approach any type of water you need to determine if you

can cross it safely and responsibly. If necessary, get out

and walk through the water or probe it with a stick. You

need to be sure of its depth, approach angle, current and

bottom condition. Be careful of murky or muddy waters,

check for hidden obstacles. Make sure you will not be

intruding on any wildlife and you can recover the vehicle

if necessary. The key to a safe crossing is the water depth,

current and bottom conditions. On soft bottoms the

588 STARTING AND OPERATING

vehicle will sink in, effectively increasing the water level

on the vehicle. Be sure to consider this when determining

the depth and the ability to safely cross.

• Crossing Puddles, Pools, Flooded Areas Or Other

Standing Water – Puddles, pools, flooded or other

standing water areas normally contain murky or

muddy waters. These water types normally contain

hidden obstacles and make it difficult to determine an

accurate water depth, approach angle, and bottom

condition. Murky or muddy water holes are where

you want to hook up tow straps prior to entering. This

makes for a faster, cleaner and easier vehicle recovery.

If you are able to determine you can safely cross, than

proceed using the low and slow method.

CAUTION!

Muddy waters can reduce the cooling system effec-

tiveness by depositing debris onto the radiator.

• Crossing Ditches, Streams, Shallow Rivers Or Other

Flowing Water – Flowing water can be extremely dan-

gerous. Never attempt to cross a fast running stream or

river even in shallow water. Fast moving water can easily

push your vehicle downstream sweeping it out of control.

Even in very shallow water, a high current can still wash

the dirt out from around your tires putting you and your

vehicle in jeopardy. There is still a high risk of personal

injury and vehicle damage with slower water currents in

depths greater than the vehicle’s running ground clear-

ance. You should never attempt to cross flowing water

which is deeper than the vehicle’s running ground clear-

ance. Even the slowest current can push the heaviest

vehicle downstream out of control if the water is deep

enough to push on the large surface area of the vehicle’s

body. Before you proceed determine the speed of the

current, the water’s depth, approach angle, bottom con-

dition and if there are any obstacles, then cross at an angle

heading slightly upstream using the low and slow tech-

nique.

STARTING AND OPERATING 589

WARNING!

Never drive through fast moving deep water. It can

push your vehicle downstream, sweeping it out of

control. This could put you and your passengers at

risk of injury or drowning.

Airing Down For Off-Road Driving

Running lower tire pressure off-road can improve your

ride comfort and vehicle traction. Reducing the tire air

pressure allows the tire to bulge slightly, improving its

surface area for better flotation and ability to mold or

form to the ground contour. Different terrain, tires, and

vehicles require different tire pressure. Hard surfaces like

rock and heavier vehicles require higher pressures than

softer surfaces such as sand and lighter vehicles. You will

need to experiment to determine what is right for your

situation. It is easier and faster to let air out than it is to

replace it so, start high and lower it as required. Remem-

ber you must return the tires to normal air pressure

before driving on road or at highway conditions. Be sure

you have a way to return the tires to their normal on road

air pressure.

CAUTION!

Reduced tire pressure increases the risk of tire dam-

age and may cause tire unseating with total loss of air

pressure. To reduce the risk of tire unseating, while at

a reduced tire pressure, drive at slower speeds and

avoid sharp turns or abrupt maneuvers.

590 STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicle Recovery

If you drive off-road, you may encounter a situation

where you will need to recover your vehicle. Vehicle

recovery should always be given consideration before

attempting a questionable obstacle. You should never go

off-road driving without the ability to recover your

vehicle from a situation. Having another vehicle with

you usually works best for most situations. The first

thing to do is assess the situation. Why are you stuck?

Are you hung up on something? Would it be easier to go

forward or to go backward? Can you still move the

vehicle? Is there an anchor point to winch to? Are you

alone or do you have another vehicle to help? Is there

high risk of vehicle damage during the recovery process?

Answering these questions will help you determine the

best method of recovery. If you can still move the vehicle

slightly and the only issue is slick ground, then rock

cycling your vehicle would be the first choice. If you have

ample room, an additional vehicle and there is low risk of

vehicle impingement on the surroundings, then using a

tow strap to the vehicle tow hooks would be fast and

easy. If the vehicle is severely hung up or in a situation

where great care needs to be taken during the recovery,

then nothing can do the job better than a winch. If you are

severely hung up on something you should jack the

vehicle up and stack something under the wheels to

allow the vehicle to roll off the object without causing

further damage. This should be tried before attempting

any recovery method.

CAUTION!

Pulling the vehicle off an obstacle, without first

clearing the object, may result in additional under-

body damage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 591

• Rock Cycling Your Vehicle – Rock cycling your ve-

hicle is one of the easiest, fastest and most commonly

used methods. This simply involves shifting your

vehicle from DRIVE to REVERSE, while applying

throttle after each shift. During this process, for addi-

tional traction, try turning your steering wheel quickly

left and right no more than a ¼ turn. If you are stuck

in mud, sand, or snow try spinning your tires during

this process to clean the debris from the tread and

improve the traction. You want to create a rocking

motion with the vehicle. This helps build vehicle

momentum, which hopefully gets you out. Remember

to ease off and on the accelerator before and after the

shift. If after a few rock cycles your vehicle is not free,

stop and try another method of recovery. Continuous

rock cycling will only cause unnecessary damage to

your vehicle and the environment.

CAUTION!

Damage can occur when spinning your tires at an

excessive high speed. Do not spin your tires faster

than an indicated 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Using The Tow Hooks With A Tow Strap – Tow straps

are a quick and easy way to recover your vehicle from

minor situations if you have a secondary vehicle which

is not stuck. The tow hooks on your vehicle are

designed to take the abusive force generated during

vehicle recovery. Do not use the bumper or any other

vehicle component as an attachment point. Using tow

straps requires coordination between the two drivers.

Good communication and line of sight are required for

a safe recovery. First connect the tow strap to the

correct attachment points on both vehicles. There

should be a least 20 to 30 feet (6 to 9 meters) between

the vehicles to allow for a safe recovery. If necessary

join two tow straps together using a 1 ½ inch hard

592 STARTING AND OPERATING

wood dowel. This will keep the straps from becoming

knotted and is safer than using a clevis pin if the strap

breaks. Next have the tow vehicle backup, leaving two

to three feet worth of slack in the strap. Then the tow

vehicle, using light throttle, should accelerate tighten-

ing the strap providing the pulling force needed to free

the vehicle. The vehicle being recovered should assist

in the recovery, at the time of the snap, by slowly

spinning the tires in the same direction as the pulling

vehicle. After the vehicle becomes free, the driver of

the previously stuck vehicle should signal they are free

and should hit their brakes stopping both vehicles. The

driver of the pulling vehicle should let off the throttle

without using the brakes, once signaled by the other

driver. This sequence is important to avoid having the

recovered vehicle hit the pulling vehicle.

WARNING!

Never use tow straps with end hooks or link two

straps with a clevis pin. These heavy metal objects

could become projectiles if a strap breaks, which

could cause severe injury. Never leave more than 2 to

3 feet (.6 to 1 meter) of slack in the strap. More slack

than this greatly increases the risk of injury and

vehicle damage. Always keep everyone at least

30 feet (9 meters) away from a strapping or winching

situation.

• Winching (Refer To “Winch Operation” For Addi-

tional Information) – Winching is most commonly

used in the following situations: there is no support

vehicle available, a high controlled force is required to

recover the vehicle, there is a high risk of environmen-

tal or vehicle damage, or where nothing else seems to

work. A winch can deliver a high pulling force with a

STARTING AND OPERATING 593

great deal of control. It allows you to walk the vehicle

out of the situation in a slow controlled manner. This

control works well for avoiding further vehicle dam-

age. Once you decide it is time to use the winch look

for a good anchor point. It needs to be strong enough

to hold more than the vehicle’s weight and provide a

direction of pull as straight as possible. Use block and

tackle if necessary to improve the angle of pull or

increase the winch’s pulling force. If the anchor point

is a tree use a strap around its base and hook the cable

to the strap. If it is another vehicle, then place that

vehicle in PARK and block the front tires. If you cannot

find an anchor point within reach try using your spare

tire by burying it. Once you have determined an

anchor point hook up the cable, ensuring there are a

least five wraps of cable left on the drum, and place a

floor mat or something else over the strung out cable.

Placing something over the strung out cable helps

keep the cable on the ground if it breaks. Next, place

the vehicle in first gear and apply a very light throttle

as you power the winch in. Be careful not to allow

slack in the cable as you recover the vehicle. Do not try

to guide the cable into the drum. If it starts to bunch up

on one end, let it. You can re-spool the cable after-

wards. Never use a winch cable as a tow strap and

always stand back while winching.

WARNING!

Winch cables are under high tension when in use and

can become a projectile if they fail. Never stand over

or straddle the winch cable. Never jerk or overload

the winch cable. Never stand in front of the vehicle

while winching. Failure to follow these instructions

can result in serious or fatal injury.

594 STARTING AND OPERATING

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

STARTING AND OPERATING 595

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

LIMITED-SLIP DIFFERENTIAL

The limited-slip differential provides additional traction

on snow, ice, mud, sand and gravel, particularly when

there is a difference between the traction characteristics

of the surface under the right and left rear wheels. During

normal driving and cornering, the limited-slip unit per-

forms similarly to a conventional differential. On slip-

pery surfaces, however, the differential delivers more of

the driving effort to the rear wheel having the better

traction.

The limited-slip differential is especially helpful during

slippery driving conditions. With both rear wheels on a

slippery surface, a slight application of the accelerator

will supply maximum traction. When starting with only

one rear wheel on an excessively slippery surface, slight

momentary application of the parking brake may be

necessary to gain maximum traction.

WARNING!

On vehicles equipped with a limited-slip differential

never run the engine with one rear wheel off the

ground since the vehicle may drive through the rear

wheel remaining on the ground. You could lose

control of the vehicle.

Care should be taken to avoid sudden accelerations when

both rear wheels are on a slippery surface. This could

cause both rear wheels to spin, and allow the vehicle to

slide sideways on the crowned surface of a road or in a

turn.

596 STARTING AND OPERATING

DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES

Acceleration

Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slip-

pery surfaces may cause the driving wheels to pull

erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs

when there is a difference in the surface traction under

the rear (driving) wheels.

WARNING!

Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.

Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the rear

wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle and

possibly have a collision. Accelerate slowly and

carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction

(ice, snow, wet mud, loose sand, etc.).

Traction

When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a

wedge of water to build up between the tire and road

surface. This is known as hydroplaning and may cause

partial or complete loss of vehicle control and stopping

ability. To reduce this possibility, the following precau-

tions should be observed:

• Slow down during rainstorms or when the roads are

slushy.

• Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.

• Replace tires when tread wear indicators first become

visible.

• Keep tires properly inflated.

• Maintain sufficient distance between your vehicle and

the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a

sudden stop.

STARTING AND OPERATING 597

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Limited Slip

Differential (LSD) that reduces, but does not eliminate,

the amount of wheel slip across a given axle for im-

proved handling.

DRIVING THROUGH WATER

Driving through water more than a few inches/

centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure

safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.

Flowing/Rising Water

WARNING!

Do not drive on or across a road or path where water

is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flow-

ing water can wear away the road or path’s surface

and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.

Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this

warning may result in injuries that are serious or

fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.

Shallow Standing Water

Although your vehicle is capable of driving through

shallow standing water, consider the following Cautions

and Warnings before doing so.

WARNING!

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph

(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.

• Driving through standing water limits your vehi-

cle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping

(Continued)

598 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

distances. Therefore, after driving through stand-

ing water, drive slowly and lightly press on the

brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.

• Failure to follow these warnings may result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your pas-

sengers, and others around you.

CAUTION!

• Always check the depth of the standing water

before driving through it. Never drive through

standing water that is deeper than the bottom of

the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.

• Determine the condition of the road or the path

that is under water and if there are any obstacles in

the way before driving through the standing water.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving

through standing water. This will minimize wave

effects.

• Driving through standing water may cause damage

to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always

inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil, trans-

mission, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e.,

fluid that is milky or foamy in appearance) after

driving through standing water. Do not continue to

operate the vehicle if any fluid appears contami-

nated, as this may result in further damage. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can

cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious

internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

STARTING AND OPERATING 599

OFF-ROAD DRIVING TIPS

Care should be taken when attempting to climb steep

hills or driving diagonally across a hill or slope. If natural

obstacles force you to travel diagonally up or down a hill,

choose a mild angle and keep as little side tilt as possible.

Keep the vehicle moving and make turns slowly and

cautiously.

If you must back down a hill, back straight down using

REVERSE gear. Never back down in NEUTRAL or diago-

nally across the hill.

When driving over sand, mud, and other soft terrain,

shift to low gear and drive steadily. Apply the accelerator

slowly to avoid spinning the wheels.

Do not reduce the tire pressures for this type of driving.

After Driving Off-Road

Off-road operation puts more stress on your vehicle than

does most on-road driving. After going off-road, it is

always a good idea to check for damage. That way you

can get any problems taken care of right away and have

your vehicle ready when you need it.

• Completely inspect the underbody of your vehicle.

Check tires, body structure, steering, suspension, and

exhaust system for damage.

• Inspect the radiator for mud and debris and clean as

required.

• Check threaded fasteners for looseness, particularly on

the chassis, drivetrain components, steering, and sus-

pension. Retighten them, if required, and torque to the

values specified in the Service Manual.

• Check for accumulations of plants or brush. These

things could be a fire hazard. They might hide damage

to fuel lines, brake hoses, axle pinion seals, and

propeller shafts.

600 STARTING AND OPERATING

• After extended operation in mud, sand, water, or

similar dirty conditions, have the radiator, fan, brake

rotors, wheels, brake linings, and axle yokes inspected

and cleaned as soon as possible.

WARNING!

Abrasive material in any part of the brakes may cause

excessive wear or unpredictable braking. You might

not have full braking power when you need it to

prevent a collision. If you have been operating your

vehicle in dirty conditions, get your brakes checked

and cleaned as necessary.

• If you experience unusual vibration after driving in

mud, slush or similar conditions, check the wheels for

impacted material. Impacted material can cause a

wheel imbalance and freeing the wheels of it will

correct the situation.

WINCH USAGE — POWER WAGON ONLY —

(IF EQUIPPED)

Things To Know Before Using Your Winch

General Winch Information

Your vehicle is equipped with an electric vehicle recovery

winch. This winch uses the electrical power from the

vehicle charging system to power a motor that winds

wire rope into the winch drum via planetary gear reduc-

tion. By nature, a winch is capable of generating very

high forces and should be used with care. Do not operate

the winch without reading and understanding the com-

plete winch owner’s manual.

Tensioning The Wire Rope

The winch rope must be properly tensioned before use.

Follow the instructions below to tension the rope:

1. Un-spool the wire rope leaving five wraps of rope on

the winch drum.

STARTING AND OPERATING 601

2. Attach the hook to a suitable anchor point.

CAUTION!

Be certain the anchor will withstand the load re-

quired to tension the wire rope.

3. Apply at least 500 lbs (227 kg) of tension to the rope

while winding the rope. Always use care to ensure the

rope does not pile up on one side of the drum and is

neatly wound onto the drum.

CAUTION!

Wire rope must spool on the winch drum in the

direction indicated on the drum rotation decal on the

winch.

Low Voltage Interrupt

Your winch is equipped with a device that will interrupt

winch function if the vehicle charging system voltage

drops to a low level. The winch will not power-in or out

for 30 seconds if this device is tripped. If the interrupt is

tripped, the vehicle should be operated at high idle for a

few minutes to allow the vehicle charging system to

recover before continuing to winch.

Winch Motor Thermal Protection

Your winch is equipped with a thermal protection device

in the motor. If the winch is operated for an excessive

duration, the device may interrupt motor function to

protect the winch motor. During this time the winch will

power-out but will not power-in. Allow the winch motor

to cool for a few minutes before continuing to winch. The

winch will resume normal function once the motor cools.

602 STARTING AND OPERATING

Understanding The Features Of Your Winch

Winch Components

STARTING AND OPERATING 603

1. Motor: The winch motor is powered by the vehicle

charging system and features a thermal protection

switch that automatically stops motor function in the

power-in direction if the motor gets too hot.

2. Remote Socket: The remote socket allows the remote

control to be attached to the control pack to allow the

winch to function.

3. Winch Drum With Integral Brake: The winch drum

allows the wire rope to be stored on the winch and

transmits force to the wire rope. The winch is

equipped with an integral brake that will stop rotation

of the winch drum if the winch motor is stopped.

4. 3-Stage Planetary Gear Set: Provides balance between

speed and pulling power.

5. Wire Rope: The wire rope allows the winch to be

connected to an anchor to provide a pulling force.

6. Clutch Lever: The clutch lever allows the winch drum

to be disconnected from the winch motor to allow the

wire rope to be pulled from the winch by hand.

7. Remote Control: The remote control provides the

interface between the winch operator and the winch.

The remote control provides the ability to power the

winch in, out, and stop the winch. To operate the

winch, the toggle switch is pressed down to power the

winch in and up to power the winch out. The winch

will stop if the switch is left in the neutral (center)

position.

CAUTION!

If not installed, the hook strap must be placed on the

hook.

Fairlead: The fairlead acts as a guide for the wire rope

and minimizes damage to the rope.

604 STARTING AND OPERATING

Winch Accessories

The following accessories are necessary to attach the

winch to anchors, change direction of pull, and for safe

winching.

Gloves: Wire rope, through

use, will develop barbs which

can slice skin. It is extremely

important to wear protective

gloves while operating the

winch or handling the wire

rope. Avoid loose fitting clothes

or anything that could become

entangled in the wire rope and

other moving parts.

Snatch/Block Pulley: Used

properly, the multi-purpose

snatch block allows you to (1)

increase the winch’s pulling

power; and (2) change your

pulling direction without dam-

aging the wire rope. Proper use

of the snatch block is covered in

Before You Pull.

Clevis/D-Shackles: The

D-Shackle is a safe means of

connecting the looped ends of

cables, straps and snatch

blocks. The shackle’s pin is

threaded to allow easy re-

moval.

STARTING AND OPERATING 605

Tree Trunk Protector: Typi-

cally made of tough, high-

quality nylon, it provides the

operator an attachment point

for the winch rope to a wide

variety of anchor points and

objects, as well as protect liv-

ing trees.

Operating Your Winch

WARNING!

Failure to observe any of these warnings regarding

proper winch usage may result in severe injury.

• Always use supplied hook strap to hold the hook

when spooling wire rope in or out.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never use as a hoist.

• Never use to move persons.

• Never exceed winch or wire rope rated capacity.

• Always wear heavy leather gloves when handling

the wire rope.

• Never touch wire rope or hook while in tension or

under load.

• Never engage or disengage clutch if winch is under

load, wire rope is in tension, or wire rope drum is

moving.

• Always stand clear of wire rope and load and keep

others away during winching.

• Always keep hands and clothing clear of the wire

rope, hook and fairlead opening during operation

and when spooling.

(Continued)

606 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never wrap wire rope back onto itself. Always use

a choker chain, wire choker rope or tree trunk

protector on the anchor.

• Never attach a recovery strap to the winch hook to

increase the length of a pull.

• Never attempt to tow a vehicle with the recovery

strap attached directly to the winch hook.

• Never use bungee straps that develop tremendous

and potentially dangerous amounts of force when

stretched.

• Always disconnect the remote control when not in

use.

• Never winch when there are less than five wraps of

wire rope around the winch drum.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Always pass remote control through a window to

avoid pinching lead in door, when using remote

inside a vehicle.

• Never leave the remote control plugged into the

winch while free spooling, rigging or sitting idle.

General Information

Practice using your winch before you get stuck. Some key

points to remember when using your winch are:

• Always take your time to assess the situation and plan

your pull carefully.

• Always take your time when using a winch.

• Use the right equipment for the situation.

STARTING AND OPERATING 607

• Always wear leather gloves and do not allow the wire

rope to slip through your hands when handling the

rope.

• Only the operator should handle the wire rope and

remote control.

• Think safety at all times.

Vehicle Recovery Using The Winch

CAUTION!

• Always Know Your Winch: Take the time to fully

read and understand the included Installation and

Operations Guide, and Basic Guide to Winching

Techniques, in order to understand your winch and

the winching operation.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Always inspect winch installation and wire rope

condition before operating the winch. Frayed,

kinked or damaged wire rope must be replaced

immediately. Loose or damaged winch installation

must be corrected immediately.

• Always be sure any element which can interfere

with safe winching operations is removed prior to

initiating winching.

• Always keep remote control lead clear of the drum,

wire rope and rigging.

• Inspect for cracks, pinches, frayed wires, or loose

connections. Replace if damaged.

• Be careful not to pull the Winch Cable Collar

through the rollers. Watch and listen to Winch for

proper snugness.

608 STARTING AND OPERATING

1. Inspect the winch, winch mount, and wire rope for

damage. Do not use the winch if the mount is loose or

rope shows excessive wear or damage.

2. Put on gloves.

3. Disengage the clutch to allow free spooling of the

winch drum, rotate the clutch lever on the winch to

disengage. Freespooling conserves battery power.

Winch Rope Free Spool

STARTING AND OPERATING 609

4. Free the winch hook and attach the hook strap. Free

the winch hook from its anchor point. Attach the hook

strap to the hook (if not attached).

5. Pull the wire to the anchor point. Pull out enough wire

rope to reach your anchor point. Be sure to keep a

certain amount of tension on the wire as it can become

twisted and over-wrapped when slackened, leading to

wire rope damage. To prevent losing the end, hold the

hook strap while you work.

6. Secure to the anchor point. Once you have established

your anchor point, secure the tree-trunk protector or

choker-chain around the object.

Hook Strap Pulling Wire Rope

610 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Always be certain the anchor you select will with-

stand the load.

NOTE: How to choose an anchor point: A secure anchor

is critical to winching operations. An anchor must be

strong enough to hold while winching. Natural anchors

include trees, stumps and rocks. Hook the cable as low as

possible. If no natural anchors are available when recov-

ering another vehicle, your vehicle becomes the anchor

point. In this case, be sure to put the transmission in

NEUTRAL, apply the hand brake and block its wheels to

prevent your vehicle from moving. Ideally, you’ll want

an anchor point that will enable you to pull straight in the

direction the vehicle will move. This allows the wire rope

to wind tightly and evenly onto the spooling drum. An

anchor point as far away as possible will provide the

winch with its greatest pulling power.

Tree Trunk Protector

STARTING AND OPERATING 611

7. Attach the Clevis/D-shackle and Tree Trunk Protector.

Attach the shackle to the two ends of the strap or chain

and through the hook loop, being careful not to over

tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

8. Lock the clutch. Lock the winch drum by rotating the

clutch lever on the winch to engage.

NOTE: Always ensure the clutch is fully engaged or

disengaged.

9. Connect the remote control to the winch control box,

located behind the front bumper. Be careful not to let

the remote control cord dangle in front of the winch. If

you choose to control the winch from inside your

vehicle, always pass the remote through a window to

avoid pinching the cord in the door. Always discon-

nect the remote control when not in use.

Clevis/D-Shackles

612 STARTING AND OPERATING

10. Put wire rope under tension. Using the remote con-

trol switch, slowly wind the wire rope until no slack

remains. Once the wire rope is under tension, stand

well clear of it and never step over it.

11. Check your anchor. Make sure all connections are

secured and free of debris before continuing with the

winching procedure.

Winch Box Remote Control Connector Pulling Wire Rope Under Tension

STARTING AND OPERATING 613

12. Check wire rope. The wire rope should be neatly

wound around the spooling drum. Improper wind-

ing can cause damage to the wire rope.

In certain situations you may

decide to throw a heavy blan-

ket or similar object over the

wire rope. A heavy blanket

can absorb energy should the

wire rope break. Place it on

the wire rope midway be-

tween the winch and the an-

chor point. Do this before the

wire rope is put under ten-

sion. Do not approach or move the blanket once tension

is applied. Do not allow it to get pulled into the fairlead.

If it is necessary to move or remove the blanket, slack the

tension on the wire rope first.

13. Establish no people zones: Make your intentions

clear. Be sure that everyone in the immediate vicinity

surrounding the winching operation is completely

aware of your intentions before you pull. Declare

where the spectators should not stand - never

Wire Neatly Wound Around The Spooling Drum

614 STARTING AND OPERATING

behind or in front of the vehicle and never near the

wire rope or snatch block. Your situation may have

other no people zones.

14. Begin winching. With the winching vehicles engine

on and light tension already on the wire rope, begin

winching slowly and steadily. Be sure that the wire

rope is winding evenly and tightly around the spool-

ing drum. For additional assistance, the winched

vehicle can be slowly driven while being pulled by

the winch. Continue pulling until the vehicle is on

stable ground. If you are able to drive the vehicle, the

winching operation is complete.

No People Zones

Using The Remote Control

STARTING AND OPERATING 615

NOTE:

• Avoid overheating the winch motor. For extended

winching, stop at reasonable intervals to allow the

winch motor to cool down.

• What to look for under load: The wire rope must

always spool onto the drum as indicated by the

drum rotation decal on the winch. As you power-in,

make sure the wire rope winds evenly and tightly on

the drum. This prevents the outer wire wraps from

drawing into the inner wraps, binding and damag-

ing the wire rope. Avoid shock loads by using the

control switch intermittently to take up wire rope

slack. Shock loads can momentarily far exceed the

winch and wire rope ratings. During side pulls the

wire rope tends to stack up at one end of the drum.

This stack can become large enough to cause serious

damage to the winch. So, line up pulls as straight

ahead as possible and stop winching if the wire rope

comes close to the tie rods or mounting plate. To fix

an uneven stack, spool out that section of the rope

and reposition it to the opposite end of the drum,

which will free up space for continued winching.

15. Secure vehicle. Once recovery of the vehicle is com-

plete, be sure to secure the vehicle’s brakes and shift

the transmission to PARK. Release tension in the wire

rope.

16. Disconnect the wire rope, and disconnect from the

anchor.

17. Rewind the wire rope. The person handling the wire

rope should walk the rope in and not let it slide

through the hand, control the winch at all times.

616 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

To prevent serious injury, NEVER put your fingers

inside the hook area as you are powering-in.

NOTE: How to spool under no load: Arrange the re-

mote control lead so it cannot be caught in the winch.

Arrange the wire rope so it will not kink or tangle when

spooled. Be sure any wire rope already on the spooling

drum is wound tightly and evenly layered. Tighten and

straighten the layer if necessary. Keep the wire rope

under light tension and spool the wire rope back and

onto the winch drum in even layers. Stop frequently to

tighten and straighten the layers as necessary. Repeat this

process until the winch hook is the same distance as the

full length of the remote control from the winch. Pinch

the hook between your thumb and forefinger and attach

the hook strap. Hold the hook strap between the thumb

and forefinger to keep tension on the wire rope. Walk the

wire rope towards the fairlead, carefully spooling in the

remaining wire rope. By pulsing the remote control

switch.

Rewinding The Wire Rope

STARTING AND OPERATING 617

18. Store the hook on the most outboard loop of the tow

hook.

19. Disconnect the remote control. Disconnect the remote

control cord from the control box and store in a clean

and dry place. Winching operations are now com-

plete. Put the cap on the solenoid plug-in.

NOTE: Always store the remote control in a protected,

clean, dry area.

Rigging Techniques

Various winching situations will require application of

other winching techniques. These could range from too

little distance to achieve maximum pull using straight

line rigging, simply increasing pulling power, or main-

taining a straight-line pulling situation. You will have to

assess what technique is correct for your situation. Think

safety at all times.

Hook In Stored Position

618 STARTING AND OPERATING

How To Change The Pulling Direction All winching operations should have a straight line from

the winch to the object being pulled. This minimizes the

wire rope collecting on one side of the drum affecting

pulling efficiency and damaging wire rope. A snatch

block, secured to a point directly in front of the vehicle

will enable you to change your pulling direction while

still allowing the wire rope to be at 90° to wind properly

onto the spooling drum.

Increasing Pulling Power

In some cases, you may find yourself needing more

pulling power. The use of snatch blocks increases me-

chanical advantage and that increases your pulling

power.

Change Pulling Directions

STARTING AND OPERATING 619

Double Line Because pulling power decreases with the number of

layers of wire rope on the winch drum, you can use a

snatch block to double line out more wire rope. This

decreases the number of layers of wire rope on the drum,

and increases pulling power. Start by feeding out enough

wire rope to free the winch hook. Attach the hook to your

vehicle’s frame/tow hook and run the wire rope through

a snatch block. Disengage the clutch and, using the

snatch block, pull out enough wire to reach your anchor

point. Do not attach the hook to the mounting kit. Secure

to the anchor point with a tree trunk protector or choker

chain. Attach the clevis/shackle. Attach the shackle to the

two ends of the strap/chain, being careful not to over

tighten (tighten and back-off 1/2 turn).

Wire Rope Routing

620 STARTING AND OPERATING

POWER STEERING

Electric Power Steering — 1500 Models

The electric power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will vary its assist to provide

light efforts while parking and good feel while driving. If

the electric steering system experiences a fault that

prevents it from providing assist, you will still have the

ability to steer the vehicle manually.

If the Steering icon is flashing, it indicates that the vehicle

needs to be taken to the dealer for service. It is likely the

vehicle has lost power steering assistance.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “POWER STEER-

ING SYSTEM OVER TEMP” message is displayed on the

EVIC/DID screen, they indicate that extreme steering ma-

neuvers may have occurred which caused an over tempera-

ture condition in the power steering system. Once driving

conditions are safe, pull over and let the vehicle idle for a

few moments until the icon and message turn off. Refer to

“Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver

Information Display (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

If the Steering icon is displayed and the “SERVICE POWER

STEERING – ASSIST OFF” message is displayed the EVIC/

DID screen, they indicate the vehicle needs to be taken to the

dealer for service. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

NOTE:

• Even if the power steering assistance is no longer

operational, it is still possible to steer the vehicle.

Under these conditions there will be a substantial

increase in steering effort, especially at low speeds and

during parking maneuvers.

• If the condition persists, see your authorized dealer for

service.

STARTING AND OPERATING 621

Hydraulic Power Steering — 2500/3500 Models

The standard power steering system will give you good

vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability

in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical

steering capability if power assist is lost.

If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will

still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these condi-

tions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering

effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during

parking maneuvers.

NOTE:

• Increased noise levels at the end of the steering wheel

travel are considered normal and do not indicate that

there is a problem with the power steering system.

• Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steer-

ing pump may make noise for a short amount of time.

This is due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering

system. This noise should be considered normal, and it

does not in any way damage the steering system.

CAUTION!

Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end of

the steering wheel travel will increase the steering fluid

temperature and it should be avoided when possible.

Damage to the power steering pump may occur.

Power Steering Fluid Check — 2500/3500 Models

Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined

service interval is not required. The fluid should only be

checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are

apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as antici-

pated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an autho-

rized dealer.

622 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your power steering

system as the chemicals can damage your power

steering components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

WARNING!

Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and

with the engine off to prevent injury from moving

parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do

not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended

power steering fluid.

If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated

level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all

surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

FUEL SAVER TECHNOLOGY 5.7L/6.4L ENGINES

ONLY — IF EQUIPPED

This feature offers improved fuel economy by shutting

off four of the engine’s eight cylinders during light load

and cruise conditions. The system is automatic with no

driver inputs or additional driving skills required.

NOTE: This system may take some time to return to full

functionality after a battery disconnect.

PARKING BRAKE

Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking

brake is fully applied. Also, be certain to leave the

transmission in PARK.

The foot operated parking brake is located below the

lower left corner of the instrument panel. To apply the

park brake, firmly push the park brake pedal fully.

STARTING AND OPERATING 623

To release the parking brake, pull the parking brake

release handle.

When the parking brake is applied with the ignition

switch ON, the “Brake Warning Light” in the instrument

cluster will illuminate.

NOTE:

• When the parking brake is applied and the transmis-

sion is placed in gear, the “Brake Warning Light” will

flash. If vehicle speed is detected, a chime will sound

to alert the driver. Fully release the parking brake

before attempting to move the vehicle.

• This light only shows that the parking brake is applied. It

does not show the degree of brake application.

When parking on a hill, it is important to turn the front

wheels toward the curb on a downhill grade and away

from the curb on an uphill grade. Apply the parking

brake before placing the gear selector in PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mechanism may

make it difficult to move the gear selector out of PARK.

The parking brake should always be applied whenever

the driver is not in the vehicle.

Parking Brake Release

624 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a substitute for the

parking brake. Always apply the parking brake

fully when parked to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle, or with

access to an unlocked vehicle. Leaving unattended

children in a vehicle is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seriously or

fatally injured.

• Do not leave the Key Fob in or near the vehicle, or

in a location accessible to children, and do not

leave a vehicle equipped with Keyless Enter-N-Go

in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged

before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake

failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake when leav-

ing your vehicle or it may roll and cause damage or

injury. Also, be certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may cause the vehicle to roll

and cause damage or injury.

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains on with

the parking brake released, a brake system malfunc-

tion is indicated. Have the brake system serviced by

an authorized dealer immediately.

STARTING AND OPERATING 625

BRAKE SYSTEM

If power assist is lost for any reason (for example,

repeated brake applications with the engine off), the

brakes will still function. However, you will experience a

substantial increase in braking effort to stop the vehicle.

If either the front or rear hydraulic system loses normal

braking capability, the remaining system will still func-

tion with some loss of overall braking effectiveness. This

will be evident by increased pedal travel during applica-

tion, greater pedal force required to slow or stop, and

activation of the “Brake Warning Light” and the “ABS

Warning Light” (if equipped) during brake use.

Hydraulic Brake Assist — 2500/3500 Models Only

(Except Power Wagon)

The brake system power assist is provided by a hydro-boost

unit which shares fluid with the power steering system. You

may experience some clicking or hissing noises from the

hydro-boost system during hard braking conditions.

NOTE: Under cold temperatures, pedal effort will be

higher than normal until the power steering fluid reaches

operating temperature.

ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced Electronic

Brake Control system (EBC). This system includes Elec-

tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD), Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start

Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS), Electronic

Stability Control (ESC), and Electronic Roll Mitigation

(ERM). These systems work together to enhance both

vehicle stability and control in various driving condi-

tions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with Trailer Sway

Control (TSC) and Hill Descent Control (HDC).

626 STARTING AND OPERATING

Electronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD)

This function manages the distribution of the braking

torque between the front and rear axles by limiting

braking pressure to the rear axle. This is done to prevent

overslip of the rear wheels to avoid vehicle instability,

and to prevent the rear axle from entering ABS before the

front axle.

Brake System Warning Light

The red “Brake System Warning Light” will turn on when

the ignition switch is turned to the ON position and may

stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Brake System Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the brake system

is not functioning properly and that immediate service is

required. If the “Brake System Warning Light” does not

come on when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides increased

vehicle stability and brake performance under most

braking conditions. The system automatically prevents

wheel lock, and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to ensure that the

ABS is working properly each time the vehicle is started

and driven. During this self-check, you may hear a slight

clicking sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the system detects

one or more wheels begins to lock. Road conditions such

as ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,

or panic stops may increase the likelihood of ABS activa-

tion(s).

STARTING AND OPERATING 627

You also may experience the following when ABS acti-

vates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to run for a

short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated electronic equip-

ment that may be susceptible to interference

caused by improperly installed or high output

radio transmitting equipment. This interference

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

can cause possible loss of anti-lock braking capa-

bility. Installation of such equipment should be

performed by qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish

their effectiveness and may lead to a collision.

Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just

press firmly on your brake pedal when you need to

slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of phys-

ics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded

by the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires or

the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, including those

resulting from excessive speed in turns, following

another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning.

(Continued)

628 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped vehicle must

never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner that could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM tires. Modifi-

cation may result in degraded ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The amber “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” will turn on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position

and may stay on for as long as four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” remains on or

comes on while driving, it indicates that the anti-lock

portion of the brake system is not functioning and that

service is required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if the “Brake

System Warning Light” is not on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on, the brake

system should be serviced as soon as possible to restore the

benefits of anti-lock brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning

Light” does not come on when the ignition switch is turned to

the ON position, have the light repaired as soon as possible.

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking

capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The sys-

tem detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the

rate and amount of brake application and then applies

optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help reduce

braking distances. The BAS complements the anti-lock brake

system (ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly results in

the best BAS assistance. To receive the benefit of the system,

you must apply continuous braking pressure during the

stopping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes). Do not

reduce brake pedal pressure unless braking is no longer

desired. Once the brake pedal is released, the BAS is

deactivated.

STARTING AND OPERATING 629

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the

natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor

can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions, including

those resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabili-

ties of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be exploited

in a reckless or dangerous manner, which could jeopar-

dize the user’s safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to mitigate roll back from a

complete stop while on an incline. If the driver releases the

brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will continue to

hold the brake pressure for a short period. If the driver does

not apply the throttle before this time expires, the system

will release brake pressure and the vehicle will roll down the

hill as normal.

The following conditions must be met in order for HSA to

activate:

• The feature must be enabled.

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• Park brake must be off.

• Driver door must be closed.

• The vehicle must be on a sufficient grade.

• The gear selection must match vehicle uphill direction

(i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in forward gear; vehicle

backing uphill is in REVERSE gear).

• HSA will work in REVERSE gear and all forward

gears. The system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK or NEUTRAL. For vehicles equipped with

a manual transmission, if the clutch is pressed, HSA

will remain active.

630 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill Start Assist

(HSA) will not activate and slight rolling may occur,

such as on minor hills or with a loaded vehicle, or

while pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to be attentive to distance to other

vehicles, people, and objects, and most importantly

brake operation to ensure safe operation of the ve-

hicle under all road conditions. Your complete atten-

tion is always required while driving to maintain

safe control of your vehicle. Failure to follow these

warnings can result in a collision or serious personal

injury.

Towing With HSA

HSA will also provide assistance to mitigate roll back

while towing a trailer.

WARNING!

• If you use a trailer brake controller with your

trailer, the trailer brakes may be activated and

deactivated with the brake switch. If so, there may

not be enough brake pressure to hold both the

vehicle and the trailer on a hill when the brake

pedal is released. In order to avoid rolling down an

incline while resuming acceleration, manually ac-

tivate the trailer brake or apply more vehicle brake

pressure prior to releasing the brake pedal.

• HSA is not a parking brake. Always apply the

parking brake fully when leaving your vehicle.

Also, be certain to leave the transmission in PARK.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 631

WARNING! (Continued)

• Failure to follow these warnings may cause the

vehicle to roll down the incline and could collide

with another vehicle, object or person, and cause

serious or fatal injury. Always remember to use the

parking brake while parking on a hill and that the

driver is responsible for braking the vehicle.

Disabling And Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change the

current setting, proceed as follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Dis-

play (DID), refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”

in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel” for further

information.

• If disabling HSA using Uconnect Settings, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC/DID, perform

the following steps:

1. Center the steering wheel (front wheels pointing

straight forward).

2. Shift the transmission into PARK.

3. Apply the parking brake.

4. Start the engine.

5. Rotate the steering wheel slightly more than one-half

turn to the left.

6. Push the “ESC Off” button located in the lower switch

bank below the climate control four times within

twenty seconds. The “ESC Off Indicator Light” should

turn on and turn off two times.

632 STARTING AND OPERATING

7. Rotate the steering wheel back to center and then an

additional slighty more than one-half turn to the right.

8. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and then

back to the ON position. If the sequence was com-

pleted properly, the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will

blink several times to confirm HSA is disabled.

9. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to

its previous setting.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of

the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, the TCS may

apply brake pressure to the spinning wheel(s) and/or

reduce engine power to provide enhanced acceleration

and stability. A feature of the TCS, Brake Limited Differ-

ential (BLD), functions similar to a limited slip differen-

tial and controls the wheel spin across a driven axle.

If one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster than the

other, the system will apply the brake of the spinning

wheel. This will allow more engine torque to be applied

to the wheel that is not spinning. BLD may remain

enabled even if TCS and ESC are in a reduced mode.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and stability of

the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESC cor-

rects for oversteering or understeering of the vehicle by

applying the brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in

counteracting the oversteer or understeer condition. En-

gine power may also be reduced to help the vehicle

maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine the vehicle

path intended by the driver and compares it to the actual

path of the vehicle. When the actual path does not match

STARTING AND OPERATING 633

the intended path, ESC applies the brake of the appro-

priate wheel to assist in counteracting the oversteer or

understeer condition.

• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than

appropriate for the steering wheel position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” lo-

cated in the instrument cluster will start to flash as soon

as the ESC system becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes when the TCS

is active. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the

accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure

to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road

conditions.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) cannot prevent

the natural laws of physics from acting on the

vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by

prevailing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent

accidents, including those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, driving on very slippery surfaces, or

hydroplaning. ESC also cannot prevent accidents

resulting from loss of vehicle control due to inap-

propriate driver input for the conditions. Only a

safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent acci-

dents. The capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous

manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety or

the safety of others.

(Continued)

634 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to properly main-

tain your vehicle, may change the handling charac-

teristics of your vehicle, and may negatively affect

the performance of the ESC system. Changes to the

steering system, suspension, braking system, tire

type and size or wheel size may adversely affect

ESC performance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC perfor-

mance. Any vehicle modification or poor vehicle

maintenance that reduces the effectiveness of the

ESC system can increase the risk of loss of vehicle

control, vehicle rollover, personal injury and death.

ESC Operating Modes

NOTE: Depending upon model and mode of operation,

the ESC system may have multiple operating modes.

ESC On

This is the normal operating mode for the ESC. When-

ever the vehicle is started, the ESC system will be in this

mode. This mode should be used for most driving

conditions. Alternate ESC modes should only be used for

specific reasons as noted in the following paragraphs.

Partial Off

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for times when a more

spirited driving experience is desired. This mode may

modify TCS and ESC thresholds for activation, which allows

for more wheel spin than normally allowed. This mode may

be useful if the vehicle becomes stuck.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily push the

“ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will

illuminate. To turn the ESC on again, momentarily push

the “ESC Off” switch and the “ESC Off Indicator Light”

will turn off.

STARTING AND OPERATING 635

NOTE: For vehicles with multiple partial ESC modes a

momentary button push will toggle the ESC mode.

Multiple momentary button pushed may be required to

return to ESC On.

NOTE:

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS functionality of

ESC, (except for the limited slip feature described in

the TCS section), has been disabled and the “ESC Off

Indicator Light” will be illuminated. When in “Partial

Off” mode, the engine power reduction feature of TCS

is disabled, and the enhanced vehicle stability offered

by the ESC system is reduced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled when the ESC

system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

Full Off – If Equipped

This mode is intended for off-highway or off-road use

only and should not be used on any public roadways. In

this mode, TCS and ESC features are turned OFF. To enter

the “Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC Off” switch

for five seconds while the vehicle is stopped with the

engine running. After five seconds, a chime will sound,

the “ESC Off Indicator Light” will illuminate, and the

“ESC OFF” message will display in the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC). To turn ESC ON again,

momentarily push the “ESC Off” switch.

NOTE: System may switch from ESC Full Off to Partial

mode when vehicle exceeds a predetermined speed.

When the vehicle speed slows below the predetermined

speed the system will return to ESC Full Off.

ESC modes may also be affected by drive modes – if

equipped.

636 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• In the ESC “Full Off” mode, the engine torque

reduction and stability features are disabled.

Therefore, enhanced vehicle stability offered by

the ESC system is unavailable. In an emergency

evasive maneuver, the ESC system will not engage

to assist in maintaining stability. “ESC Off” mode

is intended for off-highway or off-road use only.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light and

ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” in the instrument cluster will come on

when the ignition switch is turned to the ON

position. It should go out with the engine

running. If the “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the engine running, a

malfunction has been detected in the ESC system. If this

light remains on after several ignition cycles, and the

vehicle has been driven several miles (kilometers) at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see your autho-

rized dealer as soon as possible to have the problem

diagnosed and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” (lo-

cated in the instrument cluster) starts to flash as soon as

the tires lose traction and the ESC system becomes active.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” also

flashes when TCS is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash during ac-

celeration, ease up on the accelerator and apply as little

throttle as possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

STARTING AND OPERATING 637

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light”

and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESC system

will be ON even if it was turned off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or clicking sounds

when it is active. This is normal; the sounds will stop

when ESC becomes inactive following the maneuver

that caused the ESC activation.

The “ESC OFF Indicator Light” indicates the

customer has elected to have the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) in a reduced mode.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for wheel lift by

monitoring the driver’s steering wheel input and the

speed of the vehicle. When ERM determines that the rate

of change of the steering wheel angle and vehicle’s speed

are sufficient to potentially cause wheel lift, it then

applies the appropriate brake and may also reduce

engine power to lessen the chance that wheel lift will

occur. ERM can only reduce the chance of wheel lift

occurring during severe or evasive driving maneuvers; it

cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors, such as

road conditions, leaving the roadway, or striking objects

or other vehicles.

NOTE: ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full Off”

mode (if equipped). Refer to “Electronic Stability Control

(ESC)” in this section for a complete explanation of the

available ESC modes.

638 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading, road condi-

tions and driving conditions, influence the chance

that wheel lift or rollover may occur. ERM cannot

prevent all wheel lift or roll overs, especially those

that involve leaving the roadway or striking objects

or other vehicles. The capabilities of an ERM-

equipped vehicle must never be exploited in a reck-

less or dangerous manner which could jeopardize the

user’s safety or the safety of others.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize an exces-

sively swaying trailer and will take the appropriate

actions to attempt to stop the sway. TSC will become

active automatically once an excessively swaying trailer

is recognized. Note that TSC cannot stop all trailers from

swaying. Always use caution when towing a trailer and

follow the trailer tongue weight recommendations. Refer

to “Trailer Towing” in this section for further informa-

tion.

When TSC is functioning, the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” will flash, the engine power

may be reduced and you may feel the brakes being

applied to individual wheels to attempt to stop the trailer

from swaying. TSC is disabled when the ESC system is in

the “Partial Off” or “Full Off” modes.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the vehicle

down, stop at the nearest safe location, and adjust the

trailer load to eliminate trailer sway.

STARTING AND OPERATING 639

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving while in

4WD Low Range. HDC maintains vehicle speed while

descending hills during various driving situations. HDC

controls vehicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not activate).

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but activation

conditions are not met, or driver is actively overriding

with brake or throttle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively controlling

vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch, but the

following conditions must also be met to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range

• Vehicle speed is below 5 mph (8 km/h).

• Parking brake is released.

• Driver door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled, it will activate automatically if

driven down a grade of sufficient magnitude. The set

speed for HDC is selectable by the driver, and can be

adjusted by using the gear shift +/-. The following

summarizes the HDC set speeds:

HDC Target Set Speeds

• P = No set speed. HDC may be enabled but will not

activate

• R = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• N = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• D = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

640 STARTING AND OPERATING

• 1st = 0.6 mph (1 km/h)

• 2nd = 1.2 mph (2 km/h)

• 3rd = 1.8 mph (3 km/h)

• 4th = 2.5 mph (4 km/h)

• 5th = 3.1 mph (5 km/h)

• 6th = 3.7 mph (6 km/h)

• 7th = 4.3 mph (7 km/h)

• 8th = 5.0 mph (8 km/h)

• 9th = 5.6 mph (9 km/h) – If Equipped

NOTE: During HDC, the +/- shifter input is used for

HDC target speed selection but will not affect the gear

chosen by the transmission. When actively controlling

HDC, the transmission will shift appropriately for the

driver-selected set speed and corresponding driving con-

ditions.

Driver Override

The driver may override HDC activation with throttle or

brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available if any of

the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle or brake

application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 20 mph (32 km/h) but remains

below 40 mph (64 km/h).

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insufficient magni-

tude, is on level ground, or is on an uphill grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to park.

STARTING AND OPERATING 641

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any of the

following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low Range.

• The parking brake is applied.

• Driver door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 20 mph (32 km/h)

for greater than 70 seconds.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 40 mph (64 km/h)

(HDC exits immediately).

• HDC detects excessive brake temperature.

Feedback To The Driver

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the HDC

switch has an LED which offer feedback to the driver

about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illuminate and

remain on solid when HDC is enabled or activated.

This is the normal operating condition for HDC.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when the driver pushes the

HDC switch but enable conditions are not met.

642 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash for several

seconds then extinguish when HDC disables due to

excess speed.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will flash when HDC

deactivates due to overheated brakes. The flashing will

stop and HDC will activate again once the brakes have

cooled sufficiently.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in control-

ling vehicle speed when descending hills. The driver

must remain attentive to the driving conditions and

is responsible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards

Code (TIN)

4 — Maximum Load

2 — Size Designation

5 — Maximum Pressure

3 — Service Description

6 — Treadwear, Traction and

Temperature Grades

STARTING AND OPERATING 643

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”

molded into the sidewall preceding the size designa-

tion. Example: P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on European

design standards. Tires designed to this standard have

the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with

the section width. The letter P is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric

tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the

letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for temporary

emergency use only. Temporary high pressure com-

pact spare tires have the letter “T” or “S” molded into

the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design

standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded

into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

644 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

....blank.... = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

T or S = Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

– Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

STARTING AND OPERATING 645

EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

– R means radial construction, or

– D means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

– A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

– A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to

its load index under certain operating conditions

– The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under

specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and

posted speed limits)

646 STARTING AND OPERATING

EXAMPLE:

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL)

tire:

• XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,

however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires

with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the

date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall

tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on

the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard

side of the tire.

STARTING AND OPERATING 647

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

– This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire

safety standards and is approved for highway use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

– 01 means the year 2001

– Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year

in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

648 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located

behind the front door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after

the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours, or driven

less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three

hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds per

square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible

cold tire inflation pressure for this tire. The maximum inflation

pressure is molded into the sidewall.

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation

Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer’s recommended cold tire inflation pressure

as shown on the tire placard.

Tire Placard A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehi-

cle’s loading capacity, the original equipment tire sizes and the

recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

STARTING AND OPERATING 649

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

Tire And Loading Information Placard Location

NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the driver’s side door.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door)

Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

650 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and

spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed

the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You

will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you

adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading

Information placard in “Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting

And Operating” section of this manual.

NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear

axles must not be exceeded. For further information on

GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to

“Vehicle Loading” in the “Starting And Operating” sec-

tion of this manual.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

STARTING AND OPERATING 651

To determine the maximum loading conditions of your

vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and

trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed

the weight referenced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of the driver and

passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of the driver and

passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the available amount of

cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if

“XXX” amount equals 1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your vehicle, the amount of

available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of luggage and

cargo being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may

not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from

your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Con-

sult this manual to determine how this reduces the

available cargo and luggage load capacity of your

vehicle.

652 STARTING AND OPERATING

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg and there

will be five 68 kg passengers in your vehicle, the amount

of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 295 kg

(635-340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your

trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. The follow-

ing table shows examples on how to calculate total

load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of your

vehicle with varying seating configurations and num-

ber and size of occupants. This table is for illustration

purposes only and may not be accurate for the seating

and load carry capacity of your vehicle.

• For the following example, the combined weight of

occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs

(392 kg). 5

STARTING AND OPERATING 653

654 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading can

cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and increase

your stopping distance. Use tires of the recommended

load capacity for your vehicle. Never overload them.

TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and

satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Four primary areas

are affected by improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can

cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result

in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion

shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can

cause damage that result in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect ve-

hicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in

loss of vehicle control.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering prob-

lems. You could lose control of your vehicle.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 655

WARNING! (Continued)

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle

to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to the

right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recom-

mended cold tire inflation pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect the stability

of the vehicle and can produce a feeling of sluggish

response or over responsiveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side may cause

erratic and unpredictable steering response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may cause the

vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling resistance

resulting in higher fuel consumption.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can cause abnor-

mal wear patterns and reduced tread life, resulting in the

need for earlier tire replacement.

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.

Over-inflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable

ride.

656 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the

driver’s side B-Pillar or rear edge of the driver’s side

door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good quality

pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not make a visual judge-

ment when determining proper inflation. Tires may look

properly inflated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always

“cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold tire inflation pressure

is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of three hours.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the

maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire side-

wall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range

of outdoor temperatures, as tire pressures vary with

temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per

12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind

when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in

the Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the

outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 657

inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),

which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this

outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)

during operation. DO NOT reduce this normal pressure

build up or your tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds and

within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or condi-

tions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high

speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very

important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle opera-

tion. Refer to your authorized tire dealer or original

equipment vehicle dealer for recommended safe operat-

ing speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under maxi-

mum load is dangerous. The added strain on your

tires could cause them to fail. You could have a

serious collision. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the

maximum capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires

on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle

poorly. The instability could cause a collision. Al-

ways use radial ply tires in sets of four. Never

combine them with other types of tires.

658 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be repaired if it

meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of your tire

(sidewall damage is not repairable).

• The puncture is no greater than a ¼ of an inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire repairs and

additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that have

experienced a loss of pressure should be replaced imme-

diately with another Run Flat tire of identical size and

service description (Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all seasons (Spring,

Summer, Fall and Winter). Traction levels may vary

between different all season tires. All season tires can be

identified by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designation on

the tire sidewall. Use all season tires only in sets of four;

failure to do so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet and dry

conditions, and are not intended to be driven in snow or

on ice. If your vehicle is equipped with Summer tires, be

aware these tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your vehicle

when ambient temperatures are less than 40°F (5°C) or if

roads are covered with ice or snow. For more informa-

tion, contact an authorized dealer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 659

Summer tires do not contain the all season designation or

mountain/snowflake symbol on the tire sidewall. Use

Summer tires only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice conditions. You

could lose vehicle control, resulting in severe injury

or death. Driving too fast for conditions also creates

the possibility of loss of vehicle control.

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires

during the Winter. Snow tires can be identified by a

“mountain/snowflake” symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires, select tires

equivalent in size and type to the

original equipment tires. Use snow

tires only in sets of four; failure to do

so may adversely affect the safety and

handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what

was originally equipped with your vehicle and should

not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph

(120 km/h). For speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h), refer

to original equipment or an authorized tire dealer for

recommended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

While studded tires improve performance on ice, skid

and traction capability on wet or dry surfaces may be

poorer than that of non-studded tires. Some states pro-

hibit studded tires; therefore, local laws should be

checked before using these tire types.

660 STARTING AND OPERATING

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive 50 miles

(80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after a rapid loss of inflation

pressure. This rapid loss of inflation is referred to as the

Run Flat mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi (96 kPa). Once a

Run Flat tire reaches the run flat mode it has limited

driving capabilities and needs to be replaced immedi-

ately. A Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle loaded at full

capacity or to tow a trailer while a tire is in the run flat

mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for more infor-

mation.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to the “Tire Service

Kit” section located in your Owner’s Information kit for

further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take

your vehicle through an automatic car wash with a

compact or limited-use temporary spare installed.

Damage to the vehicle may result.

STARTING AND OPERATING 661

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire And

Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare tire and

wheel equivalent in look and function to the original

equipment tire and wheel found on the front or rear axle

of your vehicle. This spare tire may be used in the tire

rotation for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this option,

refer to an authorized tire dealer for the recommended

tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emergency use only.

You can identify if your vehicle is equipped with a

compact spare by looking at the spare tire description on

the Tire and Loading Information Placard located on the

driver’s side door opening or on the sidewall of the tire.

Compact spare tire descriptions begin with the letter “T”

or “S” preceding the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

T, S = Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the original equip-

ment tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled

on your vehicle at the first opportunity.

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a

conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the

wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare tire.

Do not install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact spares are for temporary emergency use

only. With these spares, do not drive more than

50 mph (80 km/h). Temporary use spares have limited

tread life. When the tread is worn to the tread wear

indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be

(Continued)

662 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

replaced. Be sure to follow the warnings, which

apply to your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle control.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emergency use only.

This tire may look like the originally equipped tire on the

front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use full size

spare tire needs to be replaced. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emergency use

only. This tire is identified by a label located on the

limited use spare wheel. This label contains the driving

limitations for this spare. This tire may look like the

original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your

vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same as

your original equipment tire, replace (or repair) the

original equipment tire and reinstall on the vehicle at the

first opportunity.

STARTING AND OPERATING 663

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use only. In-

stallation of this limited use spare tire affects vehicle

handling. With this tire, do not drive more than the

speed listed on the limit use spare wheel. Keep

inflated to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear edge of the

driver’s side door. Replace (or repair) the original

equipment tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it

on your vehicle. Failure to do so could result in loss

of vehicle control.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not

spin your vehicle’s wheels above 30 mph (48 km/h) or

for longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “What To Do In

Emergencies” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire dam-

age or failure. A tire could explode and injure some-

one. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 seconds continu-

ously when you are stuck, and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

664 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires to

help you in determining when your tires should be replaced.

These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread

grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth

becomes a 1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire should be

replaced. Refer to “Replacement Tires” in this section for

further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying

factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation pressures

can cause uneven wear patterns to develop across the

tire tread. These abnormal wear patterns will reduce

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

STARTING AND OPERATING 665

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating of V or

higher, and Summer tires typically have a reduced

tread life. Rotation of these tires per the vehicle main-

tenance schedule is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six

years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to

follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.

You could lose control and have a collision resulting

in serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little

exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact

with oil, grease, and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many

characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for

wear and correct cold tire inflation pressures. The manu-

facturer strongly recommends that you use tires equiva-

lent to the originals in size, quality and performance

when replacement is needed. Refer to the paragraph on

“Tread Wear Indicator”. Refer to the Tire and Loading

Information placard or the Vehicle Certification Label for

the size designation of your tire. The Load Index and

Speed Symbol for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall. See the Tire Sizing Chart ex-

ample found in the “Tire Safety Information” section of

this manual for more information relating to the Load

Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

666 STARTING AND OPERATING

It is recommended to replace the two front tires or two

rear tires as a pair. Replacing just one tire can seriously

affect your vehicle’s handling. If you ever replace a

wheel, make sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

It is recommended you contact your authorized tire

dealer or original equipment dealer with any questions

you may have on tire specifications or capability. Failure

to use equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than

that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations

of unapproved tires and wheels may change sus-

pension dimensions and performance characteris-

tics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredict-

able handling and stress to steering and suspen-

sion components. You could lose control and have

a collision resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings

approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or

capacity, other than what was originally equipped

on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load

index could result in tire overloading and failure.

You could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having

adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire

failure and loss of vehicle control.

STARTING AND OPERATING 667

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a different size may

result in false speedometer and odometer readings.

SUPPLEMENTAL TIRE PRESSURE INFORMATION

— IF EQUIPPED

A light load vehicle condition is defined as two passen-

gers [150 lbs (68 kg) each] plus 200 lbs (90 kg) of cargo.

Cold tire inflation pressures for a lightly loaded vehicle

will be found on the face of the driver’s door.

TIRE CHAINS (TRACTION DEVICES)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-to-body

clearance. Follow these recommendations to guard

against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for the tire, as

recommended by the traction device manufacturer.

Please follow the table below for proper tire size, chain

type, and axle recommendations:

Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class

1500 Models Rear Only P265/70R17 S Class

2500 Models Rear Only LT245/70R17E

LT265/70R18E

LT275/70R18E

U Class

2500 Power Wagon Models Rear Only LT285/70R17D U Class

668 STARTING AND OPERATING

Vehicle Axle Recommendations Tire Sizes Chain Class

3500 (Single Rear Wheel)

Models

Rear Only LT265/70R18E

LT275/70R18E

U Class

3500 (Dual Rear Wheel)

Models

Front/Rear LT235/80R17E U Class

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type (M+S, Snow)

between front and rear axles can cause unpredictable

handling. You could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires, observe the

following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device clearance be-

tween tires and other suspension components, it is

important that only traction devices in good condi-

tion are used. Broken devices can cause serious

damage. Stop the vehicle immediately if noise

occurs that could indicate device breakage. Remove

the damaged parts of the device before further use.

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 669

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Install device as tightly as possible and then re-

tighten after driving about ½ mile (0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns and large

bumps, especially with a loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on dry pave-

ment.

• Observe the traction device manufacturer’s instruc-

tions on the method of installation, operating

speed, and conditions for use. Always use the

suggested operating speed of the device manufac-

turer’s if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a compact spare tire.

TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS

Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at

different loads and perform different steering, driving,

and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at

unequal rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.

The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with

aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain

mud, snow and wet traction levels and contribute to a

smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is permis-

sible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or unusual

wear should be corrected prior to rotation being per-

formed.

670 STARTING AND OPERATING

The suggested rotation method is the “rearward cross”

shown in the following diagram. This rotation pattern

does not apply to some directional tires that must not be

reversed.

Directional Tires — If Equipped

For the R/T package with 22” tires and wheels, the

rotational direction of the tire must be taken into consid-

eration when rotating the tires. The recommended rota-

tion pattern for directional tires is shown below.

Tire Rotation

STARTING AND OPERATING 671

Dual Rear Wheels — If Equipped

The tires used on dual wheel assemblies should be

matched for wear to prevent overloading one tire in a set.

To check if tires are even, lay a straight edge across all

four tires. The straight edge should touch all the tires.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a Tire Pressure

Information System (TPIS):

• The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses

unique sensors in the inner rear wheels to help identify

them from the outer rear wheels, because of this, the

inner and outer wheel locations can’t be switched.

• After a tire rotation is completed, as shown below, the

system can auto learn the locations of each sensor ID.

Auto learning/localization occurs when the vehicle igni-

tion status is changed from Off to On and speeds of

greater than 5 mph (8km/h) are obtained and remain over

5 mph (8km/h) for at about a 15 minute period. You may

need to drive for 20 minutes to account slower speeds and

stops.

• If the tires are rotated incorrectly, The Auto localization

of the TPIS sensors will fail to locate correctly resulting

in incorrect locations for the pressure values displayed

in the Instrument Cluster.

Tire Rotation

672 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• 3500 Dual Rear Tires may only have one approved

direction of rotation. This is to accommodate the

asymmetrical design (tread pattern) of the On/Off-

Road tire and the use of Outline White Letter

(OWL) tires.

• When replacing a flat, the spare tire may have to be

remounted on the rim, or installed at a different

location, to maintain the correct placement of the

tire on the wheel relative to the tire/wheel position

on the truck. For example, if the spare is used to

replace an outer rear tire it will have to be re-

mounted on the rim so that the wheel is dished

inward. That way the tread design of asymmetrical

tires and the white writing of the OWL tires will

maintain proper position.

TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR SYSTEM (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the

driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recom-

mended cold placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about 1 psi

(7 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that when the

outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure will de-

crease. Tire pressure should always be set based on cold

inflation tire pressure. This is defined as the tire pressure

after the vehicle has not been driven for at least three hours,

or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period.

The cold tire inflation pressure must not exceed the maxi-

mum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer

to “Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Operat-

ing” for information on how to properly inflate the vehicle’s

tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the vehicle is

driven - this is normal and there should be no adjustment for

this increased pressure.

STARTING AND OPERATING 673

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if

the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning

limit for any reason, including low temperature effects

and natural pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire

pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn

off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warn-

ing (Tire Pressure Monitoring [TPM] Telltale Light) illu-

minates, you must increase the tire pressure to the

recommended cold placard pressure in order for the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off. The

system will automatically update and the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off once the system

receives the updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need

to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this informa-

tion.

For example, your vehicle may have a recommended

cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure

of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F

(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),

a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire

pressure to approximately 23 psi (158 kPa). This tire

pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the vehicle

may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately

27 psi (186 kPa), but the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will still be ON. In this situation, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn OFF only

after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended

cold placard pressure value.

674 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the original equip-

ment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and warning

have been established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor

damage may result when using replacement equip-

ment that is not of the same size, type, and/or style.

Aftermarket wheels can cause sensor damage.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause the Tire

Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) sensor to be-

come inoperable. After using an aftermarket tire

sealant it is recommended that you take your

vehicle to an authorized dealership to have your

sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure al-

ways reinstall the valve stem cap. This will prevent

moisture and dirt from entering the valve stem,

which could damage the TPMS sensor.

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care

and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure

or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge

while adjusting your tire pressure.

• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.

Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire

tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and

stopping ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire mainte-

nance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain

correct tire pressure using an accurate tire pressure

gauge, even if under-inflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light.”

STARTING AND OPERATING 675

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,

and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in

the tire.

Premium System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) uses wireless

technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sensors to

monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire pressure

readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four TPM sensors

• Various TPMS messages, which display in the Elec-

tronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)/Driver In-

formation Display (DID)

• TPM Telltale Light

The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly (if

equipped) has a TPM sensor. The full size spare can be

used in place of any of the four road tires. A spare with a

pressure below the low-pressure limit will not cause the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” to illuminate or

the chime to sound while it is stored in the spare tire

location.

676 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

illuminate in the instrument cluster and a chime

will sound when tire pressure is low in one or more of the

four active road tires. In addition, the EVIC/DID will

display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic showing

the pressure values of each tire with the low tire pressure

values in a different color. An Inflate to XX message will

also be displayed.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as possible

and inflate the tires with a low pressure condition (those

in a different color in the EVIC/DID graphic) to the

vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure inflation

value as shown in the Inflate to XX message. Once the

system receives the updated tire pressures, the system

“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” Message

STARTING AND OPERATING 677

will automatically update, the graphic display in the

EVIC/DID will return to it’s original color, and the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

Service TPMS Warning

If a system fault is detected, the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds and

then remain on solid. The system fault will also sound a

chime. In addition, the EVIC/DID will display a SER-

VICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault no

longer exists, the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light”

will no longer flash, and the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM

Tire Pressure Monitor Display

678 STARTING AND OPERATING

message will no longer display, and a pressure value will

display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur due

to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving

next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as

the TPM sensors.

• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains

materials that may block radio wave signals.

• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

Vehicles With Matching Full Size Spare

• The matching full size spare wheel and tire assembly

has a TPM sensor that can be monitored by the TPMS.

• If you install the full size spare in place of a road tire

that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning

limit, upon the next ignition switch cycle, a chime will

sound and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will turn ON. In addition, the EVIC/DID will

display a “LOW TIRE” message and a graphic show-

ing the low tire pressure value in a different color. An

Inflate to XX message will also be displayed.

• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (25 km/h) the “Tire Pressure Monitoring

Telltale Light” will turn OFF and the pressure value

will be updated and return to it’s original color, as long

as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning

limit in any of the four active road tires.

STARTING AND OPERATING 679

Vehicles With Non Matching Full Size Spare Or Com-

pact Spare

• The non matching full size spare or compact spare tire

does not have a TPM sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will

not monitor the pressure in the non matching full size

spare or compact spare tire.

• If you install the non matching full size spare or

compact spare tire in place of a road tire that has a

pressure below the low-pressure warning limit, upon

the next ignition switch cycle, the TPM Telltale Light

and a “LOW TIRE” message will remain ON and a

chime will sound. In addition, the graphic in the

EVIC/DID will still display a flashing pressure value

or a pressure value in a different color.

• After driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h), the TPM Telltale Light will flash on

and off for 75 seconds and then remain on solid. In

addition, the EVIC/DID will display a SERVICE TPM

SYSTEM message for a minimum of five seconds and

then display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

• For each subsequent ignition switch cycle, a chime will

sound, the TPM Telltale Light will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid, and the EVIC/

DID will display a SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message

for a minimum of five seconds and then display

dashes (- -) in place of the pressure value.

• Once you repair or replace the original road tire and

reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the non matching full

size spare or compact spare, the TPMS will update

automatically. In addition, the TPM Telltale Light will

turn OFF and the graphic in the EVIC/DID will display a

new pressure value instead of dashes (- -), as long as no

tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may need to

be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h)

in order for the TPMS to receive this information.

680 STARTING AND OPERATING

Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS)

3500 Series Trucks

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Tire Pressure

Information System (TPIS).

The Tire Pressure Information System (TPIS) uses wire-

less technology with wheel rim mounted electronic sen-

sors to transmit tire pressure levels. Sensors mounted to

each wheel as part of the valve stem transmit tire

pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the

tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle monthly

and to maintain the proper pressure.

The TPIS consists of the following components:

• Receiver module

• Four TPM sensors (Single Rear Wheel (SRW) applica-

tions)

• Six TPM sensors (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW) applica-

tions)

• Pressure display in the Electronic Vehicle Information

Center (EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID)

The TPIS system will display all four (Single Rear Wheel

(SRW) applications) or six (Dual Rear Wheel (DRW)

applications) tire pressure values in the EVIC/DID dis-

play.

If a system fault is detected, the EVIC/DID will display a

SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message for a minimum of five

seconds and then display dashes (- -) in place of the

pressure value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

If the ignition switch is cycled, this sequence will repeat,

providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault

no longer exists, the SERVICE TPM SYSTEM message

STARTING AND OPERATING 681

will no longer be displayed, and a pressure value will

display in place of the dashes. A system fault can occur

due to any of the following:

• Signal interference due to electronic devices or driving

next to facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as

the TPM sensors.

• Installing aftermarket window tinting that contains

materials that may block radio wave signals.

• Accumulation of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.

General Information

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and

RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the

following conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful interference.

2. This device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired op-

eration.

NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved

by the party responsible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equipment.

682 STARTING AND OPERATING

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

3.6L Engine

This engine is designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide op-

timum fuel economy and performance

when using high quality unleaded

“Regular” gasoline having a posted

octane number of 87 as specified by

the (R+M)/2 method. The use of

higher octane “Premium” gasoline is not required, as it

will not provide any benefit over “Regular” gasoline in

these engines.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

5.7L Engine

This engines is designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide sat-

isfactory fuel economy and perfor-

mance when using high quality un-

leaded gasoline having a posted

octane number range of 87 to 89 as

specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The

use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for

optimum performance and fuel economy.

STARTING AND OPERATING 683

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

6.4L Engine

This engines is designed to meet all

emissions regulations and provide sat-

isfactory fuel economy and perfor-

mance when using high quality un-

leaded gasoline having a posted

octane number range of 87 to 89 as

specified by the (R+M)/2 method. The

use of 89 octane “Plus” gasoline is recommended for

optimum performance and fuel economy.

While operating on gasoline with an octane number of

87, hearing a light knocking sound from the engine is not

a cause for concern. However, if the engine is heard

making a heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane number lower

than 87 can cause engine failure and may void or not be

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

684 STARTING AND OPERATING

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard

starting, stalling, and hesitations. If you experience these

symptoms, try another brand of gasoline before consid-

ering service for the vehicle.

Reformulated Gasoline

Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner

burning gasoline referred to as “Reformulated Gasoline”.

Reformulated gasoline contains oxygenates and are spe-

cifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and im-

prove air quality.

The use of reformulated gasoline is recommended. Prop-

erly blended reformulated gasoline will provide im-

proved performance and durability of engine and fuel

system components.

Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends

Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxy-

genates such as ethanol.

CAUTION!

DO NOT use gasoline containing methanol or gaso-

line containing more than 15% ethanol (E-15). Use of

these blends may result in starting and drivability

problems, damage critical fuel system components,

cause emissions to exceed the applicable standard,

and/or cause the “Malfunction Indicator Light” to

illuminate. Please observe pump labels as they

should clearly communicate if a fuel contains greater

than 15% ethanol (E-15).

STARTING AND OPERATING 685

Problems that result from using gasoline containing more

than 15% ethanol (E-15) or gasoline containing methanol

are not the responsibility of the manufacturer and may

void or not be covered under New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

Modifications that allow the engine to run on com-

pressed natural gas (CNG) or liquid propane (LP) may

result in damage to the engine, emissions, and fuel

system components. Problems that result from running

CNG or LP are not the responsibility of the manufacturer

and many void or not be covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles

Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles (FFV) are compatible with gaso-

line containing up to 15% ethanol (E-15). Gasoline with

higher ethanol content may void the New Vehicle Lim-

ited Warranty.

If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85

fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:

• Operate in a lean mode.

• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on.

• Poor engine performance.

• Poor cold start and cold drivability.

• Increased risk for fuel system component corrosion.

MMT In Gasoline

Methylcyclopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl (MMT)

is a manganese-containing metallic additive that is

blended into some gasoline to increase octane. Gasoline

blended with MMT provides no performance advantage

beyond gasoline of the same octane number without

MMT. Gasoline blended with MMT reduces spark plug

686 STARTING AND OPERATING

life and reduces emissions system performance in some

vehicles. The manufacturer recommends that gasoline

without MMT be used in your vehicle. The MMT content

of gasoline may not be indicated on the gasoline pump,

therefore, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether

the gasoline contains MMT. MMT is prohibited in Federal

and California reformulated gasoline.

Materials Added To Fuel

Besides using unleaded gasoline with the proper octane

rating, gasolines that contain detergents, corrosion and

stability additives are recommended. Using gasolines

that have these additives will help improve fuel

economy, reduce emissions, and maintain vehicle perfor-

mance.

Designated TOP TIER Detergent Gaso-

line contains a higher level of deter-

gents to further aide in minimizing

engine and fuel system deposits.

When available, the usage of Top Tier

Detergent gasoline is recommended.

Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of

TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning agents should

be avoided. Many of these materials intended for gum

and varnish removal may contain active solvents or

similar ingredients. These can harm fuel system gasket

and diaphragm materials.

STARTING AND OPERATING 687

Fuel System Cautions

CAUTION!

Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s

performance:

• The use of leaded gasoline is prohibited by Federal

law. Using leaded gasoline can impair engine per-

formance and damage the emissions control sys-

tem.

• An out-of-tune engine or certain fuel or ignition

malfunctions can cause the catalytic converter to

overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or

some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune

or malfunctioning and may require immediate ser-

vice. Contact your authorized dealer for service

assistance.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• The use of fuel additives, which are now being

sold as octane enhancers, is not recommended.

Most of these products contain high concentrations

of methanol. Fuel system damage or vehicle perfor-

mance problems resulting from the use of such

fuels or additives is not the responsibility of the

manufacturer and may void or not be covered

under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with the emissions control

system can result in civil penalties being assessed against

you.

688 STARTING AND OPERATING

Carbon Monoxide Warnings

WARNING!

Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.

Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon

monoxide poisoning:

• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon

monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas, which can

kill. Never run the engine in a closed area, such as

a garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the

engine running for an extended period. If the

vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine

running for more than a short period, adjust the

ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into

the vehicle.

• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper main-

tenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

time the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal

conditions repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive

with all side windows fully open.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (3.6L ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is unique for Flexible Fuel

vehicles only. These vehicles can be identified by a

unique fuel filler door label that states Ethanol (E-85) or

Unleaded Gasoline Only and a yellow fuel cap. Please

refer to the other sections of this manual for information

on features that are common between Flexible Fuel and

non-Flexible Fuel powered vehicles.

STARTING AND OPERATING 689

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door label or a

yellow gas cap can operate on E-85.

Ethanol Fuel (E-85)

E-85 is a mixture of approximately 85% ethanol and 15%

unleaded gasoline.

WARNING!

Ethanol vapors are extremely flammable and could

cause serious personal injury. Never have any smok-

ing materials lit or products that can cause spark in or

near the vehicle when removing the fuel filler tube

cap (gas cap) or filling the tank. Do not use E-85 as a

cleaning agent and never use it near an open flame.

Fuel Requirements

If your vehicle is E-85 compatible, it will operate on

unleaded gasoline with any octane rating, or solely E-85

fuel, or any mixture of these fuels.

For best results, avoid fueling patterns alternating

between E-85 and unleaded gasoline.

When switching fuel types:

• Add 5 gallons (19 liters) or more when refueling.

• Drive the vehicle immediately after refueling for at

least 5 miles (8 km).

Observing these precautions will avoid possible hard

starting and/or driveability problems during warm up.

690 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE:

• Use seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel (ASTM D5798). With

non-seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel, hard starting and

rough idle following start up may be experienced even

if the above recommendations are followed, especially

when the ambient temperature is below 32°F (0°C).

• Some additives used in regular gasoline are not fully

compatible with E-85 and may form deposits in your

engine. To eliminate driveability issues that may be

caused by these deposits, a supplemental gasoline

additive, such as MOPAR Injector Cleanup or Techron

may be used.

Selection Of Engine Oil For Flexible Fuel Vehicles

(E-85) And Gasoline Vehicles

FFV vehicles operated on E-85 require specially formu-

lated engine oils. These special requirements are included

in MOPAR engine oils, and in equivalent oils meeting

FCA Material Standard MS-6395. It is recommended that

engine oils that are API Certified and meet the require-

ments of Material Standard MS-6395 be used. MS-6395

contains additional requirements, developed during ex-

tensive fleet testing, to provide additional protection to

FCA US LLC engines.

Starting

The characteristics of E-85 fuel make it unsuitable for use

when ambient temperatures fall below 0°F (-18°C). In the

range of 0°F (-18°C) to 32°F (0°C), an increase in the time

it takes for your engine to start may be experienced, and

a deterioration in driveability (sags and/or hesitations)

until the engine is fully warmed up. These issues may be

improved with the use of seasonally adjusted E-85 fuel.

NOTE: Use of the engine block heater (if equipped) may

improve engine start time when using E-85 fuel when the

ambient temperature is less than 32°F (0°C).

STARTING AND OPERATING 691

Cruising Range

Because E-85 fuel contains less energy per gallon/liter

than gasoline, an increase in fuel consumption will be

experienced. The miles per gallon (mpg)/kilometers per

liter and the driving range will decrease by approxi-

mately 30%, compared to gasoline operation.

Replacement Parts

All fuel and engine components in your Flexible Fuel

Vehicle (FFV) are designed to be compatible with ethanol.

Ethanol compatible service components are required.

CAUTION!

Replacing fuel system components with non-ethanol

compatible components can damage your vehicle.

Maintenance

CAUTION!

Do not use ethanol mixtures greater than 85% in your

vehicle. It will make it more difficult for your engine

to start under cold conditions, may affect drivability,

and could cause engine damage.

ADDING FUEL

The fuel filler cap (gas cap) is located behind the fuel

filler door, on the left side of the vehicle. Open the fuel

door and remove the fuel cap by turning it counter-

clockwise.

692 STARTING AND OPERATING

NOTE: When removing the fuel filler cap, lay the cap

tether in the hook, located on the fuel filler door.

CAUTION!

• Damage to the fuel system or emissions control

system could result from using an improper fuel

tank filler tube cap.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap could let impurities

into the fuel system.

• A poorly fitting fuel filler cap may cause the

“Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)” to turn on.

• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top

off” the fuel tank after filling. When the fuel

nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank is full.

WARNING!

• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near the

vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the tank is

being filled.

(Continued)

Fuel Filler Cap

STARTING AND OPERATING 693

WARNING! (Continued)

• Never add fuel to the vehicle when the engine is

running.

• A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a

portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You

could be burned. Always place gas containers on

the ground while filling.

NOTE:

• When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the fuel tank

is full.

• Tighten the gas cap until you hear a “clicking” sound.

This is an indication that the gas cap is tightened

properly. The MIL in the instrument cluster may turn

on if the gas cap is not secured properly. Make sure

that the gas cap is tightened each time the vehicle is

refueled.

WARNING!

Static electricity can cause an ignition of flammable

liquid, vapor or gas in any vehicle or trailer. To

reduce risk of serious injury or death when filling

containers:

• Always place container on the ground before fill-

ing.

• Keep the pump nozzle in contact with the container

when you are filling it.

• Use only approved containers for flammable liq-

uid.

• Do not leave container unattended while filling.

• A static electric charge could cause a spark and fire

hazard.

694 STARTING AND OPERATING

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator

will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display

area. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)/Driver Information Display (DID) in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the RIGHT

button to turn off the message. If the problem continues,

the message will appear the next time the vehicle is

started.

VEHICLE LOADING

Certification Label

As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Admin-

istration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label

affixed to the driver’s side door or pillar.

This label contains the month and year of manufacture,

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR), Gross Axle Weight

Rating (GAWR) front and rear, and Vehicle Identification

Number (VIN). A Month-Day-Hour (MDH) number is

included on this label and indicates the Month, Day and

Hour of manufacture. The bar code that appears on the

bottom of the label is your VIN.

STARTING AND OPERATING 695

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

including driver, passengers, vehicle, options and cargo.

The label also specifies maximum capacities of front and

rear axle systems (GAWR). Total load must be limited so

GVWR and front and rear GAWR are not exceeded.

Payload

The payload of a vehicle is defined as the allowable load

weight a truck can carry, including the weight of the

driver, all passengers, options and cargo.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum permissible load on the front

and rear axles. The load must be distributed in the cargo

area so that the GAWR of each axle is not exceeded.

Each axle GAWR is determined by the components in the

system with the lowest load carrying capacity (axle,

springs, tires or wheels). Heavier axles or suspension

components sometimes specified by purchasers for in-

creased durability does not necessarily increase the vehi-

cle’s GVWR.

Tire Size

The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents

the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires

must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.

Rim Size

This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size

listed.

Inflation Pressure

This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle for

all loading conditions up to full GAWR.

696 STARTING AND OPERATING

Curb Weight

The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight

of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full

capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo

loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight

values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a

commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are

added.

The actual total weight and the weight of the front and

rear of your vehicle at the ground can best be determined

by weighing it when it is loaded and ready for operation.

The entire vehicle should first be weighed on a commer-

cial scale to insure that the GVWR has not been exceeded.

The weight on the front and rear of the vehicle should

then be determined separately to be sure that the load is

properly distributed over the front and rear axle. Weigh-

ing the vehicle may show that the GAWR of either the

front or rear axles has been exceeded but the total load is

within the specified GVWR. If so, weight must be shifted

from front to rear or rear to front as appropriate until the

specified weight limitations are met. Store the heavier

items down low and be sure that the weight is distributed

equally. Stow all loose items securely before driving.

Improper weight distributions can have an adverse effect

on the way your vehicle steers and handles and the way

the brakes operate.

CAUTION!

Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the GVWR

or the maximum front and rear GAWR. If you do,

parts on your vehicle can break, or it can change the

way your vehicle handles. This could cause you to

lose control. Also overloading can shorten the life of

your vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 697

TRAILER TOWING

In this section you will find safety tips and information

on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do

with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer, carefully

review this information to tow your load as efficiently

and safely as possible.

To maintain the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage,

follow the requirements and recommendations in this

manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.

Common Towing Definitions

The following trailer towing related definitions will assist

you in understanding the following information:

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)

The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.

This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue

weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not

exceed the GVWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle

Certification Label” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)

The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all

cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or tem-

porary) loaded in or on the trailer in its loaded and

ready for operation condition.

The recommended way to measure GTW is to put your

fully loaded trailer on a vehicle scale. The entire weight

of the trailer must be supported by the scale.

698 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

If the gross trailer weight is 5,000 lbs (2 267 kg) or

more, it is recommended to use a weight-distributing

hitch to ensure stable handling of your vehicle. If

you use a standard weight-carrying hitch, you could

lose control of your vehicle and cause a collision.

Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)

The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle

and trailer when weighed in combination.

Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)

The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear

axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles

evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either front or rear

GAWR. Refer to “Vehicle Loading/Vehicle Certification La-

bel” in “Starting And Operating” for further information.

WARNING!

It is important that you do not exceed the maximum

front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition

can result if either rating is exceeded.

Tongue Weight (TW)

The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the

hitch ball by the trailer. You must consider this as part of

the load on your vehicle.

Frontal Area

The frontal area is the maximum height multiplied by the

maximum width of the front of a trailer.

STARTING AND OPERATING 699

Trailer Sway Control

The trailer sway control can be a mechanical telescoping

link that can be installed between the hitch receiver and

the trailer tongue that typically provides adjustable fric-

tion associated with the telescoping motion to dampen

any unwanted trailer swaying motions while traveling.

If equipped, the electronic Trailer Sway Control (TSC)

recognizes a swaying trailer and automatically applies

individual wheel brakes and/or reduces engine power to

attempt to eliminate the trailer sway.

Weight-Carrying Hitch

A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue

weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or

some other connecting point of the vehicle. These kinds

of hitches are the most popular on the market today and

they are commonly used to tow small and medium sized

trailers.

Weight-Distributing Hitch

A weight-distributing system works by applying lever-

age through spring (load) bars. They are typically used

for heavier loads to distribute trailer tongue weight to the

tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s). When used

in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it pro-

vides for a more level ride, offering more consistent

steering and brake control, thereby enhancing towing

safety. The addition of a friction/hydraulic sway control

also dampens sway caused by traffic and crosswinds and

contributes positively to tow vehicle and trailer stability.

Trailer sway control and a weight distributing (load

equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue

Weights (TW) and may be required depending on vehicle

and trailer configuration/loading to comply with GAWR

requirements.

700 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING!

• An improperly adjusted weight distributing hitch

system may reduce handling, stability and braking

performance and could result in a collision.

• Weight distributing systems may not be compatible

with surge brake couplers. Consult with your hitch

and trailer manufacturer or a reputable Recreational

Vehicle dealer for additional information.

Without Weight-Distributing Hitch (Incorrect)

STARTING AND OPERATING 701

With Weight-Distributing Hitch (Correct) Improper Adjustment Of Weight-Distributing Hitch

(Incorrect)

702 STARTING AND OPERATING

Recommended Distribution Hitch Adjustment

Towing With 1500 Air Suspension

1. Set air suspension to normal ride height. No action is

required if already in normal ride height.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running

position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of

the air suspension system.

2. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer

(do not connect the trailer).

3. Under radio suspension settings, turn on jack mode.

Jack mode will be canceled and procedure must be

restarted if the vehicle is driven at speeds above 5mph

(8kph).

4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel

opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

5. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight

distribution bars connected.

6. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel

opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

Measuring Height (H)

STARTING AND OPERATING 703

7. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distribut-

ing bars so that the height of the front fender is

approximately (H2-H1)/3+H1 (about 1/3 the differ-

ence between H2 and H1 above normal ride height

[H1]).

8. The truck can now be driven. Jack mode will be

canceled and vehicle will return to normal ride height

when drive at speeds above 5mph (8kph).

Measurement Example Example 1500 Height

(mm)

H1 925

H2 946

H2-H1 21

(H2-H1)/3 7

(H2-H1)/3 + H1 932

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing

with tow haul mode engaged.

All Other 1500(Non-Air Suspension)/2500/3500 Trucks

1. Position the truck to be ready to connect to the trailer

(do not connect the trailer).

NOTE: For Ram 2500/3500 trucks equipped with rear air

suspension, normal ride height or alternate ride height

can be used. The vehicle must remain in the engine

running position while attaching a trailer for proper

leveling of the air suspension system. It may not be

possible to enter alternate ride height while lightly

loaded.

2. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel

opening on the fender to ground, this is height H1.

3. Attach the trailer to the vehicle without the weight

distribution bars connected.

704 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. Measure the height of the top of the front wheel

opening on the fender to ground, this is height H2.

5. Install and adjust the tension in the weight distribut-

ing bars so that the height of the front fender is

approximately (H2-H1)/2+H1 (about 1/2 the differ-

ence between H2 and H1 above normal ride height

[H1]).

Measurement Example Example 2500/3500

Height (mm)

H1 1030

H2 1058

H2-H1 28

(H2-H1)/2 14

(H2-H1)/2 + H1 1044

NOTE: For all towing conditions, we recommend towing

with tow haul mode engaged.

Fifth-Wheel Hitch

The fifth-wheel hitch is a special high platform with a

coupling that mounts over the rear axle of the tow vehicle

in the truck bed. It connects a vehicle and fifth-wheel

trailer with a coupling king pin.

Gooseneck Hitch

The gooseneck hitch employs a pivoted coupling arm

which attaches to a ball mounted in the bed of a pickup

truck. The coupling arm connects to the hitch mounted

over the rear axle in the truck bed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 705

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

The following chart provides the maximum trailer

weight a given factory equipped trailer hitch type can

tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the

correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Hitch Type Max. Trailer Weight / Max.

Tongue Weight

Class III Bumper

Hitch - 1500 Model

5,000 lbs (2,268 kg) / 500 lbs

(226 kg)

Class IV - 1500

Model

11,000 lbs (4,989 kg) / 1100

lbs (498 kg)

Class V - 2500/3500

Models

18,000 lbs (8,164 kg) / 1800

lbs (816 kg)

Fifth Wheel - 2500

Model

25,000 lbs (11,339 kg) / 5000

lbs (2,267 kg)

Trailer Hitch Type and Maximum Trailer Weight

Gooseneck - 2500

Model

20,000 lbs (9,071 kg) /

4000 lbs (1,814 kg)

Gooseneck Or Fifth

Wheel - 3500 Model

32,000 lbs (14,545 kg) / 6000

lbs (2,721 kg)

Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum

Trailer Weight Ratings)” for the Maximum Gross

Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given drive-

train.

All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on

your vehicle.

706 STARTING AND OPERATING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight

Ratings)

NOTE: For additional trailer towing information (maxi-

mum trailer weight ratings) refer to the following website

addresses:

• ramtrucks.com/en/towing_guide/

• ramtruck.ca (Canada)

• rambodybuilder.com

Trailer And Tongue Weight

Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on

your trailer hitch.

Consider the following items when computing the

weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:

• The tongue weight of the trailer

• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment

put in or on your vehicle

• The weight of the driver and all passengers

NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the

trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional

factory-installed options or dealer-installed options must

be considered as part of the total load on your vehicle.

Refer to “Tire Safety Information/Tire and Loading In-

formation Placard” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

STARTING AND OPERATING 707

Towing Requirements

To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drive-

train components the following guidelines are recom-

mended:

CAUTION!

• Do not tow a trailer at all during the first 500 miles

(805 km) the new vehicle is driven. The engine, axle

or other parts could be damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (805 km) that a

trailer is towed, do not drive over 50 mph (80 km/h)

and do not make starts at full throttle. This helps

the engine and other parts of the vehicle wear in at

the heavier loads.

WARNING!

Improper towing can lead to a collision. Follow these

guidelines to make your trailer towing as safe as

possible:

• Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer

and will not shift during travel. When trailering

cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts

can occur that may be difficult for the driver to

control. You could lose control of your vehicle and

have a collision.

• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not

overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can

cause a loss of control, poor performance or dam-

age to brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering,

suspension, chassis structure or tires.

• Safety chains must always be used between your

vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to

(Continued)

708 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

the hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the

chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough

slack for turning corners.

• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a

grade. When parking, apply the parking brake on

the tow vehicle. Put the tow vehicle transmission in

PARK. For four-wheel drive vehicles, make sure

the transfer case is not in NEUTRAL. Always,

block or chock the trailer wheels.

• GCWR must not be exceeded.

• Total weight must be distributed between the tow

vehicle and the trailer such that the following four

ratings are not exceeded:

1. GVWR

2. GTW

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

3. GAWR

4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch uti-

lized.

Towing Requirements — Tires

• Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact

spare tire.

• Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe

and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to

“Tires – General Information” in “Starting And Oper-

ating” for proper tire inflation procedures.

• Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pres-

sures before trailer usage.

STARTING AND OPERATING 709

• Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage

before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires – General

Information” in “Starting And Operating” for the

proper inspection procedure.

• When replacing tires, refer to “Tires – General Infor-

mation” in “Starting And Operating” for proper tire

replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher

load carrying capacity will not increase the vehicle’s

GVWR and GAWR limits.

Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes

WARNING!

• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s hydrau-

lic brake lines. It can overload your brake system and

cause it to fail. You might not have brakes when you

need them and could have an accident.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping

distance. When towing you should allow for addi-

tional space between your vehicle and the vehicle

in front of you. Failure to do so could result in an

accident.

CAUTION!

If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

loaded, it should have its own brakes and they

should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this

could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher

brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.

• Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or

vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.

This could cause inadequate braking and possible

personal injury.

710 STARTING AND OPERATING

• An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is

required when towing a trailer with electronically

actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with

a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic

brake controller is not required.

• Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over

1,000 lbs (453 kg) and required for trailers in excess of

1,653 lbs (749 kg).

Integrated Trailer Brake Module — If Equipped

Your vehicle may have an Integrated Trailer Brake Mod-

ule (ITBM) for Electric and Electric Over Hydraulic

(EOH) trailer brakes.

NOTE: This module has been designed and verified with

electric trailer brakes and new electric over hydraulic

systems. Some previous EOH systems may not be com-

patible with ITBM.

Integrated Trailer Brake Module (ITBM)

1 — GAIN Adjustment Button

2 — GAIN Adjustment Button

3 — Manual Brake Control Lever

STARTING AND OPERATING 711

The user interface consists of the following:

Manual Brake Control Lever

Slide the manual brake control lever to the left to activate

power to the trailer’s electric brakes independent of the tow

vehicle’s brakes. If the manual brake control lever is acti-

vated while the brake is also applied, the greater of the two

inputs determines the power sent to the trailer brakes.

The trailer and the vehicle’s brake lamps will come on when

either vehicle braking or manual trailer brakes are applied.

Trailer Brake Status Indicator Light

This light indicates the trailer electrical connection status.

If no electrical connection is detected after the ignition is

turned on, pushing the GAIN adjustment button or

sliding the manual brake control lever will display the

GAIN setting for 10 seconds and the “Trailer Brake Status

Indicator Light” will not be displayed.

If a fault is detected in the trailer wiring or the Integrated

Trailer Brake Module (ITBM), the “Trailer Brake Status

Indicator Light” will flash.

GAIN Adjustment Buttons (+/-)

Pushing these buttons will adjust the brake control

power output to the trailer brakes in 0.5 increments. The

GAIN setting can be increased to a maximum of 10 or

decreased to a minimum of 0 (no trailer braking).

GAIN

The GAIN setting is used to set the trailer brake control

for the specific towing condition and should be changed

as towing conditions change. Changes to towing condi-

tions include trailer load, vehicle load, road conditions

and weather.

712 STARTING AND OPERATING

Adjusting GAIN

NOTE: This should only be performed in a traffic free

environment at speeds of approximately 20–25 mph

(30–40 km/h).

1. Make sure the trailer brakes are in good working

condition, functioning normally and properly ad-

justed. See your trailer dealer if necessary.

2. Hook up the trailer and make the electrical connec-

tions according to the trailer manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

3. When a trailer with electric/EOH brakes is plugged

in, the trailer connected message should appear in the

EVIC/DID (if the connection is not recognized by the

ITBM, braking functions will not be available), the

GAIN setting will illuminate and the correct type of

trailer must be selected from the EVIC/DID options.

4. Push the UP or DOWN button on the steering wheel

until “TRAILER TOW” appears on the screen.

5. Push the RIGHT arrow on the steering wheel to enter

“TRAILER TOW”.

6. Push the UP or DOWN buttons until Trailer Brake

Type appears on the screen.

7. Push the RIGHT arrow and then push the UP or

DOWN buttons until the proper Trailer Brake Type

appears on the screen.

8. In a traffic-free environment, tow the trailer on a dry,

level surface at a speed of 20–25 mph (30–40 km/h)

and squeeze the manual brake control lever com-

pletely.

9. If the trailer wheels lockup (indicated by squealing

tires), reduce the GAIN setting; if the trailer wheels

turn freely, increase the GAIN setting.

STARTING AND OPERATING 713

Repeat steps 8 and 9 until the GAIN setting is at a point

just below trailer wheel lockup. If towing a heavier

trailer, trailer wheel lockup may not be attainable even

with the maximum GAIN setting of 10.

Light Electric Heavy Electric Light EOH Heavy EOH

Type of Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric Trailer Brakes Electric over Hydrau-

lic Trailer Brakes

Electric over Hydrau-

lic Trailer Brakes

Load *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs *Under 10,000 lbs *Above 10,000 lbs

* The suggested selection depends and may change

depending on the customer preferences for braking per-

formance. Condition of the trailer brakes, driving and

road state may also affect the selection.

Display Messages

The trailer brake control interacts with the Electronic

Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information

Display (DID). Display messages, along with a single

chime, will be displayed when a malfunction is deter-

mined in the trailer connection, trailer brake control, or

on the trailer. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center” or “Driver Information Display” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

714 STARTING AND OPERATING

CAUTION!

Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the

ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss

of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-

ping distance or trailer instability which could result

in damage to your vehicle, trailer, or other property.

WARNING!

Connecting a trailer that is not compatible with the

ITBM system may result in reduced or complete loss

of trailer braking. There may be a increase in stop-

ping distance or trailer instability which could result

in personal injury.

NOTE:

• An aftermarket controller may be available for use

with trailers with air or electric-over-hydraulic trailer

brake systems. To determine the type of brakes on

your trailer and the availability of controllers, check

with your trailer manufacturer or dealer.

• Removal of the ITBM will cause errors and it may

cause damage to the electrical system and electronic

modules of the vehicle. See your authorized dealer if

an aftermarket module is to be installed.

STARTING AND OPERATING 715

Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights And Wiring

Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,

stoplights and turn signals on the trailer are required for

motoring safety.

The Trailer Tow Package may include a four- and seven-

pin wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer har-

ness and connector.

NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicles

wiring harness.

The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle

but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.

Refer to the following illustrations.

Four-Pin Connector

1 — Female Pins

2 — Male Pin

3 — Ground

4 — Park

5 — Left Stop/Turn

6 — Right Stop/Turn

716 STARTING AND OPERATING

Towing Tips

Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping

and backing the trailer up in an area away from heavy

traffic.

Automatic Transmission

The DRIVE range can be selected when towing. The

transmission controls include a drive strategy to avoid

frequent shifting when towing. However, if frequent

shifting does occur while in DRIVE, select TOW/HAUL

mode or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic

Range Select (ERS) shift control).

NOTE: Using TOW/HAUL mode or selecting a lower

gear range (using the ERS shift control) while operating

the vehicle under heavy loading conditions will improve

performance and extend transmission life by reducing

excessive shifting and heat build up. This action will also

provide better engine braking.

Seven-Pin Connector

1 — Battery

2 — Backup Lamps

3 — Right Stop/Turn

4 — Electric Brakes

5 — Ground

6 — Left Stop/Turn

7 — Running Lamps

STARTING AND OPERATING 717

When towing a loaded trailer up steep grades at low

speeds (20 mph [32 km/h] or below), holding your

vehicle in first gear (using the ERS shift control) can help

to avoid transmission overheating.

If you regularly tow a trailer for more than 45 minutes of

continuous operation, then change the automatic trans-

mission fluid and filter(s) as specified for police, taxi,

fleet, or frequent trailer towing. Refer to the “Mainte-

nance Schedule” for the proper maintenance intervals.

NOTE: Check the automatic transmission fluid level

before towing (6-speed automatic only).

Tow/Haul Mode

To reduce potential for automatic transmission overheat-

ing, activate TOW/HAUL mode when driving in hilly

areas, or select a lower gear range (using the Electronic

Range Select (ERS) shift control) on more severe grades.

Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped

• Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.

• When using the speed control, if you experience speed

drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage until

you can get back to cruising speed.

• Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to

maximize fuel efficiency.

Cooling System

To reduce potential for engine and transmission over-

heating, take the following actions:

City Driving

When stopped for short periods of time, shift the trans-

mission into NEUTRAL and increase engine idle speed.

Highway Driving

Reduce speed.

718 STARTING AND OPERATING

Air Conditioning

Turn off temporarily.

Air Suspension System

To aid in attaching/detaching the trailer from the vehicle,

the air suspension system can be used. Refer to “Air

Suspension System” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information.

NOTE: The vehicle must remain in the engine running

position while attaching a trailer for proper leveling of

the air suspension system.

SNOWPLOW

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Do not use this model vehicle for snowplow

applications.

WARNING!

Snowplows and other aftermarket equipment should

not be added to the front end of your vehicle. The

airbag crash sensors may be affected by the change in

the front end structure. The airbags could deploy

unexpectedly or could fail to deploy during a colli-

sion resulting in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Using this vehicle for snowplow applications can

cause damage to the vehicle.

STARTING AND OPERATING 719

WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely

affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.

Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-

scribed earlier in this manual.

2500/3500 Models Only

Snowplow Prep Packages are available as a factory

installed option. These packages include components

necessary to equip your vehicle with a snowplow.

NOTE: Before installation of a snowplow it is highly rec-

ommended that the owner/installer obtain and follow the

recommendations contained within the current Body Build-

ers Guide. See your authorized dealer, installer or snowplow

manufacturer for this information. There are unique electri-

cal systems that must be connected to properly assure

operator safety and prevent overloading vehicle systems.

WARNING!

Attaching a snowplow to this vehicle could adversely

affect performance of the airbag system in a collision.

Do not expect that the airbag will perform as de-

scribed earlier in this manual.

CAUTION!

The “Lamp Out” indicator could illuminate if exte-

rior lamps are not properly installed.

Before Plowing

• Check the hydraulic system for leaks and proper fluid

level.

• Check the mounting bolts and nuts for proper tight-

ness.

720 STARTING AND OPERATING

• Check the runners and cutting edge for excessive wear.

The cutting edge should be ¼ to ½ in (6 cm to 1.2 cm)

above ground in snow plowing position.

• Check that snowplow lighting is connected and func-

tioning properly.

Snowplow Prep Package Model Availability

For Information about snowplow applications visit

www.ramtrucks.com or refer to the current Body Build-

ers Guide.

1. The maximum number of occupants in the truck

should not exceed two.

2. The total GVWR or the Front GAWR or the Rear

GAWR should never be exceeded.

3. Cargo capacity will be reduced by the addition of

options or passengers, etc.

The loaded vehicle weight, including the snowplow

system, all aftermarket accessories, driver, passengers,

options, and cargo, must not exceed either the Gross

Vehicle Weight (GVWR) or Gross Axle Weight (GAWR)

ratings. These weights are specified on the Safety Com-

pliance Certification Label on the driver’s side door

opening.

NOTE: Detach the snowplow when transporting pas-

sengers.

Vehicle front end wheel alignment was set to specifica-

tions at the factory without consideration for the weight

of the plow. Front end toe-in should be checked and reset

if necessary at the beginning and end of the snowplow

season. This will help prevent uneven tire wear.

The blade should be lowered whenever the vehicle is

parked.

STARTING AND OPERATING 721

Maintain and operate your vehicle and snowplow equip-

ment following the recommendations provided by the

specific snowplow manufacturer.

Over The Road Operation With Snowplow

Attached

The blade restricts air flow to the radiator and causes the

engine to operate at higher than normal temperatures.

Therefore, when transporting the plow, angle the blade

completely and position it as low as road or surface

conditions permit. Do not exceed 40 mph (64 km/h). The

operator should always maintain a safe stopping distance

and allow adequate passing clearance.

Operating Tips

Under ideal snow plowing conditions, 20 mph (32 km/h)

should be maximum operating speed. The operator

should be familiar with the area and surface to be

cleaned. Reduce speed and use extreme caution when

plowing unfamiliar areas or under poor visibility.

General Maintenance

Snowplows should be maintained in accordance with the

plow manufacturer’s instructions.

Keep all snowplow electrical connections and battery

terminals clean and free of corrosion.

When plowing snow, to avoid transmission and drivetrain

damage, the following precautions should be observed.

• Operate with transfer case in 4LO when plowing small or

congested areas where speeds are not likely to exceed

15 mph (24 km/h). At higher speeds operate in 4HI.

• Vehicles with automatic transmissions should use 4LO

range when plowing deep or heavy snow for extended

periods of time to avoid transmission overheating.

• Do not shift the transmission unless the engine has

returned to idle and wheels have stopped. Make a

practice of stepping on the brake pedal while shifting

the transmission.

722 STARTING AND OPERATING

RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.)

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

Towing Condition Wheels OFF

The Ground

Two-Wheel

Drive Models

Four-Wheel Drive Models

Flat Tow NONE NOT AL-

LOWED

See Instructions

• Automatic transmission in PARK

• Manual transmission in gear (NOT in

NEUTRAL)

• Transfer case in NEUTRAL (N)

• Tow in forward direction

Dolly Tow Front NOT AL-

LOWED

NOT ALLOWED

Rear OK NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL OK OK

STARTING AND OPERATING 723

NOTE:

• When recreational towing your vehicle, always follow

applicable state and provincial laws. Contact state and

provincial Highway Safety offices for additional de-

tails.

• Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be placed

in Transport mode before tying them down (from the

body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to “Air

Suspension – If Equipped” for more information. If the

vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode (for ex-

ample, engine will not run), tie-downs must be fas-

tened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow

these instructions may cause fault codes to be set

and/or cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Recreational Towing — Two-Wheel Drive Models

DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to the drivetrain

will result.

Recreational towing (for two-wheel drive models) is

allowed ONLY if the rear wheels are OFF the ground.

This may be accomplished using a tow dolly or vehicle

trailer. If using a tow dolly, follow this procedure:

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure

the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

1. Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

2. Drive the rear wheels onto the tow dolly.

3. Firmly apply the parking brake. Place automatic trans-

mission in PARK, manual transmission in gear (not in

NEUTRAL).

724 STARTING AND OPERATING

4. Properly secure the rear wheels to the dolly, following

the dolly manufacturer’s instructions.

5. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position and

remove the Key Fob.

6. Install a suitable clamping device, designed for tow-

ing, to secure the front wheels in the straight position.

CAUTION!

• Towing with the rear wheels on the ground will

cause severe transmission damage. Damage from

improper towing is not covered under the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

• Do not disconnect the driveshaft because fluid may

leak from the transmission, causing damage to

internal parts.

Recreational Towing — Four-Wheel Drive Models

NOTE: Both the manual shift and electronic shift transfer

cases must be shifted into NEUTRAL (N) for recreational

towing. Automatic transmissions must be shifted into

PARK for recreational towing. Manual transmissions

must be placed in gear (NOT in NEUTRAL) for recre-

ational towing. Refer to the following for the proper

transfer case NEUTRAL (N) shifting procedure for your

vehicle.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT dolly tow any 4WD vehicle. Towing with

only one set of wheels on the ground (front or rear)

will cause severe transmission and/or transfer case

damage. Tow with all four wheels either ON the

ground, or OFF the ground (using a vehicle trailer).

(Continued)

STARTING AND OPERATING 725

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Tow only in the forward direction. Towing this

vehicle backwards can cause severe damage to the

transfer case.

• Automatic transmissions must be placed in PARK

for recreational towing.

• Manual transmissions must be placed in gear (not

in Neutral) for recreational towing.

• Before recreational towing, perform the procedure

outlined under “Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)” to be

certain that the transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL

(N). Otherwise, internal damage will result.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-

ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

• Do not disconnect the rear driveshaft because fluid

will leak from the transfer case, causing damage to

internal parts.

• Do not use a bumper-mounted clamp-on tow bar

on your vehicle. The bumper face bar will be

damaged.

Shifting Into NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

recreational towing.

WARNING!

You or others could be injured or killed if you leave

the vehicle unattended with the transfer case in the

NEUTRAL (N) position without first fully engaging

(Continued)

726 STARTING AND OPERATING

WARNING! (Continued)

the parking brake. The transfer case NEUTRAL (N)

position disengages both the front and rear drive

shaft from the powertrain, and will allow the vehicle

to roll, even if the automatic transmission is in PARK

(or manual transmission is in gear). The parking

brake should always be applied when the driver is

not in the vehicle.

CAUTION!

It is necessary to follow these steps to be certain that the

transfer case is fully in NEUTRAL (N) before recre-

ational towing to prevent damage to internal parts.

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, with the engine

running. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL.

NOTE: If vehicle is equipped with air suspension, ensure

the vehicle is set to Normal Ride Height.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.

4. Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

5. With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer case

lever into NEUTRAL (N).

• With electronic shift transfer case, push and hold the

transfer case NEUTRAL (N) button. Some models

have a small, recessed “N” button (at the center of

the transfer case switches) that must be pushed using

a ballpoint pen or similar object. Other models have

a rectangular NEUTRAL switch, below the rotary

transfer case control knob. The NEUTRAL (N) indi-

cator light will blink while the shift is in progress.

The light will stop blinking (stay on solid) when the

shift to NEUTRAL (N) is complete. After the shift is

completed and the NEUTRAL (N) light stays on,

release the NEUTRAL (N) button.

STARTING AND OPERATING 727

6. Release the parking brake.

7. Shift the transmission into REVERSE.

8. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on manual

transmissions) for five seconds and ensure that there is

no vehicle movement.

9. Repeat steps 7 and 8 with automatic transmission in

DRIVE or manual transmission in first gear.

10. Shift the transmission to NEUTRAL. Firmly apply

the parking brake. Turn OFF the engine. For vehicles

with Keyless Enter-N-Go, push and hold the EN-

GINE START/STOP button until the engine shuts off.

11. Shift the transmission into PARK or place manual

transmission in gear (NOT in Neutral). On 8-speed

transmissions the shifter will automatically select

PARK when the engine is turned off.

12. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF position, then

cycle the Key or the Keyless Enter-N-Go button to the

RUN position and back to the OFF position. Remove

the Key Fob from the ignition switch.

13. Attach the vehicle to the tow vehicle using a suitable

tow bar.

14. Release the parking brake.

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

• Steps 2 through 4 are requirements that must be met

before pushing the NEUTRAL (N) button, and must

continue to be met until the shift has been completed.

If any of these requirements are not met before push-

ing the NEUTRAL (N) button or are no longer met

during the shift, the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light will

flash continuously until all requirements are met or

until the NEUTRAL (N) button is released.

728 STARTING AND OPERATING

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

• If the vehicle is equipped with air suspension, the engine

should be started and left running for a minimum of 60

seconds (with all the doors closed) at least once every 24

hours. This process allows the air suspension to adjust the

vehicle’s ride height to compensate for temperature effects.

Shifting Out Of NEUTRAL (N)

Use the following procedure to prepare your vehicle for

normal usage:

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop, leaving it con-

nected to the tow vehicle.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Press and hold the brake pedal.

4. Start the engine. Shift the transmission into NEUTRAL.

Depress the clutch pedal on a manual transmission.

• With manual shift transfer case, shift the transfer

case lever to the desired position.

• With electronic shift transfer case with rotary selector

switch, push and hold the transfer case NEUTRAL (N)

button until the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off.

After the NEUTRAL (N) indicator light turns off, re-

lease the NEUTRAL (N) button. After the NEUTRAL

(N) button has been released, the transfer case will shift

to the position indicated by the selector switch.

• With electronic shift transfer case with push-button

selector switch, push and hold the switch for the

desired transfer case position, until the NEUTRAL

(N) indicator light turns off and the desired position

indicator light turns on.

STARTING AND OPERATING 729

NOTE: When shifting out of transfer case NEUTRAL (N),

turning the engine OFF is not required, but may be

helpful to avoid gear clash. With the 8-speed automatic

transmission, the engine must remain running, since

turning the engine OFF will shift the transmission to

PARK (and the transmission must be in NEUTRAL for

the transfer case to shift out of NEUTRAL).

5. Turn the engine OFF. Shift automatic transmission into

PARK. On 8-speed transmissions the shifter will auto-

matically select PARK when the engine is turned off.

6. Release the brake pedal (and clutch pedal on a manual

transmission).

7. Disconnect vehicle from the tow vehicle.

8. Start the engine.

9. Press and hold the brake pedal.

10. Release the parking brake.

11. Shift the transmission into gear, release the brake

pedal (and clutch pedal on manual transmissions),

and check that the vehicle operates normally.

NOTE: With electronic shift transfer case:

• Steps 3 and 4 are requirements that must be met before

pushing the button to shift out of NEUTRAL (N), and must

continue to be met until the shift has been completed. If

any of these requirements are not met before pushing the

button or are no longer met during the shift, the NEUTRAL

(N) indicator light will flash continuously until all require-

ments are met or until the button is released.

• The ignition switch must be in the ON/RUN position

for a shift to take place and for the position indicator

lights to be operable. If the ignition switch is not in the

ON/RUN position, the shift will not take place and no

position indicator lights will be on or flashing.

• A flashing NEUTRAL (N) position indicator light

indicates that shift requirements have not been met.

730 STARTING AND OPERATING

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CONTENTS

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS . . . . . . . . . . .733

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . . . . . . . . . . . .733

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734

▫ Torque Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .735

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING . . . . . . . . . .737

▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks . . .737

▫ Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And

3500 Series Trucks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .756

HOISTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .777

▫ Preparations For Jump-Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . .778

▫ Jump-Starting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .779

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . .781

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED . .783

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED

TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784

▫ Column Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . .784

▫ Center Console Shifter — If Equipped . . . . . . .785

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED

TRANSMISSION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .786

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . .787

▫ Two-Wheel Drive Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .789

▫ Four-Wheel Drive Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .790

732 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the

upper switch bank just below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning

flasher. When the switch is activated, all direc-

tional turn signals will flash on and off to warn oncoming

traffic of an emergency. Push the switch a second time to

turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it should not

be used when the vehicle is in motion. Use it when your

vehicle is disabled and it is creating a safety hazard for

other motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek assistance, the

Hazard Warning flashers will continue to operate even

though the ignition is placed in the OFF position.

NOTE: With extended use the Hazard Warning flashers

may wear down your battery.

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can reduce the

potential for overheating by taking the appropriate ac-

tion.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, place the transmission

in NEUTRAL, but do not increase the engine idle

speed while preventing vehicle motion with the

brakes.

NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down

an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off. The A/C

system adds heat to the engine cooling system and

turning the A/C off can help remove this heat.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 733

• You can also turn the temperature control to maximum

heat, the mode control to floor and the blower control

to high. This allows the heater core to act as a

supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat

from the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator or coolant bottle is hot.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could damage

your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads HOT

(H), pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle

with the air conditioner turned off until the pointer

drops back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on HOT (H), and you hear continuous

chimes, turn the engine off immediately and call for

service.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to ensure

that the wheel is properly mounted to the vehicle. Any

time a wheel has been removed and reinstalled on the

vehicle the lug nuts/bolts should be torqued using a

properly calibrated torque wrench.

734 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Torque Specifications

Lug Nut/Bolt

Torque

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Type

**Lug

Nut/Bolt

Size

Lug Nut/

Bolt

Socket

Size

130 Ft-Lbs

(176 N·m)

Cone M14 x

1.50

22 mm

129 Ft-Lbs

(175 N·m)

Flanged

**Use only your Authorized Dealer recommended lug

nuts/bolts and clean or remove any dirt or oil before

tightening.

NOTE: Dual wheels are flat mounted, center piloted.

The lug nuts are a two-piece assembly. When the tires are

being rotated or replaced, clean these lug nuts at the

interface between the lug nut/bolt and the washer.

Do not oil wheel studs.

Two-Piece Lug Nut

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 735

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to mounting

the tire and remove any corrosion or loose particles.

Tighten the lug nuts/bolts in a star pattern until each

nut/bolt has been tightened twice.

After 25 miles (40 km) check the lug nut/bolt torque to be

sure that all the lug nuts/bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

Wheel Mounting Surface 4 And 5 Lug Nuts/Bolts Torque Pattern

736 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack,

do not tighten the lug nuts fully until the vehicle has

been lowered. Failure to follow this warning may

result in personal injury.

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

Jacking And Tire Changing 1500 Series Trucks

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with an air suspen-

sion system, there is a feature which allows the automatic

leveling to be disabled to assist with changing a tire.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 737

If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be activated through the Uconnect system.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Understanding Your

Instrument Panel” for further information.

If your vehicle is not equipped with a touchscreen, this

feature can be activated through the Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC) or Driver Information Display

(DID). Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel” for further information.

Jack Location

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front

passenger seat.

Removal Of Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the

plastic access cover, located on the side of the front

passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part

of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you

to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is

loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it

is free from the seat frame.

Jack Access Cover

738 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt

counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide

the assembly out from under the seat.

Release the tool bag straps from the jack and remove

tools from bag.

Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

Jack And Tool Bag

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 739

There are 2 ways to assemble the tools:

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising

CAUTION!

• The wheel wrench can only be attached to exten-

sion 3.

• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism

be sure the large flared end opening on extension 1

is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism

adjusting nut.

• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and

winch mechanism may occur from improper tool

assembly.

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising

1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3

2 — Extension 2 4 — Wheel Wrench

740 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Assembled For Jack Operation WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them

in the original carrier and location. While driving

you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-

tion or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or

other objects in the vehicle may move around with

force, resulting in serious injury.

Assembled For Jack Operation

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4

2 — Extension 2 5 — Wheel Wrench

3 — Extension 3

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 741

Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the

truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube

with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle. Insert

the tube through the access hole between the lower tailgate

and the top of the bumper and into the winch mechanism

tube.

2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise

until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable

slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole

Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle

742 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain

access to the spare tire retainer.

4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to

tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 743

5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other

power tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive

vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel

744 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right

front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the

vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jack Instructions (1500 Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

(Continued)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 745

WARNING! (Continued)

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the wheel wrench, loosen, but do not remove,

the wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one

turn while the wheel is still on the ground.

Jack Warning Label

746 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Placement of the jack:

4x2 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the

lower control arm.

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack

under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown

below.

4X2 Front Jacking Location Indicator

4X2 Front Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 747

4x4 Series Trucks Front Jacking Location

There is a jack location indicator on the rear portion of the

lower control arm.

When changing a front wheel, place the scissor jack

under the rear portion of the lower control arm as shown

below.

4x2 and 4x4 Rear Jacking Location

Operate the jack using the jack drive tube and the wheel

wrench. The tube extension may be used but is not

required.

4X4 Front Jacking Location Indicator

4X4 Front Jacking Location

748 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

For 4x2 and 4x4 trucks, when changing a rear wheel,

assemble the jack drive tube to the jack and connect the

drive tube to the extension tube. Place the jack under the

axle between the wheel and the shock bracket with the

drive tubes extending to the rear.

Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure

that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts

and adjust the jack position as required.

4. By rotating the lug wrench clockwise, raise the vehicle

until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

Rear Jacking Location

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 749

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. Install the

spare wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of

the wheel nuts toward the wheel. To avoid the risk of

forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not fully tighten the

wheel nuts until the vehicle has been lowered.

6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench

while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.

Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has

been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section. If in doubt about

the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque

wrench by you authorized dealer or service station.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-

ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel

in the places provided.

7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel

blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel

center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap

damage.

8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. If the bottle

jack will not lower by turning the dial (thumbwheel)

by hand, it may be necessary to use the jack drive tube

in order to lower the jack. Stow the replaced tire, jack,

and tools as previously described.

9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do

not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

750 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with aluminum wheels can-

not be stored under the vehicle because the wheel

retainer will not fit through the wheel pilot hole. Secure

the flat tire in the bed of the truck. Have the flat tire

repaired or replaced immediately.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard

stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have

the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-

ately.

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the

ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-

nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the

wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

Reinstalling The Retainer

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 751

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to

tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it

properly across the wheel opening.

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube

with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.

Insert the tube through the access hole between the

lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the

winch mechanism tube.

Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The

Wheel And Positioning It

Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And

In Position

752 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the

wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the

vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch

mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot

be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to

ensure it is firmly in place.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other

power tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack

turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.

Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 753

2. Position the jack and tool bag. Make sure the lug

wrench is under the jack near the jack turn-screw.

3. Secure the tool bag straps to the jack.

Jack And Tool Bag

Jack And Tools Tied

754 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

4. Place the jack and tools in the storage position holding

the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip the jack and tools

under the seat so that the bottom slot engages into the

fastener on the floor.

NOTE: Ensure that the jack slides into the front hold

down location.

5. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.

Reinstall the plastic cover.

Jack Hold Down Fastener

Jack And Tools (1500 Series)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 755

WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them

in the original carrier and location. While driving

you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-

tion or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or

other objects in the vehicle may move around with

force, resulting in serious injury.

Jacking And Tire Changing 2500 And 3500 Series

Trucks

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The

vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You

could be crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you need to get

under a raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Never start or run the engine while the vehicle is

on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool for

changing tires only. The jack should not be used to

lift the vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle

should be jacked on a firm level surface only.

Avoid ice or slippery areas.

756 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Jack Location

The jack and jack tools are stored under the front

passenger seat.

Removal Of Jack And Tools (2500, 3500 Series)

To access the jack and jack tools you must remove the

plastic access cover, located on the side of the front

passengers seat. To remove the cover, pull the front part

of the cover (closest to the front of the seat) toward you

to release a locking tab. Once the front of the cover is

loose, slide the cover toward the front of the seat until it

is free from the seat frame. Jack Access Cover

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 757

Remove the jack and tools by turning the wing bolt

counterclockwise, remove the wing bolt and then slide

the assembly out from under the seat.

Remove the jack and tools from the bracket assembly.

Turn the jack-turn-screw counterclockwise to release jack

from bracket assembly.

Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series) Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly

758 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

There are 2 ways to assemble the tools:

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising

CAUTION!

• The wheel wrench can only be attached to exten-

sion 3.

• When attaching the tool to the winch mechanism

be sure the large flared end opening on extension 1

is positioned correctly over the winch mechanism

adjusting nut.

• Damage to the wheel wrench, extensions and

winch mechanism may occur from improper tool

assembly.

Assembled For Spare Tire Lowering/Raising

1 — Extension 1 3 — Extension 3

2 — Extension 2 4 — Wheel Wrench

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 759

Assembled For Jack Operation WARNING!

After using the jack and tools, always reinstall them

in the original carrier and location. While driving

you may experience abrupt stopping, rapid accelera-

tion or sharp turns. A loose jack, tools, bracket or

other objects in the vehicle may move around with

force, resulting in serious injury.

Assembled For Jack Operation

1 — Extension With Jack Hook 4 — Extension 4

2 — Extension 2 5 — Wheel Wrench

3 — Extension 3

760 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Removing The Spare Tire

1. Remove the spare tire before attempting to jack up the

truck. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube

with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.

Insert the tube through the access hole between the lower

tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the winch

mechanism tube.

2. Rotate the wheel wrench handle counterclockwise

until the spare tire is on the ground with enough cable

slack to allow you to pull it out from under the vehicle.

Inserting The Jack Extension Tube Into The Access Hole

Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 761

3. Pull the spare tire out from under the vehicle to gain

access to the spare tire retainer.

4. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to

tilt the retainer at the end of the cable.

Pulling The Spare Tire Out Gaining Access To The Retainer

762 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

5. Pull the retainer through the center of the wheel.

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other

power tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

Preparations

1. Park the vehicle on a firm, level surface. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the

vehicle close to moving traffic, pull far enough off

the road to avoid the danger of being hit when

operating the jack or changing the wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Set the parking brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK. On four-wheel drive

vehicles, shift the transfer case to the 4L position.

5. Turn the ignition OFF.

Pulling The Retainer Through The Center Of The Wheel

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 763

Block both the front and rear of the wheel diagonally

opposite the jacking position. For example, if the right

front wheel is being changed, block the left rear wheel.

NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the

vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jack Instructions (2500, 3500 Series)

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to

help prevent personal injury or damage to your

vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from the

edge of the roadway as possible before raising the

vehicle.

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to

be raised.

• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic

transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in

REVERSE.

• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a

jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a

jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack. If

you need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a

service center where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and for

lifting this vehicle during a tire change.

(Continued)

764 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely

careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated, are

securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the

valve stem facing the ground.

Jack Warning Label

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 765

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on

locations other than those indicated in the Jacking

Instructions for this vehicle.

1. Remove the spare wheel, jack, and tools from storage.

2. Using the lug wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the

wheel nuts by turning them counterclockwise one

turn while the wheel is still on the ground. Changing

a dually tire requires the lug wrench adapter.

Lug Wrench Adaptor Shown In Jack And Tools

Assembly

766 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with hub caps/wheel

covers they must be removed before raising the vehicle

off the ground. Refer to ”Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If

Equipped” in this section.

3. Placement of the jack:

Front Jacking Location

When changing the front wheel, assemble the jack drive

tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the

extension tube. Place the jack under the axle as close to

Lug Wrench Adapter

Lug Wrench Adapter And Wrench

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 767

the tire as possible with the drive tubes extending to the

front. Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

Rear Jacking Location

When changing a rear wheel, assemble the jack drive

tube to the jack and connect the drive tube to the

extension tube. Place the jack under the axle between the

spring and the shock absorber with the drive tubes

extending to the rear.

Connect the jack tube extension and wheel wrench.

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

768 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

Before raising the wheel off the ground, make sure

that the jack will not damage surrounding truck parts

and adjust the jack position as required.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial

(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the

jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

4. By rotating the wheel wrench clockwise, raise the

vehicle until the wheel just clears the surface.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make

the vehicle unstable. It could slip off the jack and

hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough

to remove the tire.

5. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel off. On

single rear-wheel (SRW) trucks, install the spare wheel

and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the wheel

nuts toward the wheel. On 3500 dual rear-wheel

models (DRW) trucks, if the outer tire is being re-

placed then leave the inner wheel on the vehicle. If the

inner wheel is being replaced remove the outer wheel

and replace the inner wheel. The wheel nuts are a

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 769

two-piece assembly with a flat face. Lightly tighten the

wheel nuts. To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel nuts until the

vehicle has been lowered.

6. Finish tightening the lug nuts. Push down on the wrench

while at the end of the handle for increased leverage.

Tighten the lug nuts in a star pattern until each nut has

been tightened twice. For the correct lug nut torque refer to

“Torque Specifications” in this section. If in doubt about

the correct tightness, have them checked with a torque

wrench by you authorized dealer or service station.

Rear Inner Wheel Proper Placement (Dual Rear Wheel

Equipped)

Dual Rear Wheel Placement

770 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or

hard stop could injure someone in the vehicle. Al-

ways stow the jack parts and the extra tire and wheel

in the places provided.

7. Install the wheel center cap and remove the wheel

blocks. Do not install chrome or aluminum wheel

center caps on the spare wheel. This may result in cap

damage.

8. Lower the jack to its fully closed position. Stow the

replaced tire, jack, and tools as previously described.

NOTE: If the bottle jack will not lower by turning the dial

(thumbwheel) by hand, it may be necessary to use the

jack drive tube in order to lower the jack.

9. Adjust the tire pressure when possible.

NOTE: Do not oil wheel studs. For chrome wheels, do

not substitute with chrome plated wheel nuts.

To Stow The Flat Or Spare

NOTE: Have the flat tire repaired or replaced immedi-

ately.

WARNING!

A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard

stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have

the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immedi-

ately.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 771

1. Turn the wheel so that the valve stem is facing the

ground and toward the rear of the vehicle for conve-

nience in checking the spare tire inflation. Slide the

wheel retainer through the center of the wheel.

2. Lift the spare tire with one hand to give clearance to

tilt the retainer at the end of the cable and position it

properly across the wheel opening.

Reinstalling The Retainer

Pushing The Retainer Through The Center Of The

Wheel And Positioning It

772 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

3. Attach the wheel wrench to the jack extension tube

with the curved angle facing away from the vehicle.

Insert the tube through the access hole between the

lower tailgate and the top of the bumper and into the

winch mechanism tube.

4. Rotate the wheel wrench handle clockwise until the

wheel is drawn into place against the underside of the

vehicle. Continue to rotate until you feel the winch

mechanism slip, or click three or four times. It cannot

be overtightened. Push against the tire several times to

ensure it is firmly in place.

Wheel Wrench And Jack Extension Tube Assembled And

In Position Rotating The Wheel Wrench Handle

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 773

NOTE: The winch mechanism is designed for use with

the jack extension tube only. Use of an air wrench or other

power tools is not recommended and can damage the

winch.

Reinstalling The Jack And Tools (2500 And

3500 Series)

1. Tighten the jack all the way down by turning the jack

turn-screw counterclockwise until the jack is snug.

2. Position the jack and tools into bracket assembly.

Make sure the lug wrench is under the jack near the

jack turn-screw. Snap tools into bracket assembly clips.

Install the jack into bracket assembly and turn the

jack-turn-screw clockwise until jack is snug into

bracket assembly.

3. Place the jack and tool bracket assembly in the storage

position holding the jack by the jack turn-screw, slip

the jack and tools under the seat so that the bottom slot

engages into the fastener on the floor.

Jack And Tools Bracket Assembly

774 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

NOTE: Ensure that the jack and tool bracket assembly

slides into the front hold down location.

4. Turn the wing bolt clockwise to secure to the floor pan.

Reinstall the plastic cover.

Jack Hold Down Fastener

Wing Bolt/Jack And Tools (2500/3500 Series)

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 775

Hub Caps/Wheel Covers — If Equipped

The hub caps must be removed before raising the vehicle

off the ground.

CAUTION!

Use extreme caution when removing the front and rear

center caps. Damage can occur to the center cap and/or

the wheel if screwdriver type tools are used. A pulling

motion, not a pry off motion, is recommended to remove

the caps.

For single rear wheel (SRW) models, use the flat blade on

the end of the lug wrench to pull the hub cap off. Insert

the blade end into the pull off notch and carefully pull the

hub cap off with a back and forth motion.

On 3500 models with dual rear wheels (DRW), you must

first remove the hub caps. The jack handle driver has a hook

at one end that will fit in the pull off notch of the rear hub

caps. Position the hook and pull straight out on the ratchet

firmly. The hub cap should pop off. The wheel skins can now

be removed. For the front hub cap, use the flat blade on the

end of the lug wrench to pull the caps off. The wheel skin

can now be removed.

CAUTION!

• Use a pulling motion to remove the hub cap. Do not

use a twisting motion when removing the hub cap,

damage to the hub cap; finish may occur.

• The rear hub caps on the dual rear wheel has two

pull off notches. Make sure that the hook of the

jack handle driver is located squarely in the cap

notch before attempting to pull off.

You must use the flat end of the lug wrench to pull off the

wheel skins. Locate the hub cap pull notches (2 notches on

each cap). Insert the flat tip completely and using a back and

forth motion, loosen the wheel skin. Repeat this procedure

around the tire until the skin pops off.

776 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Replace the wheel skins first using a rubber mallet. When

replacing the hub caps, tilt the cap retainer over the lug

nut bolt circle and strike the high side down with a

rubber mallet. Be sure that the hub caps and wheel skins

are firmly seated around the wheel.

HOISTING

A conventional floor jack may be used at the jacking

locations. Refer to the graphics that show jacking loca-

tions. However, a floor jack or frame hoist must never be

used on any other parts of the underbody.

CAUTION!

Never use a floor jack directly under the differential

housing of a loaded truck or damage to your vehicle

may result.

JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can be jump-

started using a set of jumper cables and a battery in

another vehicle or by using a portable battery booster

pack. Jump-starting can be dangerous if done improperly

so please follow the procedures in this section carefully.

NOTE: When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instructions and

precautions.

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump-starting if the battery is frozen.

It could rupture or explode and cause personal injury.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 777

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack or any

other booster source with a system voltage greater

than 12 Volts or damage to the battery, starter motor,

alternator or electrical system may occur.

Preparations For Jump-Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the front of the

engine compartment, behind the left headlight assembly.

NOTE: The positive battery post is covered with a

protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain access to the

positive battery post. Do not jump off fuses. Only jump

directly off positive post. WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever

the hood is raised. It can start anytime the ignition

switch is ON. You can be injured by moving fan blades.

(Continued)

Correct Positive Jumping Location

778 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

WARNING! (Continued)

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings, watch

bands and bracelets that could make an inadvertent

electrical contact. You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can burn your

skin or eyes and generate hydrogen gas which is

flammable and explosive. Keep open flames or

sparks away from the battery.

1. Set the parking brake, shift the automatic transmission

into PARK and turn the ignition to LOCK.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnecessary electri-

cal accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump-start the battery, park

the vehicle within the jumper cables reach, set the

parking brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other as this

could establish a ground connection and personal

injury could result.

Jump-Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump-starting procedure could

result in personal injury or property damage due to

battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could result in

damage to the charging system of the booster vehicle

or the discharged vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 779

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable to the

positive (+) post of the discharged vehicle.

NOTE: Do not jump off fuses. Only jump directly off

positive post.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable to a good engine ground (exposed metal part of

the discharged vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the negative (-)

post of the discharged battery. The resulting electri-

cal spark could cause the battery to explode and

could result in personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed metal

parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster

battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, and then

start the engine in the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

CAUTION!

Do not connect jumper cable to any of the fuses on

the positive battery terminal. The resulting electrical

current will blow the fuse.

780 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

6. Once the engine is started, remove the jumper cables

in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the jumper cable

from the engine ground of the vehicle with the dis-

charged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the negative (-) jumper

cable from the negative (-) post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the jumper cable

from the positive (+) post of the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the positive (+) jumper

cable from the positive (+) post of the vehicle with the

discharged battery.

If frequent jump-starting is required to start your vehicle

you should have the battery and charging system in-

spected at your authorized dealer.

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle power outlets draw

power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in use

(i.e., cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if plugged in long

enough without engine operation, the vehicle’s battery

will discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life and/or

prevent the engine from starting.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand, or snow, it can

often be moved using a rocking motion. Turn the steering

wheel right and left to clear the area around the front

wheels. Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and

REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or 2nd gear and

REVERSE (with manual transmission), while gently press-

ing the accelerator. Use the least amount of accelerator pedal

pressure that will maintain the rocking motion, without

spinning the wheels or racing the engine.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 781

NOTE: For trucks equipped with 8-speed automatic

transmission: Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can

only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph (8 km/h) or

less. Whenever the transmission remains in NEUTRAL

for more than two seconds, you must press the brake

pedal to engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

CAUTION!

Racing the engine or spinning the wheels may lead to

transmission overheating and failure. Allow the en-

gine to idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL for at

least one minute after every five rocking-motion

cycles. This will minimize overheating and reduce

the risk of clutch or transmission failure during

prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

NOTE: Push the ESC Off switch, to place the Electronic

Stability Control (ESC) system in Partial Off mode,

before rocking the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for further infor-

mation. Once the vehicle has been freed, push the ESC

Off switch again to restore ESC On mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces gener-

ated by excessive wheel speeds may cause damage, or

even failure, of the axle and tires. A tire could

explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehi-

cle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for

longer than 30 seconds continuously without stop-

ping when you are stuck and do not let anyone near

a spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

782 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shifting be-

tween DRIVE/2nd gear and REVERSE, do not spin

the wheels faster than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drive-

train damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the wheels too fast

may lead to transmission overheating and failure.

It can also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear (no trans-

mission shifting occurring).

EMERGENCY TOW HOOKS — IF EQUIPPED

Your vehicle may be equipped with emergency tow

hooks.

NOTE: For off-road recovery, it is recommended to use

both of the front tow hooks to minimize the risk of

damage to the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck vehicle.

Chains may break, causing serious injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling with tow

hooks. Tow straps may become disengaged, caus-

ing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only to rescue a

vehicle stranded off-road. Do not use tow hooks for

tow truck hookup or highway towing. You could

damage your vehicle.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 783

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE — 6-SPEED

TRANSMISSION

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector cannot be

moved out of the PARK position, you can use one of the

following procedures to temporarily move the gear se-

lector:

Column Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Tilt the steering wheel to the full up position.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert a screwdriver or similar tool, into the access port

(ringed circle) on the bottom of the steering column

and push and hold the override release lever up.

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

Gear Selector Override Access Port

784 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Center Console Shifter — If Equipped

1. Turn the engine off.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake.

3. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the

gear selector override access cover (located to the right

of the gear selector).

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the brake pedal.

5. Insert the screwdriver or similar tool into the access

hole, and push and hold the override release lever

down.

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the gear selector override access cover.

Gear Selector Override Access Cover

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 785

MANUAL PARK RELEASE — 8 SPEED

TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

Always secure your vehicle by fully applying the

parking brake, before activating the Manual Park

Release. Activating the Manual Park Release will

allow your vehicle to roll away if it is not secured by

the parking brake or by proper connection to a tow

vehicle. Activating the Manual Park Release on an

unsecured vehicle could lead to serious injury or

death for those in or around the vehicle.

In order to push or tow the vehicle in cases where the

transmission will not shift out of PARK (such as a dead

battery), a Manual Park Release is available.

Manual Park Release Pull Strap

786 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Follow these steps to activate the Manual Park Release:

1. Firmly apply the parking brake.

2. Using a small screwdriver or similar tool, remove the

Manual Park Release access cover, which is just above

the parking brake release handle, below and to the left

of the steering column.

3. Using the screwdriver or similar tool, push the

Manual Park Release lever locking tab (just below the

middle of the lever) to the right.

4. While holding the locking tab in the disengaged position,

pull the tether strap to rotate the lever rearward, until it

locks in place pointing towards the driver’s seat. Release

the locking tab and verify that the Manual Park Release

lever is locked in the released position.

5. The vehicle is now out of PARK and can be towed.

Release the parking brake only when the vehicle is

securely connected to a tow vehicle.

To Reset The Manual Park Release:

1. Push the locking tab to the right, to unlock the lever.

2. Rotate the Manual Park Release lever forward to its

original position, until the locking tab snaps into place

to secure the lever.

3. Pull gently on the tether strap to confirm that the lever

is locked in its stowed position.

4. Re-install the access cover.

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing a disabled

vehicle using a commercial towing service. If the trans-

mission and drivetrain are operable, disabled vehicles

may also be towed as described under “Recreational

Towing” in the “Starting And Operating” section.

NOTE: Vehicles equipped with air suspension must be

placed in Transport mode, before tying them down (from

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 787

the body) on a trailer or flatbed truck. Refer to Air

Suspension in Starting And Operating for more infor-

mation. If the vehicle cannot be placed in Transport mode

(for example, engine will not run), tie-downs must be

fastened to the axles (not to the body). Failure to follow

these instructions may cause fault codes to be set and/or

cause loss of proper tie-down tension.

Towing

Condition

Wheels

OFF the

Ground

2WD Models 4WD Models

Flat Tow NONE If transmission is operable:

• Transmission in NEUTRAL

• 30 mph (48 km/h) max speed

• 15 miles (24 km) max distance

(6–speed transmission)

• 30 miles (48 km) max distance

(8–speed transmission)

See instructions in “Recreational Tow-

ing” under “Starting and Operating”

• Automatic Transmission in PARK

• Manual Transmission in gear

(NOT NEUTRAL)

• Transfer Case in NEUTRAL (N)

• Tow in forward direction

Wheel Lift

or Dolly

Tow

Front NOT ALLOWED

Rear OK NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed ALL BEST METHOD BEST METHOD

788 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required to prevent

damage to your vehicle. Use only tow bars and other

equipment designed for this purpose, following equip-

ment manufacturer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing device to

main structural members of the vehicle, not to bumpers

or associated brackets. State and local laws regarding

vehicles under tow must be observed.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, defrosters, etc.)

while being towed, the ignition must be in the ON/RUN

position, not the ACC position.

If the key fob is unavailable or the vehicle’s battery is

discharged, refer to ”Manual Park Release” or “Gear

Selector Override” in this section for instructions on

shifting the automatic transmission out of PARK for

towing.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when towing.

Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed truck, do

not attach to front or rear suspension components.

Damage to your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

Two-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing your vehicle with

all four wheels OFF the ground using a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transmis-

sion is operable, this vehicle may be towed (with rear

wheels on the ground) under the following conditions:

• The transmission must be in NEUTRAL.

• The towing speed must not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 789

• The towing distance must not exceed 15 miles (24 km)

for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for

8-speed transmission.

If the transmission is not operable, or the vehicle must be

towed faster than 30 mph (48 km/h) or farther than 15 miles

(24 km) for 6-speed transmission, or 30 miles (48 km) for

8-speed transmission, tow with the rear wheels OFF the

ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the vehicle on a

flatbed, or with the front wheels raised and the rear wheels on

a towing dolly, or (when using a suitable steering wheel

stabilizer to hold the front wheels in the straight position) with

the rear wheels raised and the front wheels on the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the above require-

ments can cause severe engine and/or transmission

damage. Damage from improper towing is not cov-

ered under the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four-Wheel Drive Models

The manufacturer recommends towing with all wheels

OFF the ground. Acceptable methods are to tow the

vehicle on a flatbed or with one end of vehicle raised and

the opposite end on a towing dolly.

If flatbed equipment is not available, and the transfer

case is operable, the vehicle may be towed (in the

forward direction, with ALL wheels on the ground), IF

the transfer case is in NEUTRAL (N) and the transmis-

sion is in PARK (for automatic transmissions) or in gear

(NOT in NEUTRAL, for manual transmissions). Refer to

“Recreational Towing” in “Starting And Operating” for

further information and detailed instructions.

790 WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES

CAUTION!

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be used. Internal

damage to the transmission or transfer case will

occur if a front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the above re-

quirements can cause severe transmission and/or

transfer case damage. Damage from improper tow-

ing is not covered under the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty.

WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES 791

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CONTENTS

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L . . . . . . . . . .796

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L . . . . . . . . . .797

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L . . . . . . . . . .798

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II) . . .799

▫ Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .799

▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . .800

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .801

REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802

DEALER SERVICE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . .803

▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804

▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

▫ Accessory Drive Belt Inspection . . . . . . . . . . .812

▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813

▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . .814

▫ Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500

(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only) . . . . . . . . . .816

▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821

▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .821

▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824

▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .831

▫ Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle

Fluid Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833

▫ Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834

▫ Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835

▫ Appearance Care And Protection From

Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839

FUSES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .848

▫ Power Distribution Center . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .849

VEHICLE STORAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .857

REPLACEMENT BULBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858

BULB REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .859

▫ Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam

Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park

And Turn — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .860

▫ Fog Lamps — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . .862

▫ Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup

Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .862

▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With

Cargo Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864

▫ Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped . . . .865

▫ Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) —

If Equipped. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .867

794 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

▫ Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If

Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .868

FLUID CAPACITIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE

PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871

▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871

▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 795

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 3.6L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick

3 — Engine Oil Fill

4 — Brake Fluid Reservoir

5 — Battery

6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

8 — Coolant Pressure Cap

9 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

796 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 5.7L

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 7 — Washer Fluid Reservoir

2 — Automatic Transmission Dipstick (6-Speed Trans Only) 8 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

3 — Engine Oil Fill 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir (2500/3500 Models Only)

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 10 — Coolant Pressure Cap

5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 11 — Engine Coolant Reservoir

6 — Battery

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 797

ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 6.4L

1 — Coolant Pressure Bottle 6 — Battery

2 — Transmission Dipstick 7 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses)

3 — Engine Oil Fill 8 — Washer Solvent

4 — Engine Oil Dipstick 9 — Power Steering Fluid Reservoir

5 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 10 — Air Cleaner Filter

798 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM (OBD II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated onboard

diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors

the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic

transmission control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent

performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emis-

sions well within current government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system

will turn on the “Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).” It

will also store diagnostic codes and other information to

assist your service technician in making repairs. Al-

though your vehicle will usually be drivable and not

need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as

soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause

further damage to the emission control system. It

could also affect fuel economy and driveability.

The vehicle must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is running,

severe catalytic converter damage and power loss

will soon occur. Immediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard Diagnostic

system (OBD II) and a connection port to allow access to

information related to the performance of your emissions

controls. Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the diagnosis and

service of your vehicle and emissions system.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 799

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician should con-

nect equipment to the OBD II connection port in order

to diagnose or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected to the

OBD II connection port, such as a driver-behavior

tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be impaired or a

loss of vehicle control could occur that may result

in an accident involving serious injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access, information

stored in your vehicle systems, including per-

sonal information.

For further information, refer to “Privacy Practices — If

Equipped With Uconnect 8.4 Radio” and “Uconnect Cyber-

Security” in “All About Uconnect Access” in your Owner’s

Manual Radio Supplement and “Cybersecurity” in “Under-

standing Your Instrument Panel”.

Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message

If the vehicle diagnostic system determines

that the fuel filler cap is loose, improperly

installed, or damaged, a loose gascap indicator

will display in the EVIC/DID telltale display

area. Refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center

(EVIC)” or “Driver Information Display (DID)” in “Un-

derstanding Your Instrument Panel” for further informa-

tion. Tighten the fuel filler cap properly and push the

SELECT button to turn off the message. If the problem

continues, the message will appear the next time the

vehicle is started.

800 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

A loose, improperly installed, or damaged fuel filler cap

may also turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL).

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass

an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.

Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspection and Mainte-

nance (I/M), this check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is not

on when the engine is running, and that the OBD II

system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II

system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently

serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replace-

ment. If the OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated test, which

you can use prior to going to the test station. To check if

your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must do the

following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON position, but do

not crank or start the engine.

NOTE: If you crank or start the engine, you will have to

start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to the ON

position, you will see the “Malfunction Indicator Light

(MIL)” symbol come on as part of a normal bulb

check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will

happen:

• The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then

return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 801

the ignition or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should

not proceed to the I/M station.

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully

illuminated until you place the ignition in the off

position or start the engine. This means that your

vehicle’s OBD II system is ready and you can proceed

to the I/M station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your

authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was

recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,

you may need to do nothing more than drive your

vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above test routine

may then indicate that the system is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is

ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal

vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced

before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine

running.

REPLACEMENT PARTS

Use of genuine MOPAR parts for normal/scheduled

maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to en-

sure the designed performance. Damage or failures

caused by the use of non-MOPAR parts for maintenance

and repairs will not be covered by the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

DEALER SERVICE

Your authorized dealer has the qualified service person-

nel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service

operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are

available which include detailed service information for

your vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals before

attempting any procedure yourself.

802 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could result in civil

penalties being assessed against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or around a motor

vehicle. Only do service work for which you have the

knowledge and the proper equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a service job, take

your vehicle to a competent mechanic.

MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES

The pages that follow contain the required maintenance

services determined by the engineers who designed your vehicle.

Besides those maintenance items specified in the fixed

“Maintenance Schedule”, there are other components

which may require servicing or replacement in the future.

CAUTION!

• Failure to properly maintain your vehicle or per-

form repairs and service when necessary could

result in more costly repairs, damage to other

components or negatively impact vehicle perfor-

mance. Immediately have potential malfunctions

examined by an authorized dealer or qualified

repair center.

• Your vehicle has been built with improved fluids

that protect the performance and durability of your

vehicle and also allow extended maintenance inter-

vals. Do not use chemical flushes in these compo-

nents as the chemicals can damage your engine,

transmission, or air conditioning. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

If a flush is needed because of component malfunc-

tion, use only the specified fluid for the flushing

procedure.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 803

Engine Oil

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper lubrication of your vehicle’s engine, the

engine oil must be maintained at the correct level. Check

the oil level at regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.

The best time to check the engine oil level is about five

minutes after a fully warmed up engine is shut off.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground will

improve the accuracy of the oil level readings. Always

maintain the oil level within the SAFE zone on the

dipstick. Adding one quart of oil when the reading is at

the bottom of the SAFE zone will result in a reading at the

top of the safe zone on these engines.

CAUTION!

Overfilling or underfilling the crankcase will cause

oil aeration or loss of oil pressure. This could damage

your engine.

Change Engine Oil

The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for further informa-

tion.

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

804 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2500 – 3500 Models Only

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350

hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350

hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Engine Oil Selection

For best performance and maximum protection under all

types of operating conditions, the manufacturer only

recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet

the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395.

American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil

Identification Symbol

This symbol means that the oil has

been certified by the American Petro-

leum Institute (API). The manufac-

turer only recommends API Certified

engine oils.

This symbol certifies 0W-20, 5W-20, 0W-30, 5W-30 and

10W-30 engine oils.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your engine oil as the

chemicals can damage your engine. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 805

Engine Oil Viscosity — 3.6L Engines (1500 Models

Only)

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 or equivalent Pennzoil or Shell Helix

is recommended for all operating temperatures. This

engine oil improves low temperature starting and vehicle

fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your vehicle. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to “Engine Compart-

ment” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion.

NOTE: MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA

Material Standard MS-6395 may be used when SAE

5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 5.7L Engine

(1500/2500/3500 Models)

MOPAR SAE 5W-20 engine oil approved to FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 such as Pennzoil, Shell Helix or

equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures. This engine oil improves low temperature starting

and vehicle fuel economy.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-

partment” illustration in this section.

NOTE: For 2500/3500 trucks with a 5.7L engine operat-

ing under a gross combined weight rating of 14,000 lbs

(6 350 kg) or greater, SAE 5W-30 meeting FCA Material

Standard MS-6395 engine oil is recommended for all

operating temperatures.

806 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade) — 6.4L Engine

Use MOPAR SAE 0W-40 engine oil approved to FCA

Material Standard MS-12633 such as Pennzoil Ultra

equivalent is recommended for all operating tempera-

tures.

The engine oil filler cap also shows the recommended

engine oil viscosity for your engine. For information on

engine oil filler cap location, refer to the “Engine Com-

partment” in this section.

Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certi-

fication mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade num-

ber should not be used.

Synthetic Engine Oils

You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recom-

mended oil quality requirements are met, and the recom-

mended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes

are followed.

Synthetic engine oils which do not have both the engine

oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade

number should not be used.

Disposing Of Used Engine Oil And Oil Filters

Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and

oil filters from your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,

indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the

environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service

station or governmental agency for advice on how and

where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in

your area.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 807

Engine Oil Filter

The engine oil filter should be replaced with a new filter

at every engine oil change.

Engine Oil Filter Selection

This manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type oil

filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality

of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high

quality filters should be used to assure most efficient

service. MOPAR engine oil filters are a high quality oil

filter and are recommended.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in the “Mainte-

nance Schedules” section for the proper maintenance

intervals.

WARNING!

The air induction system (air cleaner, hoses, etc.) can

provide a measure of protection in the case of engine

backfire. Do not remove the air induction system (air

cleaner, hoses, etc.) unless such removal is necessary

for repair or maintenance. Make sure that no one is

near the engine compartment before starting the

vehicle with the air induction system (air cleaner,

hoses, etc.) removed. Failure to do so can result in

serious personal injury.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection

The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters

varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be

used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR engine air

cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are recom-

mended.

808 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Inspection and

Replacement

Inspect engine air cleaner filter for dirt and or debris, if

you find evidence of either dirt or debris you should

change your air cleaner filter.

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Removal

1. Release the spring clips from the air cleaner cover.

3.6L/5.7L Air Cleaner Filter Cover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp

2 — Air Hose

3 — Spring Clips

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 809

2. Lift the air cleaner cover to access the air cleaner filter. 3. Remove the air cleaner filter element from the housing

assembly.

6.4L Air Cleaner Filter Cover

1 — Clean Air Hose Clamp

2 — Spring Clips

Open Air Cleaner Filter Assembly

1 — Air Cleaner Cover

2 — Air Cleaner Filter

810 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Engine Air Cleaner Filter Installation

NOTE: Inspect and clean the housing if dirt or debris is

present before replacing the air filter element.

1. Install the air cleaner filter element into the housing

assembly with the air cleaner filter inspection surface

facing downward.

2. Install the air cleaner cover onto the housing assembly

locating tabs.

3. Latch the spring clips and lock the air cleaner cover to

the housing assembly.

Air Cleaner Filter

1 — Air Cleaner Filter

2 — Air Cleaner Filter Inspection Surface

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 811

Accessory Drive Belt Inspection

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to inspect an accessory drive belt

with vehicle running.

• When working near the radiator cooling fan, dis-

connect the fan motor lead. The fan is temperature

controlled and can start at any time regardless of

ignition switch position. You could be injured by

the moving fan blades.

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you

have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

When inspecting accessory drive belts, small cracks that

run across ribbed surface of belt from rib to rib, are

considered normal. These are not a reason to replace belt.

However, cracks running along a rib (not across) are not

normal. Any belt with cracks running along a rib must be

replaced. Also have the belt replaced if it has excessive

wear, frayed cords or severe glazing.

Accessory Belt (Serpentine Belt)

812 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Conditions that would require replacement:

• Rib chunking (one or more ribs has separated from belt

body)

• Rib or belt wear

• Longitudinal belt cracking (cracks between two ribs)

• Belt slips

• “Groove jumping (belt does not maintain correct

position on pulley)

• Belt broken (note: identify and correct problem before

new belt is installed)

• Noise (objectionable squeal, squeak, or rumble is

heard or felt while drive belt is in operation)

Some conditions can be caused by a faulty component

such as a belt pulley. Belt pulleys should be carefully

inspected for damage and proper alignment.

Belt replacement on some models requires the use of

special tools, we recommend having your vehicle ser-

viced at an authorized dealer.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-free battery.

You will never have to add water, nor is periodic main-

tenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can burn

or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid to

contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean over

a battery when attaching clamps. If acid splashes in

eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large

amounts of water. Refer to “Jump-Starting Proce-

dures” in “What To Do In Emergencies” for further

information.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 813

WARNING! (Continued)

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep

flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use

a booster battery or any other booster source with

an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands

after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables on the

battery that the positive cable is attached to the

positive post and the negative cable is attached to

the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive

(+) and negative (-) and are identified on the

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the

terminal posts and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in the

vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables be-

fore connecting the charger to the battery. Do not

use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.

Air Conditioner Maintenance

For best possible performance, your air conditioner

should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer

at the start of each warm season. This service should

include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance

test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this

time.

814 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants

approved by the manufacturer for your air condi-

tioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are

flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other

unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause the

system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to

Warranty Information Book, located on the DVD,

for further warranty information.

• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant

under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal

injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant

or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected

should be done by an experienced technician.

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your air conditioning

system as the chemicals can damage your air condi-

tioning components. Such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R134a — If

Equipped

R-134a Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoro-

carbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental

Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. How-

ever, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning

service be performed by authorized dealer or other

service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 815

Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling R1234yf — If

Equipped

R-1234yf Air Conditioning Refrigerant is a hydrofluoole-

fine HFO that is endorsed by the Environmental Protec-

tion Agency and is an ozone-saving product with a low

GWP (Global Warming Potential). However, the manu-

facturer recommends that air conditioning service be

performed by authorized dealer or other service facilities

using recovery and recycling equipment.

NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system

PAG compressor oil and refrigerants.

Front Driveshaft Lubrication — 2500/3500

(Four-Wheel Drive Models Only)

Lubricate the front driveshaft grease fitting at each oil

change. The grease fitting is located at the rear of the

front driveshaft, near the centering mechanism of double

cardan joint. Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the

proper maintenance intervals. Use MOPAR Type

MS-6560 (lithium-based grease), or equivalent.

Front Drive Shaft Double Cardan Joint

816 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Body Lubrication

Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as

seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,

tailgate, decklid, sliding doors and hood hinges, should

be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease,

such as MOPAR Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy

operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to

the application of any lubricant, the parts concerned

should be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after

lubricating excess oil and grease should be removed.

Particular attention should also be given to hood latching

components to ensure proper function. When performing

other underhood services, the hood latch, release mecha-

nism and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.

The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a

year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small

amount of a high quality lubricant, such as MOPAR Lock

Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the

windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a

mild nonabrasive cleaner. This will remove accumula-

tions of salt or road film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods

may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use

washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt

from a dry windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost or ice from

the windshield. Keep the blade rubber out of contact with

petroleum products such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

NOTE: Life expectancy of wiper blades varies depend-

ing on geographical area and frequency of use. Poor

performance of blades may be present with chattering,

marks, water lines or wet spots. If any of these conditions

are present, clean the wiper blades or replace as neces-

sary.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 817

The wiper blades and wiper arms should be inspected

periodically, not just when wiper performance problems

are experienced. This inspection should include the fol-

lowing points:

• Wear Or Uneven Edges

• Foreign Material

• Hardening Or Cracking

• Deformation Or Fatigue

If a wiper blade or wiper arm is damaged, replace the

affected wiper arm or blade with a new unit. Do not

attempt to repair a wiper arm or blade that is damaged.

Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

CAUTION!

Do not allow the wiper arm to spring back against

the glass without the wiper blade in place or the glass

may be damaged.

1. Lift the wiper arm to raise the wiper blade off of the

glass, until the wiper arm is in the full up position.

818 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. To disengage the wiper blade from the wiper arm,

press the release tab on the wiper blade and while

holding the wiper arm with one hand, slide the wiper

blade down towards the base of the wiper arm.

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Locked Position

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm

3 — Release Tab

Wiper Blade With Release Tab In Unlocked Position

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm

3 — Release Tab

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 819

3. With the wiper blade disengaged, remove the wiper

blade from the wiper arm.

4. Gently lower the wiper arm onto the glass.

Installing The Front Wipers

1. Lift the wiper arm off of the glass, until the wiper arm

is in the full up position.

2. Position the wiper blade near the hook on the tip of the

wiper arm.

3. Insert the hook on the tip of the arm through the

opening in the wiper blade.

4. Slide the wiper blade up into the hook on the wiper

arm, latch engagement will be accompanied by an

audible click.

5. Gently lower the wiper blade onto the glass.Wiper Blade Removed From Wiper Arm

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Wiper Arm

3 — Release Tab

820 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Adding Washer Fluid

The fluid reservoir is located under the hood and should be

checked for fluid level at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir

with windshield washer solvent only (not radiator anti-

freeze). When refilling the washer fluid reservoir, take some

washer fluid and apply it to a cloth or towel and wipe the

wiper blades clean. This will help blade performance.

To prevent freeze-up of your windshield washer system in

cold weather, select a solution or mixture that meets or

exceeds the temperature range of your climate. This rating

information can be found on most washer fluid containers.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer solvents

are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care

must be exercised when filling or working around

the washer solution.

After the engine has warmed up, operate the defroster for

a few minutes to reduce the possibility of smearing or

freezing the fluid on the cold windshield. Windshield

washer solution used with water as directed on the

container, aids cleaning action, reduces the freezing point

to avoid line clogging, and is not harmful to paint or trim.

Exhaust System

The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into

the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust

system.

If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system;

or if the exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle;

or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged;

have an authorized technician inspect the complete ex-

haust system and adjacent body areas for broken, dam-

aged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams

or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep

into the passenger compartment. In addition, have the

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 821

exhaust system inspected each time the vehicle is raised

for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.

WARNING!

• Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain

carbon monoxide (CO), which is colorless and

odorless. Breathing it can make you unconscious

and can eventually poison you. To avoid breathing

CO, refer to “Safety Tips/Exhaust Gas” in “Things

To Know Before Starting Your Vehicle” for further

information.

• A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park

over materials that can burn. Such materials might

be grass or leaves coming into contact with your

exhaust system. Do not park or operate your ve-

hicle in areas where your exhaust system can con-

tact anything that can burn.

CAUTION!

• The catalytic converter requires the use of un-

leaded fuel only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the

effectiveness of the catalyst as an emissions control

device and may seriously reduce engine perfor-

mance and cause serious damage to the engine.

• Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your

vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition.

In the event of engine malfunction, particularly

involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of

performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly.

Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe

malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,

resulting in possible damage to the converter and

vehicle.

822 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic con-

verter will not require maintenance. However, it is im-

portant to keep the engine properly tuned to assure

proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst

damage.

NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems can result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning

engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe

and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop

the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.

Service, including a tune-up to manufacturer’s specifica-

tions, should be obtained immediately.

To minimize the possibility of catalytic converter dam-

age:

• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition,

when the transmission is in gear and the vehicle is in

motion.

• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the

vehicle.

• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires

disconnected or removed, such as when diagnostic

testing, or for prolonged periods during very rough

idle or malfunctioning operating conditions. 7

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 823

Cooling System

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) or steam from your radiator. If

you see or hear steam coming from under the hood,

do not open the hood until the radiator has had time

to cool. Never try to open a cooling system pressure

cap when the radiator is hot.

Engine Coolant Checks

Check the engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every 12

months (before the onset of freezing weather, where

applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or

rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,

flushed and refilled with fresh coolant. Check the front of

the A/C condenser (if equipped) or radiator for any

accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently

spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the

face of the A/C condenser (if equipped) or the back of the

radiator core.

Check the engine cooling system hoses for brittle rubber,

cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection at the

coolant recovery bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire

system for leaks.

With the engine at normal operating temperature (but

not running), check the cooling system pressure cap for

proper vacuum sealing by draining a small amount of

engine coolant (antifreeze) from the radiator drain cock.

The radiator drain cock is located in the lower radiator

tank. If the cap is sealing properly, the engine coolant

(antifreeze) will begin to drain from the coolant expan-

sion bottle. DO NOT REMOVE THE COOLANT PRES-

SURE CAP WHEN THE COOLING SYSTEM IS HOT.

824 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cooling System — Drain Flush And Refill

If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a

considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a

reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough

rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly

dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Selection Of Coolant

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than speci-

fied Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant (antifreeze), may result in engine damage and may

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

decrease corrosion protection. Organic Additive Tech-

nology (OAT) engine coolant is different and should

not be mixed with Hybrid Organic Additive Technol-

ogy (HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze) or any “glob-

ally compatible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT

engine coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the

cooling system in an emergency, the cooling system

will need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with

fresh OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the engine coolant and may

plug the radiator.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 825

CAUTION! (Continued)

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

Adding Coolant

Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine

coolant (OAT coolant conforming to MS.90032) that al-

lows extended maintenance intervals. This engine cool-

ant (antifreeze) can be used up to ten years or 150,000

miles (240,000 km) before replacement. To prevent reduc-

ing this extended maintenance period, it is important that

you use the same engine coolant (OAT coolant conform-

ing to MS.90032) throughout the life of your vehicle.

Please review these recommendations for using Organic

Additive Technology (OAT) engine coolant (antifreeze)

that meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032. When adding engine coolant (antifreeze):

• We recommend using MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10

Year/150,000 Mile Formula OAT (Organic Additive Tech-

nology) that meets the requirements of FCA Material

Standard MS.90032.

• Mix a minimum solution of 50% OAT engine coolant that

meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS.90032 and distilled water. Use higher concentrations

(not to exceed 70%) if temperatures below −34°F (−37°C)

are anticipated. Please contact your authorized dealer for

assistance.

• Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized

water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)

solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the

amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling

system.

826 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

• It is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper

level of protection against freezing according to the

temperatures occurring in the area where the vehicle is

operated.

• Some vehicles require special tools to add coolant

properly. Failure to fill these systems properly could

lead to severe internal engine damage. If any coolant is

needed to be added to the system, please contact your

local authorized dealer.

• Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types is not recom-

mended and can result in cooling system damage. If

HOAT and OAT coolant are mixed in an emergency,

have a authorized dealer drain, flush, and refill with

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032) as soon as

possible.

Cooling System Pressure Cap

The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine

coolant (antifreeze), and to ensure that the engine coolant

(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant

expansion bottle.

The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any

accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.

WARNING!

• Do not open hot engine cooling system. Never add

engine coolant (antifreeze) when the engine is

overheated. Do not loosen or remove the cap to cool

an overheated engine. Heat causes pressure to

build up in the cooling system. To prevent scalding

or injury, do not remove the pressure cap while the

system is hot or under pressure.

(Continued)

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 827

WARNING! (Continued)

• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one

specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or en-

gine damage may result.

Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant

Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is

a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check

with your local authorities to determine the disposal

rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by ani-

mals or children, do not store ethylene glycol-based

engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it

to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a child

or pet, seek emergency assistance immediately. Clean up

any ground spills immediately.

Checking Coolant Level — 3.6L and 5.7L Engines

With the engine OFF and cold, the level of the engine coolant

should be between the ADD and SAFE range on the dipstick.

To check the coolant level:

1. Open the coolant reservoir.

Opening The Coolant Reservoir

828 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Lift and remove the plastic dipstick from the reservoir

neck.

3. Check the coolant level on the dipstick.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for

engine coolant (antifreeze) freeze point or replacing en-

gine coolant (antifreeze). Advise your service attendant

of this. As long as the engine operating temperature is

satisfactory, the coolant bottle need only be checked once

a month.

When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to

maintain the proper level, it should be added to the

coolant bottle. Do not overfill.

Coolant Reservoir Dipstick

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 829

Checking Coolant Level — 6.4L Engine

The level of the coolant in the pressurized coolant bottle

should be between the “MIN” and “MAX” range on the

bottle when the engine is cold.

The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is

no need to remove the cap unless checking for coolant

freeze point or replacing engine coolant (antifreeze).

Advise your service attendant of this. As long as the

engine operating temperature is satisfactory, the coolant

bottle need only be checked once a month. When addi-

tional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to maintain

the proper level, it should be added to the coolant bottle.

Do not overfill.

Points To Remember

NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/

kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming

from the front of the engine compartment. This is nor-

mally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high

humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vapor-

ized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine

coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.

If an examination of your engine compartment shows no

evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be

safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.

• Do not overfill the coolant expansion bottle.

• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in the

coolant expansion bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze)

needs to be added, the contents of the coolant expansion

bottle must also be protected against freezing.

830 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are

required, the cooling system should be pressure tested

for leaks.

• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at a

minimum of 50% OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032)

and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of

your engine which contains aluminum components.

• Make sure that the coolant expansion bottle overflow

hoses are not kinked or obstructed.

• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is

equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the

condenser clean.

• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter

operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install

ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may

result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)

performance, poor gas mileage, and increased emis-

sions.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance, all brake

system components should be inspected periodically.

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and

possibly a collision. Driving with your foot resting or

riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally

high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and

possible brake damage. You would not have your full

braking capacity in an emergency.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 831

Brake Fluid Level Check

The fluid level of the master cylinder should be checked

when performing under the hood service or immediately

if the brake system warning lamp indicates system

failure.

The brake master cylinder has a translucent plastic

reservoir. On the outboard side of the reservoir, there is a

“MAX” dot and an “MIN” dot. The fluid level must be

kept within these two dots. Do not add fluid above the

MAX mark because leakage may occur at the cap.

With disc brakes the fluid level can be expected to fall as

the brake linings wear. However, an unexpected drop in

fluid level may be caused by a leak and a system check

should be conducted.

Use only the manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

Using the wrong type of brake fluid can severely

damage your brake system and/or impair its perfor-

mance. The proper type of brake fluid for your vehicle

is also identified on the original factory installed

hydraulic master cylinder reservoir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign matter or mois-

ture, use only new brake fluid or fluid that has been in

a tightly closed container. Keep the master cylinder

reservoir cap secured at all times. Brake fluid in a open

container absorbs moisture from the air resulting in a

lower boiling point. This may cause it to boil unexpect-

edly during hard or prolonged braking, resulting in

sudden brake failure. This could result in a collision.

(Continued)

832 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING! (Continued)

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in

spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts, causing

the brake fluid to catch fire. Brake fluid can also

damage painted and vinyl surfaces, care should be

taken to avoid its contact with these surfaces.

• Do not allow petroleum based fluid to contaminate

the brake fluid. Brake seal components could be

damaged, causing partial or complete brake failure.

This could result in a collision.

Rear Axle And 4x4 Front Driving Axle Fluid Level

For normal service, periodic fluid level checks are not

required. When the vehicle is serviced for other reasons

the exterior surfaces of the axle assembly should be

inspected. If gear oil leakage is suspected inspect the

fluid level. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine

Parts” in “Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further informa-

tion. This inspection should be made with the vehicle in

a level position.

For 1500 Model axles, the fluid level should be even with

the bottom of the fill hole (within 1/4 in (6.4 mm) of edge

of hole) for the FDU215 HD front axle and C235FE rear

axle.

For all 2500/3500 Model axles, the fluid level should be

1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole on

the 9.25 in front and 3/4 in ± 1/4 in (19 mm ± 6.4 mm) on

10.5 in rear axles. The 11.5 in rear axle level should be

1/4 in ± 1/4 in (6.4 mm ± 6.4 mm) below the fill hole.

Drain And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 833

Lubricant Selection

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

NOTE: The presence of water in the gear lubricant will

result in corrosion and possible failure of differential

components. Operation of the vehicle in water, as may be

encountered in some off-highway types of service, will

require draining and refilling the axle to avoid damage.

Limited-Slip Differentials

1500 Model rear axles equipped with a Limited Slip Differ-

ential require that 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR Limited Slip

Additive be added to the gear lubricant. Refer to “Fluids,

Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in “Maintaining Your Ve-

hicle” for further information. The MOPAR Limited Slip

Additive should be added to the gear lubricant whenever a

fluid change is made to an axle equipped with a Limited Slip

Differential.

2500/3500 Model axles DO NOT REQUIRE any limited

slip oil additive (friction modifiers).

NOTE: When refilling an axle with a Limited Slip Differ-

ential, (which requires a Limited Slip Additive), the

Limited Slip Additive should be added before the gear

lubricant is added to insure proper additive fill.

Transfer Case

Drain And Refill

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

Lubricant Selection

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in

“Maintaining Your Vehicle” for further information.

834 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid Level Check

This fluid level can be checked by removing the filler

plug. The fluid level should be to the bottom edge of the

filler plug hole with the vehicle in a level position.

Automatic Transmission

Selection Of Lubricant

It is important to use the proper transmission fluid to

ensure optimum transmission performance and life. Use

only the manufacturer’s specified transmission fluid.

Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts” in this

section for fluid specifications. It is important to maintain

the transmission fluid at the correct level using the

recommended fluid. No chemical flushes should be used

in any transmission; only the approved lubricant should

be used.

CAUTION!

Using a transmission fluid other than the manufac-

turer’s recommended fluid may cause deterioration

in transmission shift quality and/or torque converter

shudder, and will require more frequent fluid and

filter changes. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, And

Genuine Parts” in this section for fluid specifica-

tions.

Special Additives

The manufacturer strongly recommends against using

any special additives in the transmission. Automatic

Transmission Fluid (ATF) is an engineered product and

its performance may be impaired by supplemental addi-

tives. Therefore, do not add any fluid additives to the

transmission. Avoid using transmission sealers as they

may adversely affect seals.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 835

CAUTION!

Do not use chemical flushes in your transmission as

the chemicals can damage your transmission compo-

nents. Such damage is not covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Fluid Level Check — Eight-Speed Transmission

The fluid level is preset at the factory and does not require

adjustment under normal operating conditions. Routine

fluid level checks are not required, therefore the transmis-

sion has no dipstick. Your authorized dealer can check your

transmission fluid level using special service tools.

If you notice fluid leakage or transmission malfunction,

visit your authorized dealer immediately to have the

transmission fluid level checked. Operating the vehicle

with an improper fluid level can cause severe transmis-

sion damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit your autho-

rized dealer immediately. Severe transmission dam-

age may occur. Your authorized dealer has the proper

tools to adjust the fluid level accurately.

Fluid Level Check — Six-Speed Transmission

It is best to check the fluid level when the transmission is

at normal operating temperature (170-180°F / 77-82°C).

This normally occurs after at least 15 miles (25 km) of

driving. At normal operating temperature the fluid can-

not be held comfortably between the fingertips. You can

read the transmission sump temperature in the EVIC/

DID screen (refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information

Center [EVIC]” or “Driver Information Display (DID)”

for further information).

836 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Use the following procedure to check the transmission

fluid level properly:

1. Monitor the transmission temperature using the

EVIC/DID screen, and operate the vehicle as required

to reach the normal operating temperature. If the

transmission is not functioning properly, or the vehicle

cannot be driven, see the NOTE and CAUTION below

about checking the fluid level at colder temperatures.

2. Park the vehicle on level ground.

3. Run the engine at normal idle speed for at least 60

seconds, and leave the engine running for the rest of

this procedure.

4. Fully apply the parking brake, and press the brake

pedal.

5. Place the gear selector momentarily into each gear posi-

tion (allowing time for the transmission to fully engage in

each position), ending with the transmission in PARK.

6. Remove the dipstick, wipe it clean and reinsert it until

seated.

7. Remove the dipstick again and note the fluid level on

both sides. The fluid level reading is only valid if there

is a solid coating of oil on both sides of the dipstick.

Note that the holes in the dipstick will be full of fluid

if the actual level is at or above the hole. The fluid level

should be between the “HOT” (upper) reference holes

on the dipstick at normal operating temperature. If the

fluid level is low, add fluid through the dipstick tube

to bring it to the proper level. Do not overfill. Use

ONLY the specified fluid (see Fluids, Lubricants, And

Genuine Parts for fluid specifications). After adding

any quantity of oil through the dipstick tube, wait a

minimum of two minutes for the oil to fully drain into

the transmission before rechecking the fluid level.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 837

NOTE: If it is necessary to check the transmission below

the operating temperature, the fluid level should be

between the two “COLD” (lower) holes on the dipstick

with the fluid at 60-70°F / 16-21°C. Only use the COLD

region of the dipstick as a rough reference when setting

the fluid level after a transmission service or fluid

change. Re-check the fluid level, and adjust as required,

once the transmission reaches normal operating tempera-

ture.

CAUTION!

If the fluid temperature is below 50 °F (10 °C) it may

not register on the dipstick. Do not add fluid until

the temperature is elevated enough to produce an

accurate reading. Run the engine at idle, in PARK, to

warm the fluid.

8. Reinsert the dipstick. Check for leaks. Release the

parking brake.

NOTE: To prevent dirt and water from entering the

transmission after checking or replenishing fluid, make

sure that the dipstick cap is properly reseated. It is

normal for the dipstick cap to spring back slightly from

its fully seated position, as long as its seal remains

engaged in the dipstick tube.

Fluid And Filter Changes — Eight-Speed

Transmission

Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at

the factory will provide satisfactory lubrication for the

life of the vehicle.

Routine fluid and filter changes are not required. How-

ever, change the fluid and filter if the fluid becomes

contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the transmission is

disassembled for any reason.

838 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Fluid And Filter Changes — Six Speed

Transmission

Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” for the proper

maintenance intervals.

In addition, change the fluid and filter(s) if the fluid

becomes contaminated (with water, etc.), or if the trans-

mission is disassembled for any reason.

Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion

Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion

Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geo-

graphic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads

passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on trees

and road surfaces during other seasons are highly corrosive

to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking, which exposes

your vehicle to airborne contaminants, road surfaces on

which the vehicle is operated, extreme hot or cold weather

and other extreme conditions will have an adverse effect on

paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.

The following maintenance recommendations will enable

you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion

resistance built into your vehicle.

What Causes Corrosion?

Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of

paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.

The most common causes are:

• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.

• Stone and gravel impact.

• Insects, tree sap and tar.

• Salt in the air near seacoast localities.

• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 839

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your ve-

hicle in the shade using MOPAR Car Wash, or a mild

car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with

clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have accumu-

lated on your vehicle, use MOPAR Super Kleen Bug

and Tar Remover to remove.

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as MOPAR

Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains and to protect

your paint finish. Take care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing

that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials

such as steel wool or scouring powder that will

scratch metal and painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding 1,200 psi (8 274 kPa)

can result in damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive

near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once

a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges

of the doors, rocker panels, and trunk be kept clear and

open.

840 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,

touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is

considered the responsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision or similar

cause that destroys the paint and protective coating,

have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The

cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,

de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well

packaged and sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider

mud or stone shields behind each wheel.

• Use MOPAR Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as

possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to

match the color of your vehicle.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and

chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly using

mild (neutral Ph) soap and water to maintain their luster

and to prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the same

soap solution recommended for the body of the vehicle.

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration caused by

salt, sodium chloride, magnesium chloride, calcium chlo-

ride, etc., and other road chemicals used to melt ice or

control dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge and

mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not use harsh

chemicals or a stiff brush. They can damage the wheel’s

protective coating that helps keep them from corroding

and tarnishing.

NOTE: Many aftermarket wheel cleaners contain strong

acids or strong alkaline additives that can harm the wheel

surface.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 841

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes that use

acidic solutions or strong alkaline additives or harsh

brushes. These products and automatic car washes

may damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such

damage is not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel

Cleaner or equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels including exces-

sive brake dust, care must be taken in the selection of tire

and wheel cleaning chemicals and equipment to prevent

damage to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or Mopar

Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is recommended or

select a non-abrasive, non-acidic cleaner for aluminum or

chrome wheels. Do not use any products on Dark Vapor

or Black Satin Chrome Wheels. They will permanently

damage this finish and such damage is not covered by

the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a bristle brush,

metal polishes or oven cleaner. These products may

damage the wheel’s protective finish. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Only car wash soap, MOPAR Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

NOTE: If you intend parking or storing your vehicle for

an extended period after cleaning the wheels with wheel

cleaner, drive your vehicle for a few minutes before doing

so. Driving the vehicle and applying the brakes when

stopping will reduce the risk of brake rotor corrosion.

842 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Dark Vapor Or Black Satin Chrome Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with Dark Vapor or Black

Satin Chrome wheels DO NOT USE wheel cleaners,

abrasives or polishing compounds. They will perma-

nently damage this finish and such damage is not

covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty. USE

ONLY MILD SOAP AND WATER WITH A SOFT

CLOTH. Used on a regular basis this is all that is

required to maintain this finish.

Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If

Equipped

Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following man-

ner:

• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting

with a clean, dry towel.

• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.

• For tough stains, apply MOPAR Total Clean, or a mild

soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.

Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• For grease stains, apply MOPAR Multi-Purpose

Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use

a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.

• Do not use any harsh solvents or any other form of

protectants on Stain Repel products.

Interior Care

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and

carpeting.

Use MOPAR Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.

MOPAR Total Clean is specifically recommended for

leather upholstery.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 843

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular

cleaning with a damp soft cloth. Small particles of dirt

can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery

and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.

Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth

and MOPAR Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid

soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please

do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, deter-

gents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean your leather

upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not

required to maintain the original condition.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.

Many are potentially flammable, and if used in

closed areas they may cause respiratory harm.

CAUTION!

Direct contact of air fresheners, insect repellents,

suntan lotions, or hand sanitizers to the plastic,

painted, or decorated surfaces of the interior may

cause permanent damage. Wipe away immediately.

CAUTION!

Damage caused by these type of products may not be

covered by your New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based and/or Keton

based cleaning products to clean leather seats, as

damage to the seat may result.

844 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cleaning Headlights

Your vehicle is equipped with plastic headlights and fog

lights that are lighter and less susceptible to stone break-

age than glass headlights.

Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and therefore

different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.

To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and

reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To

remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution fol-

lowed by rinsing.

Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel

wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis

with MOPAR Glass Cleaner, or any commercial

household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type

cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear win-

dow equipped with electric defrosters or windows

equipped with radio antennas. Do not use scrapers or

other sharp instrument that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray cleaner on the

towel or cloth that you are using. Do not spray cleaner

directly on the mirror.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are

molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care

must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap solution may

be used, but do not use high alcohol content or

abrasive cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a

clean damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 845

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with chemical

solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.

Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or

lukewarm water. Do not remove the belts from the

vehicle to wash them. Dry with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or worn or if the

buckles do not work properly.

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and

leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do

not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they

have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

Tri-Fold Soft Tonneau Cover Care

For cleaning and protecting the vinyl Tri-Fold Tonneau

cover, use MOPAR Whitewall & Vinyl Top Cleaner and

MOPAR Leather and Vinyl Conditioner/Protectant.

Spray-On Bedliner – If Equipped

During ownership, the shine and luster of the Spray-On

Bedliner can fade from oxidation, road dirt, heavy-duty

hauling and hard water stains. Weathering and UV

exposure will lead to fading, dulling, and loss of gloss

over time.

846 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

To help maintain the appearance of your Spray-On Bedliner,

the manufacturer recommends you periodically rinse all

loose dirt from your truck bed and clean your truck at least

twice per year using the MOPAR Spray-On Bedliner Condi-

tioner available at your local authorized dealer.

To Help Maintain The Appearance Of Your Spray-On

Bedliner, Follow The Steps Below:

1. Rinse your truck bed out with water to remove any

loose dirt and debris.

2. Mix a mild soap or detergent with water with a soft

cloth or brush.

3. Rinse bedliner with water.

4. Once dry, apply a small amount of MOPAR Spray-On

Bedliner Conditioner to a moist towel or sponge and

wipe over the entire surface of the truck bedliner.

WARNING!

Do not use silicon-based protection products to clean

your bedliner. Silicon-based products can become

slippery and may result in personal injury.

Spray-On Bedliners are chemically-resistant to many

different types of chemicals (including gasoline, oil,

hydraulic fluids) for short periods of time. If a spill

occurs on your Spray-On Bedliner, rinse the truck out as

soon as possible to avoid permanent damage.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 847

Repairing The Spray-On Bedliner

While extremely tough, it is possible to damage a

Spray-On Bedliner. One common condition is when

loading a heavy pallet and dragging that pallet across the

floor of the bed. If a nail or sharp point is exposed under

the weight of the pallet a scratch or tear is possible. While

not covered by your new vehicle warranty, a cosmetic fix

to cover the metal exposed by the scratch is required. To

repair a tear or gouge, follow the directions provided in

the MOPAR Quick Repair Kit.

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use an ap-

propriate replacement fuse with the same amp

rating as the original fuse. Never replace a fuse

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

with another fuse of higher amp rating. Never

replace a blown fuse with metal wires or any other

material. Failure to use proper fuses may result in

serious personal injury, fire and/or property dam-

age.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that the ignition

is off and that all the other services are switched off

and/or disengaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact an autho-

rized dealer.

• If a general protection fuse for safety systems (air

bag system, braking system), power unit systems

(engine system, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

848 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Power Distribution Center

The Power Distribution Center is located in the engine

compartment near the battery. This center contains car-

tridge fuses, micro fuses, relays, and circuit breakers. A

description of each fuse and component may be stamped

on the inside cover, otherwise the cavity number of each

fuse is stamped on the inside cover that corresponds to

the following chart.

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 80 Amp Black – Rad Fan Control Module – If Equipped

F03 60 Amp Yellow – Rad Fan – If Equipped

F05 40 Amp Green – Compressor for Air Suspension – If Equipped

F06 40 Amp Green – Antilock Brakes/Electronic Stability Control Pump

Power Distribution Center Location

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 849

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F07 40 Amp Green – Starter Solenoid

F08 20 Amp Blue

(1500 LD/

Cummins Diesel)

– Emissions Diesel – If Equipped

F09 40 Amp Green

(Special Services

Vehicle & Cum-

mins Diesel)

– Diesel Fuel Heater – If Equipped

F10 40 Amp Green – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2

F10 50 Amp Red – Body Controller / Exterior Lighting #2 – If Equipped

with Stop/Start

F11 30 Amp Pink – Integrated Trailer Brake Module – If Equipped

F12 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #3 / Power Locks

F13 40 Amp Green – Blower Motor

F14 40 Amp Green – Body Controller #4 / Interior Lighting

F16 30 Amp Pink – Smart Bar – If Equipped

850 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F19 20 Amp Blue (1500

LD Diesel)

30 Amp Pink

(Cummins Diesel)

– SCR – If Equipped

F20 30 Amp Pink – Passenger Door Module

F21 30 Amp Pink – Drive Train Control Module

F22 20 Amp Blue

30 Amp Pink

(Cummins Diesel)

– Engine Control Module

F23 30 Amp Pink – Body Controller #1 / Interior Lighting

F24 30 Amp Pink – Driver Door Module

F25 30 Amp Pink – Front Wiper

F26 30 Amp Pink – Antilock Brakes / Stability Control Module / Valves

F28 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Backup Lights – If Equipped

F29 20 Amp Blue – Trailer Tow Parking Lights – If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 851

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F30 30 Amp Pink – Trailer Tow Receptacle

F31 30 Amp Pink (1500

LD Diesel)

– Urea Heater Control – If Equipped

F32 – – Spare Fuse

F33 20 Amp Blue – Special Services Vehicle Only

F34 30 Amp Pink – Vehicle System Interface Module #2 – If Equipped

F35 30 Amp Pink – Sunroof – If Equipped

F36 30 Amp Pink – Rear Defroster – If Equipped

F37 30 Amp Pink – Cummins Diesel Fuel Heater #2 – If Equipped

F38 30 Amp Pink – Power Inverter 115V AC – If Equipped

F39 20 Amp Blue – Power Outlet – Special Services Only

F41 – 10 Amp Red Active Grill Shutter – If Equipped

F42 – 20 Amp Yellow Horn

F44 – 10 Amp Red Diagnostic Port

F46 – 10 Amp Red Upfitter – If Equipped

852 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F49 – 10 Amp Red Instrument Panel Cluster (except for fleet vehicles)

F50 – 20 Amp Yellow Air Suspension Control Module – If Equipped

F51 – 10 Amp Red Ignition Node Module / Keyless Ignition (Instru-

ment Panel Cluster – Fleet Vehicles Only)

F52 – 5 Amp Tan Battery Sensor

F53 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow – Left Turn/Stop Lights

F54 – 20 Amp Yellow Adjustable Pedals

F56 – 15 Amp Blue Additional Diesel Content – If Equipped

F57 – 20 Amp Yellow Transmission

F58 – 20 Amp Yellow Spare Fuse

F59 – 10 Amp Red SCR Relay – If Equipped

F60 – 15 Amp Blue Underhood Lamp

F61 – 10 Amp Red (1500

LD Diesel & Cum-

mins Diesel)

PM Sensor – If Equipped

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 853

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F62 – 10 Amp Red Air Conditioning Clutch

F63 – 20 Amp Yellow Ignition Coils (Gas), Urea Heater (Cummins Diesel)

F64 – 25 Amp Clear Fuel Injectors / Powertrain

F65 – – Spare Fuse

F66 – 10 Amp Red Sunroof / Passenger Window Switches / Rain Sensor

F67 – 10 Amp Red CD / DVD / Bluetooth Hands-free Module – If

Equipped

F69 – 15 Amp Blue Mod SCR 12V (Cummins Diesel) – If Equipped

F70 – 30 Amp Green Fuel Pump Motor

F71 – 25 Amp Clear Amplifier

F72 – 10 Amp Red PCM – If Equipped

F73 – 20 Amp Yellow Fuel Transfer Pump (HD Only) – If Equipped

F74 – 20 Amp Yellow

(Gas Engine & 1500

LD Diesel)

Brake Vacuum Pump Gas/Diesel – If Equipped

854 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F75 – 10 Amp Red Coolant Temperature Valve Actuator

F76 – 10 Amp Red Antilock Brakes / Electronic Stability Control

F77 – 10 Amp Red Drivetrain Control Module/Front Axle Disconnect

Module

F78 – 10 Amp Red Engine Control Module / Electric Power Steering

F79 – 15 Amp Blue Clearance Lights

F80 – 10 Amp Red Universal Garage Door Opener / Compass

F81 – 20 Amp Yellow Trailer Tow Right Turn / Stop Lights

F82 – 10 Amp Red Steering Column Control Module / Cruise Control

F84 – 15 Amp Blue Switch Bank / Instrument Cluster

F85 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module

F86 – 10 Amp Red Airbag Module

F87 – 10 Amp Red Air Suspension – If Equipped / Trailer Tow / Steer-

ing Column Control Module

F88 – 15 Amp Blue Instrument Panel Cluster

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 855

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F90/F91 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlet (rear seats) Customer Selectable

F93 – 20 Amp Yellow Cigar Lighter

F94 – 10 Amp Red Shifter / Transfer Case Module

F95 – 10 Amp Red Rear Camera / Park Assist

F96 – 10 Amp Red Rear Seat Heater Switch

F97 – 25 Amp Clear Rear Heated Seats & Heated Steering Wheel – If

Equipped

F98 – 25 Amp Clear Front Heated Seats – If Equipped

F99 – 10 Amp Red Climate Control

F100 – 10 Amp Red Upfitters – If Equipped

856 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Cavity Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F101 – 15 Amp Blue Electrochromatic Mirror / Smart High Beams – If

Equipped

F104 – 20 Amp Yellow Power Outlets (Instrument Panel / Center Console)

CAUTION!

• When installing the power distribution center cover, it

is important to ensure the cover is properly positioned

and fully latched. Failure to do so may allow water to

get into the power distribution center and possibly

result in an electrical system failure.

• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to use

only a fuse having the correct amperage rating. The

use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated may

result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If

a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it indicates

a problem in the circuit that must be corrected.

VEHICLE STORAGE

If you are storing your vehicle for more than 21 days, we

recommend that you take the following steps to mini-

mize the drain on your vehicle’s battery:

• Disconnect the negative cable from battery.

• Any time you store your vehicle or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more, run the

air conditioning system at idle for about five minutes

in the fresh air and high blower setting. This will

ensure adequate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the system is

started again.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 857

REPLACEMENT BULBS

All of the inside bulbs are brass or glass-wedge base.

Aluminum base bulbs are not approved.

Interior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Overhead Console

Lamps

TS 212–9

Dome Lamp 7679

For lighted switches, see your authorized dealer for

replacement instructions.

Exterior Bulbs

Bulb Number

Base Quad Headlamp –

Low Beam

H11LL

Base Quad Headlamp –

High Beam

9005LL

Front Turn Signal Lamp

(Base Quad Headlamp)

3157NA

Premium Bi Halogen

Projector Headlamp -

Low Beam

9005Sl+

Premium Bi Halogen

Projector Headlamp -

High Beam

9005LL

Front Turn Signal Lamp

(Premium Headlamp)

LED (Serviced at Autho-

rized Dealer)

858 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Bulb Number

Fog Lamp (Horizontal

shape)

9145

Fog Lamp (Vertical

shape)

9006

Center High Mounted

Stop Lamp (CHMSL)

921K

Rear Cargo Lamp 921

LED Center High

Mounted Stop Lamp

(CHMSL)/Cargo Lamp

LED (Serviced at Autho-

rized Dealer)

Cab Roof Marker Lamps 194NA

Base Rear Tail/Turn and

Stop Lamp

3157K

Premium Rear Tail/Turn

and Stop Lamp

LED (Serviced at Autho-

rized Dealer)

Bulb Number

Premium Backup Lamp 7440/W21W

Rear Lamp Bar ID

Marker Lamp

194

Side Marker Lamps

(Dual Rear Wheels)

194

Backup Lamp 921

Rear License Plate Lamp 194

BULB REPLACEMENT

NOTE: Lens fogging can occur under certain atmo-

spheric conditions. This will usually clear as atmospheric

conditions change to allow the condensation to change

back into a vapor. Turning the lamps on will usually

accelerate the clearing process.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 859

Base Quad / Premium Bi-Halogen: Low Beam

Headlamp, High Beam Headlamp, Front Park And

Turn — If Equipped

1. Open the hood.

2. Disconnect and isolate the negative battery cable.

3. Remove the six plastic push-in fasteners that secure

the upper radiator seal to the grille support and both

fender ledges.

4. Remove the two plastic push-in rivets that secure the

upper radiator seal to the radiator.

5. Remove the upper radiator seal from the vehicle.

6. Remove the two headlamp assembly attachment

screws.

7. Reach into the front wheel house ahead of the front

wheel, remove the fastener, and lift the cover over the

access hole in the front of the wheel house splash

shield. Access to the rear of the lamp can be gained

through this access hole.

Headlamp Assembly Attachment Screw Locations

860 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

8. Reach through the access hole of the wheel house

splash shield and lift the slide lock upward far enough

to disengage it from the lock post on the back of the

front lamp unit housing.

9. Remove the headlamp assembly. Grasp the outboard

edge of the lamp and pull it straight forward to

disengage the ball stud from the plastic grommet.

10. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the

bulb socket.

11. Replace bulb(s) as necessary.

CAUTION!

• Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it

with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other

oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

• Always use the correct bulb size and type for

replacement. An incorrect bulb size or type may

overheat and cause damage to the lamp, the bulb

socket, or the lamp wiring.Slide Lock

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 861

NOTE: There are access covers over both headlamp bulb

access holes in the quad front lamp unit housing (if

equipped). These covers MUST be reinstalled after the bulb

has been replaced.

Fog Lamps — If Equipped

1. Reach under and behind the front bumper to access

the back of the front fog lamp housing.

2. Disconnect the fog lamp wiring harness connector

from the fog lamp bulb.

3. Rotate the bulb counterclockwise ¼ turn to unlock the

bulb from the housing.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from the housing.

CAUTION!

Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it

with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other

oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

Rear Tail/Stop, Turn Signal And Backup Lamps

1. Remove the two screws that pass through the bed

sheet metal.

Tail Lamp Screw Locations

862 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

2. Pull the outboard side of the lamp rearward far

enough to unsnap the two receptacles on the outboard

side of the lamp housing from the two plastic snap

post retainers in the outer box side panel.

3. Disconnect the wiring harness connectors from the

bulb socket.

4. Rotate the bulb socket counterclockwise 1/4 turn to

unlock it from the housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

CAUTION!

Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it

with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other

oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

6. Reverse the procedure to install the bulb and housing.

Pulling Out The Tail Lamp

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 863

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) With

Cargo Lamp

1. Remove the two screws holding the housing/lens to

the body as shown.

2. Separate the connector holding the housing and wir-

ing harness to the body.

3. Turn the desired bulb socket ¼ turn and remove the

socket and bulb from housing.

4. Pull the desired bulb straight from the socket.

CHMSL Mounting Screw Locations

CHMSL Connector Location

864 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

Do not contaminate the bulb glass by touching it

with your fingers or by allowing it to contact other

oily surfaces. Shortened bulb life will result.

• Outside Bulbs: Cargo Lamps

• Inside Bulb: Center High-Mounted Stop Lamp

5. Reverse the procedure for installation of bulbs and

housing.

Cab Top Clearance Lamps — If Equipped

1. Remove the two screws from the top of the lamp.

CHMSL Bulb And Socket

Removing Rear Screw From Clearance Lamp

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 865

2. Rotate the bulb socket ¼ turn and pull it from the lamp

assembly.

3. Pull the bulb straight from it’s socket and replace.

Removing Bulb Socket From Clearance Lamp

Removing The Bulb From The Bulb Socket

866 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Rear Lamp Bar ID Marker (Dual Rear Wheels) — If

Equipped

1. Loosen the two screws and the housing to gain access

to the bulb sockets.

2. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise to access the

bulb.

3. Pull the bulb straight out from the socket.

4. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and

housing.

Screw Locations

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 867

Side Marker Lamps (Dual Rear Wheels) — If

Equipped

1. Push rearward on the side marker lamp assembly.

2. Pull the entire assembly from the fender.

3. Turn the socket ¼ turn counterclockwise and remove

from assembly to access the bulb.

4. Pull the bulb straight out from socket.

5. Reverse the procedure for installation of the bulbs and

housing.

Side Marker Lamp Locations

868 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S. Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

1500 Regular Cab Shortbed/Crew Quad Cab Models 26 Gallons 98 Liters

1500 Regular Cab Longbed/Crew Quad Cab Models (Optional) 32 Gallons 121 Liters

2500/3500 Shortbed Models 31 Gallons 117 Liters

2500/3500 Longbed Models 32 Gallons 121 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

3.6L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 6 Quarts 5.6 Liters

5.7L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 5W-20, API Certified) 7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

5.7L Engine (We recommend you use SAE 5W-30, API Certified),

for 2500/3500 trucks operating under a gross combined weight

rating greater than 14,000 lbs (6 350 kg).

7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

6.4L Engines (We recommend you use SAE 0W-40 engine oil

meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12633 for

use in all operating temperatures.)

7 Quarts 6.6 Liters

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 869

U.S. Metric

Cooling System

3.6L Engine (We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant

10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the requirements of FCA

Material Standard MS.90032.)

13.7 Quarts 13 Liters

5.7L Engine – 1500 Models (We recommend you use MOPAR

Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that meets the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)

18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters

5.7L Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use

MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that

meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)

18.3 Quarts 17.3 Liters

6.4 Liter Engine – 2500/3500 Models (We recommend you use

MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile Formula that

meets the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.)

16.6 Quarts 15.7 Liters

870 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use MOPAR Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology).

Engine Oil – 3.6L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil,

and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

MOPAR SAE 5W-30 engine oil approved to FCA Material Standard MS-6395

may be used when SAE 5W-20 engine oil meeting MS-6395 is not available.

Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil,

and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE grade.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 871

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Oil – 5.7L Engine 2500/3500

trucks operating under a gross com-

bined weight rating greater than

14,000 lbs/(6,350 kg.)

We recommend you use API Certified SAE 5W-30 Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as MOPAR, Pennzoil,

Shell Helix or equivalent. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE

grade.

Engine Oil – 6.4L For best performance and maximum protection under all types of operating

conditions, the manufacturer only recommends full synthetic engine oils

that meet the American Petroleum Institute (API) categories of SN. The

manufacturer recommends the use of Pennzoil Ultra 0W-40 or equivalent

MOPAR engine oil meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard

MS-12633 for use in all operating temperatures.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use MOPAR brand Engine Oil Filters.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use MOPAR Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection – 3.6L Flex Fuel (E-85)

Engine – If Equipped

87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

Fuel Selection – 5.7L/6.4L Engines 89 Octane Recommended - 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol.

872 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than

specified Organic Additive Technology (OAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze), may result in engine

damage and may decrease corrosion protection.

Organic Additive Technology (OAT) engine cool-

ant is different and should not be mixed with

Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) en-

gine coolant (antifreeze) or any “globally compat-

ible” coolant (antifreeze). If a non-OAT engine

coolant (antifreeze) is introduced into the cooling

system in an emergency, the cooling system will

(Continued)

CAUTION! (Continued)

need to be drained, flushed, and refilled with fresh

OAT coolant (conforming to MS.90032), by an au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

• Do not use water alone or alcohol-based engine

coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional

rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they may not

be compatible with the radiator engine coolant and

may plug the radiator.

• This vehicle has not been designed for use with

propylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze).

Use of propylene glycol-based engine coolant (an-

tifreeze) is not recommended.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 873

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Automatic Transmission – Eight-Speed Automatic Use only MOPAR ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Trans-

mission Fluid, or equivalent. Failure to use the correct

fluid may affect the function or performance of your

transmission.

Automatic Transmission – Six-Speed Automatic with

Gasoline Engine (For Diesel Engine see Diesel Supple-

ment)

Use only ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid. Failure

to use ATF+4 fluid may affect the function or perfor-

mance of your transmission. We recommend MOPAR

ATF+4 fluid.

Transfer Case We recommend you use MOPAR BW44–44 Transfer

Case Fluid.

Front Axle – 1500 Four-Wheel Drive Models We recommend you use MOPAR GL-5 Synthetic Axle

Lubricant SAE 75W-85.

874 MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Rear Axle – 1500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Synthetic Gear Lubri-

cant SAE 75W-140 (MS-8985). Limited-Slip Rear Axles

require the addition of 5 oz. (148 ml) MOPAR Limited

Slip Additive (MS-10111).

Front and Rear Axle – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use SAE 75W-85 HD Ram GL-5

Synthetic Axle Lubricant. Limited slip additive is not

required for Limited-Slip Rear Axles.

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use MOPAR DOT 3. If DOT 3 brake

fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable.

Power Steering Reservoir – 2500/3500 Models We recommend you use MOPAR Power Steering Fluid

+4 or MOPAR ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid.

MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE 875

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

CONTENTS

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE . . . . . . . . . . . . .878 ▫ Maintenance Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .879

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic oil change

indicator system. The oil change indicator system will

remind you that it is time to take your vehicle in for

scheduled maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil change

indicator message will illuminate. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating conditions

such as frequent short-trips, trailer tow, extremely hot or

cold ambient temperatures, and E85 fuel usage will

influence when the “Oil Change Required” message is

displayed. Severe Operating Conditions can cause the

change oil message to illuminate as early as 3,500 miles

(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your vehicle serviced as

soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).

Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator

message after completing the scheduled oil change. If a

scheduled oil change is performed by someone other

than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by

referring to the steps described under “Electronic Vehicle

Information Center (EVIC)” or “Driver Information Dis-

play (DID)” in “Understanding Your Instrument Panel”

for further information.

1500 Models Only

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km), twelve months or

350 hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The

350 hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

2500 – 3500 Models Only

NOTE: Under no circumstances should oil change inter-

vals exceed 8,000 miles (13,000 km), twelve months or 350

hours of engine run time, whichever comes first. The 350

hours of engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

878 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Severe Duty All Models

NOTE: Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles (6,500 km) if the

vehicle is operated in a dusty and off road environment or is

operated predominantly at idle or only very low engine

RPM’s. This type of vehicle use is considered Severe Duty.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level

• Check windshield washer fluid level

• Check tire pressure and look for unusual wear or damage.

Rotate tires at the first sign of irregular wear, even if it

occurs before the oil indicator system turns on.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reservoir, brake

master cylinder, power steering (2500/3500 Models

Only) and automatic transmission (six-speed only)

and fill as needed

• Check function of all interior and exterior lights

Maintenance Chart

Required Maintenance

Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following

pages for required maintenance.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Change oil and filter.

• Rotate the tires. Rotate at the first sign of irregu-

lar wear, even if it occurs before the oil indicator

system turns on.

• Inspect battery and clean and tighten terminals as

required.

• Inspect automatic transmission fluid if equipped

with dipstick.

• Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums, hoses

and park brake.

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 879

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Inspect engine cooling system protection and

hoses.

• Inspect exhaust system.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

• Inspect engine air cleaner if using in dusty or

off-road conditions.

• Lube the front drive shaft fitting (2500/3500 (4x4)

models only).

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Additional Inspections

Inspect the CV/Universal joints. X X X X X

Inspect front suspension, tie rod

ends, and replace if necessary. X X X X X X X

880 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

1500 Models:

Inspect the front and rear axle

surfaces. If gear oil leakage is

suspected, check the fluid level.

If using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent

trailer towing, change axle fluid.

X X X X X

2500/3500 Models:

Inspect the front and rear axle

surfaces. If gear oil leakage is

suspected, check the fluid level.

If using your vehicle for police,

taxi, fleet, off-road or frequent

trailer towing, change axle fluid.

X X X X X X X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 881

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Inspect the brake linings, replace

as necessary. X X X X X X X

Adjust parking brake as neces-

sary. X X X X X X X

Inspect transfer case fluid. X X X

Additional Maintenance

Replace engine air filter. X X X X X

Replace spark plugs. ** X

Flush and replace the engine cool-

ant at 10 years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) whichever comes

first.

X X

882 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Change automatic transmission

fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-

matic only), if using your vehicle

for police, taxi, fleet, or frequent

trailer towing.

Change automatic transmission

fluid and filter(s) (six-speed auto-

matic only).

Inspect the transfer case fluid,

change for any of the following:

police, taxi, fleet, or frequent

trailer towing.

X X

Change the transfer case fluid. X

MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES 883

Mileage or time passed

(whichever comes first)

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Inspect and replace PCV valve if

necessary. X

** The spark plug change interval is mileage based only,

yearly intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or around a

motor vehicle. Do only service work for which you

have the knowledge and the right equipment. If

(Continued)

WARNING! (Continued)

you have any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a competent me-

chanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain your ve-

hicle could result in a component malfunction and

effect vehicle handling and performance. This

could cause an accident.

884 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

CONTENTS

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

▫ Prepare For The Appointment. . . . . . . . . . . . .887

▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

▫ FCA USA LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . .888

▫ FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . . . . .888

▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .889

▫ Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands . . . . . . . .889

▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .889

▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .890

WARRANTY INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

MOPAR PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS . . . . . . . . . . . .891

▫ In The 50 United States And

Washington, D.C.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .892

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS . . . . . . . . . . . .892

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893

▫ Treadwear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893

▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .894

▫ Temperature Grades. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .894

886 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR

YOUR VEHICLE

Prepare For The Appointment

If you are having warranty work done, be sure to have

the right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All

work to be performed may not be covered by the

warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service

manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s

service history. This can often provide a clue to the

current problem.

Prepare A List

Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the

specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident

or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the

service advisor know.

Be Reasonable With Requests

If you list a number of items and you must have your

vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with

the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.

At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental

vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it

is advisable to make these arrangements when you call

for an appointment.

IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE

The manufacturer and its authorized dealer are vitally

interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy

with our products and services.

Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.

We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an

authorized dealer. They know your vehicle the best, and

are most concerned that you get prompt and high quality

service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealer have the

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 887

facilities, factory-trained technicians, special tools, and

the latest information to ensure the vehicle is fixed

correctly and in a timely manner.

This is why you should always talk to an authorized

dealer service manager first. Most matters can be re-

solved with this process.

• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the

general manager or owner of the authorized dealer.

They want to know if you need assistance.

• If an authorized dealer is unable to resolve the con-

cern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer

center.

Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer cen-

ter should include the following information:

• Owner’s name and address

• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)

• Authorized dealer name

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Vehicle delivery date and mileage

FCA USA LLC Customer Center

P.O. Box 21–8004

Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004

Phone: (866) 726-4636

FCA Canada Inc. Customer Center

P.O. Box 1621

Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6

Phone: (800) 465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French

888 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

In Mexico Contact

Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240

Sante Fe C.P. 05109

Mexico, D. F.

In Mexico City: 5081-7568

Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300

Puerto Rico And U.S. Virgin Islands

Customer Service Chrysler International Services LLC

P.O. Box 191857

San Juan 00919-1857

Tel.: (787) 782-5757

Fax: (787) 782-3345

Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech

Impaired (TDD/TTY)

To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the

manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommuni-

cation Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer

center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who

has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter

(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the

manufacturer by dialing 1-800-380-CHRY.

Canadian residents with hearing difficulties that require

assistance can use the special needs relay service offered

by Bell Canada. For TTY teletypewriter users, dial 711

and for Voice callers, dial 1-800-855-0511 to connect with

a Bell Relay Service operator. 9

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 889

Service Contract

You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle

to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected

repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited

Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only

the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a

manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan

Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail

within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you

have any questions about the service contract, call the

manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer

Hotline at 1-800-521-9922 (Canadian residents, call (800)

465-2001 English / (800) 387-9983 French).

The manufacturer will not stand behind any service

contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It

is not responsible for any service contract other than the

manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a ser-

vice contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,

and you require service after the manufacturer’s New

Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the

contract documents, and contact the person listed in

those documents.

We appreciate that you have made a major investment

when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer

has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and

training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with

the ownership experience. You will be pleased with their

sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related

concerns.

WARNING!

Engine exhaust (internal combustion engines only),

some of its constituents, and certain vehicle compo-

nents contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State

of California to cause cancer and birth defects, or

other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids

(Continued)

890 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING! (Continued)

contained in vehicles and certain products of compo-

nent wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth defects,

or other reproductive harm.

WARRANTY INFORMATION

See the Warranty Information Booklet, located on the

DVD, for the terms and provisions of FCA US LLC

warranties applicable to this vehicle and market.

MOPAR PARTS

MOPAR fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are

available from an authorized dealer. They are recom-

mended for your vehicle in order to help keep the vehicle

operating at its best.

REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS

In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.

If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could cause

a crash or cause injury or death, you should immediately

inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration

(NHTSA) in addition to notifying the manufacturer.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an

investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a

group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy cam-

paign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in indi-

vidual problems between you, your authorized dealer, and

the manufacturer.

To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety

Hotline toll free at 1-888-327-4236 (TTY: 1-800-424-9153), or

go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator,

NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE., West Building,

Washington, D.C. 20590.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 891

You can also obtain other information about motor

vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

In Canada

If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you

should contact the Customer Service Department immedi-

ately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety defect

to the Canadian government should contact Transport

Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations and Recalls at

1-800-333-0510 or go to http://www.tc.gc.ca/roadsafety/

PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS

To order the following manuals, you may use either the

website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mas-

tercard, American Express, and Discover orders are ac-

cepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call

for an order form.

NOTE: A street address is required when ordering

manuals (no P.O. Boxes).

Service Manuals

These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the infor-

mation that students and professional technicians need in

diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving, maintain-

ing, servicing, and repairing FCA US LLC vehicles. A

complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system,

and/or components is written in straightforward lan-

guage with illustrations, diagrams, and charts.

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals

Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams,

charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals

make it easy for students and technicians to find and fix

problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and

features. They show exactly how to find and correct

problems the first time, using step-by-step troubleshoot-

ing and drivability procedures, proven diagnostic tests

and a complete list of all tools and equipment.

892 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

Owner’s Manuals

These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the

assistance of service and engineering specialists to ac-

quaint you with specific FCA US LLC vehicles. Included

are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance pro-

cedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety

tips.

Call toll free at:

• 1-800-890-4038 (U.S.)

• 1-800-387-1143 (Canada)

Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:

• www.techauthority.com

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM

TIRE QUALITY GRADES

The following tire grading categories were established by

the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer

in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must conform to Federal

safety requirements in addition to these grades.

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on

the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled

conditions on a specified government test course. For

example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government course as a tire graded

100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the

actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 893

significantly from the norm due to variations in driving

habits, service practices, and differences in road charac-

teristics and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,

and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on

wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions

on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and

concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction perfor-

mance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on

straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not

include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or

peak traction characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,

representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat

and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under

controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the

material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The

grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all

passenger vehicle tires must meet under the Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A

represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory

test wheel, than the minimum required by law.

894 IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire is established for

a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.

Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive load-

ing, either separately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE 895

INDEX

Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . .826

Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

Adjust

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Adjustable Pedals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Advance Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73

Air Bag Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .74

Air Bag Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82

Enhanced Accident Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Event Data Recorder (EDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Front Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

If A Deployment Occurs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80

Knee Impact Bolsters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Maintaining Your Air Bag System . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Side Air Bags . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Air Bag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71

Air Bag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 121, 299

Air Bag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84

Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . .808

Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .814

Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426

Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426

Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . .441, 443

Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . .814, 815, 816

Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . .421, 426, 439, 814

Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657, 668

Air Suspension. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553, 566

Alarm, Panic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 302

Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22

Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant). . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825, 869

898 INDEX

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839

Ashtray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Assist, Hill Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630

Auto Down Power Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49

Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Automatic High Beams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .439

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 838

Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .836, 838

Fluid And Filter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838, 839

Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .838

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835, 836

Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835, 874

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .498, 511

Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835

Axle Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833, 874

Axle Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833

Back-Up Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Bar, Stabilizer/Sway System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303, 813

Charging System Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303

Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . .31

Belts, Seat. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Body Builders Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650

Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .629

Brake Control System, Electronic . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626

Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832, 874

Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626, 831

Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832

Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832

Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

INDEX 899

Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489

Bulb Replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858, 859

Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 858

Cab Top Clearance Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865

Camera, Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .214

Camper . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

Caps, Filler

Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806, 807

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

Radiator (Coolant Pressure) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827

Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 689

Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840

Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864

Center Seat Storage Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Certification Label. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645

Check Engine Light (Malfunction Indicator Light) . .801

Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Checks, Safety. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Child Restraints

Booster Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .91

Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Child Seat Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104, 106

How To Stow An Unused ALR Seat Belt . . . . . . .102

Infants And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88

Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Restraint . . . .101

Installing Child Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat

Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .103

Locating The LATCH Anchorages . . . . . . . . . . . .98

Lower Anchors And Tethers For Children . . . . . . .93

Older Children And Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . .90

Seating Positions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92

Cigar Lighter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

900 INDEX

Cleaning

Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841

Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 431

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431

Cold Weather Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418

Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662

Console, Overhead . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .890

Coolant Pressure Cap (Radiator Cap) . . . . . . . . . . .827

Cooling System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824

Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .826

Coolant Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .824, 828, 830

Disposal Of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828

Drain, Flush, And Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .825

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828, 830

Points To Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .830

Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827

Radiator Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .827

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . .825, 869, 871

Corrosion Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839

Cruise Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328, 330

Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .239

Customer Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . . . . . . .397

Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Daytime Running Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Dealer Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802

Defroster, Rear Window. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121, 424

Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Differential, Limited-Slip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596

Dipsticks

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

Disabled Vehicle Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787

INDEX 901

Disposal

Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .828

Door Ajar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

Door Ajar Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308

Door Locks

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Key Fob . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Door Opener, Garage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Driving

Off-Pavement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

Off-Road . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow Standing

Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

Dual Rear Wheels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672, 735

E-85 Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

Electrical Power Outlets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232

Electric Rear Window Defrost. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Electronically Shifted Transfer Case. . .526, 532, 539, 546

Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .626

Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .627

Electronic Roll Mitigation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .638

Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

Electronic Range Select (ERS) . . . . . . . . . .496, 506, 518

Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . .192

Electronic Stability Control (ESC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

Electronic Throttle Control Warning Light . . . . . . . .305

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . .214, 333

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . .333

Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) Setup

Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

EVIC Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333

Selectable Menu Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338

Emergency Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

902 INDEX

Emergency, In Case Of

Freeing Vehicle When Stuck . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .781

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777

Tow Hooks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .783

Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . . . . .801

Engine. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .797, 798

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

Block Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .796

Compartment Identification . . . . . . . . .796, 797, 798

Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871

Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 689

Flooded, Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683, 869

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777

Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804, 869, 871

Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806, 807

Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805, 869

Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Engine Oil Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806, 807

Engine Oil Viscosity Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806

Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . . .81

Entry System, Illuminated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685, 689

Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Exhaust Gas Caution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 689

Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119, 821

Exterior Lighting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Filters

Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808, 871

Engine Oil Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

INDEX 903

Flashers

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 183, 327

Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .751, 771

Flexible Fuel Vehicles

Cruising Range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691

Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689, 690

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .691

Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Fluid Level Checks

Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .832

Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .622

Fluids, Lubricants And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . .871

Fog Lights. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 318, 862

Fold Flat Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Four-Way Hazard Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Four Wheel Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .522

Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .781

Front Axle (Differential). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833

Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .692

Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Ethanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685, 689

Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Materials Added . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .687

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Octane Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683, 871

Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683, 869

Tank Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

Fuel, Flexible . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .689

904 INDEX

Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .848

Garage Door Opener (HomeLink) . . . . . . . . . .219, 227

Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695, 800

Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .499, 512

Gear Select Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .682

Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845

Grocery Bag Retainer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248

Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .699

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

Guide, Body Builders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

GVWR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .696

Hazard

Driving Through Flowing, Rising, Or Shallow

Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .860

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . .184

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

Heated Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146, 249

Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .421, 426

Heater, Engine Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .485

High Beam/Low Beam Select (Dimmer) Switch . . . .184

Hill Descent Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

Hill Start Assist. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .630

INDEX 905

Hitches

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706

Hoisting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777

HomeLink (Garage Door Opener). . . . . . . . . . . . . .219

Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171

Hub Caps. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776

Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12, 16

Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Inflation Pressure Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668

Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .333, 352

Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 133, 140

Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .291, 302, 327

Instrument Panel And Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290

Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .845

Integrated Trailer Brake Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . .711

Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .843

Interior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179

Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers). . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Inverter Outlet (115V) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .237

Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .737, 756

Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .777

Key Fob

Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .21

Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .21

Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18

Keyless Enter-N-Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43, 477

Lock The Vehicle’s Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 407

Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .43, 388, 407

Keyless Entry System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25

Key, Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

906 INDEX

Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12

Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Lane Change And Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Lane Change Assist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Lap/Shoulder Belts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 858

Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 172

Air Bag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .82, 121, 299

Automatic Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .174

Brake Assist Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300

Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .859

Cap Top Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .865

Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .182

Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .864

Courtesy/Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .180, 182, 217

Cruise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .328, 330

Daytime Running . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .175

Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178, 318, 862

Four-Wheel Drive Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .173

High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

High Beam/Low Beam Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Hill Descent Control Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . .640

Illuminated Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24

Interior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .179, 180, 182, 217

Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315

Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . .309

Park . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326, 328

Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

INDEX 907

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302

Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858, 859

Side Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .868

Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . .313, 673

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .637

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .526

Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 183, 327, 860, 862

Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . .302, 327

Limited-Slip Differential . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .596, 834

Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .695

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650

Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Automatic Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41

Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42

Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38

Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Low Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673

Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

Lug Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .734, 735

Maintenance Free Battery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .813

Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .803

Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .878

Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . .309, 801

Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .892

Manual Transmission

Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835

Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

Memory Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Methanol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132

Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .132, 133, 140

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

908 INDEX

Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .673

MOPAR Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802, 891

MTBE/ETBE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183

Navigation System (Uconnect GPS). . . . . . . . . . . . .214

New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .118

Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Off-Pavement Driving (Off-Road). . . . . . . . . . .578, 600

Off-Road Driving (Off-Pavement). . . . . . . . . . .578, 600

Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804, 871

Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .869

Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804

Dipstick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .804

Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808, 871

Filter Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 307

Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .805, 869

Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806, 807, 869

Oil Filter, Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

Oil Filter, Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .808

Oil Pressure Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .304, 307

Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .799

Operating Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .799

Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . .4

Outside Rearview Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140

Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 519

Overdrive OFF Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .508, 519

Overhead Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217

Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .733

Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . .4, 892

INDEX 909

Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .839

Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29

Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .623

ParkSense System, Rear. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 205

Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Passive Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43

Pedals, Adjustable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191

Personalized Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444

Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 372

Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Pickup Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255, 258, 275

Placard, Tire And Loading Information . . . . . . . . . .651

Power

Distribution Center (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .849

Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144

Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . .232, 237

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Sliding Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622

Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Power Seats

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Forward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Rearward . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150, 151

Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Pretensioners

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . .346, 372

Programming Transmitters (Remote Keyless Entry) . .25

Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658

Radiator Cap (Coolant Pressure Cap) . . . . . . . .824, 827

910 INDEX

Radio Frequency

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . .19, 21, 34, 38, 47

Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .419

Radio (Sound Systems) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Rain Sensitive Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

Ramp Travel Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .578

Rear Axle (Differential) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .833

Rear Cargo Area Utility Rails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Rear ParkSense System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196, 205

Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159

Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .249

Rear Window, Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Reclining Rear Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .85

Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723

Shifting Into Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . . . .726

Shifting Out Of Transfer Case Neutral (N) . . . . . .729

Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .685

Refrigerant. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .815, 816

Reminder, Seat Belt. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Remote Control

Starting System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .25, 27

Programming Additional Key Fobs . . . . . . . . . . .21

Programming Additional Transmitters . . . . . . . . .21

Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . .417

Remote Starting

Uconnect Customer Programmable Features .390, 409

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 409

Remote Starting System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .858

Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Replacement Parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .802

Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666

Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

Restraint, Head. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162

Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Restraints, Occupant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

INDEX 911

Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670

Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122

Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119

Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .878

Seat Belt

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . . . .61

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) . . . . . . . . . . .68

Energy Management Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Seat Belt Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Seat Belt Pretensioner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Seat Belt System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52

Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846

Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54

Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 120

Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . .61

Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86

Extender . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65

Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54, 56, 58

Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120

Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58

Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66

Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67

Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .298

Untwisting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 150, 151, 157

Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148, 150, 151

912 INDEX

Easy Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169

Folding Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149

Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .158, 159

Reclining Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157

Security Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22, 302

Selection Of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871

SENTRY KEY

Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .21

Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .19

Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .20

Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .887

Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .890

Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .892

Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346, 372

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 498, 511

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .525

Transfer Case, Shifting Into Transfer Case

Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .726

Transfer Case, Shifting Out Of Transfer Case

Neutral (N) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .729

Shift Lever Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .784

Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56

Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 183, 327

Sliding Rear Window

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668

Snow Plow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .719

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661, 662, 663

Spark Plugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .871

Speed Control

Accel/Decel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195

Cancel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Resume . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194

Speed Control (Cruise Control). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .192

INDEX 913

Stabilizer/Sway Bar System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .576

Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34, 475

Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

Cold Weather . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .479

Remote . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Starting Procedures (Gas Engines) . . . . . . . . . . . . .475

Steering

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .621, 622

Wheel, Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .189

Wheel, Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Steering Wheel Audio Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417

Steering Wheel Mounted Sound System Controls . . .417

Storage Compartment, Center Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . .243

Storage, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 857

Storing Your Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .857

Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228

Supplemental Restraint System - Air Bag . . . . . . . . .71

Supplemental Tire Pressure Information . . . . . . . . .668

Suspension, Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .553, 566

Sway Control, Trailer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .807

System, Remote Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34

Tailgate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .272

Temperature Control, Automatic (ATC) . . . . . . . . . .439

Tilt

Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150

Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188

Tip Start. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .476

Tire And Loading Information Placard . . . .650, 651, 668

Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .122, 655, 661, 662, 893

Aging (Life Of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655

Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .668

Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .662

914 INDEX

Dual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .672, 735

General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .655, 661, 662

High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658

Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .657

Life Of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .650, 651

Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . .673

Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313

Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893

Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .658

Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .666

Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .670

Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643, 655

Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .645

Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .660

Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .661, 662, 663

Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .664

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .643

Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Tonneau Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846

Tonneau Cover Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .846

Torque Converter Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .510, 521

Tow Hooks, Emergency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .783

Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698, 787

Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .787

Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .723

Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Towing Vehicle Behind A Motorhome . . . . . . . . . . .723

Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .597

Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .633

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .639

Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .698

Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .718

Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .706

Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .708

Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .146

INDEX 915

Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .716

Trailer Towing Guide. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .707

Transfer Case . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .834

Electronically Shifted . . . . . . . . . . .526, 532, 539, 546

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489

Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .489, 498, 511, 835

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .874

Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .835

Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .486

Transmitter Battery Service (Remote Keyless Entry) . .31

Transmitter Programming (Remote Keyless Entry) . . .25

Transmitter, Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) . . . . . . . . .25

Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117

Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .665

Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183, 327, 860, 862

Uconnect

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . . . .390, 409

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390, 409

Uconnect 8.4A/8.4AN Voice Recognition

Additional Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .466

Do Not Disturb . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .465

Siri Eyes Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .464

Uconnect 8.4 Settings

Customer Programmable Features — Units . . . . .400

Uconnect Access

Vehicle Health Alert . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .458

Uconnect Settings

Customer Programmable Features . . . . . .43, 388, 407

Passive Entry Programming . . . . . . . . . .43, 388, 407

Uconnect Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388, 407

Uconnect Voice Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .893

916 INDEX

Universal Garage Door Opener (HomeLink)

Programming HomeLink . . . . . . . .220, 221, 224, 225

Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .683

Untwisting Procedure, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60

Utility Rails, Rear Cargo Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .270

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .651, 695

Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7

Vehicle Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441, 857

Viscosity, Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .806, 807

Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445

Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6

Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .891

Washers, Windshield. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185, 821

Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .840

Water

Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .598

Wheel And Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .841

Wheel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .776

Winch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601

Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .605

Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .606

Rigging Techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .618

Usage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .601

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51, 231

Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442

Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48

Rear Sliding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250

Reset Auto-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50

Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51

Windshield Defroster. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121

Windshield Washers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 185, 821

Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184, 821

Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

INDEX 917

Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .184

Wiper Blade Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .817

Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185

Wipers, Rain Sensitive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .187

918 INDEX

INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING

EQUIPMENT

Special design considerations are incorporated into this

vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio

frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone

equipment must be installed properly by trained person-

nel. The following must be observed during installation.

The positive power connection should be made directly

to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.

The negative power connection should be made to body

sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.

This connection should not be fused.

Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the

roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used

in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may

affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on

vehicles so equipped.

The antenna cable should be as short as practical and

routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use

only fully shielded coaxial cable.

Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to

ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).

Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than

normal may require special precautions.

All installations should be checked for possible interfer-

ence between the communications equipment and the

vehicle’s electronic systems.

Seventh EDITION

Printed in U.S.A.

16_DSDJD2_OM_EN_USC

Ram is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

STICK WITH THE SPECIALISTS®

Barrett Small Engine Parts and Repair

2016 Ram 1500 2500 3500 Manual

Comments

Post a Comment